Home

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual

1. SE ROIT 531 R61 HOO f dp Le em Q512 ERIS T row PE R23 R508 Kalte Junction of D E ret FA C541 and R547 e eS S amp D 18 c LC en ES CO _ C LO LC amp 2 L TOF 558 R560 UHF bands SE Ree BE CES R5010 Junction of C541 and R547 LC CO C LC amp 3 QU CX Sat 5 R5 70 E RTE TP50 OR K5 band oh ai C300 R537 IC 6 BI eza S THOME Coce E me a J SYN TOP WS Junction of C541 and R547 TP503 T CH ROOM eer R560 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 203
2. un Bot es Cn C 3 cn L5000 gt C21 C 51 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 229 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 30 If either or both the maximum and minimum frequencies are incorrect the Repair VCO VCO circuitry is faulty 1 Remove the VCO BOT can 2 Check the VCO The circuitry is based on Q5000 see Figure 9 15 3 If a fault 1s found repair 1t and go to Step 4 If no fault 1s found go to Step 7 4 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 of Task 28 to measure the maximum VCO frequency 5 Re
3. Q401 Measurement point SENSE EHE 2 R406 L404 CY L Sm E E mn L400 gt en ems L409 2 iei oco m zn cg a m tes Lg e EA ES C38 wW 403 m L402 S BIT Sek E C403 0 po e R401 R404 s we R44 E420 e S c DJ ae So Bi z EZ R400 gg 407 S x mM S B QD lt TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 251 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 10 4 Receiver circuitry under the FE TOP and IF TOP can K5 band only Task 3 If there 1s no fault with the power supplies check the logic signal DIG RX EN Check Logic Signal 1 252 Receiver Fault Finding that is input from the digital board Check the logic signal DIG RX EN at pin 8 of IC403 see Figure 10 2 The signal is active high
4. Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit DN co e Es t Kc cx 4S MA o L CE DRM D 1 3 z b TOSIN zu Si BEIS E O G SCH w Cal mo Cr E 3 Ve WY S A Em s S 009 F gen 0070 Sms genre MEN res EI 1S grs T gm Zee E SS wees de 2 CL En Ze Eg lt Ta c NG zi e OTIN E gx lt EE e oe Jor Ern i is ol Fr 0190 Si Di T i R BEEN 2019 01 E SS 2195 9198 EE Li 001f DS L yp bes a S 9 eren Ig fif de rel L A TIR L o D ai c 2 Se bee es MN 03 0219 Gel L S zm m m 004 e E TEUZ em UU eg L aliy EEE eme eat Ven L LL 0 11 0 13 0c12 JE D D were 7 H AU amp N M c 3 E au O S _ Ge Es gt e T02f m m co ga AYA 1128 e e Bul Sind M IPN 220 01721 04 no Co A cn jm w TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 f a M LZ J LS F l x ircuit Diagram C
5. T LO z t 9 2 z o OZ iz Ge cO D z ug NE S H S S ES SEGEH m NS ea ben kd wen e ge G0SE0 52 PS Fe 2 mms S SE S S 2a Sp sm mp leiz E eu S p A o S ac ca lea laal Ces c3 co eo I 1e LA Ge RS ag Zeen Eloet gt G e Ec EBS a Z PRS lv 20601 ESA Y mse 2 Dice Rosa E Jm Losey Z i ne O Sib e O DCH coe e SS LEC CH e a cs posed oce Fc e m 90 COM 12500 POSEN oc ECH LLI UE 7 NE ul tc D n 3 S Ba m im em c TUC mm Y elle O EE SITT Zi peDEu O20 8 SIE amp i coy IIS fel E a e ic B moed a gt e eu Qy CH S Rr recy 5 BIGe ICE T z p S ord O A Z S CLK S o D Leck i m Sp m be PNE oce Y SE 2 Web GE ach Ele e Iw TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 273 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 3 Point for measuring the power supply to the PAs and PA driver UHF and K5 bands
6. OIIO C5015 C5001 VCO BOT L an H ore Eum Sis R5002 a Q e L5000 25012 Jeu R5000 o C549 CG R5031 25008 Kat S C5018 __ E C5008 g Boo e I D5004 R5007 m D en z S c S 3 R5006 C5006 R50058 65014 PETS EF ar mI S steps tu e L522 p C584 D5001 D50000 SC S P H e co co eo D5003 D5002 Q5002 E 2 T R5030 8 D R5019 e E5005 2 L5004 Q5003 R5024 A4 band Q5003 Q5002 Ede VU DUI 05015 i578 8594 E we M psg 00 E y UE B BA R E Hor m aD m 500 ES 2 B m 05009 co gt Fa mum Ee En RR pias ele Ar BE oll eh EX EE Wa SS L506 m B i S ec 75 ES LC Jr S Rr JE DE 0 08 DO Eun um 5 LC zur Ee Si E S paS S oim RN SYN TOP M e ei Food d ng e 196 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 6 If the SMPS output and the 6V and 5V supplies are correct the remaining 3V Power Supply li TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual power supply to check 1s the 3V DC supply Measure the supply 3V0 AN at pins 7 and 15 of IC503 see Figure 9 2 pins 7 and 15
7. SYN TOP CAN L100 L101 R103 R105 R104 R102 R106 L102 R109 C227 T oc A4 band R791 072 R607 C108 x a N r 2 Chit Pc OA R533 lt e SES ES EM e Cr Gg e L016 S DIG BCAN TAN la a ea R107 VCXO BOT can Ge ni PCB bottom side PCB TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 193 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 4 Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN BOT can bottom side SYN BOT 194 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 5 If the SMPS output and 6V DC supply are correct check the 45V DEC 5V Power Supply li TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual supply next Remove the SYN TOP can Measure the supply 5V DEC at pin 4 of Q508 see Figure 9 2 pin 4 of Q508 5 3 0 3V DC If the voltage is correct go to Task 6 If it is not go to Step 4 UHF radios or Step 5 VHF radios For UHF and K5 band radios check for faults in the C multiplier
8. 396 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 33 If there are no faults in the final RF signal path up to and including the PIN Check Components switch then the fault should lie in the LPE Check the LPF as follows of LPF 8 2 10 11 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Remove the LPF TOP can Connect the RF connector to the test set Check the capacitors and inductors of the LPF between the PIN switch and the RF connector See Figure 12 20 Check for shorts open circuits and faulty components Repair any fault Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF output power This should exceed 35 W RF output power more than 35W Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the highest frequency
9. A a BTS HCH vOLIOHUTA EcuS TTC ET 6 lIOIG AS 7911910 ns vn T ZN ne els C ET A A A kie d H NS TANS g cdi D D m E ANT C 7 634 e a Me6nga V Hero T G eS d B a N CN a22S 8012 2 ep A 8 dId lOH 7 O9 ETIS kK PS Hore ASNE ddl Oo A ME Mace ET a G3H31dIJ SAET UNIL III BAET en 2 ANGI TTN 65 ET on I ap ce dl A A oe e Rr 2qN9 TONS MEENUE S c deli91d AS BNT ZaN9 TONS e 166088 V Iw GC A9130 1 ONIAJH DIT oraj T dIMS 35 NT af HE AW V 1 ND LIL DIG 1 S E p J d M TAM IM 61 e a SENS 4 ace S d vias Sal QdH3ldI4d SAET On T S THIISIG S AWLISTA S AWILISTA os ERSTEN DER UN ldO WON4 Lid ex DD ges gt vetar 8 dIG O O A Bp OO O TS Zal oss gases EI v RE 8 art Eire 2d en 5 kg N DL Ges og E vt QNO TS 3189 4SN4 PS Fa J vdi e E A O HEGER er gt Es TEM ERR DES LES QUIL III gong T ANAL II T A ZN ZN ZX GG dO 7X Y 8 H M22 sa ML agl Oe taie Las SH C Ce Sru x rite n 3c 8 dIt Si SEI T o zl ST ve ug spere a e Jat gt TES Eras A Lx B E eid SOWNY NAG A 1 NICONIACME ST O O 4 ag TS 2 anio c Gr Ee CIN f STO EE SES E Mt DIS ELI ca E LUN vOxzd nis G ANZI TED 9 XZE V TL j gt AUDE es i e AT E ST D LID ae JNazz T OL orang
10. 180 Interface Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 1 For an output line suspected or reported to be faulty compare actual and Check Output Lines expected signals as described below If necessary determine what an expected signal should be by copying the faulty radio s programming file into a serviceable radio and measuring the relevant points on the latter 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Check the electrical signal at the appropriate pin of a connector mated to the radio connector in question If the expected connector signal is not present go to Step 3 If it is go to Step 2 If the expected signal 1s present there might be no fault on that line or there could be an intermittent fault Subject the radio to mild mechanical shock or vibration or to a temperature change This might expose any intermittent contact in which case go to Step 3 If the expected signal 1s not present check whether the expected internal signal is present If it is go to Step 5 If it is not go to Step 4 The fault lies with the radios internal circuitry If the power supply circuitry or the CODEC and audio circuitry 15 suspect continue with the fault diagnosis as in Power Supply Fault Finding on page 169 and C
11. Q404 Measurement point Senat SYN TOH B 560 R429 C468 R430 Q404 Measurement point TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 249 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 2 Excessive Loss of Sensitivity Introduction Task 2 Check Power Supplies 250 This section covers the case where the receiver has suffered an excessive loss of sensitivity As measured in Task 1 the receiver gain will be less than 1500 which implies a sensitivity that is more than 40dBm too low The fault diagnosis procedure for this case consists of five tasks m Task 2 check power supplies m Task 3 check logic signal m Task 4 check lock status m Task 5 check biasing of IF amplifier m Task 6 check matching circuitry If the fault does not lie with the power supplies it is probably in the control LO IF1 or IF2 circuitry 1 2 Receiver Fault Findin
12. L 3 MST d RE Ke O em em kee e el 2 E S Q512 C EE SS Ss 548 SMPS output C531 and Ollo Q508 R530 are on the bottom side LO LO gen pue of the PCB 5 Fes Q5004 I OO CO mm am e LC R573 S Y TOF Measurement point on L506 UHF bands C365 C940 50808 5095 50809 50980 E R568 R373 SYN TOF 8551 LR p C cn Coa ap 190 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 2 Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can and the 6V regulator IC606 top side cont K5 band Junction of C541 and R547
13. top side VHF board UHF board similar Note that other components may be fitted for C548 such as C5085 and C5086 for UHF radios 6071 0EQ Cem D606 bottom side UHF board VHF board similar p e 122 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 8 Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM Terminal Program for CCTM Invoking CCTM The servicing procedures require a radio to be placed in the computer controlled test mode In this mode CCTM commands can be entered at the test PC These commands are then relayed via the test unit to the radio Certain CCTM commands cause the radio to carry out particular functions others read particular settings and parameter values in the radio The CCTM commands of use in servicing radios are listed 1n Table 4 2 to Table 4 6 grouped according to category Use the calibration application to place the radio in CCTM To do this run the calibration application select Tools CCTM and click the CCTM Mode button For more information refer to the online help of the calibration application You can also use the HyperTerminal utility which is supplied with Microsoft Windows As a preliminary first select the settings for the communications port as follows m Open the terminal
14. 2 S nz R23 a Z S R8 C50 gt WS P geal gt Sul 0 E d echte 0 SR D10 Ke RO C40 SK203 ON Ki T S s D ier qa ES a gt E C36 R10 amm Ww ye et Wi Fre E8 N x D LO lined d E FT EM mai O SK202 7 e 8 is 7 de Lm EE N Se Wl ow TH C15 IC2 T b EN NEN i Ge G Y B BK 201 WE CN C25 PEL n T gt SES C2 B S ec H 2 p ce S REB rn R13 ES mm E agr IC1 e E gt Dp ON 4 z E ll 564 TMAAO3 31 Control Head Interface Box TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 27 2 3 Control Head Interface Box Board Layouts bottom side Y w e TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAAO3 31 Control Head Interface Box IPN 220 02174 03 565 it Diagram Ircul 27 2 4 Control Head Interface Box C V OT 6 8 9 G v C T T JO I PLIZO OZZ O Ietueq ALYA GAdV O REG NMVud SINSHAGNHNWV SSI ASWH ASINAN LAAHS DHAVN GII DHHINISONS 900
15. UGC NO L LNIOd PAR CIS 6 8H NO LNIOd INAWSYNSVAW OSE H NO c LNIOd VOU 69 EAU Ca gl cSt VIe SS VOcs QO BC 25 EE SEH recoit us decGE 0ccGE ER A A A a 90 1 NO LNIOd LNAWSAENSVAW PI SON Fe lersey me m E em m e ak dose elal S Ss S c aloccb m Booed seu Boo ve Eg E WS s E ecco Ion d SP picea EIE EST Pe Ze eet RH 0968 Ge CC Si Si e fm Zei NCL Fonc E Ere cdi Em um S sce C MN od ak cdd Soen S S vised SES G SS 0 Te e ES EE Ge a gr cc recou B bes CAO gC CHL leesey RK x z e CE TM e d Ig amp e E ee lt le So 20 SIRE y z yee m gt U m pur S QTE e CO peed 6 m SE
16. Ss C321NC320A C QO QOO R348 PAF TOP CAN PAD TOP CAN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 327 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 25 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the PAs Q309 and Q310 K5 band E EN D 32 Un BI 304 C348 C334 R349 PAF TOP can PAD TOP can 328 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 31 If as determined in Task 26 to Task 30 there is no fault in the initial RF Check Power at Directional Coupler signal path investigate the final signal path This part of the circuitry may also require investigation following certain checks in Transmitter RF Power Begin by checking the directional coupler as follows l 2 10 11 12 13 14 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual If no
17. Task 3 First check the output VCL SUPPLY from the SMPS which is itself provided rea ade with a 9V DC supply from a 9V regulator in the PSU module 15 5V 1 Remove the board from the chassis 2 Place the radio in CCTM 3 Measure the SMPS output VCL SUPPLY at the via between C531 and R530 see Figure 9 2 C531 14 2V 0 3 DC B1 50W from board revision 04 and K5 15 5V 0 3 DC Note On A4 band radios C531 and R530 are on the bottom side of the EJ PCB Measure the VCL SUPPLY voltage on the via beside C5050 4 If the SMPS output is correct go to Task 4 If it is not go to Step 5 5 Check the 9V supply at Q500 and R533 see Figure 9 3 6 If the voltage is correct go to Step 7 If it is not the 9V regulator IC601 is suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 y Remove the FCL TOP can and check the SMPS circuit based on Q500 Q502 and L502 see Figure 9 3 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 191 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Note On A4 band radios these components are not located under the FCL TOP can see Figure 9 3 Remove the SYN BOT can and check IC504 and IC505 for shorts see Figure 9 4 replace any suspect IC 8 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and
18. G D Ce L T 0 T LZIZOTOZZ H 41 q RIEG sod TAHO MM SINSAGNZSAV SSI AS SHSUNWDN LAAHS DHAVN ATTA AAANTONA GO P ET AL X SIHNHO XD D HAHLS IO0 LZl1Z0 02Z NdI MEN VIO LOOZ SS 01 91 61 390 T3234 HIYA ala S0 ZI LO X SIHHO L NIMQS SINF OL HSINIA HOVAHNS HONVHO HHAOTION NdI VZO V See ke LOL4ASTT M JAYA X SAV M JAYA 2 SASLS LL9100000 W3HW N 094 YC U YIWAN INVIHVA TNSS NdI SE uds Td QVdO I INOV ST yzi x pa zd H 9 cad HL tv anv DIN p cal qVdO I TE LNO av anw e uS pd Ia Z aydo I XL TT Gd VOIdd OT cal 90149 6 ESCH MS SAKT 8 NI dWL dY L ISSU o Id5 G Id9 axx E avdo I GOId49 zZ LOId T E qVdO I Te 9d GT ONS z NICE inocw NITH LNOTU ET i LNOZL NIZI S L OT LAOTI NITL Oh LT Z2 zezsu g ZEZE E Ta ANL v 92 ANEE 279 82 D 9 E INL A e l 7 LTO 22A T ANSE 9l de elt 15 ANZZ Ei vo se T9 avdo I AG Ino NI e L so1gL 8 2 SS zn PID MEET SCH IW AOL qVdO I Ta Zo qvdO I 8d L 9 G V C L 577 TMAA04 04 Crossband Linking Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 578 TMAAO4 04 Crossband Linking Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 30 TMAAO4 05 Ignition Sense Kit auxiliary connector plug plug into the radio s auxiliary connector ignition sense cable The TMAA0
19. lt L La L lt z S C dy E Go e l va Z T SE c um L ti 0 gt PN n A EB E o o CY Cl sc co co x lt L lt L O N N Z a CY CJ TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 605 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 g S v c T T 40 T TTAT T ZZ 73 fespui 3180 andy on H2 NM SINSWONSWY SSI hd3WH gt OSEWNN L33HS IWON JII c 33NION3 78877 sdu SMO AMYITIXNY BGOQSWL JUTQ E Z ST ST TT ET SAY PSM 3180 7371114 CH OI T ULZ 20 LNG T Sr 3NSSI Hd al jid 440 43SUNSH YUUUSWL ZN wars ON9E STdl 8Ta NWA 0 2M j ino dei ng 2 O etd T T o TId9 Xf UN LNG c D e renard u KOL dO NTHO D H pps SOIdO wt m D mn MSTBnET El Ze urs o Qt NI d81 one 2 2 E zi ISSN D o a9 SA Lu Dw Tdo NIR D J ONE NH Ee e SOId9 xnu 5 LOId9 xNY U Sn oO e O D Sn D Ka MEA pg Q vO et Ma2S894 D CU 1747ENE Ben a m NN MSTBNET Lr Mm TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 606 36 TMAA10 07 Desktop Microphone The TMAA10 01 desktop microphone is an omnidirectional dynamic microphone which can be used in dispatch situations where the microphone is positioned on a flat surface The des
20. FCL TOP CAN OUTPUT OF STAGE 2 OF EXCITER AT C3505 SYNTHESIZER OUTPUT AT C3500 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 317 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 22 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can K5 band output of PA driver d E PROBLSVBBATT output of stage 2 of exciter at C307 a8 R351 Jas ALE C C348 C334 R349 Q 5 C328 R302 0300 C329 LC ev NI m CZ CE 20 R326 R330 8218 73 C300 R C530 urs Re AE ch Sd synthesizer output of stage 2 output at C300 of exciter at C313 318 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 11 8 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio B1 band RF voltages V Power Frequency level W MHz Synthesizer Exciter Exciter Exciter Driver output stage 1 stage 2 stage 3 output 11 8 0 5 10 0 0 5 10 0 0 5 O Ul 14 3 x 0 5 13 5 0 5 14 7 x 0 5 15 6 0 5 15 0 0 5 15 6 0 5 LI O 24 5 0 5 29 0 x 0 5 22 0 0 5 N O N Ul Table 11 9 RF voltages along t
21. HHH E en TEST PAD TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 CSI E 3519 n C Co Co Es R351 co c C329 H EN CA c C Co Co C326 want 83003 338 R348 C328 R360 R356 R3007 eB c co AC R361 C339 R3006 R354 R3008 TEMPERATURE SENSOR UHF shown VHF similar MOUNTING POINT FOR TEST CAPACITOR 321A C3204 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 285 Figure 11 7 PA circuitry under the PAr TOP can and part of the directional coupler under the DIRC TOP can K5 band E WEN temperature sensor mounting point for test capacitor test pad 286 Transmitter
22. Lf LO I o o N N gt co Fe eo e OW TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards 505 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 it Diagram IFCUI 19 4 5 Options Extender Board C KT ET ZI II OT 6 8 L 9 S v Z T T 40 I Cozeg 027 QHIVI NHHdALS 31Vd GAdV ord TAHO NMVuUG SINSAONSAV SS1 AdH aen LSSHS AWVN GIG FHRANTONT p0 E0 ST B B B W OIVHD 00 02S9 02Z OL E0 62100 922 WOH4 NdI QS9NXHO v00 LOOZ 00 ST 0T OT Aen nur AIYA STIG Zz 2 z 70 0 ST B 3 HAYA 4 SIHHO L NIMIS 9 A SO IOVVAX WOHd dWOO ALGdN 9 SINF OHO VIO Bi SO 07S9 077 dech uel mu ssl sl era noe STA EM 9ONNL9T B 3 AYG X SIWHO a wvav FTIA ALNOW OHIVId NI 90993 QHIOSHHOO vn SE EM LIE SNO 95 295 199 099 655 865 E or E 90TALLZ D a lt gavd H SINHO G Wvdv SXVHS H M H 9 GSH O I VEO quvOH WHHINHIXH SNOILdO I I I I I I col col ANOOT POLOHVPL L
23. mounting point for test capacitor TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 333 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 34 If the RF power at the PIN switch is low the switch is not drawing the Repair PIN switch expected current or the diode is faulty Check the circuit as follows 1 Remove the PIN TOP can 2 Perform a diode check of D307 VHF and K5 band or D3507 UHF see Figure 11 27 If it is not faulty go to Step 3 If it is replace D307 or D3507 and go to Step 4 a Check the 49VO TX supply to the PIN switch via the following resistors on the bottom side of the PCB see Figure 11 28 and Figure 11 29 for VHF and UHE and Figure 11 29 for the K5 band m VHF R389 and R390 m UHF and K5 band R3000 R389 and R390 If any resistor is faulty replace the resistor as well as D307 VHF and K5 band or D3507 UHF A faulty resistor is likely to have resulted in damage to D307 or D3507 4 With the test lead still connected to the test set enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum 5 Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 6 Enter the CCTM command 38 to place the radio in transmit mod
24. 1 See Line interface input and output connections on page 476 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 471 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 17 3 Line interface settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Audio tab Rx PTT Type Tap In Type Tap In Unmute Tap Out Type Tap Out Unmute A Bypass n On PTT D Spit Busy Detect EPTT1 A Bypass In On PTT C BypassO On PTT Table 17 4 Line interface settings in the PTT form External PTT 1 tab Advanced PTT PTT Transmission Type 2 Set the DIP switches on the line interface board S1 to the following default test settings DIP1 on two wire audio interface DIP2 off DIP3 off DIP4 on busy gate rx gate DIP5 on busy gate logic active high DIP6 off DIP7 off two wire keying DIP8 off time delay disabled 3 Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity For detailed disassembly instructions refer to Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Note When installing the internal options loom take care that it is folded in the way shown in Figure 17 2 4 Connect the internal options loom between SK2 on the line interface board and SK102 on the radio s main PCB 5 Set up the test equipment shown in Figure 17 1 and follow the adjustment procedure for RV1 RV2 and RV3 described in the following section 17 2 4 Adjusting RV1 RV2 and RV Setting the Keying The keying time delay circuit 1s
25. L mon mr AUX GP11 7 lt VV DIG AUX GP04 7 set 17 WW S oam _ Receiver RX DIG LD l LEM v ben rm rm e em pm pe re re re re re re re re m e em em rm rm re rm rm rem rem rem rm J IP AUX RXD i pe pen sl DIG RX NB EN I I DIG CHTXD M ee ee ee ee e 2 2 NEEN LL EURO 0 l I DIG RX EN Digital Board Fog I DIG TX EN D l CDC2 DIG SDTO FPGA l l piam eve loari ian DIG CDC2 SDTI l C2 Ael E RAN e DIG CDC2 SCLK l I qJ es e e rm e K lr ps pm zm I DIG CDC2 LRCK I al 2 Fog Emm to lt x I DIG DAC SPI DO I es x FF o a I DIG DAC SPI CLK l S i r A DIG DAC LATCH l l l T PIG CDC ARSM I Flash T coc ogs d y AE d aoro E EE SR SIS 2 DIG CDC VSDI I SI E PU S c NT ME E I EIS A CDC DIG BSOFS l E el e CDC DIG BSDO l c l DIG CDC ASFS I lt J gt mm s l pm pen em em D CDC ASDI l DIG PSU LATCH Bae e LL Lp CDC DIG ASDO l S oiGwo kick DIG CDC RST l DIG sp EN a and Power ress e uppl Decoder PPly A DIG SYS CLK ER DIG AUD PA ENT I E DIG AUD PA EN2 l lt Regulator 1V8 43V3 G G PSU SYS RST PSU SYS RST m 22222 11 111 a 98 ll DIG RX EN FPGA JTAG Signals DSP JTAG Signals Signal Types D FPGA JTAG TCK ZI DSP JTAG TCK DSP JTAG TRST E FPGA JTAG TMS amp DSP JTAG TMS DSP JTAG EMUO
26. f C T SINSWONSWY SEET 31943435 NOU ANS N5SO era T 40 I US43e G pint HAWAN L33HS SHOG3NION3 JAZ 8c S b In ON 2160 C gt LAHIN LNG THO j L OL ded eme MSE OL GL LOS ULESOIUI2Z c8 OILA108H123 E ETET 9 OH STBT ACE OBS SE D I JJJ JK C Av aN9d CNS N99 see AN sg Won H n E 7 ELD E ZH G x 902 2 LY oi 2704 2704 ee ee dag Nr 112029 N M PEE Waze gery AT TS ec ONT LNNOW ONI LNNON E E E Ee T ABS m BEA D0S6 ZLE d D0S6 cid q 91 nas ees aci SR 0 LRE ay Tas LW 299 L 7 GTS e 91 ER BELD n ER aT 8093 gt 2994 ac WEN jJne g JNT IN OH LOH JN T Ie z Scio SEI T GK E Lis GH E 7 2 a a UNS 8 Sch ELS SEAN CEAL EE TEAQ 2 290
27. o ay Ee Yast id E LYNG IX fE ms s CNS I LNT LX 2 Gg 82x m S 2 8 Z mE ri E NYT NITSN3STNOI 1 MEE JO T AWS V l 7 l S Ld Je ET NO dl ONE TT ML ae ST TId9 3 s c 5 LJU cc OX D NISL Sd9 Bq volde Du San fe f YWZ ELP ZPYNN SEI LNO NET Sd9 e ih e ba MS NET T4 vu A ra cu JTHUN3 Sd9 1 fI J NI del1 ang M20 82Sba MER STL e Qj ISSN NITMSTBAET LI zr Mg 9 Gi dG e1d9 di MSS AIL mE C T 00 PUN M LL BRA 9 S8 8M V HNTTSNAS HEI LL ote c axe aos EZ i 5 SOId95 NO CO ol u Sf SE i 2OId9 CT ino dei ang p3 9f Tu Tido pe i EI NT db1 ong EE SGOIg9 er LX qp Roo poo x TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 588 32 TMAA 10 01 Desktop Microphone The TMAA10 01 desktop microphone 1s an omnidirectional dynamic microphone which can be used in dispatch situations where the microphone 15 positioned on a flat surface The desktop microphone plugs into the microphone socket on the radio control head The desktop microphone has an internal pre amplifier and an adjustable sensitivity control on the underside of the desktop microphone a microphone base PTT key monitor key e gromme 32 1 Operation Hold down the monitor key and check whether the channel 1s clear If the channel is clear press the PTT key to transmit Speak clearly into the microphone and release the PTT
28. D range plug internal options connector line interface board external options connector line interface installation parts EC 7e Important internal options loom external options cover seal 17 1 Operation These instructions refer to line interface PCB issue 220 65202 02 or later On earlier issue PCBs SK1 pin 5 is ground The TMAA01 01 line interface board provides both audio and digital interfaces for a variety of systems The interfaces available are m an isolated 600Q audio interface which is capable of both simplex operation on a two wire system or duplex operation on a four wire system m a keying interface which allows for two wire keying or single line bi directional keying m a variable delay timer m a logic sense control The line interface board fits inside the radio in the options cavity and is connected to the main PCB by the internal options loom The high density 15 way D range connector mounted on the line interface board fits through the external options connector hole provided in the radio chassis The radio does not meet the IP54 protec tion standard once a line interface board has been installed unless the external options cover seal 1s installed One of the control head function keys can be programmed to toggle the line interface board on and off The state of the function key LED when the line interface board 1s on depends on the way the radio 1s programmed see
29. OP lt Hojeue ju sod L jeubis Ju X XL a YMS Nid JojjnusueJ 19119394 1012e0uu0j 49 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 ions ipt ircuit Descri C 68 Power Control Loop Directional Coupler gt 25W H 25W Temperature Sensor The high level RF signal passes via the directional coupler the transmit receive PIN switch and the LDE through to the antenna The LPF is used to attenuate unwanted harmonic frequencies Calibration is used to adjust the power control loop thus setting the output of the transmitter to one of four preferred power levels m 10 15 25 and 50W VHB and 10 15 20 and 40 W UHF for 40W 50W radios m 2 5 10 and 30W 762 806 MHz and 2 5 10 and 35 W 806 870 MH z for 30 W 35 W radios m 1 5 12 and 25 W all bands for 25 W radios The loop maintains these power settings under changing environmental conditions The control mechanism for this loop is via the DAC IC204 and one of the operational amplifiers making up IC301 The power control loop will be inhibited if for any reason an out of lock signal is detected from the synthesizer This ensures that no erroneous signals are transmitted at any time With the 40W 50W radio the power control loop processes the voltages from the forward and reverse power sensors in the directional coupler This signal 1s fed to the
30. TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on transmit mode Using a frequency counter proceed as follows to observe the transmit frequency at the TX port before and after grounding the Junction between C541 and R547 see Figure 9 11 While holding the probe from the counter on the TX port use a pair of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction The frequency should change to TX port maximum transmit frequency see Table 9 4 The loop filter will hold its output steady at 13 3 V This should result in a frequency equal to the maximum given in Table 9 4 If the transmit frequency measured in Step 2 1s correct go to Step 4 If it is incorrect go to Task 25 If no frequency is detected go to Task 26 Proceed as follows to observe the transmit frequency at the TX port before and after applying 3 V DC to the junction of C541 and R547 there 1s a convenient 3V level at R544 see Figure 9 11 While holding the probe on the TX port use the tweezers to momentarily apply 3V DC to the junction do not touch the board with your hand and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans when you remove them The frequency should change to TX port minimum transmit frequency see Table 9 4 The loop filter will hold its output steady at about OV This should result in a frequency equal to the minimum given in Table 9 4 If the transmit frequency measured in Step 4 is correct go
31. U601 and processed by the FPGA The function key LEDs F1 and F4 and the red green and amber status LEDs each are controlled by an FPGA signal and a transistor Q604 to Q608 The brightness level is controlled by two FPGA signals resulting in four intensity levels off low medium and high The keypad backlighting LEDs are controlled by two FPGA signals and two transistors Q2 resulting 1n four intensity levels off low medium and high The keypad backlighting LEDs are arranged in two groups for the main keypad and one group for the power button keypad each group consisting of three LEDs The two speaker lines SPK and SPK are connected to the speaker connector J104 which is joined to the control head connector J103 through two ferrite beads L105 and L106 The audio signals from the microphone connector or the soldering pads of the optional concealed microphone are routed to a switching and pre amplifier circuit If a dynamic microphone is required the pre amplifier 1s engaged The switching logic is used to select either the standard microphone input or the concealed microphone signal The dynamic microphone must be activated in the programming software The PTT signal from the microphone connector is connected to the FPGA via a resistor R25 and relayed to the radio as a digital command TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 10 Control Head Board with 1 2 or 3 Digit Di
32. With the 40 50 W radios and 30 35 W K5 band radios the sum of the forward power output from the RF power amplifier and reverse power reflected from the load is sensed by the directional coupler and fed back to the power control loop With the 25 W radios the forward power output from the RF power amplifier is sensed by the directional coupler and fed back to the power control loop The PA output power 15 controlled by varying driver gate bias voltage that has a calibrated maximum limit to prevent overdrive The power control signal is supplied by a 13 bit DAC driven by custom logic TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ramping Power ramp up consists of two stages m bias m power ramping The timing between these two stages 1s critical to achieving the correct overall wave shape in order to meet the specification for transient ACP adjacent channel power A typical ramping waveform 1s shown in Figure 2 17 Figure 2 17 Typical ramping waveforms Bias Power Power Bias ramp ramp ramp ramp High power Low power Bias Ramp Up The steady state final stage bias level is supplied by an 8 bit DAC programmed prior to ramp up but held to zero by a switch on the DAC output under the control of a TX INHIBIT signal Bias ramp up begins upon release by the TX INHIBIT signal with the ramping shape being determined by a low pass filter Owing to power leakage through the PA chain ramping the bias
33. gt RF FPGA JTAG TDO amp DSP JTAG TDO DSP JTAG EMU1 34 analog I JTAG FPGA TDI JTAG DSP TDI clock yt Factory Connector gt asynchronous serial data NZ 4 synchronous serial data TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 95 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Circuit Descriptions 3 9 Control Head Board with Graphical Display Introduction User Interface Connectors ON OFF Key This section describes the control head board for the control head with graphical display For a block diagram of the digital circuitry refer to Figure 3 15 Most signals except power on off speaker and microphone to and from the radio body are processed by a RISC processor which 1s implemented on an FPGA on the control head board For more information on the RISC processor and the FPGA refer to Software Architecture on page 49 The control head board includes the circuitry for the following control elements m ON OFF key m volume potentiometer m main keypad with four functions keys two scroll keys and two selection keys m LCD module with backlighting and optional heating element m three status LEDs m two function key LEDs for function keys F1 and F4 m keypad backlighting LEDs m speaker The control head board includes the circuitry for the following connectors m microphone connector RJ45 socket m control head connector 18 way MicroMaTch socket m LCD connector for int
34. 15 1 as LdO 8AET i tus GOW Xu l TO i 1 i i 0 ING A tus MS SAET i H TTA OTe 9 ANOOT H i SE put L S bo MSTBAET MSTBAET DR OAS 19 DOA T H ZAS nL Y 3NOOI 3NOOI JT iM MM SISG 159 29 EH HOLOHSNNOO OL A SNOIILdO TTVNYA INT ZLZSH OAS OL vt I eh TT OT 6 8 L 9 G v G T TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAA01 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards 506 20 TMAAO02 02 DTMF Microphone PTT key The TMAA02 02 DTMF microphone plugs into the l microphone socket on the radio control head and enables users micropnone bsec make calls to a PABX or PSTN to rear of microphone To make a call enter the required number using the DTMF keypad The DTMF microphone generates audible DTMF tones as the microphone keys are pressed Press the PTT key and speak clearly into the microphone then release the PTT key when you have finished speaking Ta The microphone button operates a hookswitch which 1s closed when the microphone 1s connected to the microphone clip and open when the microphone is removed from the microphone clip The function of the hookswitch 1s determined by the radio programming Note The TMAA02 02 DTMF microphone is not suitable for use with PTT signalling An example of PTT signalling is leading ANT 20 1 Installation Installing the Important The DTMF microphone grommet must be insta
35. Adapter Flange 30 Description The control head board is a printed circuit board in SMT design with components on the top and bottom sides Some SMT components are shielded by metal cans The control head board 1s fitted to the front panel assembly 19 through the space frame with four 3x10 PT screws The side facing the radio body has the connectors for the connection of the control head loom the LCD loom the speaker an optional control head options board and pads for the leads of the optional concealed microphone Figure 2 5 Connectors of the control head board pads for leads of connector for connector for control head concealed microphone loom of LCD assembly options board connector for speaker connector for control head loom The side facing the front panel has the volume control potentiometer the microphone connector the indicator and backlight LEDs and the contacts for the keypads The control head loom G connects the connector on the control head board to the control head connector of the radio body For more information refer to Control Head Connectors on page 44 The adapter flange 2 is an injection moulded plastic part which is fitted to the space frame with two M4x12 Taptite screws TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 1 3 Control Heads with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display Overview Front Panel Assembly Knob for Volume Control Potentiometer Ke
36. Enter the CCTM command 335 1 and again measure the voltage at the via between R103 and the digital board via at R103 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 If the voltages measured in Step 4 and Step 5 are correct go to Step 7 If they are not the digital board 1s faulty resolder R103 in position see Figure 9 7 replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check and resolder R103 in position see Figure 9 7 and check for continuity between Q5003 see Figure 9 15 and the digital board via R103 If no fault is found go to Step 9 If a fault is found repair the circuit confirm that the voltages are now correct and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check the circuitry for the transmit receive and 5V switches based on Q5002 and Q5003 see Figure 9 15 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit confirm that the voltages are now correct and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 33 If no VCO frequency is detected but the switching network 1s not faulty Check Buffer check the buffer amplifier If the amplifier 15 not faulty there might be a fault Amplifier in the VCO that was not detected earlier 1 Enter
37. If the control head is faulty check the control head connector pin 2 13V8 pin 14 3V3 pin 6 AGND and repair or replace the control head board If the repair succeeded without the need for replacing the main board assembly go to Task 4 Otherwise continue with Step 7 If the main board assembly was replaced or if the repair failed re assemble the radio as described in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Conclude with the tasks of Final Tasks on page 163 Servicing Procedures 157 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 4 Read the Programming File 158 1 2 10 11 12 Servicing Procedures Given that the radio powers up the next task is to read the radio programming file or upload a default file Use the programming application to read the programming file If the programming file can be read save a copy on the test PC and go to Task 5 If not go to Step 3 If 1t seems that the file cannot be read cycle the power to the radio and again attempt to read the file First cycling the power is essential if the radio 1s programmed to power up in transparent data mode both 1200 baud FFSK and Tait high speed data and if the selected data port 1s the microphone connector control head with user interface or programming connector blank control head If the programming file cannot be read check whether m the radio is connected to the correct serial port of the test PC
38. Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3631z 01 9 D range screwlock fastener x2 power connector seal 1 power connector 2 gap pad gt 25W radio only 3 hexagonal nut lock washer 5 RF connector main board AD control head connector Description 25 Main Board Heat Transfer Block 26 Description The main board 9 is attached to the heat transfer block C with three M3x10 Torx head screws D and the fastening elements and 4 of the auxiliary and RF connectors The inner foam D range seal seals the auxiliary connector against the heat transfer block The power connector seal seals the power connector against the heat transfer block The power connector seal U0 of the 225 W radio blue is different to the seal of the 25 W radio black The main board 16 is a printed circuit board in SMT design with components on the top and bottom sides A digital board is reflow soldered to the main board Most components are shielded by metal cans There are different main boards for each frequency band and each RF output power configuration The internal options connector for connecting an internal options board and the factory connector not illustrated for factory use are soldered to the top side of the main board The control head connector facing the front of the radio and the auxiliary G power D and RF 9 connectors facing the rear of the radio are located on the bottom side of the ma
39. m custom logic on FPGA of digital board m DSP block on digital board The transmit path consists of three major functional parts m audio processing and signalling m frequency synthesizer m RFE transmitter TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 57 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 6 1 Audio Processing and Signalling Microphone Input Analog Processing of the Microphone Input Automatic Level Control DSP Audio Processing Data and Signalling Encoders 58 Description The input to the transmitter path begins at the microphone input There are two microphone sources a fist microphone connected to the control head and an auxiliary microphone connected via the auxiliary or external options connector Only electret type microphones are supported Support for optional dynamic fist microphones is facilitated by a hardware amplifier and filter in the control head and must be activated in the programming software he CODEC AD6521 performs microphone selection and amplification The microphone amplifier consists of a fixed gain amplifier of 16dB followed by a programmable gain amplifier with 0 to 22dB gain The amplified microphone signal 1s converted to a digital stream by a 16 bit ADC with integral anti alias filtering 0 1 to 3 2kHz The digital stream 1s transported to the DSP for further audio processing The ALC follows and 1s used to effectively increase dynamic range by boosting the gain of the m
40. C CH oO ce CAN FOR DIGITAL BOARD vod 099 vecd 5 Mo C2 NS ce SS n2 co 9020 gley Task 3 Ifthe 9V and 3V supplies are correct the remaining power supply to check 2 5V Power Supply is the 2 5V DC supply 2V5 CDC 1 Measure the voltage 2V5 CDC at pin 5 of IC604 see Figure 13 1 pin 5 of IC604 2 5 0 3V DC 2 If the voltage is correct go to Step 4 If it is not go to Step 3 3 The 2 5V regulator IC604 is suspect see Figure 13 1 Check the regulator as described in Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 4 Proceed to the section relevant to the fault exhibited m Faulty Speaker Audio distorted or no speaker audio m No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector no speaker audio at auxiliary connector m Faulty Receiver receiver does not operate m Faulty Modulation distorted or no transmit modulation m Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector modulation at auxiliary connector only Further details are given in the introduction to the section TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 401 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 13 2 Faulty Speaker Audio Introduction This section covers the case where the green STATUS LED is operating correctly and all unmute c
41. Grid Reference List Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit C101 F3 1D2 R112 G1 1C4 C102 F2 1D3 R113 M2 1E4 C103 K1 1D5 R114 M3 1E5 C104 F4 1E3 R115 M3 1E6 C105 E4 1D3 R116 M3 1E6 C106 G1 1C4 R117 M2 1D5 C107 F1 162 R118 M3 1D5 C108 G1 1C3 R119 M3 1D6 C109 E4 103 R120 M3 1D6 C110 F4 1B2 R121 M4 1E7 C111 F4 1B2 R122 L4 1D6 C112 M3 1E5 R123 K2 1B6 C113 M3 1D5 C114 M3 1E6 U101 G3 1D3 115 M3 1D6 U102 K1 1C5 C116 M4 1D6 C117 M4 1D6 D101 J2 1C4 1C5 D102 J1 1C4 D103 G4 1E2 D104 JA 1E3 D105 FA 1D4 1D3 D106 D4 1B2 D107 M4 1D7 E101 F3 1B2 E102 FA 1B3 E103 G1 1C3 E104 G1 1C3 E105 K3 1D1 E106 D3 1D1 E107 E4 1D2 E108 E4 162 E109 K1 1D5 F101 F3 1D2 J100 E4 1C1 J101 L2 TE MT100 A3 1E1 M1101 J3 1E1 Q101 M2 1E5 R101 K3 1D1 R102 G4 TES R103 G4 1E3 R104 D4 1B3 R105 K1 1B6 R106 K2 165 R107 K2 1B5 R108 M2 1B6 R109 E4 1D3 R110 G2 1C4 R111 G1 1C4 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing a Remote Kit 539 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Board Layout 540 Installing a Remote Kit ESS M y N E A u gt wy E pop IS E N P Y AA E107
42. I R9 CD N va oS e ES 9 ec ni ce ht ww WP Gm B A TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 IPN 220 01 755 01 TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 587 Ircuit Diagram Linking and Interface Cable C 31 6 3 T JO aad L Dec cl HL L 33HS JAN 4 1I d CG i WHS TENTS LAO QOO TE G rt 40 d d CANIN LNOLSSA J 18S T ALLTA LON I3LIId LON 2TL ANU STI eurn X4 N AO e e EE Ie q SCC Id HIN WHO HS S OL I39NU L l4 CMS Oo Ti aH3lsuW WOHd IUNDIS SSNS HOLIMS A SOINOMN LO SIS le EX Ld e d Bar GE 80 INT MO vier cO 2ZT E vit eae AM M8 9 SN z S ON TO N MNT LATE S ees C 4 WA 2 SERT a 298 Ud 7 ED TTS SN TH CNS x e E T e k ca
43. Programming Information on page 476 17 2 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Configuring the Line Interface Board Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to damage from static charges Refer to ESD Precautions on page 112 for more information TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board 469 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 2 1 Adjustment Points on the Line Interface Board The following table describes the line interface adjustment points Adjustments are made by setting the DIP switches on S1 to either on or off and by three variable resistors RV1 RV2 and RV3 Table 17 1 Line interface board adjustment points E two wire audio interface DIP1 on DIP2 off line interface board top side four wire audio interface DIP1 off DIP2 on busy gate busy DIP3 on DIP4 off busy gate rx gate DIP3 off DIP4 on busy gate logic DIP5 on DIP6 off active high busy gate logic DIP5 off DIP6 on active low bi directional keying line DIP7 on two wire keying DIP 7 off enable gate keying delay DIP8 on DIRE on ooo o gate keying delay audio line out level audio line in level time delay range 17 2 2 Test Equipment Setup The following diagram shows the setup of the test equipment used when adjusting RV1 RV2 and RV3 470 TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 17 1 Line inter
44. Q radio communications TM8100 mobiles TM8200 mobiles Service Manual MMA 00005 05 ssue 5 November 2007 www taitworld com Contact Information Tait Radio Communications Corporate Head Office Tait Electronics Limited PO Box 1645 Christchurch New Zealand For the address and telephone number of regional offices refer to the TaitWorld website Website www taitworld com Technical Support For assistance with specific technical issues contact Technical Support E mail support taitworld com Website www taitworld com technical Copyright and Trademarks All information contained in this document is the property of Tait Electronics Limited All rights reserved This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated stored or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior written permission from Tait Electronics Limited The word TAIT and the TAIT logo are trademarks of Tait Electronics Limited All trade names referenced are the service mark trademark or registered trademark of the respective manufacturers Disclaimer There are no warranties extended or granted by this document Tait Electronics Limited accepts no responsibility for damage arising from use of the information contained in the document or of the equipment and software it describes It 1s the responsibility of the user to ensure that use of such information equipmen
45. RISC Processor i wt eon t Oi O Pg Er DCE M Additional Digital Signal Processing FPGA Image Dynamic Memory Software Start Up When the radio is turned on the following processes are carried out on the main board Note This process describes the software start up into normal radio operation mode 1 The FPGA image which includes the RISC processor and the cus tom logic is loaded from the serial flash to the FPGA 2 The RISC processor executes the boot code which carries out an initialization and auto calibration and in the case of a fault generates an error code for display on the control head Normal radio operation starts with m the RISC processor executing the radio application code including application software m the DSP executing the DSP code for processing of digital signals m the custom logic executing additional digital signal processing 50 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Software Shutdown Programming and Calibration Files Software Upgrades When the radio is turned on the following processes are carried out on the control head board of the control head with graphical display 1 The FPGA image which includes the RISC processor is loaded from the serial flash to the FPGA 2 The RISC processor executes the boot code which carries out an initialization and in the case of a fault generates an error code for
46. Receive audio 1 RDLRXAUD Receive audio RD 13V8 SW Switched 13V8 supply from radio 12345678 7 beo pewigoud ro cc ON or edi contol head onon 562 TMAA03 31 Control Head Interface Box TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 27 2 PCB Information 27 2 1 Ref IPN C1 018 13100 00 C2 015 06470 01 C3 015 27220 05 C4 018 14100 00 C5 018 14100 00 C7 015 06470 01 C8 018 16100 00 C11 018 14100 00 C12 014 07470 05 C13 018 14100 00 C14 018 14100 00 C15 018 16100 00 C16 018 16100 00 C20 015 27100 08 C24 018 14100 00 C25 018 14100 00 C27 018 13100 00 C30 018 13100 00 C31 018 14100 00 C32 018 13100 00 C36 018 16100 00 C38 018 16100 00 C40 018 13100 00 C41 018 13100 00 C50 018 13100 00 D1 001 10153 00 D2 001 10054 02 D4 001 10084 51 D5 001 10000 99 D6 001 10841 50 D8 001 10084 91 D10 001 10208 60 ET 057 10081 06 E2 057 10081 06 E4 057 10081 06 E8 057 10081 06 E9 057 10081 06 F1 265 10300 10 IC1 000 10409 00 IC2 002 10800 00 IC7 002 19120 00 Description CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP cer 470n 50V 20 1206 X7R CAP cer 2u2 25V 10 0805 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 470n 50V 2096 1206 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP tant 4u7 16V 1096 A CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7
47. Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 23 TMAAO02 08 Keypad Microphone The TMAAO02 08 keypad microphone plugs into the microphone socket on the radio control head and enables users to make calls to other radios groups or to a PABX or PSTN The types of call that you can make depends on the radio model and the way it has been programmed The microphone button operates a hookswitch which 1s closed when the microphone 1s connected to the microphone clip and open when the microphone 1s removed from the microphone clip The function of the hookswitch is determined by the way the radio 1s programmed As well as the PTT key there are twelve alphanumeric keys The functions of the other keys depend on the radio model as follows Graphical display 1 digit display 2 digit display se ay aol Clear key Left selection key StS Shift key Right selection key Scroll keys Scroll keys Scroll keys For detailed operating instructions refer to the radio user s guides m TM8100 Users Guide MMA 00002 xx m 1M382235 Users Guide MMA 00051 xx m 1M38250 and TM8255 Users Guide MMA 00003 xx 23 1 Installation Microphone ever the microphone is plugged into the microphone Installing the Important The keypad microphone grommet must be installed when socket When installed the grommet has two functions B to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there is movement of the micropho
48. Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 4 Loop Filter Introduction If the power supplies for the frequency synthesizer are correct and the PLL is functioning properly check the loop filter next m Task 11 check loop voltage m Task 12 VCO fault m Task 13 check reference voltage m Task 14 check feedback voltage m Task 15 check DIG SYN FAST line m Task 16 check TP503 test point The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the loop filter are summarized in Figure 9 6 Task 11 Check whether the loop filter 1s functioning correctly by measuring the Check Loop Voltage loop voltage at the output of the filter at C565 1 If not already done remove the board from the chassis remove the SYN TOP can and place the radio in CCTM 2 Remove R542 see Figure 9 8 Di Using an oscilloscope proceed as follows to observe the voltage at C565 before and after grounding the junction between C541 and R547 see Figure 9 8 While holding the oscilloscope probe at C565 use a pair of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction The voltage should change to the following value if 1t 1s not already at this value C565 13 3 0 3V DC 4 If the loop voltage is correct go to Step 5 If it is not the loop filter circuitry is suspect go to Task 13 5 Proceed as follows to observe the voltage at C565 before and after applying 3V DC to the junction of C541 and R547 there is a convenient 3 V level at R544 se
49. The frequency control block compares the mixer output frequency to a reference generated by the digital clock and creates a DC error signal A programmed offset 1s also added This error signal 1s converted to analog form and used to control the VCXO frequency and reduce the initial error Once settled the loop locks to the TCXO frequency with a programmed offset frequency The FCL output therefore acquires the TCXO s frequency stability The full bandwidth modulation signal is obtained from the DSP in digital form at a sample rate of 48kHz In traditional dual point modulation systems the modulation 1s applied in analog form to both the frequency reference and the VCO in the RF PLL combining to produce a flat modulation response down to DC Reference modulation is usually applied directly to the TCXO In the system employed in the radio the frequency reference 1s generated by the FCL which itself requires dual point modulation injection to allow modulation down to DC With another modulation point required in the RF PLL this system therefore requires triple point modulation The modulation signals applied to the FCL are in digital form while for the RF PLL VCO the modulation signal is applied in analog form The modulation cross over points occur at approximately 30 and 300 Hz as determined by the closed loop bandwidths of the FCL and RF PLL respectively The RF PLL has a frequency resolution of 25 kHz 30 kHz for the A4 band
50. repair it and go to Step 6 Remove the PIN TOP and LPF TOP cans Make a visual check of the components in the receive path of the PIN switch and LPF circuits If the visual check reveals an obvious fault repair it and go to Step 6 If there is no obvious fault go to Task 7 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed go to Task 7 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 3 Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity Introduction Task 7 Front end Calibration and Tuning Voltages all bands except K5 This section covers the case where the receiver has suffered a moderate or slight loss of sensitivity As measured in Task 1 the receiver gain will be less than 500 000 but not as low as 1500 With a gain less than 40 000 the loss of sensitivity will be moderate about 15dBm too low otherwise it will be slight just a few decibels too low There are three tasks m Task 7 front end calibration and tuning voltages all bands except K5 m ask 8 moderately low receiver sensitivity m Task 9 slightly low receiver sensitivity The fault diagnosis procedures of Task 8 and Task 9 are similar although the differences are minor they are important If the loss of sensitivity is moderate or slight the fault 1s probably in the front end tuning circuitry This task 1s for al
51. which supports waste minimization and material recovery The European Union s Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive requires that this product be disposed of separately from the general waste stream when its service life is over Please be environmentally responsible and dispose through the original supplier your local municipal waste separate collection service or contact Tait Electronics Limited TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Contents PESE acce udo RR dol Y A dogs d Ado e uod CUL dC e Red rob CE ed 5 evi T Taal ee den sde dt tien Rte terrier 5 Hardware and OUEN VOUS uu 2 vadens dci dard i hed eR tint 5 Associated Documentation lt s sob es doe doo e eb or e denn 6 Pub onon ROSE oa du pado p Rada E EE ii PRA AE RR AT E Ya 7 Alu s a oh hk ee EEE ESO HEE EE EEE ERS EER REE VERO RE ER 7 al 8 Part A Description of the Radio 11 E TO S datur EE 13 S LOHN eio E v d 4 op abet acu dtd 4 dcs E De ee PORE 21 S AI LIGEGEDUODE 6 460s Ke ee E E qoe ad vor der E d 65 Part B Servicing the Radio 103 4 General Information 107 5 lussemblyand Reascmbly ices ENEE AANER dE EK G Serveis Procedures asas a EELER doom Eo o o RR d 153 f Powersupply Paul EENEG Acker dE rd web eee REA Ad X ee des 169 C DONDE Rd he ie etes oies Te 179 9 Frequency Synthesizer Fault
52. 2 to5V If the voltage is correct go to Step 3 If it is not go to Task 21 If the PAD TOP can has already been removed go to Step 7 If it has not go to Step 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Remove the PAD TOP can Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Check the voltage on the gate of Q306 see Figure 12 10 gate of Q306 2 to 5V Enter the CCTM command 82 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage is correct replace Q306 confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not go to Task 23 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 371 Figure 12 10 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can VHF shown 372 PAD TOP R340 C333 2 C336 R344 C100 C102 a COMPONENTS C310 R324 R327 GATE OF Q306 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 21 Check Power Control TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Check the power control circuitry if the clamp current for the PA driver is correct or if the voltage at the SET PWR test point is incorrect Import
53. 22 Mute microphone Mutes transmit modulation effectively mutes microphone audio 23 Unmute microphone Unmutes transmit modulation effectively unmutes microphone audio 74 Audio PA Controls the state of the audio PA and hence enables or disables the speaker 110 Audio volume Sets the level of the audio volume 138 Select microphone Selects the microphone required 323 Audio tap in Generates the audio tone AUD TAP IN at the specified tap point 324 Audio tap out Outputs the audio signal at the specified tap point to AUD TAP OUT 124 General Information where x is the required state O stand by 1 on 22mute where x defines the required level any integer from O to 255 138 x where x is the required microphone O control head microphone 1 auxiliary microphone 323 X y where x specifies the tap point r2 r5 t1 or t5 and y the tap type A bypass in B combine E splice the default is A when y is omitted 324 X y where x specifies the tap point r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 t1 12 13 or L and y the tap type C bypass out D split E splice the default is D when y is omitted TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table4 3 CCTM commands in the radio information radio control and system categories Command Radio information category 94 Radio serial number Reads the serial number of the radio 96 Firmware version Reads the version number
54. 240 04020 62 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 16100 10 038 15680 10 038 15470 10 038 15270 20 038 16100 10 038 15470 10 038 15470 10 038 15470 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 15470 10 038 14100 10 038 15470 10 Description CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R DIODE BAV99 dual sw SOT23 DIODE BAT54AW SOT323 DIODE BAV99 dual sw SOT23 DIODE BAV99 dual sw SOT23 DIODE SM15T30A Transil SMC DIODE BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 DIODE BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 DIODE BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 DIODE BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 DIODE BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn IND 0603 BLM18HD4715S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM18HD4715 0 1A IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn IND 0603 BLM18HD4715 0 1A IC LF80C 8V 1A LDO rgltr IC TS912ID CMOS R2R OP Amp IC TS912ID CMOS R2R OP Amp IC TS912ID CMOS R2R OP Amp HDR 3wy 1row PCB mtg HDR 3wy 1row PCB mtg SKT 2wy 0 1 rcpt shorting Ink SKT 2wy 0 1 rcpt shorting Ink RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 68k1 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 27k 0 5 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 1k0 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ref R18 R19 R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 R25 R26 R
55. 402 00019 0X 219 00329 00 34 0001 1 00 349 02062 00 354 01043 00 362 01108 01 362 01111 00 240 00034 00 240 06010 29 Description PCB TMA RS232 Options F Inst TMAA01 02 RS232 Brd 600 00010 00 Pkg Kit Opt Int parts Loom TMA Int Opt Scrw 4 40 3 16 Unc P P Blk Scrw M3 8 T T P T ContiR Fsnr Scrw Lok 1pr 4 40 Seal Drng Cvr 9way TMA Seal Drng 9way TMA 600 00012 00 Pkg Kit Opt 9w parts Plg 9w Drng UL CSA Pnl Mtg Conn 9w Hood Cvr Lets TMAA01 02 RS 232 Board 493 18 4 2 RS 232 Board Layout top side A C D E T A e o BADMARK 6 m ical Ea m a WW m S S MI eg LE Ki SE D m Ir LK4 4 LK3 LK2 e 15 n lt LK1 D z N 3 Es de 5 cid CG um C12 E re Joep te 2 IKIO m RL E R14 5 dE E PF e gt e eo F 7 1 E 5 OF lac aj e 4 EN o NM Pp B b SK2 E D E Ir IPN 220 01 740 01 494 TMAAO1 02 RS 232 Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 18 4 3 RS 232 Board Layout bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007
56. 72kHz receive for the K5 band Higher resolution cannot be achieved owing to acquisition time requirements and so for any given frequency the error could be as high as 12 5kHz This error is corrected by altering the TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Fast Frequency Settling Frequency Acquisition of RF PLL Frequency Acquisition of FCL Calibration reference frequency to the RF PLL The FCL supplies the reference frequency and is able to adjust it up to 300ppm with better than 0 1 ppm resolution equivalent to better than 50Hz resolution at the RF frequency The FCL offset will usually be different for receive and transmit modes Both the FCL and RF PLL employ frequency acquisition speed up techniques to achieve fast frequency settling The frequency acquisition process of the FCL and RF PLL is able to occur concurrently with minimal loop interaction owing to the very large difference in frequency step size between the loops In the RF PLL the loop bandwidth is initially set to high by increasing the charge pump current and reducing time constants in the loop filter As a result settling to within 1kHz of the final value occurs in under 4ms In order to meet noise performance requirements the loop parameters are then switched to reduce the loop bandwidth There is a small frequency kick as the loop bandwidth is reduced Total settling time is under 4 5 ms The FCL utilizes self calibrati
57. A and B of a key for short circuits Repair if necessary 438 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Several Keys Faulty The keys can be grouped into columns and rows of three or two keys as illustrated in Figure 14 11 If one column of keys 1s faulty iB Visually inspect the associated resistor and diodes for open or shorted circuits F2 key R620 F1 key R621 F3 key R622 FA key D602 right selection key D620 left selection key D604 scroll up key scroll down key If one row of keys 1s faulty 1 Visually inspect the associated resistor for open or shorted circuits F3 key scroll up key R624 F1 key F4 key scroll down key right selection key left selection key Figure 14 12 PCB layout of the function scroll and selection key circuitry R202 R201 R204 ANI co K2 a R203 C204 A 2 C501 C603 2 B e gt us 50601 a gt Rt C601 C602 2 C S Bi ie R115 R112 C105 top side 3888888888 Tm ai el Ve H le gt bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 439 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 10 Speaker Faul
58. C10 018 14100 00 C11 015 26100 08 C12 018 15100 00 C13 018 16100 00 C14 014 08100 30 C15 014 08100 30 C16 018 16100 00 C17 015 07220 35 C18 018 15100 00 C19 018 15100 00 C20 018 13470 00 C21 018 13470 00 C22 018 13470 00 C23 018 13470 00 C24 018 13470 00 C25 018 13470 00 C26 018 13470 00 C27 018 14100 00 C28 018 15100 00 C29 018 15100 00 C30 018 14100 00 C31 018 14100 00 C32 018 14100 00 C33 018 14100 00 C34 018 14100 00 C35 018 14100 00 C36 015 26100 08 C37 018 13470 00 C38 018 13470 00 C39 018 13470 00 C40 018 13470 00 C41 018 13470 00 C42 018 13470 00 C43 018 15100 00 C44 018 15100 00 C45 018 15100 00 C46 018 13470 00 C47 018 13470 00 C48 018 13470 00 C49 018 13470 00 C50 015 26100 08 C51 015 27470 05 C52 015 06470 01 C54 015 26100 08 C55 018 16100 00 C56 015 26100 08 D1 001 10014 03 D2 001 10099 01 D3 001 10099 01 D4 001 10099 01 D5 001 10099 01 D6 001 10099 01 D7 001 10099 01 D8 001 10099 01 D9 001 10099 01 D10 001 10099 01 D11 001 10099 01 D12 001 10099 01 D13 001 10011 74 D14 001 10360 00 D15 001 10360 00 D16 001 10360 00 D17 001 10360 00 D18 001 10099 01 D19 001 10099 01 IC2 002 10267 40 IC3 002 10740 40 L1 057 10100 65 L2 057 10010 20 L3 057 10010 20 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 2u2 35V 20 1210 X5R CAP eltro 47u 6 3x5 8mm 35V
59. C556 R55 1 C558 R560 Rx port K5 band Tx port R618 Roi E 1 6 1 950 Rost EC 606 a LS Nees C622 S IE P VCO TOP SYN TOP L508 rales ce ei 1C50b em Junction of D e Selg C541 and R547 Ok mE R501 R580 C548 Jet E585 R500 R5000 C549 R437 Rx port 212 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 18 If both the minimum and maximum receive frequencies are correct the Repair PLL feedback pr feedback is suspect m Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 2 Remove the VCO BOT can 3 Replace the components C567 R574 see Figure 9 12 and IC503 see Figure 9 11 4 Also check the second stage of the receive buffer amplifier based on IC5100 see Figure 9 12 Repair any fault 5 Confirm that the fault in the radio has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on p
60. E T e e ES RR E CDR ZJM TNO any Tx eee FH aT Gr TI ge JIG T T BZES t ang Gei MS BnE AB TS INGS SQ EE S adop Sids Tu clas lt OcEMWH M ar AVS dT IC dS i Ls lt E by 3125 AE to Hats fff Leys a ds 9 19 lds HD TASH S IG IdS HL MS 8fntI Ha KZ Oth aa V duaaac MOG P L dS H2 TINI ara catt GG T U dit RUE INT INT X le EAE VW ENT S ze EBTO z To TOTO 2812 K S4 ey Se a 6 IOId9 M Ed 4 Qu ETU X TTU M TATA 22173 CHO XG Fe Sg OId5 H2 dHIO HIG SS8FSH Bees 31 HAS T l JJO NO Ho Ge gi JAM NO O IdS HO2 MEE KE DND MERE PES fer E inet f 5505 ue e GO8 gGH m MET INO T ESCHER SHrFSH Ut gl vn MNT UG 4430 NO H2 o aa SE ys ang DIN HO d SE SA INS r EEN a p NES UNS HO TG EBYEXEN E MAMA A AN 7 Re GEES axa H3 CHO OIUUH Ux H2 es 9 amp CAT S8rsd U anouL SS r sn otsa TIS dna El ane Giele agi SET da z i OIQNS DIN HO 30 QL n AAA 2 Peu CINY XY T S OIUflg OIL BT AA 222 z 226 g IR n m BPT ang xa da D Te g Ild HD JO HD IECH g 20007 E Goor PA eara V gata E Ee gt s OXL HO AO lt U0IUSGH UXI HO 91 Loupe S BAST x CP Se BIdd GSLSIML ene 1 LZ m EA da Ju Seats S I83 qi HIBG ue Eata Ehe TT HO3 SI INONId PE 3E SIRET E T ccv Ref E 9901 28 I SUIg 2d ces us A A 14201 Lx a9 Ele 91 ABE GQ Tg oa Tir ne e OH JHA K V UOE LSTAS c ITED ED AC U JNOO T angot JE
61. EMC ITF ON OFF Filters B CH ON OFF ITF CH RXD P DIE CDD L ITF CH HOOK PTT and ITF CH PTT Hookswitch lt Decode ITF CH GEI ESD and DIG CH GPO1 EMC G d Combine Filters ICH A E DIGCH SPIDO qw j B DIGCHSPICIK HE Filt DIG CH LE 0 os Digital B SIS m Board dL dL _ ITF IOP GPIO1 6 el EEN EEN HE HEN EE RER Fe ITF IOP GPIO7 I E DE cere ES Si S ITF IOP RSD x L WS D VE Or EEGENEN NN E DPW Dee SR HE es gt Resistors HE DEE E J We ee ee or E OR SE l DIG AUX TXD P 4 TF AUX EI O yY p a E AUX GPI TF AUX GPI2 Il E E AUX GPI2 TF AUX GPI3 I E AUXGPI3 q T DGND AGND D 1 0 gt 13V8 SW Combine Clamps gt ITF AUX GPI4 7 n T node DIG AUX GPO4 7 U ns E gt gt Resistors and EMC 45V Filters Auxiliary Debug 5V E Connector Connector Regulator AUDTAPOUT E AUDTAP IN e R AUX MIC AUD lt W RSSI Frequency Synthesizer Signal Types gt RF gt digital jM gt analog asynchronous serial data Transmitter dock gt synchronous serial data 92 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Input Signals AUX GPI1 to AUX GPI3 ESD Protection Hookswitch Detection Dedicated inputs are provided on three pins of the auxiliary connector AUX GPI1 to AUX GPI3 AUX GPIT is a general purpose input with st
62. Figure 5 2 Removing the cover LO upper L screw boss We insertion q point lower SS screw boss TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 137 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Opening the The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 3 on Radio Body page 139 1 Use a Torx T20 screwdriver to remove the four screws Important Tr an options board is fitted inside the lid an options loom will connect the options board to the internal options con nector on the main board In this case carefully fold over the lid and disconnect the loom 2 Carefully remove the lid assembly 3 Inspect the main seal in the lid for damage and replace 1f necessary Removing the The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 3 on Main Board ace 139 Assembly Pag 1 Remove the auxiliary connector bung if fitted 2 Remove the RF connector seal using one of the tabs located at the bottom of the seal preferably by hand If necessary lift up the tap using the blade of a small flat bladed screwdriver Do not damage the seal with the screwdriver 3 Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to remove the screws connecting the main board to the chassis 4 Use a Torx T20 screwdriver to remove the screws amp amp connecting the heat transfer block to the rear of the chassis Note Make sure not to touch the thermal paste on the chassis the heat transfer block and the unde
63. INIOd 1S3L i Se HNI XL Ke IH GC EE OMA S C S s INIOd 1S3L Co HNI XL Q Co 80 dOL ODA NYO dOL OHIO v1 JHA LNIOd 1S3 Se moin ek eJ UD UC H o HMd AM4 On D Kg lon DIS LCT Jn W Tn W Loc Co OO RX lo ES Ile Cum INIOd 1521 HMd A3H E INIOd 1521 XL 0A6 AJ O a v INIOd 1S31 HNI XL LK N E S NVO dOL OuIG 277 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 11 2 Transmitter RF Power Introduction If there is no fault with the power supplies check the transmitter RF power and correct any fault The procedure 1s covered in the following eight tasks m Task 4 check forward and reverse powers m Task 5 check RF output power m ask 6 power unchanged regardless of setting m Task 7 check for inhibiting of transmitter m Task 8 check temperature sensor B ask 9 power and current are skewed m Task 10 repair output matching circuitry m Task 11 power and current are low The measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter RF power are summarized in Figure 11 5 Data required for the first task checking the forward and reverse powers 1s supplied 1n Table 11 3 Table 11 3 Voltages in millivolts corresponding to nominal forward and reverse powers Frequency band Forward power 318 command Reverse power 319 command 278 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manu
64. Important These kits do not meet the IP54 pro there is water dust or other environmental hazards 35 1 VOX Operation TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit Your radio may able to detect the sound of your voice so that you can make calls without using the PTT key Voice operated transmit VOX 1s turned on and off either by using a function key programmed for VOX or by using the radio s Main menu Changing to VOX The function key programmed for VOX toggles VOX between on and off MI oA When VOX 1s turned on it remains on until the function key 1s pressed again Key While VOX 1s on the VOX indication may be Channel 1 UQX A v Menu programmed to appear below the channel infor mation on your display Changing toVOXby 1 Select Menu gt Radio Settings gt Function settings using the Main Function Settings gt VOX sensitivit Menu Back T Select SU es 7 E TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 599 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2n In the VOX menu choose On UOX Off 3 Press Select Back Select wa VY While VOX is on the VOX indication may be e Channel 1 programmed to appear below the channel infor ox mation on your display ten Changing the You may need to change the threshold at which the radio detects your voice Sensitivity of VOX and makes a call To do this you use the VOX Sensitivity menu 1 Select Menu Radio
65. MI A6 2 A6 484 TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 9 3 Line Interface Board Layout top side C BADMARK RISA RL6A R43A RATA A B C D E F 6 R57 cr Fait qm R46 R55 vids mJ fo 188 Ue ae Rupe RAT Rr mj pret TTT CA R32 se fa R18 E SE U1 R18 TU geje C4 gama 62 S Ei ER S Q3 3 D4 ei E OO R10 d ar U6 U4 U3 E C3 d D e 29 E z m C35 C25 TE Ral U a Ro Se EN N T S
66. Off Mic Audio Switch This 3 way toggle switch is used to switch between Mod Audio Audio Tap In Mic Audio and Off no audio signal m With the Tait Orca portables this switch can be used for setting up dual point modulation by applying modulation to different parts of the radio m For normal transmit deviation tests other portables and mobiles this switch is set to Mic Audio 38 2 3 On Hook Off Hook Switch C Important When using the test unit with portables the On Hook Off Hook toggle switch must be set to Off Hook Portables do not have a hookswitch and if the switch 1s set to On Hook the accessory function key of the portable is activated This 2 way toggle switch is used to simulate the microphone hookswitch opening hook off and closing hook on This is done by switching a 12kQ resistor R3 in or out of the MIC PTT line m When set to Off Hook the 12kQ resistor R3 is switched out of the MIC PTT line This simulates the microphone being removed from the microphone clip m When set to On Hook a 12kQ resistor R3 is switched into the MIC PTT line This simulates the microphone being placed on the microphone clip TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TOPA SV 024 Test Unit 615 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 38 2 4 Rx Tx PTT Switch This 2 way toggle switch is used to switch between receive and transmit mode m When set to RX the PTT line is switched to high impedance m When set to TX
67. Q721 R100 R110 R200 R201 R202 R210 R211 R212 R320 R401 R402 R410 R411 R412 R420 R421 R422 R430 R431 R441 R442 R501 R510 R511 R600 R601 R602 R603 R604 R605 R606 R607 R608 R609 R611 R612 IPN 057 10081 06 057 10081 06 057 10600 05 057 10600 05 057 10081 06 057 10600 05 057 10081 06 057 10081 06 057 10081 06 240 00016 00 240 10000 11 240 10000 11 057 10100 65 057 10470 10 057 10470 10 000 10084 71 000 10084 71 000 10442 71 038 13100 10 038 15100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 036 00000 01 038 15820 10 038 15820 10 038 15150 10 038 16150 10 038 13100 10 038 15330 10 038 15220 10 038 12470 00 038 14220 00 038 14220 00 038 14470 10 038 14470 10 038 15100 10 038 13120 00 038 10000 00 038 15100 10 038 16470 00 038 10000 00 038 10000 00 038 10000 00 038 10000 00 038 15100 10 038 15100 10 038 15100 10 038 15100 10 038 15100 10 038 14470 10 TMAA03 03 Control Head Interface PCB IPN 220 01721 04 Description Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match Ind SMD Pwr Cdrh6D38 100UH 65 Ind SMD Pwr CDRH104R 47uH 1A Ind
68. RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W IC ST202E RS232 ESD SO16 PCB TMA opt extnd MANL f instr TMAA01 05 600 00009 00 Pkg Kit Opt 15w parts 240 00032 00 240 06010 29 Plg 15w Drng Hi D UL CSA P Mtg Conn 9w Hood Cvr Lets 600 00010 00 Pkg Kit Opt Int parts fitted with TMAAO1 07 only 219 00329 00 347 00011 00 349 02062 00 354 01043 00 362 01108 01 362 01111 00 Loom TMA Int Opt Scrw 4 40 3 16 Unc P P Blk Scrw M3 8 T T P T ContiR Fsnr Scrw Lok 1pr 4 40 Seal Drng Cvr 9way TMA Seal Drng 9way TMA TMAA01 05 and TMAAO01 07 Options Extender Boards 503 19 4 2 TMAAO1 05 Grid Reference List PCB IPN 220 65203 05 Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit C1 C5 1J6 D8 C3 1D3 R25 B2 1E6 C2 D5 1J5 D9 E2 1G3 R26 C2 1D6 C3 D5 1K6 D10 D2 1H4 1H3 R27 C3 1D6 C4 D5 1J5 D11 D2 1G4 R28 B2 1C6 C5 D4 1K7 D12 D2 1F4 R29 C5 TC C6 E6 1B6 D13 G3 1G8 R30 C5 1D7 C7 E8 1B7 D14 F5 1F8 R31 C5 1D7 C8 D 1B8 D15 D5 1E9 R32 C5 1E C9 D8 1B8 D16 E5 1E10 R33 D2 1G7 C10 A3 1J2 D1 E3 1B5 R34 D1 167 C11 D8 1B8 D18 D4 1H3 1J3 R35 D2 1F7 C12 E8 1B9 D19 C4 1H3 HS R36 F4 1F8 C13 D9 1B10 IC2 E8 1B9 R37 F5 1F8 C14 D9 1B10 IC3 C4 1A7 1A6 1J5 1A8 R38 G2 1F8 C15 C9 1B11 J1 E4 1B3 R39 G2 1F9 C16 C9 1B11 J2 G4 1B3 R40 D4 1F9 C17 B9 1B12 J3 F4 1B4 R41 D2 1J9 C18 E1 1F5 L1 E9 1B10 R42 F2 1G9 C19 D2 1F5 L2 E4 IS R43 G2 1F9 C20 G4 1F4 L3 B2 13 R44 D5 1F9 C21 F4 1E4 L4 B2 1E4 R45 D1 1J9 C22
69. SK1 240 00011 67 Skt 15w Drng Ra Slim Dsub 7912 E 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr SK2 240 10000 11 Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match E2 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr E3 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr T1 054 00010 18 Xfmr Line SMD 600 Ohm P2781 E4 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr T2 054 00010 18 Xfmr Line SMD 600 Ohm P2781 FL1 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr FL2 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr U1 002 10339 00 IC SMD LM339 4x CMplt 014 FL3 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr U3 002 10740 40 IC 74AHCT04 SOIC14 Hex Inv FLA 057 10120 03 Ind 0805 120e 100m 2 Emi Supr U4 002 10740 80 IC 74AHCTO8 SOIC 14 4x2IP AND FL5 057 11220 02 Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr U5 002 10854 10 IC TDA8541T 1w Audio Amp FL6 057 11220 02 Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr U6 002 10740 80 IC 74AHCT08 SOIC14 4x2IP AND FL7 057 11220 02 Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr U7 002 10003 58 IC SMD LM358 Dual 0 Amp FL8 057 11220 02 Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr U8 002 10078 05 IC SMD 78105 5v Reg FL9 012 14100 00 Cap Cer SMD 1N Array EMI Supr U9 002 10002 02 IC SMD ADM202E RS232 Esd S016 Q1 000 10084 71 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 220 65202 04 PCB TMA 600R LINE INTFC Q2 000 10084 71 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 402 00012 0X MANL f instr TMAA01 01 Q3 000 10084 71 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 R1 036 02100 03 RES Pwr 1218 10R 5 1W 600 00009 00 Pkg Kit Opt 15w parts RV1 042 05100 06 Res Pre TH 10k 6mm Top 240 00032 00 Blo 15w Drng H
70. Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 16 inch 14mm 363127 01 15lb in 1 7 N m 7 D range screwlock fastener 2x power connector seal 9 power connector gap pad 25W radio only AD RF connector nut 2 RF connector lock washer 3 RF connector main board Disassembly and Reassembly 141 Removing an Options Board The radio may be fitted with an options board in the lid assembly which may or may not have an external options connector fitted 1n a provision in Optional the lid assembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 5 1 If an external options connector is fitted m Undo the two screws D and remove the protective rubber cap af fitted m Undo the two D range screwlock fasteners 2 Undo up to nine screws and remove the options board from the lid assembly 9 3 If an external options connector 1s fitted a foam seal for the D range connector is fitted to the inside of the lid Remove the foam seal only if it is damaged Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly Figure 5 5 Removing an options board 3 3 16 inch 5mm 8Ib in 0 9N m DA G lt lt Or 277 j SA Torx T10 171b in 1 9N m SST D screw 4 40x3 15 x2 5 foam seal for D range connector 2 protective rubber cap 6 options board example 3 D range screwlock fastener 4 40 x2 7 screw M3x10 self tapping x9 4 lid assembly 142 Disassembly and Re
71. This should increase by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11 6 6 If the voltage and current are both correct go to Step 7 If the voltage is correct but not the current go to Task 17 If neither the current nor the voltage is correct go to Task 18 T Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to switch off final bias 2 and go to Task 19 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 299 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 17 If the voltage measured in Task 16 is correct but not the current either the dod second PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect And when entering the CCTM command 332 y do not specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A 1 If the PAF TOP can has already been removed go to Step 5 If it has not go to Step 2 2 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 3 Remove the PAF TOP can 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode D Enter the CCTM command 332 y where y was recorded in Task 12 6 Check that the voltage at the gate of Q309 is see Figure 11 11 gate of Q309 2 to 5V T Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 8 If the voltage is correct Q309 is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If i
72. display on the control head 3 Normal radio operation starts with the RISC processor executing m the graphical user interface m the I O processing m the user interface processing During normal radio operation the radio body and control head communicate via interface software which is part of the radio and control head application software On shutdown the programming and calibration data 1s stored 1n the database and power is removed from the radio Important On power loss any changes made to the programming or calibration data may be lost One of the servicing tasks 1s the downloading and uploading of programming and calibration files to the database For more information refer to Servicing Procedures on page 155 and the online help of the programming and calibration applications During servicing it may become necessary to upload software to a replacement main board control head or control head board using the Tools Download command of the programming application For more information refer to the online help of the programming application and to the technical notes accompanying the software files TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 51 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 5 Operation in Receive Mode Overview 52 Description This section describes the functioning of the transceiver in receive mode The operation of the transceiver is illustrated in Figure 2 16 on page 53 For the K
73. go to Task 39 If it 1s not go to Step 8 The VCXO circuitry is faulty If not already done remove the VCXO BOT can Locate and repair the fault in the VCXO circuitry Q501 Q503 XL501 and associated components see Figure 9 19 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Task 39 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 241 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 39 TP502 Test Point TP501 Grounded If the loop was oscillating Task 38 will have revealed any fault in the VCXO circuitry If there was no fault or if the circuit was repaired a check at the TP502 test point is now required This will show if there are any additional faults in the mixer or LPF circuitry 1 Use the oscilloscope probe to check the difference frequency at the TP502 test point see Figure 9 18 The signal is SYN CDC FCL and TP502 test point sine wave with frequency of at least 15kHz and amplitude of 1 1 0 2Vpp on 1 5 0 1V DC n GT O E c e A4 band the frequency should be TP502 test point triangular wave with frequency of at least 15kHz and amplitude of 1 5 0 2Vpp on 1 5 0 1V DC If the signal is correct go to Step 6 If it is not go to Step 3 The mixer circuitry IC501 and associated components or the LPP circuitry IC502 pins 5 to 7 and associated components under the FCL TOP can 1s faulty see Figure 9 18 Locate th
74. graphical display or Speaker Faulty on page 454 1 2 or 3 digit display If the radio receives audio now the original speaker was faulty Reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the radio still fails to receive reconnect the original speaker and go to Step 11 Use CCTM command 804 to read the status of the volume potentiometer TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 13 14 6 2 Final Tasks If the volume potentiometer is faulty repair it as described in Volume Control Faulty on page 442 graphical display or Volume Control Faulty on page 454 1 2 or 3 digit display If it is not faulty go to Step 13 After having eliminated the synthesizer the receiver circuitry the speaker and the volume potentiometer as cause for the fault repair the radio as described in CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 If the main board assembly was replaced or if the repair failed re assemble the radio as described in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Conclude with the tasks of Final Tasks on page 163 List of Tasks The following tasks need to be carried out for all radios M repair m enable software features if applicable m final inspection m final test m final administration Task 1 The fault diagnosis will have resulted 1n the repair or replacement of the Repair main board assembly This section descri
75. gt e reme El s SIE Jz zs POGON H SIS 3 EI scu TES OLE TNO LNIOd LNAWSAYNSVAW Jejiuis pueq gy uMous 4HN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 274 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W Task 2 If the power supply to the drains of the PAs and PA driver is not correct the Check Switch Circuit 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual switch circuit 1s suspect Check the circuit as follows Measure the voltage at the point 1 on R350 shown in Figure 11 2 VHF or Figure 11 3 UHF The voltage should be point 1 on R350 13 8V DC If the voltage measured in Step 1 is correct go to Step 3 If it is not check for continuity between R350 and the power connector Repair any fault and conclude with Step 8 Measure the voltage at R339 as shown in Figure 11 2 VHF or Figure 11 3 UHF The voltage should be R339 9V DC If the voltage measured in Step 3 is correct go to Step 5 If it is not go to Task 3 and check the 9V power supply Measure the voltage at the point 2 on R350 shown in Figure 11 2 VHF or Figure 11 3 UHF The voltage should be point 2 on R350 5V DC If the voltage measured in Step 5 is correct go to Step 7 If it is not replace Q308 see Figure 11 2 VHF or Figure 11 3 UHF and conclude with Step 8 Remove the heat transfer block from the main board Replace Q311 situated on the bottom side of the main board next to the power connector Rep
76. maximum volume at 47 dBm e At Rx AUDIO SINAD connector on test unit e At pins 3 SPK and 4 SPK of power connector on radio Distortion at 47 dBm 60 rated system deviation at 1 KHz with volume set to give 3W into 16Q load a The RX AUDIO SINAD output on the test unit has 10dB of attenuation switched in when the test unit PORTABLE MOBILE switch is set to MOBILE Refer to TOPA SV 024 Test Unit on page 613 for details Table 6 4 Final tests of general radio functions PTT switch Check that PTT switch functions Microphone Check operation of microphone Check operation of hookswitch Data communications Test 1200 baud data transmission standard Test Tait high speed data transmission if feature is enabled Direct connect GPS Check that GPS poll returns correct position if feature is enabled global positioning system Selcall Check that radio encodes Selcall Check that radio decodes Selcall Audio tap points and digital I O Check configuration of programmed options and test operation of these lines to confirm that Customer requirements are satisfied TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Servicing Procedures 167 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 168 Servicing Procedures TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 7 Power Supply Fault Finding Fault Diagnosis Fault diagnosis of the power supply circuitry is divided into the following Tasks tasks m ask 1 check in
77. o IPN 220 01 740 01 TMAA01 02 RS 232 Board 495 ircuit Diagram 18 4 4 RS 232 Board C T 4O T vLl0 Occ tH meupug LO andy Toma D4HO NM G LN3IAGN3IAU ECT OH LHS AWON 3 TI 8 3 JNIONG Sa T2 21 A n W SITE T r21 822 OL eO 19T109 Scc WOX NdI GQ39NOUHO gra COD SS8 82 v1 ZT Yer uou 319 3 d DIY Ll pps T bee HHH LNOIMSUU 3nssI NdI jOUJHJINI ZEZSX DOUEN Sen ANT ANT ANT ANT SOILNOG Bu SS O G2 CG CD CD T T T T JOH SCH JOH SICH ONT LNTOW ON I LNNOW ONI LNNOW ONT LNNOW 0092 ENNEd 2094 ENWEd 2094 ENNEd 20924 ENNEd T t LA LW ZIW TIN STS INO HAT s RN ING C9 Huge 4 gq478 NE o O Cal C co it 6 ma NG N SIBT F E EEN voloHgr ING MEE OH STH PTH T M Qr MITT L SN ING ee AS
78. off D617 Q608 amber status LED 1 89V on 1 48V off If the voltage is incorrect replace the LED 4 Replace the corresponding transistor LED Intensity Faulty If the intensity of the LEDs is faulty 1 Send CCTM command 1001 0 1 to activate the LED of the F1 key 2 Send CCTM command 1002 3 to set the LED intensity level to high 432 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 Check the resistors R601 and R602 and replace if necessary R601 2 2kQ R602 5 62kQ If the resistors are okay the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced Figure 14 6 PCB layout of the function key LED and status LED circuitry gll S SR R703 70 al D620 Mc Fp en IR NS2 z D604 T S 0703 m E z D602 SE me z c cag R108 C7104 D co zm D 5 me daka SSI lo Cn e SI d c e m a Ka gt T m x top side E S S UTOKB C101 c hl Po Eel D e Kai R601 R602 B R603 o p gt B B for Oo for B B top side bottom side 5608A gt ae P3 a bottom side bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 433 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 7 Keypad Backlighting Faulty The keypad backlighting LEDs ar
79. on page 163 If they are not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 217 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 6 Transmit VCO and Related Circuitry UHF and 800 MHz Radios Introduction If there is no fault with the power supplies the PLL inputs and output and the loop filter check the VCO and related circuitry The procedures in this section apply only to UHF radios with a system error or transmit fault and therefore with suspect transmit VCO and related circuitry The minimum and maximum transmit frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands are defined in Table 9 4 There are five aspects m Task 23 check transmit VCO m Task 24 repair PLL feedback m Task 25 repair transmit VCO m Task 26 check switching to transmit mode m Task 27 check transmit buffer amplifier The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the VCO and related circuitry are summarized in Figure 9 9 and Figure 9 10 Table 9 4 Minimum and maximum transmit frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands Frequency band Transmit frequency in MHz 218 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 23 Check that the correct transmit frequency 1s synthesized This 1s the Check Transmit VCO frequency of the transmit VCO output SYN TX LO at the TX port shown in Figure 9 11 1
80. or 3 digit display or E 1 digit display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 133 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 134 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 Disassembly and Reassembly This section describes how to BH remove and mount the control head m disassemble and reassemble the radio body m disassemble and reassemble the control heads General C Important Before disassembling the radio disconnect the radio from any test equipment or power supply Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts Inspect all disassembled parts for damage and replace them 1f necessary Observe the torque settings indicated 1n the relevant figures For information on spare parts refer to Spare Parts on page 455 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 135 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 1 Removing and Mounting the Control Head Important Before removing the control head disconnect the radio from any test equipment or power supply Removing the 1 Note which way up the control head is attached to the radio body in Control Head order to return the radio to the customer in its original configuration 2 On the underside of the radio body two lever points are indicated on the radio body by a dot dash dot pattern o o The lever point is between the control head seal and the plastic of the contr
81. qub Ln d SCH stage at C3509 for the VHF UHF bands or L307 for the K5 and m With the radio still in transmit mode measure the RF voltage after C3509 for the VHF UHF bands see Figure 11 21 or L307 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent The required voltage should be as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 2 If the voltage is correct go to Task 30 If it is not go to Step 3 3 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 4 Check the components around Q3502 for the VHF UHF bands see Figure 11 21 or Q303 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 5 For the K5 band Since the second stage of the exciter 1s also the final stage check the voltage across resistor R 351 Voltage across R351 1 0V to 4 2V Also check that the resistance of the resistor is 15 Q 6 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks Q3502 for the VHF UHF bands see Figure 11 21 or Q303 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 if none of the other components is faulty Z Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 323 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 29 Output of Third Stage of Exciter VHF UHF bands If the output of the second stage of the exc
82. the radio s frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 12 2 J Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 4 Note the RF output power measured by the test set and note the current reading on the DC power supply RF output power 30W current 8A VHF 9A UHF 5 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 6 Program the radio with the centre frequency in the radio frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 12 2 1 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 8 Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the radio s frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 12 2 vd Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 10 Depending on the results of the above measurements proceed to the task indicated in Table 12 4 Note that the power and current are considered to be skewed if they are low at one part of the frequency band and high elsewhere Table 12 4 Tasks to be performed according to the results of the power and current measurements of Task 5 Power Task Correct Task 6 Power unchanged regardless of setting Correct Task 29 Check power at directional coupler Skewed
83. usu IR AER EN A ER EE EE E dC ed SS 250 10 3 Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity 255 10 4 Jee POST Ea ee bed taxe ue ka Rad AE eed anes Er 259 OO EE een AE ee EE P E E 262 10 6 High Receiver DIStofUOB isa oc R 4 ho eo o pe e Roe 265 11 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 267 If Fone aie d 22579 9r a dod ER Ee dH S REA ESSA SS 271 ILs Wer 9 ON 2a da ap Ea d eU EORR de aus suites 216 Ti Donte o rA Diver A PAL eme sd sauter meer cie 290 Tea FOP OL PAM 4d 243 RR Moe OE RR GR ASAD EHS chasses 215 12 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 341 tal EE EE 344 Lic r GAP POWELL Le veu Ey E 350 12 3 Biasing of PA Driverand PAS ss eos dba Er REOR ORE EE 360 Los RIGEN PUE Lir 223 2323 143 527 7 15 134 99 5 3424 994 d aes 3 9 13 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 399 ENERO 4 00 ER 400 13 2 Pauly Speaker MON ve dk eode ob dO dee dot qr mde tn 402 133 No Speaker Audio at Avxiliary Connector isses xe Rr es 409 ee O A d eg qd E E KEE de de 9 Ede EOE Ee eae deng 414 15 5 Party OOO oo so 4 ceundda eer vh wg vnd Ear rb bess 416 13 6 Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector a aana aaaea 420 14 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 423 PRI a Ga N lt T 6 qd soi Ooh ed EERE bed E 424 142 Power Supply FA unes doe Oh RR pA YR EX Y RR Ed 426 14 3 FE FOU uude EE a d ddp do cea mec s 428 144 LCD Back ete D
84. which switches a transistor on MOSFET Q102 A temperature signal from the LCD module is converted to a digital signal by an analog digital converter U601 and processed by the FPGA Note The temperature sensor signal 1s independent from the heating and is also used to control the LCD contrast For a circuit diagram and PCB layout refer to Figure 14 3 on page 428 and Figure 14 4 on page 429 If the LCD heating is faulty 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Check the temperature sensor signal at pin 14 of J102 J102 pin 14 1 52V at 30 C 1 58V at 25 C 1 64V at 20 C 1 69V at 15 C If the signal is below 0 7 V low or above 2 5 V high the LCD tem perature sensor 1s faulty Send CCTM command 1007 to read the temperature sensor value If the value does not correspond to the ambient temperature U601 is faulty Check the 3 3 V supply voltage at pin 3 S2 of Q102 Q102 pin 3 2 GND If the signal 1s not correct refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 426 Check the signal at pin 4 G2 of Q102 Q102 pin 4 G2 GND with heating switched on If the signal 1s not correct visually inspect pin 4 for open contact Otherwise the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced Check the signal at pin 5 DA2 of Q102 Q102 pin 5 D2A 3 3V with heating switched on If the signal is missing replace Q102 Visually inspect pins 10 and 12 of connector J102 for open or shorted contacts Check the si
85. with a spare can If this 1s not done special precautions are needed when re installing the original can These precautions are discussed as part of the training for accreditation 4 7 SMT Repair Techniques Standard Service centres carrying out level 2 repairs are expected to be familiar with Procedures the standard techniques for the replacement of SMT components However certain components on the main board require non standard techniques and these are discussed below Another issue of concern 1s the procedure for removing and installing cans A discussion of the issue concludes this section Non standard Do not use the standard SMT repair techniques when replacing the Procedures capacitors C548 and C565 and the inductors L601 and L602 The standard techniques tend to produce excessive heat which will damage these components Do not use a hot air tool or heat gun Instead use solder paste and a standard soldering iron with an iron tip with a specified temperature of 600 F 315 C The capacitors are part of the frequency synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can The inductors are part of the SMPS of the power supply circuitry on the bottom side of the board Figure 4 5 on page 122 shows the locations of the components TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 121 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 4 5 Locations of the capacitors C548 and C565 and the inductors L601 and L602 C551 R568 C562
86. 1 1 to 2 7V after entry of CCTM 331 x Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured above is correct go to Step 6 If it is not go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 Check IC301 and the surrounding shaping filter circuitry see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 298 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 16 If the biasing of the first PA is correct check that of the second PA Q309 Check Biasing of Second PA Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A C And when entering the CCTM command 332 y do not specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs 1 Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC301 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 The voltage should be pin 8 of IC301 lt 100 mV initially 2 Note the current reading on the DC power supply As mentioned in Step 7 of Task 12 the current will be less than 500mA 3 Enter the CCTM command 332 y where y was recorded in Task 12 4 Check that the voltage changes to pin 8 of IC301 2 to 5V after entry of CCTM 332 y 5 Also note the current reading
87. 10 With the radio still in transmit mode note the RF output power measured at the test set This should be as shown in Table 12 5 11 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 12 Ifthe RF power measured in Step 10 is correct go to RF Signal Path on page 379 If it is not carry out Task 12 and then Task 16 Table 12 5 RF output power of individual RF power amplifiers at different frequencies Frequency within band Frequency band Lowest frequency Centre frequency Highest frequency TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 359 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 3 Biasing of PA Driver and PAs Introduction The measurements of the transmitter RF output power in Transmitter RP Power might indicate a need to check the biasing of the two PAs and the PA driver The procedure is covered in this section There are thirteen tasks grouped as follows Task 12 prepare to check biasing Task 13 to Task 15 check biasing of first PA Task 16 to Task 18 check biasing of second PA Task 19 and Task 20 check biasing of PA driver Task 21 to Task 24 repair circuitry The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the PAs and PA driver are summarized in Figure 12 7 Task 12 If the transmitter 1s not being inhibited check the biasing of the two PAs Prepare to Check Biasing 1 2 and the PA driver First make the following preparations Set t
88. 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 002 10022 22 220 65203 05 402 00008 0X TMAAO1 05 and TMAAO1 07 Parts List PCB IPN 220 65203 05 Description IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND pwr 10uH CDRH2D18 43A IND pwr 10uH CDRH2D18 43A IND 0603 BLM18P 60R 5A f bead IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM18P 60R 5A f bead IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A XSTR SMD MTD3055EL T4 Fet NCh XSTR SMD MTD3055EL T4 Fet NCh XSTR SMD MTD3055EL T4 Fet NCh RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 6k8 1 1 8W RES 0805 6k8 196 1 8W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0603 OR 596 1 10W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RELAY 12V DPDT 10pin SMD SMT Alloy Lead Free sac CONN 18wy skt M M SMD SKT 15wy drng RA Dsubmintr7912 RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W RES 0805 OR 1 8W
89. 1009 x Switches on or off the facility for where xis the required state ance x is the serial output from detecting if any key is pressed or O off 120n the detection facility released 1010 Volume control X Reads the setting of the volume where xis the potentiometer control potentiometer setting an integer between 00 and FF 1011 Microphone source 1011x Selects the microphone input where x is the required source source O2microphone connector 1 concealed microphone Table 4 8 CCTM commands of the remote control head kit CCTM command Entry at keyboard 1012 Remote kit 1012 0 off none turns the audio amplifier on and off 1012 1 on 1013 Mute audio amplifier 1012 0 2 mute none mutes and unmutes the audio amplifier 1012 1 zunmute 1014 Digital potentiometer 1014 value between 0 and reads the digital potentiometer 255 1017 Audio amplifier gain 1017 x none sets the audio amplifier gain 4 levels where x is the gain 0 to 3 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 129 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 CCTM Error Codes Once the radio is in CCTM the CCTM commands may be entered as shown in Table 4 2 to Table 4 6 Depending on the command a response might or might not be displayed If an error occurs an error code will be displayed Possible error codes are listed 1n Table 4 9 Table 4 9 CCTM error codes CO Jan An invalid CCTM command has been received Enter a valid CCTM command CC
90. 10k 1 1 10W C32 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R38 038 15120 10 RES 0603 12k 1 1 10W C35 015 26220 18 AP CER 220N 50V 10 0805 X7R R39 038 16180 00 RES 0603 180k 5 1 10W C37 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R40 038 13180 10 RES 0603 180R 1 1 10W C38 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R41 038 13180 10 RES 0603 180R 1 1 10W C39 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R43A 038 13680 00 RES 0603 680R 5 1 10W C40 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R44 038 13680 00 RES 0603 680R 5 1 10W C41 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R45 038 13330 00 RES 0603 330R 5 1 10W RA7A 038 13120 00 RES 0603 120R 5 1 10W D1 001 10084 47 Diode SMD BZX84C4V7 Zen SOT23 R48 038 16120 10 RES 0603 120k 1 1 10W D2 001 10099 01 Diode BAV99w Dual Ss R49 038 16150 10 RES 0603 150k 1 1 10W D4 001 10070 01 Diode BAV70W Dual Ss SOT323 R50 038 15120 10 RES 0603 12k 1 1 10W D5 001 10084 51 Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23 R51 038 16120 10 RES 0603 120k 1 1 10W D6 001 10084 51 Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23 R52 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W D7 001 10084 51 Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23 R53 038 10000 00 RES 0603 OR D8 001 10099 01 Diode BAV99w Dual Ss R54 038 10000 00 RES 0603 OR D9 001 10084 51 Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23 R55 038 10000 00 RES 0603 OR D10 001 10099 01 Diode BAV99w Dual Ss R56 038 12560 00 RES 0603 56R 5 1 10W D11 001 10099 01 Diode BAV99w Dual Ss D12 001 10284 51 Diode SMD BZX284B5V1 Zensod110 1 230 10010 44 Sw SMD Spst 16dil X8
91. 12 16 and go to Task 25 With the test lead still connected to the test set enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF output power This should exceed 35 W RF output power more than 35W Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Repeat Steps Step 7 to Step 9 Remove the test lead and test capacitor and resolder the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 in position see Figure 12 16 If the power in both the above cases is now correct the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 390 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 31 In checking the final RF signal path if no fault 1s found in the directional Check PIN Switch coupler then check the PIN s
92. 133488 5 3134 3 anva NIMQI3 YS34 HOJ Q3HIDO3H S3ONUHO SUM IONI ova 982Z D H3l3d 3 2090 NIMGI3 NE TT NI ISIQd3H NdI 193 dra 987 107871 s3l13d 3 30eG8 TL NIMGI3 3nssi NoriednoHIO 3H Y SS3H U osa HHH LNG L Sar 99 29 2797 Salad 3 2090 W NIMQ3 Wa SLOWS OIQeH 000 GSO Ge4TO0 Occ 336 asa gd SLOWSY OT ZE aT E S3ZIS Ayd LINGH32410 310ND AER x SGOINOMHIJO ed 29 ATH ET ea Qe 3 0W3H a 5 e129 2 5 O ren Z8 LIA e T T 69 ETD St I DINI WHO s MV EIE SIH BTIH 8TH vOTH EN EU CH TH DO WHO 296 SO 114 LTEN STON T 816 9T6Y 2164 OTER T6 2064 er EN EN N HNIT WHO eu LIJ N Tg LST LON Od V TE EX Ted ET STH ST m T m q S L T N 9 O QUO3H AHL3A3J TL DIJNOO OIGUOMH I L NW OIANOD OS H IL IC IAS T S Lac E dS L L a I U E i UD a I Mers dda PT Jdg2z 14e Z S 3 ETSD 2009 lt lt 7 1 a i c lt KZ TD IS Ho dH g j l 7 D E Occ e eg UID IdS HO LBS INS CU 1e ou ele 0 440
93. 15 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can K5 band components C310 R324 and R327 i R338 e L334 L303 gate of Q306 8317 610 S C S C328 8302 0300 lo 20 R326 5 R330 Go pe CO C334 R349 C306 R305 R309 R304 Si GER taf peer 3 Te 5 1 DEL eal leg eat 568 ni 306 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 21 Check the power control circuitry if the clamp current for the PA driver 1s Check Power Control correct or if the voltage at the SET PWR test point 1s incorrect And when entering the CCTM command 304 Z do not Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual specify a value Z higher than that recorded in Task 12 Fail ure to do so may result in the destruction of the PA driver Enter the CCTM command 304 Z where Z was recorded in Task 12 Note the current reading on the DC power supply Enter the CCTM command 114 0 to switch off the power Note the current reading on the DC power supply Compare the above current readings The current should decrease by
94. 1B5 SPARE B7 1B1 D3 G4 Ne R20 C4 1E6 SPARE8 B7 1B1 D4 E4 1E5 1E4 R21 C4 1D6 U1 D5 1J6 D5 F4 ES R22 D3 1B6 Do B2 1E5 1D4 R23 C5 1D6 D C3 1D5 1D4 R24 C5 1C6 504 TMAA01 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 19 4 3 Options Extender Board Layout top side e e a cc 9 G MT4 MTS SER e Se J2 E a IS M6 c 6 ve e 6 e ve ES a irap G9 m Em um mga Cp m i ue Ka E e NI ac e at a 7 e gh aa 3 tera Ent we LT isd esi vci T E CUN mr NIU wo 20 129 m S m e am Ok L S te S LC gt on istai yr ova n LT dd EE Ss i V em z E La a i Y I 2 F P L SK2 19 gt s S JES 2 N S E mms 6 BSSE 28 si i ec ELA mm mm mm wm Emm oO stone cise te FEES SEE Kel g leie elei S ao m Eam qu co e ome Pe ca DIS TT eu Ge ac S D EBS S mme H B SES B Fc E IPN 220 65203 05 19 4 4 Options Extender Board Layout bottom side d o p P5 47 47 47 47 7 lt x lt x ea co a a LU Lu SE LT C I LL LG Y e N
95. 20 Description Skt Coax BNC 3 5mm Pnl N Tag Skt Coax BNC 3 5mm Pnl N Tag Cap Cer Al 1n 10 T C B 50v Cap Cer Al 1n 10 T C B 50v Cap Elec Rdl 100m 16v 6 3x11 Cap Cer Al 1n 10 T C B 50v Plg 15w Drng W Wrap Pnl Mtg Skt 6w Modr Ph Vrt T Ent Res M F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5 2 5w Res M F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5 2 5w Res Hm 4x1 6 12k 5 0 4w Res Hm 4x1 6 560e 5 0 4w Res Hm 4x1 6 2k7 5 0 4w Res Hm 4x1 6 56e 5 0 4w Res Hm 4x1 6 10k 5 0 4w 38 3 2 PCB Layout 4 top side HOLE Ret SW SW2 SW3 SWA SW5 TRAN Parts List PCB IPN 220 01418 02A Rev 4 IPN 230 00010 42 230 00010 57 230 00010 03 230 00010 16 230 00010 03 054 00010 17 Not part of the PCB SPKR 032 31820 01 250 00010 19 Description Sw Tgl On Off On Dpdt Ms500hb Sw Tgl Dpdt On On Pnl Mtg Sw Tgl Spst Mini Pnl Mtg Sw Tgr Spst 3 Pos Pnl Mtg Sw Tgl Spst Mini Pnl Mtg Xfmr Line 600 Ohm 1 1 Res M F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5 2 5w Spkr C W Rubber Sealing Ring SWS SW3 SL UN DIN ENVIE IN H J K L IPN 220 01418 02 NIM L K J H 6 ADL Bici R10 BC we BEI 1 R2 RI SPEAKER SPEAKER F E bottom side 4 TRAN DO tee R TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TOPA SV 024 Test Unit 617 it Diagram Ir
96. 25W 393 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 18 Components of concern on the bottom side of the board CO D1 bands COPPER PLATE VCO BOT CAN 394 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 19 Components of concern on the bottom side of the board A4 B1 H5 H6 bands COPPER PLATE Q602 VCO BOT CAN S C68 HH 160 ENS NB BOT CAN B1 BAND COPPER PLATE R626 Rez Q603 S 0602 VCO BOT CAN S S R381 C358 zs 5 3021 8 sE P L R375 Ire o 3 ale E e at B R396 B Q301 SR B A R340 ALS S Q314 D311 72 8 Tlel gles HE Wa Ig R3000 R373 STD Sisi E nao A4 BAND a H5 H6 BANDS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 395 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 20 Circuitry under the LPF TOP can top side
97. 402 Figure 14 15 Circuit diagram of the volume control circuitry VCC 6 VOLWIP DC CH1U601 DO If the volume control works only intermittently works only at full volume or does not work at all 1 Check that the voltage between pins CW and WIP of the volume control potentiometer RV1 varies linearly between about 0V and 3 3 V RV1 0 to 3 3V If the voltage is not correct replace the potentiometer RV1 2 Send CCTM command 1010 to read the volume potentiometer No volume reading O 1 V Full volume reading 255 3 3V If the signal 1s not correct remove can E100 and replace the analog digital converter U601 If the signal 1s correct replace the speaker 442 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 14 16 PCB layout of the volume control circuitry C501 C603 U503 601 ceol C602 top side bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 443 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 12 PTT Faulty The PTT signal from the microphone connector is connected to the FPGA via a resistor R 25 and relayed to the radio as a digital command Figure 14 17 Circuit diagram of the PTT circuitry Microphone Connector H25 MIC PTT Note This section only describes faults to the PTT caused by the con trol head which has been established during the initi
98. 5 0603 CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP 2n2 50V 1096 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 2n2 50V 1096 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP 2n2 50V 1096 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 1uF 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R TMAAO3 34 Extender Box Ref C47 C49 D1 D2 D3 DA D5 D6 D D8 D9 D10 ET E2 E3 E4 E6 C2 ICE IC7 IC8 LIN K1 LINK2 LINK11 LINK21 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 TMAA03 34 Parts List PCB IPN 220 02180 02 IPN 018 13270 00 018 14100 00 001 10000 99 001 10054 02 001 10000 99 001 10000 99 001 10153 00 001 10084 91 001 10084 91 001 10084 91 001 10084 91 001 10084 91 057 10081 06 057 10047 02 057 10047 02 057 10081 06 057 10047 02 002 10800 00 002 19120 00 002 19120 00 002 19120 00 240 00020 59 240 00020 59 240 04020 62
99. 5eme Kit Ls oie nd uad x 3o aen seadis 349 TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 581 TMAA10 01 Desktop Microphone 589 TMAAI0 02 PEC Lu ages odo d do OR EEE OOS qo doe E 593 TMAA10 03 and TMAA10 06 High Power Remote Speakers 597 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 599 IMAATU 07 Desktop Microphone 24425 e xrku o REOR RE 607 IMAAT10 08 Desktop Microphone vse ssa a o xs 609 TOPA SY 024 Test Us a doe cede reed po aede e de i deed 613 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Preface Scope of Manual This manual contains information to service technicians for carrying out level 1 and level 2 repairs of TM8100 and TM8200 radios and accessories Level 1 repairs entail the replacement of faulty parts and circuit boards level 2 repairs entail the repair of circuit boards with the exception of certain special items on the boards The manual does not cover level 3 repairs which entail the repair of the special 1tems Hardware and Software Versions This manual describes the following hardware and software versions The IPNs internal part numbers of the boards are listed below the last two digits in the IPN represent the issue of the board The board information in this manual covers all production issue boards up to the issue listed below m Main board A4 band 25 W 220 02074 04 m Mam board B1 band 25 W 220 01700 14 m Main bo
100. 7 V off ignition sense Input line must sink 1mA from AUX GPI322 6V high active AUX GPI3 which is pulled to 13 8V by a ignition sense tolerant to 33kQ resistor The impedance between 3 3V 5V and 12V the vehicle ignition signal and ground must be lt 1kQ LK1 out Input line must be active high LK4 out IOP GPIO7 can be used as GPIO internal power sense LK1 out IOP GPIO7 lt 0 7V off LK2 out AUX GPI3 can be used as GPI a high LK4 in With LK4 in the input line must be active ignition sense tolerant to highs 3 3V and 5V only no power sense LK1 out 10 8V lt supply lt 16V LK2 out AUX GPI3 can be used as GPI LK4 out IOP GPIO7 can be used as GPIO a If LK2 is out and AUX GPIO is not used R775 33k should be placed to ensure that AUX GPI3 does not float R775 is not placed by factory default b If LK1 is out and R775 is placed AUX GPI3 should be driven low as well c If LK 4 is in and R723 is placed IOP GPIO7 should be driven low as well R723 is placed by factory default Table 3 3 shows the configuration of emergency power sense Emergency power sense can be configured with any of the above power sense options Table 3 3 Configuration of hardware link LK3 and AUX GPI2 for emergency power sense External push button or toggle switch Links required to enter required emergency mode Implications on AUX GPI2 Voltages required Yes LK3 in AUX GPI2 must be connected to an 0 7V active
101. AS TULISIO AS A P CI e E Cu e lt l NIS l1noeui E NITH INOT 399 ld LON SILNANOdNOD E mus aes e E cgvsu SE n VEN TENOI LdO Ste Auen wf QZT Z 9007 Dei agas YLVA S MR YS BITA GTS l n Z0 E l SCH STEEN 3eagzWag ges E 4 CUUNGLS cic c Se A en Pm 29 D D INGOT S 4 NM TPO E al N T A LED e 79 Sie l AN NOT AT Quo i NAT GED e Ee Aa AC 2k Ib LISIG AS 7 MT 82 A gt as E 2895 E BS A LTH SGH S 2 pd N NC X1 cers TS SN e NS Uu Ot G 2 VA _ 9 L 25M vl 2714 mis f L ING 24S A ING 380 Weg gr c ING S Sar TAGU lt gue en O KRSR weds EET JdglI51d ne 7811910 NS TWLISTIA AS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board 488 18 TMAA01 02 RS 232 Board D range hood parts internal options connector external options connector external options cover seal D range plug RS 232 board installation parts Important To comply with EN 301 489 5 all internal options loom The TMAA01 02 RS 232 board fits inside the radio in the options cavity and is connected to the main PCB by the internal options connector and loom The RS 232 signals are then made available on the 9 way D range connector mounted on the RS 232 board This connector fits through the external options connector hole provided in the radio chassis tion standard once an RS 232 boar
102. CAP eltro 47u 6 3x5 8mm 35V CAP eltro 47u 6 3x5 8mm 35V CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 100n 50V 10 0805 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP tant 100u 10V low ESR D CAP tant 100u 10V low ESR D CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 2u2 35V 20 1210 X5R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 100n 50V 10 0805 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 470p 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 100n 50V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 4U7 16V 10 0805 X7R CAP cer 470n 50V 20 1206 X7R CAP cer 100n 50V 10 0805 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP cer 100n 50V 10 0805 X7R DIODE MBRS140T3 sch DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig D
103. COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OF THE OPEN SOURCE COMPONENT FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THOSE OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF EACH SUCH LICENCE FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE http support taitworld com go opensource Title to Software THIS AGREEMENT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT OF SALE IN RELATION TO THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE SUPPLIED TO THE LICENSEE NOT WITHSTANDING THE LICENSEE MAY OWN THE MAGNETIC OR OTHER PHYSICAL MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE WAS ORIGINALLY SUPPLIED OR HAS SUBSEQUENTLY BEEN RECORDED OR FIXED IT IS A FUNDAMENTAL TERM OF THIS AGREEMENT THAT AT ALL TIMES TITLE AND OWNERSHIP OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE WHETHER ON THE ORIGINAL MEDIA OR OTHERWISE SHALL REMAIN VESTED IN TAIT OR THIRD PARTIES WHO HAVE GRANTED LICENCES TO TAIT Term and Termination THIS LICENCE SHALL BE EFFECTIVE UNTIL TERMINATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE LICENSEE MAY TERMINATE THIS LICENCE AT ANY TIME BY DESTROYING ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE AND ASSOCIATED WRITTEN MATERIALS THIS LICENCE WILL BE TERMINATED AUTOMATICALLY AND WITHOUT NOTICE FROM TAIT IN THE EVENT THAT THE LICENSEE FAILS TO COMPLY WITH ANY TERM OR CONDITION OF THIS AGREEMENT THE LICENSEE AGREES TO DESTROY ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE AND ASSOCIATED WRITTEN MATERIALS IN THE EVENT OF SUCH TERMINATION 619 Limited Warranty THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS IS S
104. Check 3 3V Supply but the radio fails to power up then the 3 3 V DC supply needs to be investigated 1 First determine as follows if a fault on the digital board is affecting the supply or preventing the radio from powering up While keeping the ON OFF key depressed measure the supply at the 3V3 test point near the corner of the digital board see Figure 7 2 The voltage is 3 3 V when there is no fault 3V3 test point 3 3 0 1 V DC If the voltage is correct the digital board is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the voltage is not correct go to Step 2 172 Power Supply Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply at the power connector Remove R199 see Figure 7 1 Reconnect the 13 8V supply 3 With the probe of the multimeter on the 3V3 test point press the ON OFF key If the voltage is now 3 3 0 1 V the digital board is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the voltage is still not correct go to Step 4 4 If the digital board is functional the fault is on the main board Replace R199 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply Use the multimeter to measure the resistance between the 3V3 test point and ground If there is a short circuit continue with Step 5 If there is no short circuit but the voltage is wrong go to Step 7 5 Search for shorts to ground in the components C603 C612 C613
105. E COD LNOTANYTIIN rear E mmm Hf 6 C E OC Q YW D Z N Eg A 4 9 et H g CL m O SE S m Do er M Leu 7 sem Bc ES OE3T U T pee z S Fei T 5 T i Ge angat STI oon ST Pop die g SINdLNO c ES kal la l ZN ZN 2 ON9G sik 8 HT HT 2 oO Letz GTX vl O HP Q TEA ENE Ej M O M Bae Ji SCH OAT OI CO SG MS 8 E T4 JIW acu Ta J O 3H LH S JNOOGT aeons JNOEE S 49n ME CETA 1 72 Ge T 2 l MIO IdS HO C ZX T ZN 1747ENE P Sd k m mmm Q JO d b LLJ ENe ENE NZI ov E DN ELI M2 894 gt G c ue TO 1 ont z T JNOEE STA a 2 5 ken ST QAITOI vo E B BEEN Set MEE OAT Sp mE OLD Z eeaov D ino dnb OIM rl D OM M89 S HOT D ET ec c O gt Ly 174 enet U Meeneg ZX V Meeneg ost NT UIT DIW D cr St _ s ENE MS BNET ENE q N 9 J 2S e J E p C 9 TMAAO2 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones 517 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 518 TMAAO2 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 22 TMAAO02 07 Concealed Microphone The TMAAO02 07 concealed microphone is installed inside the speaker grille of the graphical display control head If the radio is placed 1n emergency mode the concealed microphone can be used to monitor activity around the radio concealed microphone capsul
106. E108 J100 RIO N f e NP A D105 a D IE eve S le C104 C108 T Si R103 Q2 R102 ZO 20 el rae e mo RS VN uU f z eS Z c 2 D102 mari c A K r MJiO285 E a s ON M gt R105 J101 R122 DI m A Ej Ze 3E ma B C117 wat TIF E sie SES e see dm BI WM ILE 7 uu y D N y S IPN 220 02122 02 i N AA J E e ze T N TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 ircuit Diagram C Z C T JO T cereo ace a e 21 nat o CD4HO2 NMge SINSWONSWY SSI N23 SAWN L23H5 AUN d d GEE ra cr 9d CH S 3a TW 77g S TT9 2 9Z7Z WO4 CJ NYHI YT GOZ ET ST ET OD JEW BNL 3 c CASE SHGELON LNOTIUEN 3NSS NdI f N E J N J L ER G L D ICSI Gd TE TTT QTTO A 2 b e COTA GE Sees NN is es em GE x001 x21 S QT ey c BOTH tclH S TA S T SE CT WAS TS Has SE SEI EZ eds H2 QAT Y dS e s T EISE
107. Et recy lt D VCO BOT can eeu TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W 312 Task 24 In this task any faults 1n the power control circuitry will be located Power Control E TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC303 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 in the power control circuit The voltage should be pin 8 of IC303 7 4 0 5V If the voltage is correct go to Step 3 If it is not enter the CCTM command 32 and return to Task 23 Measure the voltage at pin 10 of IC303 in the power control circuit The voltage should be pin 10 of IC303 4 8 0 5V If the voltage is correct go to Step 5 If it is not go to Task 25 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Check C322 C324 R342 R347 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 and R396 see Figure 11 17 and Figure 11 18 in the power control circuit Repair any fault Replace IC303 if none of the other components is faulty Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 313 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 25 In this task any faults in the shaping filter circuitry will be located Shaping Filter 1 With the radio still in transmit mode measure the voltage at pin 1 of IC301 see Fig
108. F8 2 G5 2 B1 C26 F5 1 H3 R16A A7 2 E8 2 61 C27 G4 1 63 R16 E8 2 F5 SK2 B3 1 61 C28 F4 1 H4 R17 E8 2 F5 1 H1 C29 E5 1 A12 R18 F 1 E6 1 D1 C30 D6 1 A11 R19 F EDS 1 G1 C31 C1 1 313 R20 D6 1 D4 1 F1 G32 C1 1 H13 R21 C4 1 D2 1 K1 C33 B1 2 G8 R22 D1 2 B8 C35 D5 1 J9 R23 D7 1 B8 T1 D4 1 J11 C37 E8 2 E3 R24 C3 1 G2 T2 C4 1 H11 C38 D8 2 E3 R25 F5 1 E9 TP1 B4 1 D2 C39 E8 2 E3 R26 EZ 1 G9 TP2 B3 1 F2 C40 E8 2 E4 R27 D7 1 B9 TP3 B4 1 D2 C41 D8 2 E4 R28 E7 1 B9 TP4 B3 1 G2 R29 E 1 B10 TP5 D2 1 E13 D1 E1 1 C11 R30 E3 1 F9 TP6 C2 1 G12 D2 D2 1 F12 R31 D2 1 G11 TP7 C2 1 D13 1 G12 R32 D7 1 B10 D4 D6 1 C10 R34 F3 1 D9 U1 E7 1265 1 B10 R35 C2 1 D12 1 E6 D5 B3 1 J12 R36 E2 1 E11 1 B9 D6 C2 1 K12 R37 D6 1 B11 1 A11 D7 C3 1 J12 R38 E3 1 K4 Ke D8 G5 1 H4 R39 E4 1 K7 U2 E8 2 63 D9 B2 1 H12 R40 E4 1 K8 U3 F5 1 G6 D10 D2 1 E12 R41 D4 1 J8 1 G7 D11 C2 1 D12 R43A A7 2 E9 1 F2 D12 B5 2 A3 R43 C8 2 C4 1 B6 R44 C8 2 B4 1 C10 E1 C2 2 C6 R45 C4 1 H10 1 A9 E2 D2 2 C6 R46 E8 252 U4 E5 1 B6 E3 C1 ZCI R47A A7 2 E9 1 A10 E4 D1 2 C7 R47 C8 2 C4 1 E8 R48 F5 1 H3 1 F3 FL1 D2 2 G6 R49 E5 1 H3 U5 E3 1 J7 FL2 D2 2 F6 R50 F4 1 G3 U6 D5 1 A8 FL3 D1 2 67 R51 F5 1 43 1 C10 FLA D1 2 F7 R52 D2 1 D12 1 B11 FL5 E3 1 K11 R53 C3 1 H11 1 B7 FL6 D3 111 R54 D3 111 1 D3 FLY C3 1 J11 R55 F8 2 F3 U7 E4 1 H3 FL8 C3 1 H11 R56 E3 1 F10 1 J3 FL9 C1 1 D13 R57 F9 2 F2 1 A12 1 G13 RV1 E7 1 E5 U8 B5 2 A3 1 E13 RV2 F2 1 K3 U9 D8 2 E3 RV3 FA 1 H5 U10 C8 2 C3 MT1 B9 2 A5 MT2 G9 2 A6 W1 C7 1 E4
109. Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 9 If the RF output power and the supply current are skewed the output Power and Current Are Skewed 1 2 matching 1s suspect Remove the DIRC TOP can Remove the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 or C350 only for K5 see Figure 11 6 UHF shown and Figure 11 7 K5 band Solder one terminal of a 1000pF VHF 82pF UHF or 47pF K5 band test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 11 6 and Figure 11 7 Mount the capacitor vertically Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111 DLI C17 ATC100B or equivalent Solder a 50Q test lead to the PCB Solder the outer sheath to the test pad shown in Figure 11 6 and Figure 11 7 and solder the central wire to the other terminal of the test capacitor Connect the test lead to the test set Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio s frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 11 2 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Note the RF output power measured by the test set and note the current reading on the DC power supply RF output power gt 70W VHF gt 60W UHF gt 52W 700 MHz gt 58W 800 MHz current 15A VHF 12A UHF 12A 800 MHz G 10 11 12 E 14 TM8
110. Fault Finding 409 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 8 First generate an appropriate audio test signal and check whether the signal Check Signal from CODEC 1 10 is present at the output of the CODEC circuitry Enter the CCTM command 400 x where Xis a valid channel number A suitable channel will depend on the programming of the radio Enter the CCTM command 21 to force unmuting of the received audio signal Enter the CCTM command 110 128 to set the audio level at its midpoint At the test set apply 60 1 kHz modulation to the RF signal Reduce the volume to a minimum Enter the CCTM command 324 r5 Check that the received signal 1s present at pin 2 AUD TAP OUT of the internal options connector SK102 see Figure 13 5 alternatively the measurement point for CDC AUD TAP OUT shown in Figure 13 4 The signal should be pin 2 of internal options connector received signal with 2 4V DC offset If the above signal is correct go to Step 8 If it is not go to Task 9 Check the components in the path from pin 13 of the auxiliary connector SK101 to the CODEC and audio circuitry These are C719 and L708 see Figure 13 6 and the link R747 see Figure 13 5 Also check the auxiliary connector itself Repair any fault Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 10 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If there is also a
111. Finding 185 ID See Pub PIBOBIE Lu ot oh bh aoo e EEN PR de et 247 11 Transmitter Fanit Pneus 267 12 Transmitter Fault Finding 25 W serere ENEE E EE EE Res 341 Lo CODEC and Audio Pault FIndink cad ra REO RR Es 399 14 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 423 15 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display 447 iD BEN EP 2362 EE tonne dote ado deo 8 41 dot 455 Part C KEEN uuo dog 9 Raw w odo eR War c o e eda iom e 6 N 465 1 TMAABDIAM Line dntence DOS uuu aud acd dex do c ee d 469 18 DLNLAAUI DS R5 232 Board ea adem dea ee Rene s 489 19 TMAA01 05 and TMAAO01 07 Options Extender Boards 497 20 IMAAD2 02 DTMF Microphon cx GR AEN AA be bebe 507 21 TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed amp Dynamic Microphones 511 22 TMAARO02 07 Concealed Microphone 264 A d ue s wk Che 519 23 TMAAO02 08 Keypad Microphone 521 24 TMAA03 02 Security Bracket 455a pores Ea ORG o e 525 ec kale a EE ils i ee hs duae da aha bees rd Rr ra 529 26 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 545 27 IMAA0S 31 Control Head Interface Box 252422 k nh des 561 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 3 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 28 29 30 31 22 33 34 35 36 37 38 TMAAO03 34 Extender Box 567 TMAA04 04 Crossband Linking Cable 573 TMAAU4 05 lpninon
112. H5 H6 25 W MMA 00033 xx MMA 00069 xx MMA 00020 xx MMA 00021 xx MMA 00035 xx MMA 00036 xx MMA 00015 xx MMA 00058 xx MMA 00034 xx MMA 00037 xx board IPN 220 01697 05 TM8100 TM8200 Main Board H5 H6 25W boards after IPN 220 01697 05 TM8100 TM8200 Main Board K5 30 35 W TM8100 TM8200 Main Board B1 50W TM8100 TM8200 Main Board G2 H5 H7 40W TM8100 Control Head Board 2 Digit Display TM8100 Control Head Board 1 Digit Display TM8200 Control head Board Graphical Display TM8200 Control Head Board 3 Digit Display TM8200 Control Head Board RJ45 TM8100 TM8200 PCB Information printed pre punched and shrink wrapped comprises the latest releases of MMA 00015 xx MMA 00016 xx MMA 00020 xx MMA 00021 xx MMA 00031 xx MMA 00032 xx MMA 00033 xx MMA 00034 xx MMA 00035 xx MMA 00050 xx MMA 00058 xx MMA 00069 xx The characters XX represent the issue number of the documentation All available documentation 1s provided on the TM8100 TM8200 Service CD product code TMAA20 01 Updates may also be published on the Tait support website TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3DK Manuals The following manuals are mainly of concern to third party developers The manuals are supplied on the 3DK third party developer kit resource CD m MMA 00011 xx TM8100 TM8200 3DK Hardware Developers Kit Application Manual m MMA 00014 xx TMAA30 02 TM8000 3DK Application Board Software Programmer s
113. IC201 pins 5 to 7 and fed via R207 and R208 to drive the CDC AUD TAP OUT interface line The DC bias for this signal path is provided by IC204 and is approximately 1 2V when operational The offset at CDC AUD TAP OUT is approximately 2 4V owing to the gain of the buffer amplifier 84 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 6 Power Supply Circuitry Introduction Supply Protection Supervisory Circuit Internal Power Supplies Control of Internal Power Supplies Power Sense Options For a block diagram of the power supply circuitry refer to Figure 3 9 The power supply circuitry consists of the following main sections m supply protection M supervisory circuit m internal power supplies m control of internal power supplies m control of external power supply Electrical protection to the radio is provided by the clamping diode D600 and by 20A fuses for 225 W radios and 10 A fuses for 25 W radios in the positive and negative leads of the power cable This provides protection from reverse voltages positive transients greater than 30V and all negative transients An ADC monitors the supply and is responsible for the protection of internal devices which have an operating voltage of less than 30 V The ADC also ensures protection if the radio operates outside its specified voltage range of 10 8 V to 16V The supervisory circuit comprises a reset and watchdog timer
114. IC204 is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check the voltage at pin 1 of IC201 see Figure 13 7 pin 1 of IC201 1 2V If the voltage is correct go to Step 6 If itis not check the LPF circuit based on IC201 pins 1 to 3 see Figure 13 7 Repair any fault and conclude with Step 9 Check the voltage at pin 7 of IC201 see Figure 13 7 pin 7 of IC201 2 4V If the voltage is correct go to Step 8 If it is not check the buffer amplifier based on IC201 pins 5 to 7 see Figure 13 7 Repair any fault and conclude with Step 9 Check R207 and R208 see Figure 13 7 Repair any fault and conclude with Step 9 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 10 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If there is also a fault with the transmit modulation notwithstanding modulation at the auxiliary connector go to Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector on page 420 If there is no other fault go to Final Tasks on page 163 412 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 7 Circuitry under the CDC BOT can CAN FOR DIGITAL BOARD JUNCTION OF R224 AND 1C204 LO2 BOT CAN R221 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electroni
115. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 406 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 4 Circuitry under the CDC BOT can CDC AUD TAP OUT JUNCTION OF R218 AND IC204 LO2 BOT CAN CAN FOR DIGITAL BOARD TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 407 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 7 If the output of the voice band CODEC is not correct check the Check ITF RXBEEPIN ITF RX BEEP IN signal Input Signal 1 If not already done remove the CDC BOT can 2 Check the signal at the junction of R218 and IC204 see Figure 13 4 The signal should be junction of R218 and IC204 sine wave about 1 Vp with 1 2V DC offset 3 If the signal 1s correct go to Step 4 If it is not either CODEC 1 IC204 or the digital board 1s faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 4 Check for continuity between the TP200 test point and IC204 via R214 R215 see Figure 13 2 and R218 see Figure 13 4 Repair any fault if necessary replace R214 R215 or R218 5 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 162 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found repla
116. If the thermal paste on the heat transfer block or the tin plated cooper plate of the main board V has been contaminated new thermal paste must be applied m Remove any residue of the old thermal paste from both contact surfaces m Use Dow Corning 340 silicone heat sink compound IPN 937 00000 55 remain embedded in the paste The paste needs to be C Important Ensure that no bristles from the brush come loose and completely free of contaminants m Use a stiff brush to apply 0 1 cm of thermal paste over the complete contact surface on the tin plated copper plate refer to Figure 5 6 on page 143 Place the main board 2 in position on the heat transfer block and push them together to spread the thermal paste that the main board and the connectors are not assembled C Important You must observe the following order of assembly to ensure under stress 6 Use a torque driver with a 3 16 inch 5mm socket to fasten the D range screwlock fasteners D to 81b in 0 9 Nm rA Fit the RF connector lock washer Use a torque driver with a 9 16 inch 14mm long reach socket to fasten the RF connector nut to 151b in 1 7 N m 8 Use a torque driver with a Torx T10 bit to fasten the three screws to 15lb in 1 7N m ek Loosen both the D range screwlock fasteners and the RF connector nut f 10 Re tighten both the D range screwlock fasteners D and the RF connector nut DD to the torques indicated in steps
117. In this task any faults in the path between the power control circuit and the SE Control PA driver will be located as well as any fault with the PA driver or PA Driver m Check for short circuits at the gate of the PA driver Q306 Check R333 R336 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 C310 R324 and R327 see Figure 11 13 to Figure 11 15 between the power con trol circuit and Q306 2 Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 1 If none of the above mentioned components is faulty replace Q306 see Figure 11 13 to Figure 11 15 3 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Figure 11 17 Components of concern on the bottom side of the main board VHF COPPER PLATE VCO BOT CAN R3091 C392 R303 NB BOT CAN D TX INH TEST POINT 310 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 18 Components of concern on the bottom side of the main board UHF COPPER PLATE VCO BOT CAN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 311 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 19 Components of concern on the bottom side of the main board K5 band copper plate S TH DECH Foogy EN 000 S o pE ELEM en de Er i BLEN T as CO Ex tee E ia Cy E Di CO S s B S Senn e E SECH
118. Indications isa ceded bess ME AE R LLL E 132 5 Disassembly and Reassembly 135 5 1 Removing and Mounting the Control Head 136 5 2 Disassembling the Radio Body 137 2 9 Re easembbne the Radio BOO AA d 0s edad ee RR ER EE AS REA 143 5 4 Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head 147 6 Servicing Procedures x lt s d dw ox doe Ewe Se Re ORO OH de dde d 155 IEEE we H rrr 153 Eus SUR DE cua oce doloe rd ies darTRGPNGSC SES ee ea ES 163 7 Power Supply Fault Finding 169 B Interlace Fault Pies lt uic uw ce ENEE RE COGOR RC K 179 9 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 185 or Se d PT 186 hoe e Be ie i oad M CUR M A 189 ES ee LUPA 279133 43 40 4 9 44 29 eR ROO OE ee a ERROR eee 198 CMS od o cL 204 25 REKerewe VCO and Related Circuitry UHF Radios n o d 209 9 6 Transmit VCO and Related Circuitry UHF and 800MHz Radios 218 9 7 VCO and Related Circuitry VHF Radios 2 wd nda goa 224 Boa ee e 2 qutd qiiod di aie cee odio oe aita p d 234 LS VLAL amd TL CFO us dossiers stat EES CR Re 237 210 RE NR e gud LPS uou xard dep dedo EE EENEG 240 l TL er mda CODEC ET Le qoae ROC d de dete ho d 244 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 103 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 104 10 Receiver Fault Faute 4 2 aco e EE RO EKER RS D 247 dek ode Fee Beli VIEN Lose hor eke ERA eee E RR RARO EE d 248 HZ Escesive Loss OF Senuti vi
119. K a a K a L Head optional Head e Connector Options K ag UL MIC AUD OUT H DGND AGND MIC s Control Head Board Soldering Rm Res Concealed lt 7 SU E Microphone VOL WIP DC VOL WIP DC optional gt Volume BEEN Control AGND EVA not implemented _ 13V8 SW CH ON OFF gt Contact made REO when key a 13V8 SW ressed On Off Key SUDORE DGND 85 DGND L LINK Contact made Qum pasti CH SPI DI CH SPI DI Keys e amp Lost 700 ad nies CH SPICK L Contact made Key Drivers 3V3 3V3 eps when key n d i pressed DGND Keys T E c50 5 S S R53 MA SPK SPK l Speaker Leads Speaker a SS Connector lt Speaker 100 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Serial Peripheral Interface Data Input and Output LCD Driver Volume Control The control head board uses an SPI serial peripheral interface to control the display on the LCD turn back lighting on and off control the STATUS LEDs and read the status of the keys The interface consists of the following four lines at the control head connector m pin 11 data out CH SPI DO m pin 12 latch line CH LE m pin 15 data in CH SPI DI m pin 16 clock CH SPI CLK Data that are input to the control head are clocked through the LCD driver and daisy chained to a shift register Once all the data have been clocked in the latch line is driven low
120. K4 F6 C421 L3 G6 E102 K4 F3 R600 L2 B1 C422 K3 F7 E103 K4 E4 R601 L2 B2 C423 K3 F7 E105 H5 F2 R602 L1 C1 C430 M2 G9 E710 F2 D7 R603 L2 C1 C500 L4 F6 E 11 E2 D7 R604 L2 B1 C600 L2 C3 E730 E4 B8 R605 L2 B3 C601 L2 B2 E731 G4 B8 R606 M2 B3 C610 K1 C5 R607 M2 B3 C611 K1 C4 J100 H4 E1 R608 M2 B3 C612 J2 C5 J200 P3 E10 R609 M2 B4 C700 F2 C6 J201 B4 C10 R610 J2 B5 C701 G3 C7 R611 K1 C4 C702 E3 C7 L712 D2 D8 R612 K1 D4 C703 E2 C6 L730 E4 B9 R701 E3 B6 C704 G2 C6 L731 G4 B9 R710 F2 D6 C705 F2 B6 R720 F1 D1 C706 E3 B6 MT800 D3 B5 R721 F1 D2 C707 E2 B6 MT801 M3 B5 R722 G1 D2 C708 G2 A6 R730 E3 B7 C710 E2 D6 Q610 K1 D4 R731 G3 A7 C711 F2 D7 Q720 F1 D2 C712 E2 D7 Q721 G2 D3 U300 P5 G3 C720 F D2 U310 N2 G4 C721 G1 D2 R100 12 F2 U400 L3 F6 C730 E3 B8 R110 L4 F3 G7 C731 G3 A8 R200 N4 F8 1G9 C732 F4 B9 R201 R3 E8 U500 L4 F C733 G4 B9 R202 R2 E8 U600 L2 B2 C734 F4 B10 R203 J5 E1 U610 K2 B4 C735 F4 B9 R210 C3 D9 U700 F3 B7 R211 B3 C9 D100 K3 F4 R212 B4 C9 E4 R213 J5 D1 D101 K4 E4 R320 N4 E8 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 555 Board Layout e 1 To Ka e Tozy 2028 00cf U300 d e N M O 556
121. LE TE a amp p o SE 88 C CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 405 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 6 If the output of the voice band CODEC is correct but the signal level does Check ITF VOL WIP DC Input Signal 1 not vary as the volume control is varied check the ITF VOL WIP DC signal Check the voltage on the VOL WIP DC line at the junction of R708 and C706 see Figure 13 3 As the volume varies the voltage should vary as follows junction of R708 and C706 0 0 to 1 2V as volume varies If the voltage varies as expected go to Step 5 If it does not go to Step 3 Check the control head connector SK100 Repair or replace the connector if necessary Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Remove the CDC TOP can Check the voltage at the junction of R234 and R235 see Figure 13 3 As the volume varies the voltage should vary as follows junction of R234 and R235 0 0 to 0 6V as volume varies If the voltage varies as expected CODEC 1 C204 is suspect replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it does not go to Step 8 Check for continuity across R234 and check that R235 is properly soldered see Figure 13 3 Repair any fault Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163
122. Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 5 Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter RF power INIOd 1S3 L uMd Add dMd Add XL dalalldNv ana ual 9NIdVHS 119 HMd XL 909 YSIHS AU UO Olanv any eSVvI8 Nila XL 909 13441 INY 94009 H3dVHS LAS LSAL Ol avq d3 ld4lHS LSVI NIJ XL 9dO 13431 aNy dddVHS TOYULNOO dalalldNvV LIN SVIg HOA ddaddna V V V H31dnoo JYNOIL Sur O lt lt YOLOAN NOO 20 43112934 INIOd 1S3 L HAM AM4 Svid Add XL 909 HOLIMS Nid H3zis 3H1NAS f ADNINO a TVLIOId T 3uJ c NJ NAS 51d HNI XL HNI XL Sg MOOT DOIVNY bn INIOd LSSL 14S La OL HNI XL d O RER Ju SAdALTVNOIS 351 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 4 Check Forward and Reverse Powers 352 1 10 11 First check the forward and reverse powers for an indication of which part of the circuitry is suspect Enter the CCTM command 326 4 to set the transmitter power level high Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 318 to check the forward power The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the power level and should be as shown in Table 12 3 Confirm the above result by checking the level at the FWD PWR test point see Figure 12 4
123. Manual If the voltages are correct go to Step 7 If they are not check the transmit buffer circuitry based on IC506 see Figure 9 11 If this repairs the fault conclude with Step 14 Remove the VCO BOT can Check the VCO buffer amplifier in recetve mode Enter the CCTM command 339 1 to set the transmit receive switch off Measure the voltage at the base of Q510 see Figure 9 12 base of Q510 OV DC receive mode Check the VCO buffer amplifier in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on Measure the voltage at the base of Q510 base of Q510 0 7 0 1V DC transmit mode If the voltages are correct the transmit VCO is suspect Go to Step 13 If they are not check the VCO buffer circuitry based on Q510 see Figure 9 12 If this repairs the fault conclude with Step 14 Check the transmit VCO circuitry based on Q509 see Figure 9 11 Conclude with Step 14 If a fault is found repair the circuit and confirm that the voltages are now correct If they are go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 223 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 7 VCO and Related Circuitry VHF Radios Introduction If there is no fault with the power supplies the PLL inputs and output and the loop filter check the VCO and related circuitry The procedu
124. NO S rr 4 ON e S ENE _ __ 8 NE uc v m CONS PEE ka TIOIdO HO Uda t TOIdO H2 S8vSsa e en e a CO d H2 SI EH ogres U 2 Cnm a J e m aiana oruL DC El o 0d IdS HO ES e AA e HAT 2 O Ids HO QAN T ee es CNS o x dg ANN A A OU dIM J0n v P g uM DI SK OR lf SE 2 a et e e 9 e 440 O HD GH 8 6 NO POPE c OI ll serre orano xa e Ux 2 yd e e 7 g UNO SIN 5 u Lajos ang DIN Ho dH G ip Ld D EEN ETE Lid HO M b e e AN s QU JH OL Tx Re axl D n caca mE SEI e ans xa ENE ENE T di TL Si A FAN ZX d 98s TTS Gl rao LN CON E e L lt _ x9 oe A 1 p EZH S gt 2 a JNG T mer BEEN BOT ANT 6 EUIS TS S ING n ANA e pas R Tee ETO cH 29 S T 8 S 4 e VV T NZ on N tY e Qro v E mom c Bechet ET a L3M20S GHIH 2d L A ifs SA Ss A MS 8ng T ING JNOGT JNOGGOT YZZ dNOGOT a H MW e MW C te BTS Te eT STa 2 TO g TS gt E ASS S AC ZEN Pa J d ace lt ale lt lt ANAA ae ste le Dir BM azas A ANL E gees p co JN T 2159 e NA o TOTO TH OMNI C c o T8 amp e T R EE 4 e e e e Ld SUIH 0d IGDO UNS Me SE T fr N TM81
125. On this falling edge all the outputs LEDs and LCD segments are driven to their new state When the latch line is driven high the state of each key is latched into another shift register The data are then clocked out back to the radio body so that the radio can respond accordingly An oscillator is used to run the LCD It oscillates at about 60 Hz and employs a Schmitt trigger and D flip flop to ensure a 50 duty cycle to the LCD A reset circuit is required because the reset from the main board is not routed to the control head The reset circuit also employs a Schmitt trigger The volume control potentiometer is linear and passes the DC voltage signal VOL WIP DC to the radio body The signal is read by an ADC on the main board and the volume is adjusted accordingly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 101 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 11 RJ45 Control Head Introduction This section describes the circuitry of the control head board for the RJ45 control head User Interface The control head board includes a POWER ON OFF LED which indicates whether the radio is switched on or off Connectors The control head board includes the circuitry for the following connectors m programming connector RJ45 socket m control head connector 18 way MicroMaTch socket For pinouts of the connectors refer to Connectors on page 38 Basic Circuitry The signals of the control head connector are directly connected t
126. PCB 3 Remove the control head interface loom not illustrated Figure 25 5 Parts of the control head interface Description IPN D 3 x 8 PT screw x5 346 10030 XX 2 control head interface PCB 3 control head interface 316 06842 XX control head interface loom 219 0291 4 00 Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing a Remote Kit 537 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 4 PCB Information 25 4 1 Parts List Ref IPN C101 015 06470 01 C102 018 16100 00 C103 015 07220 08 C104 015 07220 08 C105 015 26220 18 C106 018 14470 00 C107 015 23270 05 C108 015 23270 05 C109 018 14470 00 C110 015 23270 05 C111 015 23270 05 C112 015 07220 08 C113 018 14470 00 C114 018 16100 00 C115 018 16100 00 C116 015 07220 08 C117 015 07470 20 D101 001 10000 99 D102 001 10000 99 D103 001 10153 00 D104 001 00010 47 D105 001 10000 99 D106 001 10000 99 D107 001 10084 33 E101 057 10020 02 E102 057 10020 02 E103 057 10600 05 E104 057 10600 05 E105 057 10020 02 E106 057 10020 02 E107 057 10020 02 E108 057 10600 05 E109 057 10600 05 F101 265 10150 00 J100 240 00016 00 J101 240 10000 11 Q101 000 10084 73 R101 038 10000 00 R102 036 03100 10 R103 036 03100 10 R104 038 13100 10 R105 038 15100 10 R106 038 14220 00 R107 038 15100 10 538 Description Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20 50v Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v
127. PTT 98 Circuit Descriptions A 3 3V regulator U1 converts the switched 13 8V supply from the radio body to 3 3V A 1 5V regulator U203 converts the 3 3V to 1 5 V A power sense module U202 verifies the outputs of the voltage regulators and in the case of a fault creates a power reset signal which is processed by the FPGA The voltage level of the volume control potentiometer is converted to a digital signal by an analog digital converter U601 processed by the FPGA and transmitted to the radio body The eight keys of the main keypad function scroll and selection keys are connected to the FPGA by an array of 3 columns and 3 rows During idle operation the KEY ROW signals are driven low by the FPGA and the KEY COL signals pulled high by an external resistor are monitored for activity by the FPGA A key press will generate a high to low transition on the associated column KEY COL signal This in turn will initiate a sequence of high output levels on the KEY ROW signals to identify which key was pressed The LCD module is connected to the control head board via the LCD connector The LCD module display 1s controlled by a serial data link to the FPGA The backlighting and the optional heating element incorporated in the LCD module are controlled by a data line each from the FPGA which switch two transistors on MOSFET Q102 A temperature signal from the LCD module is converted to a digital signal by an analog digital converter
128. PTT the PTT line is pulled to ground 38 2 5 Speaker Radio Load Switch This 3 way toggle switch is used during receive audio tests to switch the audio to the test unit speaker Speaker to the radio s internal speaker Radio or to a dummy load consisting of R1 and R2 Load Note This switch does not disconnect the radio s internal speaker on mobiles If the switch is set to Speaker or Load this simulates an external speaker being connected in parallel to the radios internal speaker With all settings a low level audio signal is available for testing through the SINAD port Portable m When set to Speaker only the speaker of the test unit is active m When set to Radio only the speaker of the portable is active m When set to Load no speaker is active The audio signal is terminated in the test unit dummy load Mobile m When set to Speaker the speakers of the test unit and the mobile are both active The speaker of the mobile cannot be disconnected m When set to Radio only the speaker of the mobile is active m When set to Load the speaker of the mobile remains active 616 TOPA SV 024 Test Unit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 38 3 PCB Information 38 3 1 Ret IPN BNC1 240 02100 11 240 02100 11 011 54100 01 011 54100 01 020 59100 06 011 54100 01 240 00010 55 240 0402 1 60 032 31820 01 032 31820 01 030 55120 20 030 53560 20 030 54270 20 030 52560 20 030 55100
129. Power DSP one Supply FPGA CLOCK A 1V5 1V5 Regulator 3V3 1V8 1V8 1V8 F1 Kj l Regulator PSU SYS RST DIG RX EN Signal Types X FPGA JTAG Signals DSP JTAG Signals gt RF z lt JTAG FPGA TCK lt e JTAG DSP TCK L JTAG DSP TRST lt q1 JTAG FPGA TMS 1L JTAG DSP TMS lt gt DSP JTAG EMUO gt analog amp gt FPGA JTAG TDO gt DSP JTAG TDO lt gt DSP JTAG EMU1 lt JTAG FPGA TDI lt JTAG DSP TDI gt digital Erie gt asynchronous serial data Factory Connector AGND gt synchronous serial data SUA 94 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 14 Block diagram of the digital board TM8100 radios DGND D E DIG TX INH DIG EE CS bi i EE DIG SPI DI 7 Serial EEPROM AGND A A A I DIG SYN EN I DIG CH SPI CLK GRRE eee gt SYN LOCK DIG CH SPI DO dE De cH spi p r DIG CH LE M a D 4 DIG SYN TR SW p mrcuenn Fre DIG SYN FAST pic CH GPO1 quency DIG SYN LATCH I arcum i den SYN DIG FREF y TF CH HOOK ITF ON OFE J mp GPio1 7 lt I DIGSYNSPIDO 7 EN L a e a LLL LLL coL A A A A A DIGIOPDD gt DE SANS D MEME 0 0 0000 0002 2255
130. Q306 confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not go to Task 23 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 303 Figure 11 13 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can VHF I ca ari PAD TOP C100 C318 C325 R343 bon am COMPONENTS C310 R324 AND R327 GATE OF Q306 El R3521 5517 3522 A3 Co en n D Get CA Cn k P GY jw SI Kn C3510 EN L3502 R3508 R3509 B 304 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 14 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can UHF COMPONENTS C310 R324 AND R327 GATE OF Q306 E mS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 305 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11
131. Q508 pins 3 4 5 and the 5V and transmit receive switches based on Q506 Q507 and Q508 pins 1 2 6 see Figure 9 2 Replace any suspect transistor Conclude with Step 6 For VHF radios check for faults in the C multiplier and 5 V switch based on Q508 and Q5004 see Figure 9 2 Remove the SYN TOP can A4 band only and VCO BOT can and check the transmit receive switch based on Q5002 and Q5003 see Figure 9 5 Replace any suspect transistor Conclude with Step 6 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 195 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 5 Transmit receive switch components VHF bands 25W versions shown
132. RF power In the fifth case the transmitter will be operating normally Fault Diagnosis The procedures for diagnosing the above faults are given below in the Procedures following sections In each case however first carry out the tasks of Power Supplies on page 400 Also note that the conditions concerning the auxiliary connector can both occur at the same time In this case carry out both No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector on page 409 and Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector on page 420 CCTM Commands The CCTM commands required in this section are listed in Table 13 1 Full details of the commands are given in Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM on page 123 Table 13 1 CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the CODEC and audio circuitry Set level x in range 0 to 255 of audio volume TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 399 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 13 1 Power Supplies Introduction First check that a power supply is not the cause of the fault Of these supplies the 3 3 V DC supply 3V3 will already have been checked in Power Supply Fault Finding on page 169 The remaining supplies that need to be checked are m Task 1 9V DC supply from 9V regulator 9V0 m Task 2 32V DC supply from 3V regulator 3VO AN m Task 3 2 5V DC supply from 2 5V regulator 2V5 CDC Two other supplies used in the CODEC and audio circuitry are a 1 8 V DC sup
133. RS485 A RM RS485 A p Su AGND DGND SIGNAL TYPES 4 gt ANALOGUE DIGITAL ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL DATA TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing a Remote Kit 535 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 3 Servicing the Remote Kit Parts 25 3 1 Disassembling the Torso Interface Disassemble only as much as is necessary to replace the defective parts Re assembly is carried out in reverse order of disassembly 1 Remove the remote cable from the RJ45 connector 2 Release the clips of the PCB bracket and remove the control head board CD 3 Disconnect the torso interface loom 4 Unscrew the four PT type screws O and remove the PCB bracket Figure 25 4 Parts of the torso interface Description IPN D control head board 2 torso interface loom 2 19 02882 00 3 x 8 PT screw x4 346 10030 XX8 4 PCB bracket 302 10063 XX2 5 front panel 316 06843 XX 6 label 365 01751 XX2 D RJ45 bung 302 50002 XX 4 Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN 536 Installing a Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 3 2 Disassembling the Control Head Interface Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts or to swap the Micromatch connector loom Re assembly is carried out in reverse order of disassembly 1 Remove the remote cable from the RJ45 connector 2 Unscrew the seven PT type screws D and remove the
134. Settings gt Function settings Function Settings VOX Sensitivity Back Select 2 In the VOX Sensitivity menu use the scroll keys use scroll js d k T A or to adjust the VOX sensitivity to the perdi desired level GE TS Done J 3 Press Done to save this setting 35 2 Installation Important Care should be taken to avoid routing any cables near vehi cle pedal controls steering column and other moving parts Installing the k Choose one of the three mounting options provided for the remote Remote microphone and determine its most appropriate location Microphone The mounting position of the microphone should be no more than 50cm 20 inches from the users mouth 2 Route the remote microphone cable so as not to distract the driver 3 Mount the remote microphone in the chosen location and check that the microphone and cable are clear of all the usual movements performed by the user Remote PTT driving position Installing the Important The remote PTT must be operable from a normal TMAA10 04 1 Secure the remote PTT in position using the velcro strap and plug the remote PTT cord into the remote PTT extension lead A common position for the remote PTT is on the gear lever of the vehicle 600 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 Check that the cord and lead do not interfere with the safe ope
135. Tant SMD 4u7 16v 10 A Cap Elec SMD 10uF 35V 105 2000 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO 5 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO 5 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20 50v Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 220p 50v NPO 5 Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 2096 50v Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v CAP CER 0805 220N 1096 X7R 50V CAP CER 0805 220N 1096 X7R 50V Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BZX84C1 1v ZEN SOT23 Diode SMD MBRS140T3 Sch Diode SMD MBRS140T3 Sch 554 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit Ref E100 E101 E102 E103 E105 E710 Gah E730 GEN J100 J200 J201 L712 L730 L731 Q610 Q720
136. Task 9 Power and current are skewed Low gt 0 1W Task 11 Power and current are low None at RF connector lt 0 1 W Task 29 Check power at directional coupler None at RF connector lt 0 1 W Task 7 Check for inhibiting of transmitter TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 353 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 6 Power Unchanged Regardless of Setting Task 7 Check for Inhibiting of Transmitter If all the power and current values measured in Task 5 are correct it is likely that the power remains unchanged regardless of the power setting fe Enter the following CCTM commands in turn and measure the RF output power in each case m 3264 m 3263 m 3262 m 3261 2 The above measurements should confirm that the power remains unchanged at all settings Carry out Task 12 and then Task 19 If the transmitter 1s drawing no current or the wrong current check whether it is being inhibited This check is also required if a CO3 error occurs in Task 1 1 If not already done enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 2 Check the logic signal at the TX INH test point see Figure 12 4 The signal should be TX INH test point about OV inactive gt If the signal is inactive as required go to Step 4 If it is active about 1 1 V the transmitter is being inhibited go to Step 5 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive m
137. This will turn the radio system off when the ignition key 1s off to avoid draining the battery and will turn the radio system on when the ignition key 1s on Note A TMAA04 05 ignition sense kit is available The kit comprises a mating plug for the radio s auxiliary connector and a 13 foot four metre length of cable to connect to the vehicle s ignition signal Installation Connect pin 4 of the external interface connector AU X GPID to the 13 8V signal controlled by the vehicle s ignition key Note Make sure the ignition switch and the radio link LK2 are properly configured to reduce the radio s power consumption Refer to TMAA04 05 Ignition Sense Kit on page 581 for more infor mation 31 3 2 Radio Programming Program both radios as shown in Table 31 5 Table 31 5 Ignition sense settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab RR RL Lacie a pouner AUX GPI3 All Input IGN SENS Power Sense High 10 Ignition 584 TMAAO4 06 Linking and Interface Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 31 4 Connecting to an External Alert Device The cable s external interface connector can be used to connect a TM8260 dual radio system to an external alert device in the vehicle This enables both radios to drive the same external alert device 31 4 1 Installation The external alert lines used to connect to an external device are open collector outputs Connect pin 9 radio closest t
138. Use the test unit cables and adaptor of the service kit Refer to Tools Equipment and Spares on page 110 for details of the test equipment and service kit The test unit is described in TOPA SV 024 Test Unit on page 613 For testing receive and transmit functions respectively the switches of the test unit must be set as described below When programming or calibrating radios the switches have no effect although it is good practice to set the MODE switch to Rx For receive tests set the switches on the test unit as follows m HOOK switch OFF HOOK m MODE switch RX m AUDIO IN switch OFF m AUDIO OUT switch SPEAKER or LOAD In the last named case with the switch in the SPEAKER position the received audio is output from the test unit s speaker In the LOAD position a 16Q load is switched into the circuit in place of the test unit s speaker Note however that the AUDIO OUT switch has no effect on the radios speaker For transmit tests set the switches on the test unit as follows m HOOK switch OFF HOOK m MODE switch RX initially m AUDIO IN switch MIC AUDIO m AUDIO OUT switch immaterial When ready to transmit set the MODE switch to the TX PTT position This switch functions in the same way as the PTT switch on the microphone Install the programming and calibration applications on the test PC These applications are included on the
139. WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT ORAL OR WRITTEN AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE LICENSEE AND TAIT RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007
140. adhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes The rear side of the front panel has four screw bosses to fasten the PCB bracket The control head loom with the female female adapter connects the connector on the control head board OU to the control head connector of the radio body For more information refer to Control Head Connectors on page 44 The control head board D is a printed circuit board in SMT design with some hand soldered parts All components are placed on the top side including the programming connector the connector for the control head loom and the POWER ON OFF LED The control head board slides into a slot in the front panel and slots in the PCB bracket and is held in place by two clips of the PCB bracket 9 The PCB bracket is an injection moulded plastic part which is fitted to the front panel with four 3x8 PT screws G TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 7 Components of the RJ45 control head 1 control head board 4 PCB bracket 2 control head loom with female female adapter 5 front panel 3 3x 8 PT screw x4 6 RJ45 bung x2 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 35 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 1 5 Blank Control Head The blank control head consists of the following parts m front panel m control head loom with programming connector B seals The circled numbers in th
141. and 2 digit display control head m TM8250 TM8255 graphical display control head m TM8235 3 digit display control head Some keys have functions assigned to both short and long key presses A short key press is less than one second and a long key press is more than one second Figure 2 9 User interfaces press to talk PTT key microphone LL r7 radio status LEDs WC gast green red amber display speaker on off key E l volume M q FF wal Channel 12 Talkgroup 01 Talkgr 3x Menu microphone K LISS gt m DIPS PEC scroll keys control function keys 1to4 left right selection key selection key radio status LEDs green x display red amber Spear on off key volume control microphone socket 1 and 2 digit display control head function keys 1to 4 3 digit display control head function key 1 loz key shift key function key 2 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 37 2 3 Connectors Overview This section describes the specifications and pinouts of the connectors of the radio body and the control head Figure 2 10 provides an overview of the connectors Figure 2 10 Connectors radio with graphical display control head Volume Control Head Control Options Connector RF Connector Control Head Microphone Options Board Connector Control Head oom Control Head Connector Mai
142. and diagram summarizes the signals used for the desktop microphone on the radio s microphone connector and shows the interface between the desktop microphone and the radio Table 32 1 Desktop microphone connector pins and signals Pin sns colour Desciption E E E meme mn fe aen M sf meme e aono foare analogue sound p Inani S Inani 590 TMAA10 01 Desktop Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 32 2 Desktop microphone to radio interface hookswitch microphone connector microphone cor neue crophone cord LE MAP transmit mca signal path microphone amplifier CART A Q DIRECT OUT J2 O C3 C6 R5 i CCW 001uF 120pF c2 Na DC BIAS S AUDIO OUT O C10 120pF CARTRIDGE MICROPHONE 120pF CART GND J4 O PTT LO J7 O SW3 O PTT HI 38 O 32 5 Circuit Description The desktop microphone uses a dynamic microphone capsule and contains a pre amplifier O1 to boost the microphone level to that required by the radio Power for the pre amplifier is provided by the electret microphone bias circuit within the radio R5 1s used to adjust the gain PTT and hookswitch signals are combined onto one line and fed to the control head PTT input of the radio TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 01 Desktop Microphone 591 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 592 TMAA10 01 Desktop Microphone TM
143. and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 420 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 16 If the DC offset measured in Task 15 is incorrect but there is no fault with Check CODEC 2 Device li 10 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual the auxiliary connector check the CODEC 2 device Remove the CDC TOP can Check the voltage at both ends of R241 see Figure 13 10 R241 1 5V DC at both ends If the voltages are correct go to Step 4 If they are not go to Step 6 Check for and repair any soldering faults around IC205 or else replace IC205 see Figure 13 10 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Remove R241 Check the voltage at pin 3 of IC205 see Figure 13 10 pin 3 of IC205 1 5V DC If the above voltage 1s correct go to Step 9 If 1t 1s not replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check for and repair any soldering faults around R241 and IC205 see Figure 13 10 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 421 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 422 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100
144. at pin 5 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 while first disconnecting and then reconnecting the 13 8V DC supply at the power connector The power up signal should go high when the power 1s reconnected If it does conclude with Step 5 If it does not check for continuity and shorts to ground between the link LK1 and the 13V8 BATT input at the power connector PL100 Repair any fault and go to Step 5 For the auxiliary power sense option the link LK2 should be inserted see Figure 7 2 Connect 3 3V DC more than 2 6V to be precise from the power supply to the AUX GPI3 line pin 4 of the auxiliary connector SK101 Check that the power up signal at pin 5 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 is high Remove the 3 3 V supply and ground the AUX GPI3 line to be precise the voltage on the line should be less than 0 6 V If the power up signal is now low conclude with Step 5 If it is not check for continuity and shorts to ground between D601 see Figure 7 1 and pin 4 of the auxiliary connector SK101 Repair any fault and go to Step 5 For the emergency power sense option the link LK3 should be inserted see Figure 7 2 Connect the AUX GPI2 line pin 5 of the auxiliary connector SK101 to ground Check that the power up signal at pin 5 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 is high Remove the connection to ground If the power up signal 1s now low conclude with Step 5 If it is not check for continuity and shorts to ground in the path from D601 see Figure 7 1 via
145. command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum value 2 If not already done program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio s frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 11 2 J Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 4 Note the RF output power measured by the test set and note the current reading on the DC power supply RF output power gt 60W VHF gt 52W UHF gt 40W 700 MHz gt 45W 800MHz current lt 15A VHF lt 12A UHF 12A 800MHz 5 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 6 Program the radio with the centre frequency in the radio frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 11 2 1 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 8 Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the radio s frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 11 2 vd Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 10 Depending on the results of the above measurements proceed to the task indicated in Table 11 4 Note that the power and current are considered to be skewed if they are low at one part of the frequency band and high elsewhere Table 11 4
146. dHAS IX27 algeuod E UE I Q W A Z D C IAN O v V S9TTd ago e qeuog Tad 4 Z NO L L oO ech N 4 g en Dou jou o D dd a 1 A EM bp H x Tod de aldon J eV UE E po ME E T o g ino 9 lt vi i DIC DIO zL ZS 1 61 01000 0SC Ndl We Ge SSNIEHOS c ek sus 1 Ov EE VE EH ONU TH YO4 SNILUM H3MOd S qe ia dS llqoN T T ST i I Ge T c 8 3 ns i SH O TMS HO ddS cM AUC S p CR eer O D Ire SEU i 1 6 On 1 I 7 gel te S292056 LO Ee I I n 9 qeuiod 1 m 900 1 1 T TR alqon LO OC8LE CE0 Ndl V l lidd 34 GINOHS TOEWAS LAG SNOILISOd E SYH TMS SE OCS HIdS IOLIMS 82d Jo Wed jou bol o ol ol ol o o o c U SI cMS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TOPA SV 024 Test Uni 618 Tait General Software Licence Agreement This legal document is an Agreement between you the Licensee and Tait Electronics Limited Tait By using any of the Software or Firmware items prior installed 1n the related Tait product included on CD or downloaded from the Tait website hereinafter referred to as the Software or Firmware you agree to be bound by the terms of this Agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement do not install and use any of the Software or Firmware If you install and use any of the Software or Firmware that will be deemed to be acceptance of the terms of this licence agreement The
147. damaged during the repair Repeat the inspection given in Visual Inspection on page 155 Rectify any damage Test the radio to confirm that it is fully functional again The recommended tests are listed in Table 6 2 to Table 6 4 The calibration application can be used for many of these tests It is good practice to record the test results on a separate test sheet A copy of the test sheet can be supplied to the Customer as confirmation of the repair The final administration tasks are the standard workshop procedures for updating the fault database and returning the repaired radio to the Customer with confirmation of the repair If the radio could not be repaired for one of the following reasons m fault not located m repair of fault failed m required repair is level 3 repair Level 1 service centres should return the faulty radio to the nearest ASC and level 2 service centres should return the radio to the ISC Supply details of the Customer the fault and if applicable the attempted repair TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Servicing Procedures 165 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 6 2 Final tests of transmitter function Error in transmit frequency 100Hz to 100Hz Transmit power 25 W radios e High e Medium e Low e Very low Current at high power 25W radios e A4 band radios e B1 band radios CO band radios D1 band radios H5 band radios H6 band radios Transmit power gt 25W radios e H
148. e x E F LES e Bes Be FLE z v 1 z S 853 PO E Gi co S i A al E 2 2 qma s ot els K K A E B J T BIT om BIEL EB too ta E ot EE IA ELLES ii OST amp CERN RI e JB CA ge i Ei de e SK1 C E F G B IPN 220 65202 04 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board 485 17 9 4 Line Interface Board Layout bottom side G F E D C B A 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 i D D 6 6 5 du 5 4 4 3 3 Q 2 2 om 4 IPN 220 65202 04 486 TMAAO0T1 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ircuit Diagram Line Interface Board C 17 9 5 C JO T eaess azcz osu 2190 andy O HOI JL N3IACN3HU GH 13346 1BddNIONd P XYWST W OIUNO 2ZS9 ZZ c velOQ 9zZ WO Nat OJ NYH GC 8E SS aa eM 3180 3114 vOd3S9T ONOA 3 S7 TSH U AdgALOLOYd NO23S B22 v012020 ONOA E l T H W TH De OL eva U3TINd EISE v os0T ONOA z TRH U GO LIMDYID 49730 2189 GCHIJIGOM an GIO 303 Lf T f We Wa 7 S223028 SNOA T W gt srsdo i Hi ol HS 3oudUns 39NUH2 OL H3noT108 NdI A Abb j Zelt FE EN L SOINOHLO3J dJ SOTSNY NS qYLISTA AS I 7811910 AS GBA N LNG Ln
149. entering the CCTM command 332 y do not specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs 1 Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC301 see Figure 12 8 The voltage should be pin 8 of IC301 lt 100mV initially 2 Note the current reading on the DC power supply As mentioned in Step 7 of Task 12 the current will be less than 500mA 3 Enter the CCTM command 332 y where y was recorded in Task 12 4 Check that the voltage changes to pin 8 of IC301 2 to 5V after entry of CCTM 332 y 5 Also note the current reading This should increase by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12 6 6 If the voltage and current are both correct go to Step 7 If the voltage is correct but not the current go to Task 17 If neither the current nor the voltage is correct go to Task 18 T Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to switch off final bias 2 and go to Task 19 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 367 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 17 Shaper and Level Shifter If the voltage measured in Task 16 is correct but not the current either the second PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA 1s suspect Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A And when entering the CCTM command 332 y do not specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure
150. external hidden push button or toggle floating inactive switch which connects it to ground No LK3 in AUX GPI2 must be left floating LK3 out AUX GPI2 can be used as GPI 88 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Battery Power Sense Auxiliary Power Sense Ignition Sense Internal Options Power Sense No Power Sense Emergency Power Sense Operation in Emergency Mode With this option link LK1 connects 13V8 BATT of the power connector to the power up circuitry With this option when a 13 8 V supply is connected to the radio the radio enters the programmed power on mode The ON OFF key can then be used to switch the radio on and off This option has the disadvantage that the radio still draws about 50mA after being switched off using the ON OFF key The reason is that the radio enters the stand by mode and does not shut down completely This option uses the digital input line AUX GPI3 of the auxiliary connector to power the radio up and down Link LK2 is required to connect the line to the power up circuitry The line is active high it is on when the level exceeds 2 6 V and off when the level falls below 0 7 V the line tolerates maximum inputs equal to the radio supply voltage When the line becomes active the radio enters the programmed power on mode The ON OFF key can then be used to switch the radio on and off With the radio off and the line active the rad
151. fed to the PLL device ADF4111 and divided down by a programmed ratio to approximately 25 kHz For the receive VCO 1n the K5 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 59 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Modulation Frequency Generation 60 Description band the frequency 1s divided down to 72kHz This 1s because the sensitivity Kyco 4MHz V is four times lower than that of the transmit VCO The reference frequency input from the FCL 1s also divided down to approximately 25kHz 30kHz for the A4 band 72kHz receive for the K5 band The phase of the two signals 1s compared and the error translated into a DC voltage by a programmable charge pump and dual bandwidth loop filter This DC signal 1s used to control the VCO frequency and reduce the initial error The loop eventually settles to a point that minimizes the phase error between divided down reference and VCO frequencies The net result 1s that the loop locks to a programmed multiple of the reference frequency The FCL generates an output of 13 012 MHz 4kHz Initially a VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator produces a quasi regulated frequency in the required range The VCXO output 1s fed to a mixer where it 1s mixed with the 13 000MHz TCXO frequency The mixer after low pass filtering to remove unwanted products produces a frequency of 12kHz nominally This 1s converted to digital form and transported to the frequency control block in the custom logic
152. go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 4 If the output of the SMPS is correct check the 6V DC supply next 6V Power Supply 1 Measure the supply 6V0 at pin 4 of IC606 see Figure 9 2 pin 4 of IC606 6 0 0 3V DC 2 If the voltage is correct go to Task 5 If it is not measure the 9V input at pin 5 of IC606 see Figure 9 2 pin 5 of IC606 9 0 0 3V DC 2 If the voltage is correct go to Step 4 If it is not the 9V regulator IC601 is suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 4 If the input to the regulator IC606 15 correct but not the output check IC606 see Figure 9 2 and the associated circuitry if necessary replace IC606 Remove the SYN TOP can and check the C multipliers Q508 pins 3 4 5 and Q512 for shorts see Figure 9 2 replace any suspect transistor 5 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 192 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 3 Synthesizer circuitry under the FCL TOP can top side R537 C501 R501 R503 C502 R3084 R504 Q500
153. in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Repeat Step 6 to Step 8 If the power in both the above cases exceeds 35 W the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it does not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 397 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 398 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 13 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding Fault Conditions This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the CODEC and audio circuitry There are five conditions that indicate a possible fault in the circuitry m no speaker audio or speaker audio is distorted m no speaker audio at auxiliary connector m receiver does not operate m no transmit modulation or modulation is distorted m no transmit modulation despite modulation at auxiliary connector In the first case regarding the speaker audio the green STATUS LED will be operating correctly and all unmute criteria will be satisfied In the second case the receiver will be operating normally In the third case the assumption is that the receiver and power supply circuitry were checked and no faults were found In the fourth case regarding the transmit modulation the radio will be transmitting the correct amount of
154. in the IF TOP can see Figure 13 8 QN test point sine wave 4 If there is a sine wave present go to Step 5 If there is not go to Receiver Fault Finding on page 247 5 Either the digital board or CODEC 1 IC204 is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 415 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 13 5 Faulty Modulation Introduction This section covers the case where the radio transmits the correct amount of RF power but there is either no modulation or the modulation is distorted There are three tasks m Task 12 initial checks m Task 13 check 2 3V DC supply m Task 14 check bias network The initial checks will determine whether the frequency synthesizer the 2 3V supply or the bias network is at fault Task 12 Carry out the following checks to isolate the part of the circuitry that 1s Initial Checks faulty 1 Apply a 1kHz audio signal of 20 mV at the microphone input on the control head 2 Enter the CCTM command 38 to place the radio in transmit mode The frequency 1s that of channel 1 2 Check that the 1 kHz signal appears at the TP503 test point see Figure 13 8 TP503 test point 1 KHz signal 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the 1 kHz signal is present go to Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 If it is not go to Step 6 6 With no microph
155. initiate the power on or power off sequence This key press will also be detected by the FPGA of the control head through Q611 as an active high signal POWER ON OFF 3v3 For more information on the start up process refer to Software Architecture on page 49 Figure 14 9 Circuit diagram of the On oFF key Control Head Connector R628 If the on orF key is faulty 1 Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens cleaning cloth to clean the pads S610 on the control head board for the ONOFF key 2 Check the CH ON OFF signal level from the radio at pin 9 of the control head connector J103 J103 pin 9 13V If the signal is approx 13V continue with Step 5 If near or at ground continue with Step 3 9 Visually inspect pin 9 of connector J103 for open or shorted contacts 4 Verify the source of the signal to pin 9 of connector J103 from the radio without the control head connector D Visually inspect R610 R606 and R624 for short circuit to adjacent components Replace if necessary Return to Step 2 6 Visually inspect R610 for shorted or open circuits Repair if necessary Retest switch T Verify continuity between R610 and switch S610 and continuity between switch S610 and ground If the continuity cannot be restored replace the control head board 436 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 14 10 PCB layout of the
156. is switched off The power will also be switched off if the primary power source voltage is outside the radios operating range The combined switched current drawn by the internal options connector the auxiliary connector and the control head connector must not exceed 1A Note The switched output is protected Short circuiting the switched power on any connector will not damage the radio In the event of a short circuit the current folds back to protect the switch device and connectors Figure 3 11 Connector power supply options Internal gt Options Connector Auxiliary Connector Primary Power Head Connector 2 Source Connector Control Power 13V8 BATT Microphone gt Connector Note The links LK7 and LK8 have the alternative designations R787 and R786 respectively The factory default setting is with LK5 and LK7 inserted and LK6 and LK8 omitted 3 7 Interface Circuitry Introduction For a block diagram of the interfaces circuitry refer to Figure 3 12 For more on the connector pinouts refer to Connectors on page 38 90 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 3 4 Connector power supply options Link state Connector power state LK7 LK8 Internal D EE ee siti iet iei Bi directional Lines Output Signals e g AUX GPIO4 5 Volt Regulator Input Signals e g AUX GPIO4 Bi directional l
157. keys faulty speaker faulty volume control faulty The faults can be detected by visual inspection refer to Check the User Interface on page 159 General The following applies for all fault finding procedures power is supplied to the radio Important Do not disconnect or connect the control head while TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual If the radio does not switch on when power 1s supplied the radio may be programmed to go into the status it was in when powered down Connect a known good control head power up the radio and change the relevant setting in the programming application Remember to program the original setting before returning the radio to the customer For disassembly and re assembly instructions refer to Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head on page 147 If the repair fails or no fault could be found replace the control head board After completing the repair carry out the tasks in Initial Tasks on page 155 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display 447 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 15 2 Bottom side of the control head board 2 digit control head shown Ce e 49 VNAQVG pins of RV1 ICT 5e C12 R21 D22 E 220 01699 03 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Findin
158. necessary Caution During this procedure take care that the control head seal is not damaged Damage to this seal reduces environmental protection On the underside of the radio lever point insert a 5mm 3 16 inch flat Es i DE SECH CS n bladed screwdriver between the NZ SA indication of control head and the control head lever point seal in the positions shown Insertion points and are lever points and are indicated on the radio chassis by a dot dash dot pattern Lessel Use the screwdriver to lift the control head off the chassis clip then repeat in the other position Unplug the control head loom from the radio body The control head is now separate from the radio body 25 1 4 Installing the Torso Interface The torso interface must be installed onto the radio body in place of the control head 1 Screw the solder tag onto one of the screw bosses on the radio chassis Plug the torso interface loom 9 onto the control head connector Insert the bottom edge of the torso interface D onto the two clips 1n the front of the radio chassis then snap into place Remove the bung 2 covering the outer RJ45 connector The remote cable 4 will plug into this connector once the installation 1s complete installed so the RJ45 cavity bung must be installed at Important The inner RJ45 cavity is not used and has no connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual all times This ensure
159. o wo G NH aero VW MEE HEE HNG LEG a EW Ole AAA vw Qren I v Le X o IEN Tere Perd Qcvo rG NI 4d QT E E Hes pe XEW BW BSZ AAA Ww x H ST Bel NM 7 T Ge S QOO ENE AAA A AA lJ2OO ENE ET TTr ele SUIH 2d T39Ud T HIJS NTZAT 2eN HIT ICATQ QECN T H2 557 Installing an Enhanced Remote Ki Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 26 4 20 TMAC34 OT Torso Interface PCB IPN 220 01720 05 Parts List Ref PN C1 018 16100 00 C2 015 07470 20 C3 015 06470 01 C4 018 13100 00 ES 015 27100 08 C9 018 13100 00 C10 018 16100 00 C13 018 16100 00 C15 018 16100 00 Ci 018 16100 00 C101 018 16100 00 C102 015 07470 20 C103 015 07470 20 C203 018 13270 00 C207 018 13270 00 C209 018 13270 00 C213 018 13270 00 DS1 008 00014 73 J1 240 10000 11 J2 240 00016 00 J3 240 00016 00 R1 038 13120 00 R2 038 10000 00 R3 038 15820 10 R4 038 15820 10 R6 038 15220 10 R7 038 15100 10 R8 038 15820 10 R9 038 13100 10 R10 038 15100 10 R12 038 16100 10 Description Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10 25V X7R Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20 50v Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO 5 Cap Cer 0805 X7R 1uF 16V 10 Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO 5 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10 25V X7R CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10 25V X7R Cap
160. of the amplifier is AC coupled into the AUDIO TAD IN line pin 6 of SK2 17 8 2 Logic Interface The line interface board 1s able to provide simple interface solutions with other radios Logic is used to control keying of both radios as well as providing time delays to prevent squelch or cycling problems The logic uses gates rather than discrete components The choice of which input controls BUSY GATE can be selected using switches 3 and 4 of S1 while the sense of BUSY GATE pin 12 of SK1 can be selected using switches 5 and 6 Switch 7 accommodates either a two line keying system or a single bi directional keying line TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 481 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 The comparators in U1 operate off a single sided regulated 5 V supply U1 pins 2 4 and 5 provide receiver gate delay Once the busy signal 1s not active C4 charges through R12 and causes U4 to go low Once charging exceeds the voltage at U1 pin5 This also locks out the keying state until this delay has occurred U6 pin 5 17 8 3 Data Communication The Line Interface circuitry is designed to provide RS 232 and RS 422 data communication RS 232 is provided by U9 but if RS 422 1s required U9 is removed and replaced by U2 and U10 Also resistors R15 16 43 and 47 need to be fitted 17 8 4 Power Supply 482 The power supply for the line interface board comes from the radio via the internal options conne
161. of IC503 2 9 0 3V DC If the voltage is correct go to Phase locked Loop on page 198 If it is not go to Step 3 Check the supply at L506 see Figure 9 2 The measurement point is the via shown in the figure L506 2 9 0 3V DC If the voltage 1s correct go to Step 5 If it 1s not the 3V regulator IC603 is suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 Check the components in the path from L506 to IC503 Also check IC503 if necessary replace IC503 see Figure 9 2 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 197 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 3 Phase locked Loop Introduction If there is no fault with the power supplies check the critical output from and inputs to the PLL m Task 7 supply for charge pump m ask 8 reference frequency input m ask 9 DIG SYN EN line input m Task 10 SYN LOCK line output The measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the PLL inputs and output are summarized in Figure 9 6 Task 7 First check the supply for the charge pump of the PLL Supply for Charge Pump iM Measure the supply for the charge pump at pin 16 of IC503 see Figure 9 2 pin 16 of IC503 5 0 0 3V DC 2 If the voltage is correct go to Task 8 I
162. of the radio firmware 97 Boot code version Reads the version number of the boot code 98 FPGA version Reads the version number of the FPGA 133 Hardware version Reads the product code of the radio body and the hardware version number 134 FLASH serial number Reads the serial number of the FLASH memory where x is the serial number an eight digit number QMATF x y where x is a three character identifier and y is an eight digit version number QMAT1B x y where x is a three character identifier and y is an eight digit version number QMA1G x y where x is a three character identifier and y is an eight digit version number X where x is the product code and y is the version number a four digit number X where x is the serial number a 16 digit hexadecimal number Radio control category 400 Select channel Changes the current channel to that specified 400 x alternatively x where x is a valid channel number None System category X where x is the supply voltage in 46 Supply voltage Reads the supply voltage 203 Clear system error Clears the last recorded system error 204 Read system error Reads the last recorded system error and the associated data 205 Erase persistent data Effectively resets the calibration parameters to their default values TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 millivolts None SysEr
163. on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 237 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 18 FCL circuitry under and adjacent the FCL TOP can I B8 Buy gg HN d i Position R527 for Tasks 38 a and 39 CE d 6169 Via for measuring VCXO output A4 band Position Rb27 here for Tasks 38 and 39 e e Via for measuring VCXO output 238 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 36 If the VCXO output is correct check the TCXO output as follows TCXO Output 1 Use the oscilloscope probe to check the TCXO output at the TP504 test point see Figure 9 18 The signal 1s SYN RX OSC and should be TCXO output at TP504 test point clipped sine wave of 1 0 0 2 Vpp 2 If the signal is correct go to Signals at TP501 and TP502 on page 240 If it is not go to Step 3 3 The T
164. pressing key Key press is valid 4 On pressing function key Function has been initiated One short low pitched beep On pressing function key again Function has been terminated One short high pitched beep While powered up Radio has been stunned One long low pitched beep 1 On pressing key Key press is invalid e On entry of PIN PIN is invalid 3 On pressing PTT switch Transmission is inhibited Two short beeps 1 On power up Radio is ready to use s On entry of PIN PIN has been accepted and radio is ready to use 3 After radio has been stunned Radio has been revived and is ready to use Two low pitched beeps While powered up Temperature of radio is high Two high pitched beeps While powered up Temperature of radio is very high and all transmissions will be at low power if temperature rises further transmissions will be inhibited Three short beeps While powered up Previously busy channel is now free Three beeps During transmission Transmit time out is imminent transmission will be terminated in 10 seconds Warble While powered up Frequency synthesizer is out of lock on current channel LCD will usually display Out of Lock graphical display OL 2 or 3 digit display or L 1 digit display Continuous low pitched While powered up System error has occurred and radio might be inoperable tone LCD usually displays System Error graphical display E1 or E2 2
165. program In the case of HyperTerminal click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt HyperTerminal A In the terminal program first select the COM port to which the radio is connected Then select the following settings for the port W bits per second 19200 m data bits 8 W parity none m stop bits zd m flow control none 3 Click the OK button or equivalent 4 Save the file with the port settings under a suitable name For subsequent sessions requiring the terminal program open this file Using the terminal program place the radio in CCTM as follows 1 Enter the character to reset the radio 2 As soon as the radio is reset the letter V is displayed If an uppercase letter V appears this implies a fault 3 Immediately the letter V is displayed enter the character The character must be entered within half a second of the letter V appearing 4 If the character is accepted the character is displayed in response and the message lest Mode appears on the radio display This implies that the radio has entered CCTM If the attempt fails repeat Steps 1 to 3 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 123 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 4 2 Command Audio category CCTM commands in the audio category 20 Mute received audio Forces muting of the received audio signal 21 Unmute received audio Forces unmuting of the received audio signal
166. remove them The frequency should change to RX port minimum VCO frequency see Table 9 5 The loop filter will hold its output steady at about OV This should result 1n a frequency equal to the minimum given in Table 9 5 If the minimum frequency measured in Step 5 is correct go to Task 29 If it is incorrect go to Task 30 If no frequency is detected go to Task 31 226 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 14 Synthesizer circuitry under the syn Top can VHF radios top side Tx port vem ur a Junction of C541 and R547 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 227 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 29 Repair PLL feedback If both the maximum and minimum V CO frequencies are correct then the PLL feedback 1s suspect 1 Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 14 2 Remove the VCO BOT can SF Replace the components L510 see Figure 9 15 and IC503 see Figure 9 14 Note On A4 band radios there is no L510 Replace L5010 instead 4 Confirm that the fault in the radio has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 228 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 15 Synthesizer circuitry under the vco Bor can VHF radios
167. result in the destruction of the PAs E Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN2 test point see Figure 12 8 The voltage should be FIN2 test point 18 2V initially 2 Enter the CCTM command 332 y where y was recorded in Task 12 3 Check that the voltage changes to FIN2 test point 1 1 to 2 7V after entry of CCTM 332 y 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the voltage measured above is correct go to Step 6 If 1t 1s not go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 6 Check IC301 and the surrounding shaping filter circuitry see Figure 12 8 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 369 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 19 Biasing of PA Driver DRV test point If there 1s no fault in the biasing of the PAs investigate the biasing of the PA driver Q306 First check the DRV test point Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A And when entering the CCTM command 304 Z do not specify a value Z higher than that recorded 1n Task 12 Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PA driver 1 Note the current reading on the DC power supply As mentioned in Step 7 of Task 12 the current will be l
168. result in the output of charge pump current pulses negative or positive depending on the sign of the error The loop filter s output voltage will change accordingly causing the VCO frequency to change in proportion The synthesizer design is such that normally the VCO frequency will be automatically corrected 76 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 try Izer Circuli Block diagram of the frequency synthes Figure 3 5 1341 OIG NAS 3201 NAS H21V1 NAS Did 1SV4 NAS DIG N3 NAS Did MS 41 NAS Did AT IdS NAS DIG Od IdS NAS DIG oS ANOY e epieju l l l l l l l SE EK 1 Sy E l l AMSAS Y v UDIMS YL uo JHN ODA l I SS mas sir D GOW ODAIGD l l ST 3a NAS EE TE i l R Tags E e doo1 jo1u09 KouenboJ4 SE i l Y l i l I JaLaAu l l l l i i d A I I I oipny l Jajdno gt i pue l l i I l pue I 23005 V V V V l d as OX2L l L NS l ung I I I 1 lt id Fm v3 Tld LR NR doo d TON i l I I Jaune LODA I I I I i l gt l I gt I I gt 0 1 BN I NN BE EE GOW OXIA 20 Jegiduy saying OA SE I I 4o01e npo N HOLIMS A S Ajuo JHA 02A l l l l NY OAE AlddN DA MS YL NAS Did I AlddflS dA m AS Dun Jezisaqyu g Aduanbal4 Gm LOT XY NAS UT XL NAS po IMS HL 0A9 peog jeubiq DSO Xd NAS 19A1929Y LOT XY NAS OT XL NAS ejep jenas SNOUOILDUAS lt eje
169. security bracket base 2 If required remove the mounting rails from the radio body base by unscrewing them 24 4 Replacing the Radio in the Security Bracket To replace the radio in a security bracket first follow the steps in Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket on page 527 and then follow from step 2 1n Installing the Security Bracket and Radio on page 526 24 5 Disassembling the Security Bracket Disassemble the security bracket as follows 1 Remove the radio from the security bracket by following the steps in Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket on page 527 2 Unscrew the four self tapping screws holding the security bracket base in place TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA03 02 Security Bracket 527 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 24 6 Re Ordering Extra Parts The following parts can be re ordered separately 1n case of loss or in situations where for example one security bracket is installed where several different radios may be installed at different times Security Crdl Key TM8 319 60004 Xx slide lock key Security Crdl Mtg Short TM8 319 60002 XX short mounting rails for TM8100 Scrw M4 25 T T P T ContiR 349 02063 XX for attaching short mounting rails to TM8100 radio Security Crdl Mtg Tall TM8 319 60003 XX tall mounting rails for TM8200 Scrw M4 30 T T P T ContiR 349 02068 XX for attaching tall mounting rails to TM8200 radio 1 Contact Technical Support for the exact
170. sense cable to the 13 8 V signal controlled by the vehicles ignition key TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAA04 05 Ignition Sense Kit 579 30 3 Radio Programming Startup Shutdown In the Power On Mode field set how the radio responds when the radio tormi receives a signal to power on from the vehicle s ignition signal m Select either Power On or Previous State EE In the Digital tab set the following fields 1 0 form Digital tab m Set AUX GPI3 line to Power Sense Ignition m Set Active to High Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information 580 TMAA04 05 Ignition Sense Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 31 TMAAO4 06 Linking and Interface Cable The TMAA04 06 cross band linking GPS and external interface cable is used to extend the features available with TM8260 dual radio systems primary 5 auxiliary END connector Using the cables provided in the TMAA04 06 kit the radios can used for the following applications external i secondar Taod i AM W cross band repeater j socket Connector connector Y B connection to a GPS device uf m connection to a vehicle s ignition signal BH connection to an external alert device Note The cable does not currently support any programmable I O actions or connection to external devices or signals o
171. takes the PA output power from m less than 20 dBm for the 40 50 W radios 20 dBm to approximately 40 dB below steady state power for the 30 35 W K5 band radios m 10dBm to approximately 25 dB below steady state power for the 25 W radios Power Ramp Up The power ramp signal is supplied by a 13 bit DAC that is controlled by custom logic The ramp is generated using a look up table in custom logic memory that is played back at the correct rate to the DAC to produce the desired waveform The ramp up and ramp down waveforms are produced by playing back the look up table in forward and reverse order respectively For a given power level the look up table values are scaled by a steady state power constant so that the ramp waveform shape remains the same for all power levels PIN Switch The RF PIN switch circuitry selects the RF path to and from the antenna to either the Tx or Rx circuitry of the radio In addition to the switching functionality the PIN switch is used to provide attenuation to the Rx front end in high signal strength locations TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 63 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 64 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 Circuit Descriptions Introduction This section describes and illustrates the circuitry of the main board and the control head boards The main board 1s divided into the following circuitry modules m transmitter NH
172. terms of this Agreement shall apply subject only to any express written terms of agreement to the contrary between Tait and the Licensee Licence TAIT GRANTS TO YOU AS LICENSEE THE NON EXCLUSIVE RIGHT TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE ON A SINGLE MACHINE PROVIDED YOU MAY ONLY 1 COPY THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INTO ANY MACHINE READABLE OR PRINTED FORM FOR BACKUP PURPOSES IN SUPPORT OF YOUR USE OF THE PROGRAM ON THE SINGLE MACHINE CERTAIN PROGRAMS HOWEVER MAY INCLUDE MECHANISMS TO LIMIT OR INHIBIT COPYING THEY ARE MARKED COPY PROTECTED PROVIDED THE COPYRIGHT NOTICE MUST BE REPRODUCED AND INCLUDED ON ANY SUCH COPY OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE AND OR 2 MERGE IT INTO ANOTHER PROGRAM FOR YOUR USE ON THE SINGLE MACHINE ANY PORTION OF ANY SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE MERGED INTO ANOTHER PROGRAM WILL CONTINUE TO BE SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE LICENSEE MAY NOT DUPLICATE MODIFY REVERSE COMPILE OR REVERSE ASSEMBLE ANY SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE IN WHOLE OR PART TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Important Notice THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE MAY CONTAIN OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE COMPONENTS OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS ARE EXCLUDED FROM THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT AND ARE COVERED BY THE TERMS OF THEIR RESPECTIVE LICENCES WHICH MAY EXCLUDE OR LIMIT ANY WARRANTY FROM OR LIABILITY OF THE DEVELOPERS AND OR
173. test the user interface If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not replace the control head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 15 4 Display and All LEDs Faulty If the display and all LEDs are faulty 1 Use a multimeter to measure the 3 3 V DC supply voltage across C1 see Figure 15 2 If it is correct go to Step 3 If it is not go to Step 2 Check for shorts to ground of the 3 3 V supply Repair any fault and go to Step 8 Use the multimeter to check that the RST line at pin 6 of IC7 1s high The level should be 3 3 V If it is go to Step 5 If it is not go to step 4 Check for continuity 1n the LCD driver circuitry D22 not fitted for 3 digit control head C12 and R27 see Figure 15 2 Repair any fault and go to Step 8 If there 1s no continuity fault replace IC7 and go to Step 8 Use the multimeter to check that the OE line at pin 8 of IC5 is low The level should be less than 0 6 V If it is replace IC7 and go to Step 8 If 1t 1s not go to Step 6 Check that the voltage at pins 4 10 and 14 of IC5 is 3 3 V DC Also check that pin 7 of IC5 is at ground If the voltages are correct replace IC7 and go to Step 8 If they are not go to Step 7 Check for continuity between IC5 and the control head connector SK1 Also check for shorts to ground between IC5 and SK1 Repair any fault and go to Step 8 Confirm the removal of the fault If the fault has been re
174. the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off 2 Measure the voltage at pin 3 of D5004 see Figure 9 15 Some RF noise might be observed pin 3 of D5004 4 2 0 2V DC 3 Measure the voltage at pin 1 of Q5001 see Figure 9 15 pin 1 of Q5001 0 7 0 2V DC 4 If the voltages measured in Step 2 and Step 3 are not correct go to Step 5 If they are check the VCO circuitry based on Q5000 see Figure 9 15 Conclude with Step 6 5 The buffer amplifier is suspect Check the buffer circuitry based on Q5001 see Figure 9 15 6 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit and confirm that the voltages are now correct If they are go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 233 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 8 Power Supply for FCL Fault Diagnosis Indications of a fault in the FCL will have been revealed by the initial checks SEBES in Initial Checks on page 186 and the PLL checks in Phase locked Loop on page 198 In the latter case a fault with the reference frequency input from the FCL to the PLL will imply that the FCL 1s suspect Fault diagnosis of the FCL 1s divided into four stages m check power supply m check VCXO and TCXO outputs m check signals at TP501 and TP502 m check VCXO and CODEC circuitry The checking of the p
175. the PA driver clamp current an integer from O to 255 304 x to set value where x is the required DAC value of the clamp current an integer from O to 255 318 Forward power X Reads the forward power level where x is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the power level a value from 0 to 1100 mV 319 Reverse power X Reads the reverse power level where x is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the power level a value from 0 to 1100 mV 326 Transmitter power 326 x Sets the power level of the where x specifies the level transmitter O off 1 very low 2 low 3 medium 4 high 5 maximum TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 3127 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 4 6 CCTM commands in the transmitter category part 2 Transmitter category 331 Final bias 1 331 to read value X Sets or reads the bias voltage for where x is the DAC value of the the first PA bias voltage an integer from O to 255 Command 331 x to set value where x is the DAC value of the required bias voltage any integer from O to 255 332 Final bias 2 332 to read value X Sets or reads the bias voltage for where x is the DAC value of the the second PA bias voltage an integer from O to 255 332 x to set value where x is the DAC value of the required bias voltage any integer from O to 255 128 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited Novem
176. the bungs O covering the RJ45 connectors The remote cable will plug into this connector once the installation is complete the RJ45 bung must be installed This ensures that the torso interface 1s sealed against water dust and other C If the remote cable is not installed in the RJ45 cavity then environmental hazards TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 547 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 1 5 Mounting the Remote U Bracket A The remote U bracket with its self drilling screws is used to install the remote control head assembly on the dashboard or on any sufficiently flat surface Caution When drilling holes in the vehicle check that drilling at the selected points will not damage existing wiring Important Check that the remote U bracket is not distorted when the screws are tightened 1 Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or bushings in the holes 2 If precise positioning is required predrill 3mm 1 8 inch pilot holes for the self drilling screws Reduce the hole size in metal that is less than 1 mm 1 32 inch thick 3 Screw the remote U bracket in the chosen mounting position using the selt drilling screws provided Use all four screws provided 26 1 6 Installing the Control Head Interface Changing the Remote U Bracket Orientation With the control head separated from the radio body the control head interface 2 mus
177. the components between the PWR test point and pin 1 of IC301 see Figure 12 8 and go to Step 13 Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 11 and Step 12 Replace IC301 see Figure 12 8 if none of the other components is faulty Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 378 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 4 RF Signal Path Introduction The RF signal path extends from the output of the frequency synthesizer to the LPE This section of circuitry will require investigation either following certain checks in Transmitter RF Power or if the biasing checks of Biasing of PA Driver and PAs reveal no fault The procedure is divided into nine tasks grouped as follows m Task 25 to Task 28 initial RF signal path m ask 29 and Task 30 directional coupler m Task 31 and Task 32 PIN switch m Task 33 LPF The initial signal path includes the exciter and PA driver The directional coupler PIN switch and LPF make up the final signal path The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the signal path are summarized in Figure 12 13 Figure 12 13 Measurement points for diagnosing faults in the RF signal path SIGNAL TYPES EXCITER SYNTHESIZER SYN TX LO ANALOG TEST CAPACITOR O O O GATES OF PA DRIVER BUFFER 50 O TEST Q309
178. the crossband linking cable into the auxiliary connector on each radio 29 2 Radio Programming After the transmit and receive channels have been programmed for both radios settings in the following forms must also be configured m PTT form refer to Table 29 1 m Programmable I O form Digital tab refer to Table 29 2 m Programmable I O form Audio tab refer to Table 29 3 If a repeater transmit tail 1s required settings 1n the following forms must be configured in both radios m PTT form TM8100 radios only refer to Table 29 4 m Basic Settings form Subaudible Signalling tab TM8200 radios and optional for TM8100 radios refer to Table 29 5 and Table 29 6 Some of the settings shown in the tables are default settings and may not need to be changed In all cases refer to the online help of the programming application for more information Crossband Settings The following table shows the crossband linking settings required in the in the PTT Form External PTT 1 tab of the PTT form Table 29 1 Crossband settings in the PTT form External PTT 1 tab PTT Transmission Type Advanced EPTT1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA04 04 Crossband Linking Cable 573 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Programmable 1 0 The following table shows the crossband linking settings required in the Form Digital Tab Digital tab of the Programmable I O form Table 29 2 Crossband settings in the Programmable 1 0 for
179. the feedback voltage is now correct go to Final Tasks on page 162 If it 1s not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 206 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 15 If the loop filter is suspect but the reference and feedback voltages are Check DIG SYN FAST Line 1 10 11 12 13 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual correct check the DIG SYN FAST line which 15 input to the inverter Enter the CCTM command 389 1 to set the synthesizer mode to fast Measure the voltage at the collector of Q505 see Figure 9 4 The result should be Q505 collector 14 2 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 389 1 B1 50W from board revision 04 and K5 15 5V 0 3 DC Enter the CCTM command 389 0 to set the mode to slow Measure the voltage at the collector of Q505 see Figure 9 4 The result should be Q505 collector OV DC after entry of CCTM 389 0 If the voltages measured 1n Step 2 and Step 4 are correct go to Task 16 If they are not go to Step 6 Remove R105 see Figure 9 7 Enter the CCTM command 389 7 to set the mode to fast Measure the voltage at the via between R105 and the digital board see Figure 9 7 The result should be via at R105 OV DC after entry of CCTM 389 1 Enter the CCTM command 389 0 to set the mode to slow Measure the voltage at the via between R105 and the digital boar
180. the radio These are for the auxiliary RE external options and programming connectors m bung for auxiliary connector m rubber seal for RF connector m bung for aperture for options connector connector not fitted m cover seal for options connector connector fitted In addition ensure that the grommet sealing the aperture to the microphone connector of the control head 1s properly fitted For information about anti static precautions and the dangers of electrostatic discharge refer to standards such as ANSI ESD S20 20 1999 and BS EN 100015 4 1994 or go to the Electrostatic Discharge Association website www esda org 112 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Important This equipment contains devices that are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge ESD Handle every device carefully and in strict accordance with the procedures defined 1n the data book provided by the manufacturer Tait recommends that you purchase an anti static bench kit from a reputable manufacturer The bench must have m a dissipative rubber bench top m a conductive wrist strap m a connection to ground Install and test the bench kit in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions See Figure 4 1 Figure 4 1 Typical anti static bench setup dissipative rubber bench mat conductive wrist strap common point ground building ground or mains ground via 1 MQ series resi
181. the radios primary supply voltage nominally 13 8 V DC Remove the short on the connector Check that with CH ON OFF open circuit both ITF ON OFF and ITF PSU ON OFF are close to 0 0 V If the voltages given in Step 4 and Step 5 are observed go to Step 7 If they are not go to Step 8 The fault lies with the radios internal circuitry If the power supply circuitry or the CODEC and audio circuitry 1s suspect continue with the fault diagnosis as 1n Power Supply Fault Finding on page 169 and CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 respectively If the digital board is suspect replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 The fault lies in the filtering basic processing or connector for the line under test Re solder components or replace faulty components as necessary Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 3 For a bi directional line suspected or reported to be faulty proceed as Bi directional Lines described below In the procedure the direction of the line will need to be configured For information on this topic consult the on line help facility on the programming application s Programmable I O page 8 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Configure the suspect line as an output and then carry out the procedure given in Task 1 Configure the suspect line as an i
182. to Task 16 Table 12 6 Gate biases for the PAs and PA driver at high power Offset currents in mA 300 300 750 300 800 300 362 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 8 Test points and components of the shaping filter ella leal lea lel lllad lt oo co ms 55552535 VCO TOP CAN UHE ONLY 01 DIRC TOP CAN SET PWR TEST POINT DRV TEST POINT FWD PWR m TEST POINT IF TOP CAN PWR TEST POINT FIN1TEST POINT FIN2 TEST POINT TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 363 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 9 PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can VHF shown PAF TOP ROL EIN 8352 R3017 EE B SN R349 R3015 RO48 R3010 CIRCUITRY BETWEEN IC301 AND PAs VIA TO PIN 14 OF 1C301 VIA TO GATE OF Q309 VIA TO PIN 8 OF IC301 VIA TO GATE OF Q310 364 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 14 If the voltage measured 1n Task 13 is corr
183. to Task 12 in Biasing of PA Driver and PAs on page 360 If 1t 1s not go to Step 3 gt If not already done remove the PAF TOP can 4 Check D301 and the surrounding components see Figure 12 6 5 If there 1s no fault go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 355 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 6 PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can and part of the directional coupler under the DIRC TOP can VHF shown PAF TOP R3005 338 R360 R358 R3007 R361 309 005 R354 43008 1308 MOUNTING POINT FOR TEST CAPACITOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SOLDER OUTER SHEATH TO GND 356 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 9 If the RF output power and the supply current are skewed the output Power and Current Are Skewed 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual matching 1s suspect Remove the DIRC TOP can Remo
184. to Task 26 If it is not go to Step 7 Check C300 see Figure 12 14 If C300 is not faulty go to Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 If C300 is faulty replace 1t and return to Step 2 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 14 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can UHF shown E k Lm Driver output Exciter output at C301 C GP en Gi KA E SIS Rae aus SS due CSL En NEC T eas Synthesizer output at C300 Buffer output at C313 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 381 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 12 8 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio A4 band RF voltages V Power level Frequency Synthesizer Buffer Exciter Driver output output output output I I l I I l I I l It I H It I H It I H It I H 1 F d i It I It I It I It I It I H It I H It OH H It I H 382 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 12 9 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio B1 band 2 c Mi O Oo o O gt LL ec Synthesizer Frequency MHz Power level W Table 12 10 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio CO band RF voltages V gt U c GL oO
185. to the control head or discon nect the LCD loom and connect it to a good control head 9i Replace the LCD Carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the top side of the LCD 4 Use an oscilloscope to check the signals of pins 3 to 7 of connector J102 J102 pins 3 to 7 The signals should be switching 0 to 3 3V in bursts of 0 125ms at approximately 1s intervals If any of the signals are missing or distorted remove can E100 and check for continuity between the FPGA and the LCD connector If necessary replace the corresponding 100 resistor s R4 to R8 Figure 14 4 PCB layout of the LCD circuitry 8 C501 C603 Co U503 Tie m K P nn C601 C602 EZ C B E o 14 e N w e iG EIS no ES Ss en ke c C BC B lt ag Cu C A c Kej gt ID c co SI E cur E E n CQ d Un o as vw I CES SC Po st leo tea SS gt c foe e la IS top side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 429 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 4 LCD Backlighting Faulty The backlighting incorporated m the LCD module is controlled by a data line from the FPGA which switches a transistor on MOSFET Q102 Note The LCD backlighting has four brightness settings off GND on 3 3V and two intermediate settings which are implemente
186. to tighten the four screws to 221bfin 2 5 Nm 5 Slide the cover D over the radio body and snap holes in the side of the cover over the screw bosses 6 Inspect the control head seal for damage and replace 1f necessary 146 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 4 Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head 5 4 1 Control Head with Graphical Display Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 9 on page 149 The connectors of the control head board and the orientation of the speaker and speaker clamp are illustrated 1n Figure 5 8 1 With your fingers pull off the volume control knob 2 Do not use any tools as this might cause damage 2 Unscrew the two screws D and remove the adaptor flange 3 Disconnect the control head loom 4 If an optional circuit board 1s fitted unplug it from the control head board 9 refer to Figure 5 8 5 Note whether the speaker is connected or disconnected If it is connected disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker connector of the control head board refer to Figure 5 8 Note that the radio must be returned to the customer in its original configuration 6 Release the lock of the LCD connector and unplug the loom of the LCD assembly 2 refer to F
187. used to prevent the burst of noise occurring Time Delay RV1 before a mobile is able to mute the audio when the carrier signal disappears The keying time delay is used in conjuction with the keying signal SK1 pin 1 Set DIP8 on and adjust RV1 for the required time delay Rotate RV1 clockwise to increase the delay and counterclockwise to reduce the delay Note Ifthe W1 link is fitted the maximum time delay available is reduced from 5 seconds to approximately 2 5 seconds 472 TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Setting the Line Monitor the line output SK1 pins 14 and 15 and apply an on channel Output Level RV2 signal from the RF signal generator at an output level of 47dBm modulated to 6096 of system deviation at 1kHz AE Adjust the RV2 for a line output level of 10dBm Setting the Line Apply a line input signal of 10dBm and key the transmitter Input Level RV3 m For a two wire configuration apply the line input signal to pins 14 and 15 on SK1 m Forafour wire configuration apply the line input signal to pins 4 and 10 on SK1 Adjust RV3 until 60 of system deviation at 1 kHz is achieved 17 3 Installing the Line Interface Board Note The line interface board link options must be set before the board EJ is installed in the radio as the top side of the line interface board is not accessible once the board is screwed to the radio lid
188. using an oscilloscope Enter the CCTM command 319 to check the reverse power The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the power level and should be as shown in Table 12 3 Confirm the above result by checking the level at the REV PWR test point see Figure 12 4 using an oscilloscope If the oscilloscope momentarily indicates a very high reverse power then the most likely scenario 1s that the antenna VSWR threshold has been exceeded and the PA has shut down to very low power Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the values obtained in Step 3 and Step 5 are both correct and there is no indication of a momentary high reverse power go to Task 5 If one or both are incorrect go to Step 9 Check the connection from the RF connector on the radio to the test set If there is no fault go to Step 11 If there is rectify the fault and repeat the above measurements If the reverse power is momentarily too high the directional coupler PIN switch or LPF is suspect go to Task 29 Otherwise go to Task 5 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 5 If the power supplies are correct check the RF output power of the Check RF Output transmitter Power k Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum value 2 If not already done program the radio with the highest frequency in
189. 0 40 1865 40 AGC2 2200 50 2000 50 H6 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO 1870 40 1825 x 40 AGC1 2050 40 1970 40 AGC2 2220 50 2150 50 K5 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO AGC1 AGC2 AGCO 50 44 AGC1 60 54 AGC2 68 62 260 Receiver Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 11 If the AGC voltage calibration is correct check the FE tune BPF settings FE Tune BPF Settings Ju Note the settings listed in the FE Tune BPF Settings field The nominal settings should be as listed in Table 10 2 2 If the settings are correct go to Task 12 If they are not go to Step 3 3 Recalibrate the receiver and check the settings again 4 If the settings are now correct go to Step 5 If they are not go to Task 1 of Faulty Receiver Sensitivity on page 248 and check the receiver sensitivity 5 Check if the RSSI fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Task 12 Task 12 If the FE tune BPF settings are also correct check the RSSI delta gain RSSI Delta Gain values 1 Note the values listed in the Rx Delta Gain Values field The values should be between OdBm and about 3dBm 2 If the values are as expected go to Task 13 If they are not go to Step 3 3 Recalibrate the receiver and check the values again 4 If the values are now correct go to Step 5 If they are not go to lask 1 and check the receiver se
190. 0 018 16100 00 C11 018 14100 00 C12 018 16100 00 C13 018 16100 00 C14 018 14100 00 C15 018 14100 00 C16 018 14100 00 C17 018 14100 00 C18 018 14100 00 LK1 036 14100 10 LK3 036 14100 10 RI 038 15100 10 R2 038 15100 10 R3 038 15100 10 R4 038 15100 10 R8 038 13100 10 R9 038 13100 10 RIO 038 13100 10 R13 038 13100 10 SK1 240 10000 11 SK2 240 06009 20 Ul 002 10740 40 U2 002 10078 00 U3 002 10022 22 Description Cap Tant SMD 1u0 16v 20 A Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap Tant 4u7 10V 20 0603 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 RES 0805 1k 196 1 8W RES 0805 1k 196 1 8W RES 0603 10k 196 1 10W RES 0603 10k 196 1 10W RES 0603 10k 196 1 10W RES 0603 10k 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 196 1 10W Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match Conn DIP D Sub 9W Female TM8K IC 7AAHCT04 SOIC14 Hex Inv IC SMD MC 8MOSCDT5v Reg0 5a IC SMD ST202E RS232 ESD 5016 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAA01 02 Parts List PCB IPN 220 01740 01 IPN 220 01740 01
191. 0 08 349 00060 00 353 05007 00 354 01052 00 402 00015 00 410 01183 02 410 01197 01 Description Brkt U Thumb Scrw TMA Brkt Remote Head TM8200 Pnl Rear TM8200 MF2 Scrw P T Wn1412 Kc30x08 Zbc Scrw 10G 20 SLFDRL Hex Poz TMA Wshr Rubber M4 19 1 0 S A Fsnr Bush PSM SHK B M4 Ins MANL f instr TMAA03 05 Pkg Box 220x82x65 TMA Pkg Ins Lg Ctrl Hd TMA U400 002 19120 00 U500 002 13483 00 U600 002 15595 00 U610 002 10126 71 U700 002 13001 00 IC TS912ID Cmos R2R Opamp IC XCVR RS485 LTD SLEW RATE 3V IC 74AHC595 8bit Shiftreg Tsop IC SMD DS1868 Dgtl Pot Tsop20 IC TPA3001 20W Mono PA TSSOP24 TMAAO04 01 Remote Cable Parts 219 02918 00 Cbl Rmt Ctrl Hd Kit comprising 219 00025 00 loom 6m shld Bonded Drain 240 02158 00 Conn Shld RJ45 Shortbody Plg 360 02022 00 Grommet Mic TMA 220 01721 04 PCB MFX Head Remote 219 02914 00 LOOM MFX Remote Head Grid Reference List Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit el D1 D7 F4 R321 M4 E8 C100 J3 E3 D102 K4 F4 R401 L3 G10 C101 L4 E3 E4 R402 L3 G10 C102 J4 E3 D103 K4 E5 R410 M3 G8 C103 J4 E3 F5 R411 M3 G7 C110 L4 F4 D104 K5 E5 R412 L4 G7 C300 M5 G2 D110 L5 F3 R420 L3 G6 C301 N5 G3 D201 K5 E8 R421 L3 G6 C310 M2 G4 D211 K5 C9 R422 K3 F C311 N2 G4 D300 N5 G3 R430 M2 G9 C312 M2 G5 D301 M5 G2 R431 M2 G9 C320 P4 D8 D720 G1 D2 R440 K3 E5 C400 L3 G10 D730 F3 B R441 K3 D5 C401 L3 G10 D731 G3 B R442 J3 D5 C410 M3 G8 R501 M4 E7 C411 M3 G8 E100 J5 E2 R510 K4 F6 C420 L3 G5 E101 H5 E2 R511
192. 0 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Description 48 2 4 2 Software Architecture Overview Software plays an important role in the functioning of the radio Some radio functions such as the graphical user interface processing of the analog and digital signals and the implementation of radio applications are completely implemented by software For a block diagram of the software architecture refer to Figure 2 15 on page 50 Software Modules The following software modules are stored on the digital board of the main board m FPGA image which includes the software implemented RISC processor and the custom logic the custom logic executes additional digital signal processing m boot code m radio application code m digital signal processing m radio application database and radio calibration database The following software modules are stored on the control head board with graphical display m FPGA image which includes the software implemented RISC processor m boot code m control head application code m control head application database Hardware and interface drivers are part of the boot code the RISC code and in the case of the main board the DSP code TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 49 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 15 Software architecture radio with graphical display control head shown FPGA Image FPGA Image Boot Code Application Code Database
193. 0 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 m emen TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 9 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Part A Description of the Radio LR Dr Vp NOR qo dre Y qd hu de dep de dedo OR ACE KE ED 13 LE Segue vs DOR bg bo REO X P qo IEEE Ne CROACIE EA dede 13 hd PEMU ONE aaa E EEN eX e Sob EH EEN PC Ardea dog d HE SSS 15 E ZEE La 229 7239 4 93 29d 3 bd EF dedo E d ded EE 16 L9 PO E ed de ORE ede NU e aede qo ice cri 17 Po o0 rrr 19 CR oua 4 9 4019 45 E ded ded L de dede E dio de a Re dod 19 4 INSCDBDOU a dx dew d Id 409 OEC OC EOROX di R 21 Boe Alecha RSS 5 6 2 hh 5 bh ee eee eee DEER EES RN ERED OHSS 2 De Esp DIEM gp cae Fae 65 bee OSs 5 de IEFq4qPSpdGad RS vaa is 37 ex hs eo 4539 3 ge oO os OS Se den dd de dea 38 2 4 Hardware and Software Architectire a a de NK EEN EE de 47 29 Sere in eee IGS ua ded ee hu bo eS tee vieu EO AOS 52 2 6 Operation in Transmit Mode ve seh wea EE EEN EE oen 57 3 Circuit Rea T e es nait OSE CHESSER radar es OS 65 24 K cT TE LEUR auus ss desde ne s rie ester tetes ses 67 S45 ENER EEN L R E dra 94 pRRERRUpEPRIC AER AERE AE Y 70 30 Frequency Synthesizer CITCUNEV ies EE der ydo RR d ey o ey des 75 24 Frequency Control Loop 2654605 oo weder d does SI 55 Ee Fs ee S au aw 9 E E ee ti 81 45 CPower Supp L Ordre eat oC Eod oe Oe eee 85 4 EOE LUPO uasa due
194. 00 Emi Supr J1 240 10000 11 Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match J3 240 00016 00 Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH Q1 000 10561 60 XSTR BCX56 16 AF NPN SOT89 R1 038 13100 10 Res 0603 100R 1 10w 1 R3 038 15100 10 Res 0603 10k 1 10w 1 R4 038 13100 10 Res 0603 100R 1 10w 1 R5 038 16100 10 Res 0603 100k 1 10w 1 Grid Reference List Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit C1 F2 1B1 E1 L2 1C5 R13 L2 1D5 C10 M2 1B6 E2 M2 1B6 R14 M2 1E6 C11 M2 1B E3 M2 1D6 R2 H2 1D2 C2 H2 1D3 E4 L2 1C6 R3 G2 1D3 C3 J1 1D4 E5 N2 1D6 R4 H2 1D3 C4 J2 1D5 R5 K2 1D3 C5 L2 1D5 J1 H2 1D1 R6 J2 1D4 C6 L2 1C6 J3 N2 1C7 R7 J2 1D4 C7 M2 1C6 R8 K1 1D5 C8 M2 1C6 MI R2 1B4 R9 L2 1C5 C9 N2 1C6 Q1 F2 1B1 TP2 M1 1B4 D1 K2 1C4 1D4 D2 K1 1C5 1D5 R1 F2 1B1 U1 D2 1B2 D3 L2 1D6 1E6 R10 L2 1D5 U2 K1 1C4 DS1 F2 1B1 R11 L2 1C5 R12 L2 1C5 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 542 Installing a Remote Kit Board Layout gt Ne Se CO Ed E cy C E Q1 DS1 Y UN SEN a ER m i _ c2 au BR eS Ce 2n c R67 lt lt TED eu U2 d p Ce pas DE D2 R11 R10 D3 89 g DR SS E4 C6 C5 m ca E EE cio R14 E3 E2 B Wil So US gt m Uu m Em TU TM8100
195. 00 Service Manual 25 4 2 RJ 45 Control Head PCB IPN 220 02123 01 Parts List Ref IPN Description Ref IPN Description C1 015 06470 01 Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20 50v R6 038 14220 00 Res 0603 2k2 1 10w 5 C2 018 14470 00 Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7r 10 R7 038 15100 10 Res 0603 10k 1 10w 1 C3 015 07220 08 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r R8 038 13560 10 Res 0603 560R 1 10w 1 C4 018 13470 00 Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r 10 R9 038 13560 10 Res 0603 560R 1 10w 1 C5 018 13470 00 Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r 10 R10 036 02270 10 Res 1206 27 0e 1 C6 018 14470 00 Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7rx 1096 R11 036 02270 10 Res 1206 27 0e 1 C7 015 23270 05 Cap 0805 270p 1 200v Grm40 R12 038 13120 00 Res 0603 120R 1 10w 5 C8 015 23270 05 Cap 0805 270p 196 200v Grm40 R13 038 16100 10 Res 0603 100k 1 10w 1 C9 018 15330 00 Cap 0603 33n 50v X7r10 R14 036 05100 01 Res M F 1206 10k 5 C10 015 23270 05 Cap 0805 270p 1 200v Grm40 C11 015 23270 05 Cap 0805 270p 1 200v Grm40 U1 002 10078 00 IC SMD MC78MO5CDT5v Reg0 5a U2 002 10014 85 IC ADM1485 RS485 Transc S08 D1 001 10000 99 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 DS1 008 00014 74 LED Hp Red Rang PCB Mtg 220 02123 01 PCB Single Rmt Radio I F D2 001 10000 99 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 D3 001 10000 99 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 E1 057 10600 05 Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead E2 057 10600 05 Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead E3 057 10600 05 Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead E4 057 10600 05 Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead E5 057 10020 02 Ind 0603 BIM18pg3
196. 00 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Installing an Enhanced Remote Ki 560 27 TMAAO3 31 Control Head Interface Box The TMAA03 31 control head interface box is used as part of the installation of dual head radio systems PL100 oo ee a a A D H CONTROL SE Idi Ta PCT BLD SK203 SK202 SK201 Not illustrated Interface box mounting washers and screws The TMAA03 3 linterface box is used with the following kits m TMAA11 06 TM8250 TM8255 extended remote upgrade kit installation instructions 402 00047 xx m TMAA11 07 TM8250 TM8255 extended remote dual head upgrade kit with a standard microphone installation instructions 402 00052 xx m TMAA11 08 TM8250 TM8255 extended remote dual head upgrade kit with a keypad microphone installation instructions 402 00052 xx m TMAA11 09 TM8260 dual head upgrade kit with a keypad microphone installation instructions 402 00043 xx TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO3 31 Control Head Interface Box 561 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 27 1 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for all the connectors on the control head interface box Table 27 1 Power connector PL100 pins and signals KEE AGND Analog ground S teens 3 Net connected rear VIEW 13V8 BATT 13V8 power input Table 27 2 Sockets SK201 SK202 SK203 pins and signals e sare hein RD RX RD RX AUD
197. 007 it Diagram Ircul 28 2 4 Extender Box C ES 10H 10H DNIINNON ONILNAOW DNIINNON 200L ZWWEd 200L ZNWWEd 200L ZNC 2 EIN ZIN TIK CABAS ERES OT 6 s8psuH eren CHE 440 NO QE e WG L RE BRET aN5a MS SAC T LL EOZAS MS 8AEI be Y 3d0LZ MOOT a N V L ANOOT aNd Sy d XI 89 4 E ANOT po er oL Ad0LZ l ANOOT AL ANZ Z ae Av OL D z9 ZZO 12 82I E i LTA ZI6SL T Lpo Ta AZZ A ZI6SL ML MLZ AR NI ATA ud x 3d0LZ r MOOT HHIGJITdWV S zza I 0TH Lu 9 does iil Sen Se sis Ap MOOT a 9 stu a AdOLZ pa o anov L MOOT 15 Lg anov T EIS AL L geo 3a0LZ EE ii o asl TE 43O0 NO HO du ar ALD EE Ma 912 c GC 34017 RIE A 4 13 Sza pre SE TV201 A8 oor GN3S z N3S l AI 6 TE PSXZH 99 70792 ia P PASS ANOOT he ATS 909 wiz gr OT Hun Hy RA p Sait e AIO NO HO du l ani ozz z es 9 Ab X1 89 d D dk ae HO NO g LOI ANOOT 4dOLZ anN9q LEO 679 L Tus TZA L ZTS pO pa L cepe dH XLV ZI6SL Ab GNZOZ XLY 001 Bees ANT xt LOI 812 G XLV 9 E T 6u zu me GN MLZ XLV Ap D E de Leu ZT6SL VUE SC 3d0LZ f SS SP T 99I a zi MS B
198. 02 01 349 00060 00 353 00010 32 319 30111 00 349 02062 00 Description XSTR SMD BTS409L Mfet sw IC LF80C 8V 1A LDO rgltr IC TS912ID CMOS R2R OP Amp SKT DC jack 2 5mm RA 5A 16VDC CONN 4wy pwr male XSTR SMD BC847B NPN SOT23 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 4k7 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 1k0 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 1k0 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 196 1 10W RES 0603 22k 196 1 10W RES 0805 220R 196 1 8W RES 0805 220R 196 1 8W SMT Alloy Lead Free sac CONN RJ45 shld 8P8C Ipfl RA TH CONN RJ45 shld 8P8C Ipfl RA TH CONN RJ45 shld 8P8C Ipfl RA TH HDR 3wy 1row PCB mtg PCB CHD I F box STEN top Splitter Box TAPE slfadh 12x6 4mm 15m roll BOX CHD interface mach Dcast LBL control hd interface TMAA03 3 1 BUNG RJ45 TMA SCRW 10x20 hex Pz blk drl WSHR M5 sprf ext BZ SPCR 15mm NYL M3 Fem Hex 5 5mm SCRW M3x8 P H T10 BZ T T CRL TMAAO3 31 Control Head Interface Box 563 27 2 2 Control Head Interface Box Board Layouts top side 1 B
199. 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards 501 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 19 4 External options connector SK2 pins and signals ww os EX 13V8_ SW 13V8 supply AUD TAP OUT Programmable tap point out of the Rx or Tx audio chain DC coupled 6 7 AGND AGND analogue ground ground AUX_MIC_AUDP Ecl microphone input with electret microphone biasing provided Dynamic microphones are not supported Me TAP IND Programmable tap point into the Rx or Tx audio chain DC coupled Bes analogue RSSI output RSSI on IOP GPIO4 programmable function and direction IOP GPIO5 programmable function and direction IOP GPIO6 programmable function and direction IOP GPIO7 programmable function and direction IOP RXD an RS 232 compliant asynchronous serial port receive data 12 IOP TXD an RS 232 compliant asynchronous serial port transmit data 1 This can be configured to be 5V Refer to Power Supply Line on page 498 2 This can be re configured to be RX BEER IN Refer to RX BEER IN Line on page 498 3 3V3 CMOS output via 1kQ series resistance 5V tolerant input 502 TMAAO01 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 19 4 PCB Information 19 4 1 Ref IPN C1 018 16100 00 C2 018 16100 00 C3 018 16100 00 C4 018 16100 00 C5 018 16100 00 C6 015 07220 35 C7 016 08470 06 C8 016 08470 06 C9 016 08470 06
200. 0603 270p 50v NPO 5 Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO 5 Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO 5 Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO 5 LED Hp Grn Rang PCB Mtg Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH RES 0603 120R 5 1 10W RES 0603 OR RES 0603 82k 196 1 10W RES 0603 82k 196 1 10W RES 0603 22k 196 1 10W RES 0603 10k 196 1 10W RES 0603 82k 196 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 196 1 10W RES 0603 100k 196 1 10W Grid Reference List Ref C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C13 C15 C17 C102 C103 C203 C207 CAS DS1 D1 D2 D3 J1 J2 J3 J4 558 PCB Circuit Ref SR H7 MT1 1 K1 J6 1 D2 H3 Q1 1 J1 H8 Q2 ENK G7 1 K1 J7 R1 1 J2 G7 R2 2 K2 J9 R3 1 K2 G8 R4 1 N2 G9 R5 1 N2 G9 R6 2 12 H10 R 22 H8 R8 1 D1 H4 R9 1 E2 D7 R10 1 J2 D6 R11 1 H2 D5 R12 1 H1 D6 R13 R14 1 F2 J5 R15 2 2 G4 R16 1 H2 E5 R17 2 H2 G3 R18 R19 1 H2 E3 R20 1 N2 E12 R21 1422 G12 R22 1 M2 D9 R23 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit PCB 1 R2 2 G2 2 02 2 N2 EHK 131 1 J1 2 H2 1 J1 1 G2 1 J1 ENK 1 K2 2 G2 1 N2 1 N2 1 F2 ENK 1 H2 ENK 1 D2 EZ 2 12 1 N2 2 H2 2 62 Ref R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 R20 R21 R30 R31 R40 R103 R104 R203 R207 R209 R213 R911 R915 R917 U1 U2 U3 Circuit F12 G4 F5 E10 G7 J6 J6 G4 H7 E5 J8 J9 G8 F4 G9 G9 H5 H9 D5 H9 HA HA J10 G10 G4 G5 IPN 038 16100 10 036 13560 10 038 15820 10 038 15100 10 038 15220 10 0
201. 10 IC1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R20 S2 53 P2 P3 514 TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones TMAAO02 06 Parts List PCB IPN 220 01712 01 IPN 015 26330 08 015 26330 08 018 15100 00 015 26330 08 018 16100 00 018 16100 00 018 16100 00 018 16100 00 018 16100 00 002 13740 53 002 13745 95 000 10084 71 000 10085 71 000 10084 62 001 10099 01 038 14220 00 038 14680 00 038 14470 00 038 15470 10 038 14100 10 038 15330 10 038 15100 10 038 14100 10 038 14100 10 038 15470 10 038 15150 10 038 15470 10 036 10000 00 240 10002 00 240 10001 00 240 10004 00 240 10003 00 205 00010 13 220 01712 01 252 00010 41 369 0103 1 00 402 00007 XX Description Ref IPN Cap Cer 0805 330n 5 10v X7r Cap Cer 0805 330n 5 10v X7r Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 Cap Cer 0805 330n 5 10v X7r Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r 10 Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r 10 Description IC 741V4053 Mux Demux Tssop16 IC 741V595 8BIT SHIFTREG TSSOP Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 Xstr SMD BC857BW PNP SOT323 Xstr BC846S Dual SOT363 NPN Diode BAV99w Dual Ss Res 0603 2k2 1 16w 5 Res 0603 6k8 1 16w 5 Res 0603 4k7 1 16w 5 Res 0603 47k 1 16w 196 Res 0603 1k0 1 16w 1 Res 0603 33k 1 Res 0603 10k 1 16w 1 Res 0603 1k0 1 16w 1 Res 0603 1k0 1 16w 1 Res 0603 47k 1 16w 196 Res 0603 15K 196 WD
202. 10 038 16100 10 038 14220 00 038 13560 10 038 13390 10 038 16100 10 002 10078 00 002 10014 85 220 02122 02 Control Head Interface PCB IPN 220 02122 02 Description Res 0603 560R 1 10w 1 Res 0603 100R 1 10w 1 Res 1206 27 0e 1 Res 1206 27 0e 1 Res 0603 100R 1 10w 1 Res 0603 10e 1 Res 0603 10k 1 10w 1 Res 0603 150k 1 Res 0603 330k 1 10w 1 Res 0603 2k7 1 10w 5 Res 0603 560R 1 10w 1 Res 0603 100k 1 10w 1 Res 0603 2k2 1 10w 5 Res 0603 560R 1 10w 1 Res 0603 390R 1 10w 1 Res 0603 100k 1 10w 1 IC SMD MC78MO5CDT5v Reg0 5a IC ADM1485 RS485 Transc S08 PCB MFx Single Rmt Head I F Mechanical Parts for the Control Head Interface and the Torso Interface 219 02882 00 219 02914 00 219 02918 00 302 10062 00 302 10063 00 316 06842 00 316 06843 00 349 02062 00 402 00020 00 302 05263 00 302 50002 00 353 05007 00 354 01052 00 349 00060 00 Remote Cable Parts 219 02918 00 240 02 158 00 360 02022 00 Loom Control Head TMA Loom MFX Remote Head Cbl Rmt Ctrl Hd Kit Brkt Remote Head TM8200 Brkt PCB Remote TM8200 Body Pnl Rear TM8200 MF2 Pnl Frt Remote TM8200 MFO Scrw M3 8 T T P T ContiR F Inst TMAA03 16 Sngl Hd Rmt Brkt U Thumb Scrw TMA Bung RJ45 MFO Wshr Rubber M4 19 1 0 S A Fsnr Bush PSM SHK B MA Ins Scrw 10GX20 SLFDRL Hex Poz TMA Cbl Rmt Ctrl Hd Kit comprising Conn Shld RJ45 Shortbody Plg Grommet Mic TMA TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007
203. 100 TM8200 Service Manual Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency in hertz Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency in hertz Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 If the power and current are still skewed go to Task 10 If the power and current are correct remove the test lead and test capacitor the resolder the coupling capacitors in position and go to Task 33 PIN switch and LPF require checking Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 287 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 10 Repair Output Matching Circuitry 288 1 2 If the checks in Task 9 show that the power and current are still skewed there 1s a fault 1n the output matching circuitry If not already done remove the PAF TOP can Check for faulty shorted or misplaced components in the circuit between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310 see Figure 11 6 Repair any fault Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 11 2 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Note the RF output powe
204. 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 8 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 9 Measure the RF output power This should be RF output power more than 70W VHF more than 60W UHF more than 52W 700MHz more than 58W 800 MHZ 10 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 11 Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 12 Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 13 Ifthe power in both the above cases is now correct go to Step 14 If it does not the circuitry of the PIN switch is suspect go to Task 34 14 Remove the test lead and test capacitor resolder the blocking capacitors in position and go to Task 35 332 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 27 Circuitry under the PIN TOP can and points for attaching the test lead and test capacitor for test capacitor J mounting point Locke deco E d mounting point for test capacitor test pad
205. 13 14 If not already done remove the DIRC TOP can Remove the coupling capacitors C348 C349 C350 see Figure 12 16 Solder one terminal of a test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 12 16 Mount the capacitor vertically Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111 DLI C17 Murata 1210 or the equivalent The value of the capacitor depends on the frequency band of the radio gm A4 100pF m DI CO D1 680pF m Ha Hp 82pE Solder a 50 2 test lead to the PCB Solder the outer sheath in the position shown in Figure 12 16 and solder the central wire to the other terminal of the test capacitor Connect the test lead to the test set Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 Table 12 9 B1 Table 12 10 CO Table 12 11 D1 or Table 12 12 H5 H6 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF output power This should exceed 35 W RF output power more than 35W Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 Table 12 9 B1 Table 12 10 C0 Table 12 11 D1 or Table 12 12 H5 H6 Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 If the power measured in both the above cases exce
206. 17 3 1 Parts Required The following table describes the parts required to install a line interface board in a radio The parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in Figure 17 2 and are used to connect to the radio s external options connector Table 17 5 Line interface installation parts required p pese es 9 p pese ee 3 p eem a po pemus ee IT s emus OS 0 Dese Fee 7 1 Contact Technical Support for the exact Internal Part Number TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 473 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 3 2 Installation Procedure 1 Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity For detailed disassembly instructions refer to Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 The circled numbers in the following instructions refer to items in the diagram on page 475 2 Remove the top cover and lid from the radio to access the options cavity Remove the external options connector bung Q if it is fitted On the inside of the radio lid place the foam seal over the external options connector cavity 4 With the top side of the line interface board facing the radio lid guide the external options connector into the external options connector cavity Screw the external options connector to the radio lid using the two screw lock fasteners Tighten the fasteners to a torque of 0 9 N m 8lbf in be tightened correctly befo
207. 27 R28 R29 R30 R31 R32 R33 R34 R35 R36 R37 R38 R39 IPN 038 16100 10 038 15270 20 038 15470 10 038 15680 10 038 14220 10 038 15270 20 038 15470 10 038 14220 10 038 16470 00 038 15470 10 038 13220 10 038 13220 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 14220 10 038 14220 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 Description RES 0603 100k 196 1 10W RES 0603 27k 0 596 1 10W RES 0603 47k 196 1 10W RES 0603 68k1 1 1 10W RES 0603 2K2 1 1 10W RES 0603 27k 0 596 1 10W RES 0603 47k 196 1 10W RES 0603 2K2 1 1 10W RES 0603 470k 5 1 10W RES 0603 47k 196 1 10W RES 0603 220R 1 1 10W RES 0603 220R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 196 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 2K2 1 1 10W RES 0603 2K2 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ref R40 R41 R42 SA SK201 SK202 SK203 U1 IPN 038 13220 10 038 13220 10 038 10000 00 938 10001 01 240 00016 00 240 00016 00 240 00016 00 002 10623 00 220 02180 02 369 02054 00 302 40079 00 TMAAO3 34 Extender Box Description RES 0603 220R 196 1 10W RES 0603 220R 196 1 10W RES 0603 OR 596 1 10W SMT Alloy Lead Free sac CONN RJ45 shld 8P8C Ipfl RA TH CONN RJ45 shld 8P8C Ipfl RA TH CONN RJ45 shld 8P8C Ipfl RA TH IC AD623 OP Amp R R MSOP8 PCB ex
208. 3 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Received Signal Strength Indication Front End AGC Control Noise Blanker A4 B1 bands only The RSSI is calculated in the FPGA and DSP and can be passed as an analog voltage to the internal options interface and the external auxiliary interface To obtain an accurate estimate of the RSSI over the signal level and frequency it 1s necessary to calibrate the AGC characteristic of the receiver and the front end gain versus the receive frequency The receiver has a front end AGC circuit to enable it to handle large receiver signals with minimal receiver distortion This 1s very important for the correct operation of the THSD modem Tait High Speed Data It enables THSD to maintain residual BER of lt 107 The front end AGC is controlled by an algorithm which monitors the RSSI and configures the DAC to turn on the front end attenuation via the receive pin diode of the PIN switch If the frequency band is between 66 and 174 MHz a noise blanker can be selected to remove common sources of electrical interference such as vehicle ignition noise The noise blanker functions by sampling the RF input to the receiver for impulse noise and momentarily disconnecting the first LO for the duration of the impulse The response time of the noise blanker is very fast tens of nanoseconds and is quicker than the time taken for the RF signal to pass through the front end hardware so that the LO is disabled
209. 3 The voltage should be point 2 on R350 5V DC 6 If the voltage measured in Step 5 is correct go to Step 7 If it is not replace Q308 see Figure 12 3 and conclude with Step 8 n Remove the heat transfer block from the board Replace Q311 situated on the bottom side of the board next to the power connector Replace the heat transfer block and conclude with Step 8 8 Repeat Task 1 to confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 3 If the supply from the power connector is correct check the 9 V DC supply 9V Power Supply 1 Enter the CCTM command 326 1 to set the transmitter power level very low 2 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 3 Measure the supply voltage between the 9V0 TX test point and the GND test point see Figure 12 4 supply 9VO TX 9 0 0 5V DC 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the supply measured in Step 3 is correct go to Task 4 in Transmitter RF Power on page 352 If it is not the 9V regulator IC601 and the associated switching circuitry Q603 are suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 348 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 4 Test points for checking the 9V supply the forw
210. 3 7 Repair any fault 9 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 162 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 414 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 8 Circuitry in the vicinity of the cpc Top can UHF shown SYN TOR G ROOT C558 R500 C448 443 L412 L411 C442 44 n43Q Junction of C708 and C732 dg R703 RI AJ u c2 c DS je Wi L 07 Task 11 If the level shifter 1s not faulty check the signal at the QN test point This will Check QN Test Point ascertain whether the digital board CODEC 1 or the receiver is at fault 1 Use the programming application to find the frequency selected for channel 1 2 Apply a strong on channel signal 3 Check that a sine wave is present at the QN test point there is access through a hole
211. 3 of IC303 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 Note that the probe impedance may affect these measurements 6 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 7 The voltages measured in Step 5 should be as given in Table 11 7 If they are go to Step 10 If the FWD PWR voltage 1s incorrect go to Step 8 If the REV PWR voltage is incorrect go to Step 9 Table 11 7 Voltages at 1C303 at maximum power 70 W for VHF and 60W for UHF Voltage V mag Pin 3 REV PWR Pin 5 FWD PWR Frequency band Frequency MHz 8 Remove the DIRC TOP can Check the components of the directional coupler see Figure 11 16 and go to Step 11 9 Remove the DIRC TOP can Check D305 and R3035 VHF or R383 UHF and K5 band see Figure 11 16 If there is no fault the PIN 308 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 11 12 switch or LPF or both are suspect go to Task 33 If there is a fault go to Step 11 In the buffer amplifiers check R340 see Figure 11 9 for VHE Figure 11 17 for UHE and Figure 11 19 for the K5 band and R341 see Figure 11 17 Figure 11 18 and Figure 11 19 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks Replace IC303 if none of the other components 1s faulty see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final
212. 312 NY TY aq WO gl SdAlOlOHd YTO LOOZ 0 9T 6T UNC SNL 31VG ATIA LOa4A8Z NYIN ad TN ss SHONVHO NOISUG AWOS VO V 0 7LIZCO OZC LONNLOZ MY TY d TW L NIMGQH 20d 02d 2008120 FHS WEO ATANAN INVIHVA NSSI NdI dau IER 0v2 E G 0 2 ZT6SL WAP OT L LOI E B Ino AIO NO HO 4 3001 Z16SL MAYA E aM 8 9 M LOI ANT 7 anaq LTA 12 63 G8ySW qu I X001 ANOOT jl 001 gu T MOOT e e NI QAY OIN e zie OTA 9 2 ER S aN EZA 4d00T H X001 0r gc TRR qu MS 8A T l Kei 082 3d001 i Lao daw XH r ANOOT REPAS PN CO Tyo 8 2 V uh PRI 66AVE am 92S98022 1Vd Sd ota TAY 66AVE 9992 E PUY EMV CNV GO OT ANT d 6 AI b Ed cs D S INO 4340 NO HO Se ZT6SL ANT g anoa LOI TR g8pSu Gu ANOOT 001 9 ap _ 89 Als A NI On OIN m 94 SL ONE ANT hz LI Ww qu e eu c A pe MS 8A T iNT TWOOT A8 Z EE Ino anw xu a MS 8ACT el GO 70 799 oZz e e spu ES 077 ll LpA 3d001 ES CUgUS ZEO F r OT 6 PICENO 1 A i 430 NO HO GM ANT anoa K L ggpsu qu 001 001 9 x gc daw OIM gu vu SL ANSY E L egre aa AI 6 W vu QM v89XZ7u ANOOT s MS 8ACT Qu 8d 3T9 T any XX du XI EE 1 TOZAS 6u TWOOT A8 E amp E ANT AT S KA AL ANT ven pa TH m zs L1 Gru TM YT Ee DUEMS 5 eta Ti 7 e Se ES I 3 gLv92H E S de TD T K L e Bh AL aNd aNd AST l Z IC 022 LA l l oN HNI AND LY 5d v9SXZg An WHE Id ANOOT ANAL A8 c
213. 38 13220 10 038 14120 10 038 10000 00 038 10000 00 038 13390 10 038 13390 10 036 00000 01 038 12100 10 038 15100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 036 00000 01 036 00000 01 038 10000 00 002 19120 00 002 12523 17 002 13483 00 219 02882 00 219 02950 00 220 01720 05 302 10063 01 302 50002 01 316 06843 00 346 10030 08 349 02062 00 Description RES 0603 100k 1 1 10W RES 0805 560R 1 1 8W RES 0603 82k 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 22k 1 1 10W RES 0603 220R 1 1 10W RES 0603 1k2 1 1 10W RES 0603 OR RES 0603 OR RES 0603 390R 1 1 10W RES 0603 390R 1 1 10W RES 1206 OR 5 0 25W RES 0603 10R 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 1206 OR 5 0 25W RES 1206 OR 5 0 25W RES 0603 OR IC TS912ID Cmos R2R Opamp IC LM3171 Reg T0252 0 5a IC XCVR RS485 LTD SLEW RATE 3V Loom Control Head TMA CBL MFX Remote Kit Gnd Lead PCB MFX Radio Remote Brkt PCB Remote TM8200 Body Bung RJ45 MFO Pnl Frt Remote TM8200 MFO Scrw P T Wn1412 Kc30x08 Zbc Scrw M3 8 T T P T ContiR Ref PCB Circuit R24 2 82 F5 R30 1 F2 D10 R31 1 E2 E9 R40 2 N2 F11 R103 1 G2 E7 R104 1 G2 E7 R203 1 J2 E6 R207 1 J2 E6 R209 1 H2 E6 R213 1 H2 E6 R820 2 L2 H10 R821 1 N2 G10 R900 1 F2 E9 R901 1 E2 E9 R910 2 2 E10 R911 2 L2 F11 R912 1 H2 E5 R915 2 M2 G12 R916 2 N2 F11 R917 1 N2 F11 R918 2 M2 G11 R920 1 D2 J4 U1 1 K1 G8 J8 J
214. 4 05 ignition sense kit provides a mating plug for the radio s auxiliary connector The four metre length of cable from pin 4 AUX_GPI3 of the plug connects to the vehicle s ignition signal Once the kit is installed the ignition signal is used to power up and power down the radio so that when the vehicle ignition is turned off the radio turns off When the vehicle ignition is turned on the radio 1s programmed to either turn on or to return to the state that it was in when the vehicle ignition was turned off the bung for the auxiliary connector 1s removed Therefore Important The radio does not meet the IP54 protection standard once once the TMAA04 05 ignition sense kit is installed mount the radio in areas where it 1s not exposed to water dust or other environmental hazards 30 1 Hardware Configuration for Ignition Sense The radio hardware link LK2 on the top side of the main PCB must be fitted for ignition sense operation The following table and diagram describe the configuration options Note LK2 is fitted by default Table 30 1 Configuration of hardware links for ignition sense Voltages required for TMAA04 05 Ignition signal 0 9V or floating off Link required LK2 in factory default 30 2 Installation Ignition signal gt 5V on Ignition sense tolerant to 34V maximum 1 Connect the auxiliary connector plug to the radio s auxiliary connector 2 Connect the ignition
215. 4 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 With the intensity set to high check the signals at pins 2 B1 and 5 B2 of Q2 Q2 pin 2 B1 GND Q2 pin 5 B2 GND If any of these signals are incorrect the FPGA 1s faulty and the con trol head board must be replaced 3 Check the signals at pins 6 C1 and 3 C2 of Q2 Check the signals at pins 1 E1 and 4 E2 of Q2 Q2 pin 6 C1 3 3V Q2 pin 3 Ge 3 3V Q2 pin 1 E1 3 3V Q2 pin 4 E2 3 3 V If any of these signals are incorrect Q2 is faulty 4 Check the resistors R607 611 and R613 for shorted or open circuits R607 3 3kQ R611 2 2kQ R613 1kQ Figure 14 8 PCB layout of the keypad backlighting circuitry Te top side z ce ba qm m 2 0609 Q603 RO Fi 8 B z E E C102 re R617 R28 B E E S mu m0 um NR Lu R35 top side EE ONE ua mp cae e El m zm RER R626 Berg top side bottom side 5603A 560 1B Jg Jm S605B TR S605A 5603B S607A TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 435 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 8 On Off Key Faulty When battery power 13 8V is applied to the radio a press of the oNorr key will create an active low signal cH ON OFF back to the radio body to
216. 5 U2 1 D2 J4 U3 1 F2 E8 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Board Layout Ir TI o Ge 049 MUS B KE S IL Tele m a SS B Oe ed EN bends ds R916 cO oo Do ex iid m L L 1 e AE alam a K SE 5 O iss K y y Ra E Gon og o ECH Ss 5 e R910 a 19 Dt Gg U L029 ily SCH 20 D3 e a x EU x 2 SI R23 Ee ra Dk ZN DR D u ET a 3 U3 gt rop E2 R14 E R901 E Rial R19 a Rg m NI c TM Ca B 99 BADMARK B 8 IHVIGVH e 8 IPN 220 01720 05 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 559 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 ircuit Diagram C T 40 T a gez E S Doch o a BEES SINSWONSWS EEN NAMUN
217. 5 front end refer to These block diagrams show the hardware modules integrated with the software modules hardware transmitter receiver CODEC and audio RISC processor on FPGA of digital board custom logic on FPGA of digital board DSP on digital board The receive path consists of three major functional parts RF hardware digital baseband processing audio processing and signalling TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 16 Transceiver operation XL pue XM 10 SODA 21eJedes ase aay JHN 104 a2eLajul ula1s gs A UMous uoneinbuuoo JHA Z uoisjoAuo2 Boeue 0 121161Q N UMOUS jou Jexue q SION 1 UOISISAUOD e1iibip o1 bo euy Va VPE AES Pa L I S ON Man 1 i 9J0MpJeH N L I 041005 i J nini Uer rc m e n m mm E Um d snm qe t m Un nee en K dwey N L 10SS9201d SIM d 1 ZHIN POL pueq vv Emmmmmm 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 d ZHN 000 L OXOL L 033005 fouanbaJJ OT EE i i i i H i H uonezi enb3 I i i i i i i i LI LI L LI LI l L LI LI L LI LI I LI LI LI i LI L i 1 peaH 1 set 04300 VA n juiod o du a O l i i L L LI LI App I 1 i See 09 9JeMpJeH d
218. 55 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display 453 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 15 7 Speaker Faulty If the speaker functions only intermittently or the audio level is low 1 2 Replace the speaker Check the continuity from the speaker connector SK2 to pin 17 SPK and pin 18 SPK of the control head connector SK1 see Figure 15 2 If there is no fault go to Step 3 If there is still a fault go to Volume Control Faulty Reconnect the control head loom test the speaker to confirm the removal of the fault and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 15 8 Volume Control Faulty 454 If the volume control works only intermittently works only at full volume or does not work at all L Disconnect the control head loom OR Check that the resistance between pins 1 and 2 of the volume control potentiometer RV1 varies linearly between about 0Q and 10kQ see Figure 15 2 If 1t does go to Step 3 If it does not go to Step 6 3 Replace the speaker 4 Re assemble the control head Reconnect the control head loom Confirm the removal of the fault and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 5 Remove the control head board 6 Replace the potentiometer RV1 See Figure 15 1 Z Re assemble the control head board Reconnect the control head loom Confirm the removal of the fault and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display
219. 7 and 8 11 Fit the power connector seal 8 144 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Fitting the Main The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 3 on Board Assembly to the Chassis page 139 This figure shows the gt 25 W configuration 1 With the gt 25W radio the L shaped gap pad WU must be replaced gt 25W each time the main board assembly is removed from the chassis Remove any residue of the old gap pad from the audio PA area on the underside of the main board refer to Figure 5 6 on page 143 and the L shaped ridge of the chassis refer to Figure 5 3 on page 139 Peel off the transparent film on one side of the gap pad and evenly press the gap pad on the L shaped ridge of the chassis Peel off the transparent film on other of the gap pad 2 If the thermal paste on the heat transfer block or the underside of the main board has been contaminated new thermal paste must be applied Remove any residue of the old thermal paste from both contact surfaces Use Dow Corning 340 silicone heat sink compound IPN 937 00000 55 remain embedded in the paste The paste needs to be C Important Ensure that no bristles from the brush come loose and completely free of contaminants Use a stiff brush to apply 0 1 cm of thermal paste on the heat transfer block refer to Figure 5 3 on page 139 Use a stiff brush to ap
220. 8 to the Opposite connector 3 Reinstall the control head interface board 1 Position the control head assembly in the remote U bracket and position it for a good viewing angle Note Adjusting the contrast on the control head display may also improve its readability 2 Screw the remote control head assembly into position using the two thumb screws provided 26 1 7 Mounting the U Bracket and Installing the Radio Body Mounting the Install the U bracket on any sufficiently flat surface using selt drilling screws U Bracket and washers Caution When drilling holes in the vehicle check that drilling at the selected points will not damage existing wiring petrol tanks fuel lines brake pipes or battery cables Important When mounting the U bracket check whether the mounting surface needs to be reinforced C Important Install the U bracket using at least four screws 1 If the U bracket is being mounted over a curved surface bend the U bracket tabs slightly to match the surface shape 2 Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or bushings in the holes Important Check that the U bracket is not distorted when the screws are tightened 3 If precise positioning is required predrill 3mm 1 8 inch pilot holes for the self drilling screws Reduce the hole size in metal that is less than 1 mm 1 32 inch thick TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 549 Tait Elect
221. 8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 33 TMAA 10 02 Handset The TMAA10 02 handset provides the user with privacy and also improves the audio quality in noisy environments The handset uses a dynamic microphone capsule therefore the radio control head must support dynamic microphone operation For example a TMAA02 06 support kit for dynamic microphones must be fitted to control head TMAC20 0T in Oa button locking eg When your radio receives a call and the handset is mounted in cradle radio to its locking cradle the radio unmutes and you can hear the call handset cord n mounting from your radio s internal speaker and from any connected plate remote speaker If you remove the handset from its cradle when you receive a call the radio unmutes and you can hear the call from your radio s internal speaker from any connected remote speaker and from the handset earpiece a Using private handset mode the radios internal and external speakers grommet are muted and the call can only be heard from the handset earpiece 33 1 Installation 33 1 1 Handset Wiring The circled numbers in the following instructions refer to items 1n the diagram in Table 33 1 1 Drill a hole in the chosen mounting surface for the radio to handset cord and pass the cord through the hole 2 Prepare the radio to handset cord as follows m Cut the radio to handset cord to the required l
222. 8V speaker to pin 2 red flying lead connector SR power connector speaker to pin 3 rear view power connector Connecting the To connect the remote speaker plug the flying lead into the housing socket Remote Speaker To disconnect the speaker release the locking mechanism and unplug the flying lead 598 TMAA10 03 and TMAA10 06 High Power Remote Speakers TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 35 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit The TMAA10 04 remote PTT kit and the TMAA10 05 hands free kit plug into the radio s auxiliary connector Both kits use the remote electret microphone to replace communication through the usual rugged microphone wee remote PTT TMAA10 04 The rugged microphone can still provide hookswitch extension lead audlay Operation if this is required remote PTT connector plug The TMAA10 04 kit uses a conveniently mounted remote PTT key for PTT operation When the remote PTT is activated the remote microphone 1s used for communlication remote microphone There are three mounting options for the remote x A a microphone and an extension lead 1s provided for the remote a S D PTT in the TMAA10 04 kit remote microphone mounting options tection standard Care must be taken when a radio with a TMAA10 04 or TMAA10 05 kit installed 1s being operated 1n an environment where
223. A10 05 Hands Free Kit 601 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 35 4 Radio Programming for the TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit VOX Settings in the PTT Form VOX Settings in the Key Settings Form The following table shows the settings required in the PTT form of the programming application For detailed instructions on how to configure a radio for VOX operation refer to the section Configuring VOX in the online help of the programming application Table 35 3 VOX settings in the PTT form External PTT 2 or VOX tab EPTT2 or VOX Inhibit Inhibit PTT When Emergency Active Inhibit PTT Transmission When Mic on Hook dear 1 These are recommended settings only In the Key Settings form of the programming application one of the function keys on the control head can be programmed to activate VOX Table 35 4 VOX settings in the Key Settings form Function Key Actions VOX Activation 1 Select the required function key 35 5 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the remote PTT and hands free kits on the radios auxiliary connector and shows the interface between the kits and the radio Table 35 5 Auxiliary connector pins and signals 13V8 SW power to hands free microphone pre amplifier 10 AUX_GPIO4 reference voltage to pre amplifier regulator AUX GPI1 PTT signal from hands free kit AUX MIC AUD microphone audio to the radio AGND analogue ground S O D 9
224. AA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 603 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 35 7 PCB Information 35 7 1 TMAA10 04 TMAA10 05 Parts List PCB IPN 220 01711 01 Ref IPN Description Ref IPN Description C2 015 26330 08 Cap Cer 0805 330n 5 10v X7r C3 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 C4 015 26330 08 Cap Cer 0805 330n 5 10v X7r C6 015 26100 08 Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v C7 015 26100 08 Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Q1 000 10084 71 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 Q2 000 10085 71 Xstr SMD BC857BW PNP SOT323 Q3 000 10084 71 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 Q4 000 10084 71 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 R1 038 14220 00 Res 0603 2k2 1 16w 5 R3 038 14390 10 Res 0603 3k9 196 R4 038 15470 10 Res 0603 47k 1 16w 1 R6 038 15330 10 Res 0603 33k 1 R13 038 15100 10 Res 0603 10k 1 16w 1 R16 038 15470 10 Res 0603 47k 1 16w 1 R17 038 15150 00 Res 0603 15k 1 16w 5 R18 038 15100 10 Res 0603 10k 1 16w 1 R19 038 15100 10 Res 0603 10k 1 16w 1 219 00305 00 cable 220 01711 01 Pcb HFree 240 06010 18 252 00010 72 402 00006 01 Conn 15w Hood Cvr Drng MDJ15 Mic Electret Unidir 2 5mm Plg F Inst TMAA10 04 TMAA10 05 Eng TMAA10 04 Remote PTT only 236 00001 00 Sw Ptt W Cbl amp Strap 604 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 35 7 2 Pre Amplifier Board Layout CY CJ ed
225. AD aua oce eh qa Roe EEN 644 ds 430 ILS Ehe E E EE EE ER 431 14 6 Fonction Key LEDs or Status LEDs Faulty es s e eee eaae ELE E 432 laf Keypad Bach tme Paal uisu dede cee ce eee de dis e e dh dde ERE 434 pL We te ee PME 4234 4235 44 3638 4 400 3 9 4470 98 E ded 436 14 9 Function Scroll or Selection Keys Faulty NEE EE u AE 438 IS ID Ser PA cs dr de icd te beta dca iol d dd eq aH d 440 DLII Vonne ona PON ua du 1 140 EK de OR ROC ESE SESE CRURA caa 442 or L M Pu a u 294 430069 3 54 21099 9 4 o3 v 444 SRI 439 ee T 444 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 15 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display 447 15 1 Display Faulty but nt LEDs a aea uade ARS OR RAEXAESRA RAPERE d 450 ID SORS LBDREENNIEO 2242943794 SR KEE S G4 e PIA PRESA E 451 194 PL FU on ot es dm ed eee oo ee XR 452 1544 Display asd AW LEDS Pay A A EE EE E eed e OR oe e A 452 155 Some DU Mot ROC POUID uu aee das tesuaeszr beed43d P Re sx4 2 453 15 0 AD Reve PRINS on ERA KE cn este TS died Prae dod a 453 a AU EE EE RE RE E TOIT e ee EE 454 ee TR SE s ok oh vire de ea 4 54454 RET ae S 454 IB Bae Paes A a Z EEE KES REE EERE TEE FLERE EO E ESS 455 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 105 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 106 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 General Information This chapter describes techniques and processes and provides other
226. ADO switched 13 8V supo fom the redo GI aoea O S 17 6 Line Interface Board Application The following diagram shows the control of two radios operated together crossband or repeater linked Figure 17 3 Two radios connected as a repeater crossband link op TXD 185p Txp op pap 1 RS 422 RS 232 RX LU pp IOP_GPIO1 RS 422 RX IOP GPIO1 op GPlo2 2 o 15iop Gpio2 IOP_GPIO3 i KEYING i 11 iop Gpio3 Op GPIO4 PTT_IN 12 op GPlo4 See BUSY GATE Op GPIOG 13V8 SW LINE IN AUD_TAP_OUT TAP LINE IN LINE OUT AUX_MIC_AUD LINE OUT internal internal options options connector connector connector connector 478 TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 7 Line Interface Board Specifications Input Voltage 10 8V to 16VDC Operating Temperature Range 10 C to 60 C ambient DC Input Current lt 40 mA total 13 8V supply Line Input Sensitivity 60 deviation 20dBm to 6dBm 600Q Line Output Level 60 deviation 20dBm to 6dBm 600Q Line Impedance 600Q Return Loss 300Hz to 3kHz 20dB relative to 600Q Line Output Filter Response stopband 2 pole 12dB octave f gt 4kHz 6 pole 36dB octave f gt 4kHz 17 7 1 Radio With Line Interface Board Receiver Line Output Receiver Frequency Response Receiver Processed Bandwidth 300Hz to 3kHz standard 400Hz to 3kHz CTCSS Response 1 3dB relative to 6dB
227. AET QW ES TE anw xw qu ER ado ut x AdOLZ suele 58x74 MOOT T AL g S g9 TAPER ZPO oc ed OCH EC JI Ate TANET Su TdL ANT TTA ANT VSXZH MOOT I s l 077 MLD 012 9d pu ae iis GE ER SE X001 ae T E gu UM S12 LO E e T Ta d PED ant VOELSTNS Ge AOE 692 ki Sd ozz AdOLZ LT MOOT adi Zz PA 0229 NT ETA x LZ Ivu E 4 aS MS 8A T ozz G Ss on HNI l ZT6SL MOOT ANOOT nc y A8 Z ANOLP Opel 921 E er TTO 1490847 a OL A lP AF Alb L ino EOL wr V I is qe fes KE cial L 0 ANOOT ANOOT ANOOT Ay 979 Dap 2 A 8 0 2 Dap E Pens ccs AY cd 66AVE MVrSIVH ed 1V2O0T1 A8 TV2OT1 A8 TV201 A8 d ea 66AVE TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAAO3 34 Extender Box 572 29 TMAAO4 04 Crossband Linking Cable The TMAA04 04 crossband linking cable is used to connect the auxiliary connectors of two radios configured as a crossband repeater Components in the TMAA04 04 are optomized for voice applications tion standard once the auxiliary connector Important The radio does not meet the IP54 protec rubber bung has been removed and a cross band linking cable has been installed Care must be taken when the radio is being oper ated in an environment where there is water dust or other environmental hazards 29 1 Installation 1 Remove the rubber bung that covers the auxiliary connector on each of the radios 2 Plug each end of
228. ATUS LEDs function key LEDs and LCD display The information conveyed by the STATUS LEDs 1s listed in Table 4 11 The behaviour of the function key LEDs depends on the way the function keys are programmed The LCD display normally displays channel and user information or error messages For more information on the LCD display during normal operation refer to the user s guide The error messages are listed in Table 6 1 on page 160 Audible indications are provided in the form of different tones emitted from the speaker The information conveyed by the tones is given in Table 4 12 on page 133 Table 4 11 Visual indications provided by the STATUS LEDs Transmit The radio is transmitting LED flashes 1 The transmit timer is about to expire 2 The radio has been stunned Green Receive and LED is on There is activity on the current channel although it might monitor not be audible LED flashes 1 The radio has received a call with valid special signaling 2 The monitor has been activated 3 The squelch override has been activated Amber The radio is scanning a group of channels for activity LED flashes The radio has detected activity on a certain channel and scanning has halted on this channel 132 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 4 12 Audible indications One short beep 1 After power up Radio is locked PIN is required 2 On power down Radio is off 3 On
229. Adare 2022 4 BT 128 A 1 1noo 1328 T299 E 8 Tc gt t Gras E 2 CNS q c reet Lno tatea inos 10S 12 0 H E 8 L o SES Kat e ECH ask NOAHS ANEN BL T n TELT L3 c lt gt S Mar Tee rn PS2 E T NIGO dk8 EE ats ug g 30 RET Y J0 HOLIY SN N9 jo JINIS HU E sented 5294 9494 S Se AdS HO BN aa 2 2190 e GOU H QE23 JNOOT B 3 T NIJS NY m PES Guen OL 39010 dap I ee ge o NIBS dH8 EU dois SR GO 2 7 EIR e lee Se aol LLDT E ni CT T g HIGH Z co HSE as MEM TNI fz MEE TNT ion dag xe a T NI Ma dao et 7 81 TOG HO E DOnd DDA aAA INGO menn TT 1580 ER sa Sas E c UNY ET NId r G any xa 71 2326 EN O Ls LOdd N SI 226 r EE ENER E Ol HlIOd LYOHS zs ML ED oe E Pal Je ads 2 GT TD IdS H3 Jneg g Uc T g Id Ids ME Id de 9 4NOLb T T ene ZBL9 E cr EER AGE s f iod ET H OId5 FO MMM I HI0 Soc Ing s INGOT Bs IDIOT ENE E ele i 199 e Il AE dl Si PE T H EE G Bos 20 dIM On L Et l l l A EN dei Pues P TE VN d30 NO HO U8 PN anoa L Ie x ZN SX a Inaat wc SE ASE ING DEE US HO C JngT Jne g Bet GTS l Qc escas G ed LE TO 2129 TTA BTL L C T SE WE S4 ao S Nd K Ly Ad et J BEN GE OLIS DIN HO ON e AN gt erry ZT S DA VVV NE KU v S VN Zu a ME H IId Ho Bray 30 HIE WEE Qr 3 BILA a de OXI HS d P 2 ATT BNET amp L114 dng Senet anv Sane T g L114 ng 8ne T S NA Hd vs vOXZU V
230. Bracket 527 24 4 Replacing the Radio in the Security Bracket 527 24 5 Disassembline the Security Bracket 4 e444 4400s e x RS 527 240 Retenir ta DID LE Le hide dide CP E ere id ester 528 Installing a Remote Kit 529 nN OG 14933 4 249 9 4 93 8 d 23 2 4 99 4 4 3 4 3 409 4 d edo EES 529 A8 Sre e ri xoc dp dee X epit kdo reu ae 535 25 5 Servicii th Remote Kit Par Louisa bed owe eens RAO Y Rak 536 LP EE ee 15 32 959 924 243019 nait Didi ir Re PERPE 538 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 545 ARI TS 24993 4 32395 44 8 23 8 8x EE 545 e SCU LR he bc dee X e pd XE oh Sep V Aeg CAE RACER E Jed a 551 26 3 Servicing the Remote Control Head Installation Parts 552 DO TUDTA Zeie EE Ne ee El Pace EI EE EP POR UPS 554 TMAAO03 31 Control Head Interface Box 561 enl Inno BOUE 4 4433 433 3 306 4 ded d dod ded canes 562 Zl ILE Bee 4 RARPEPa REA EEN 563 TMAA03 34 Extender Box s be E OON HERE eee 567 SRL Jerta SECA Lun 4 codon y ar dU LEE ESE Ro de ae dd dace 567 P DLBISONEI LL ge y v d RE A dw RE E PV oo des 568 TMAA04 04 Crossband Linking Cable 573 CUL BORD OE ao aes 25462 4 49 ke duci E Ad eed ded eos oes eas 2s 573 292 Paulo PISS a orcum Ora dere CRUNCH eo S 573 29 5 Aeren estin uude d dado d d dede eee OX dl aede de EROR S rds ex Tree HEIN A qe accus do de dde dede E doe E e dei di e ca
231. C3 1D4 L5 F4 1F3 R46 F2 1F9 C23 B2 1C4 L6 C3 1D4 R47 G2 1F10 C24 E4 1E5 L7 D4 1E4 R48 E4 1E10 C25 B2 1D5 L8 C3 1D3 R49 E2 1G10 C26 C2 1D5 L9 C9 1B11 R50 E5 1E10 C27 A3 des L10 D 1B7 R51 C2 1H10 C28 D2 1H5 L11 B9 1B12 R52 F2 1H10 C29 D2 1G5 L12 D2 1H3 R53 F2 1G10 C30 A4 flies L13 D2 1F3 R54 E2 1G10 C31 A4 1E3 L14 E1 1G3 R55 F2 1D10 C32 B4 1D3 L15 D6 1B7 R56 E2 1E11 C33 A4 1D3 L16 D1 1H12 R5 E3 1E11 C34 B4 1D3 L17 D2 1 12 R58 C2 T1ET2 C35 A4 1 2 L18 D2 1G3 R59 C2 1F12 C36 E1 1412 MI Al 1A9 R60 B1 TET2 C37 C1 1312 MT 7 A6 1A9 R61 B2 TET2 C38 D1 1H12 MT3 B9 1A10 R62 C2 1D12 C39 C1 1H12 MT4 G9 1A10 R63 C2 1D12 C40 D1 1G12 MTS G6 1A11 R64 B2 1 12 C41 D1 1G12 MT6 G1 1A12 R65 C2 1F12 C42 D1 1F12 Q1 G5 1F8 R66 C2 1F12 C43 C1 1F12 Q2 E5 1E9 R67 B1 1E12 C44 C1 1E12 Q3 F5 1E10 R68 B1 1E12 C45 B1 EN R1 B4 1C2 R69 C2 1D12 C46 B1 1D12 R2 B3 1H2 R70 C2 1D12 C47 C1 1D12 R3 C3 1H2 R71 B2 EL C48 C1 1D12 R4 B3 1G2 R72 Ab 162 C49 B1 ILS E R5 C3 1G2 R73 D3 1B5 C50 G3 1G9 R6 B3 1G2 R74 A5 1C3 C51 D4 1K7 R C3 162 RL1 F3 1G8 1G9 1B3 C52 A3 1B2 R8 C2 1F2 SK1 B3 1E2 1F2 1C2 1H2 C54 D3 1B5 R9 C3 1F2 1G2 1D2 1J2 C55 D3 1A6 R10 E1 1 12 SK2 D1 1H13 1J13 1613 C56 D3 1B6 R11 E1 1J13 1D13 1E13 1G13 C58 B1 1A9 R12 B3 1G2 1F13 C59 A7 1A9 R13 B3 Ee SPARE1 B8 1B1 C60 B10 1A10 R14 B4 1E3 SPARE2 B8 1B1 Col G10 1A10 R15 B4 LES SPARE3 B7 1B1 C62 G7 1A11 R16 C4 1H4 SPAREA B7 1B1 C63 G1 1A12 R17 D4 1H4 SPARE5 B8 1B1 D1 F9 1B9 R18 C4 1J4 SPARE6 B8 1B1 D2 B2 1C3 R19 D3
232. C618 D606 of the SMPS circuitry see Figure 7 1 as well as 1n the CODEC and interface circuitry Repair any fault and repeat the resistance measurement of Step 4 to confirm the removal of the fault If there 1s no fault go to Step 6 If the fault remains the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 6 Reconnect the 13 8 V supply Press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If the radio fails to power up disconnect the 13 8V supply and go to Step 7 s Measure the resistance of L601 see Figure 7 1 The resistance should be virtually zero If it 1s go to Step 8 If it is not replace L601 Reconnect the 13 8V supply and press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If the radio fails to power up disconnect the 13 8V supply and go to Step 8 8 Remove the CDC BOT can Remove IC603 3 0V regulator and IC604 2 5 V regulator see Figure 7 3 Reconnect the 13 8 V supply and press the ON OFF key If the 3 3V supply is restored go to Task 3 to check each regulator 3 0 V and 2 5 V in turn If the 3 3V supply is not restored continue with Step 9 9 Suspect IC602 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply Replace IC602 with a spare see Figure 7 1 Resolder IC603 and IC604 in position see Figure 7 3 Reconnect the 13 8V supply and press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If the radio fails to po
233. CD temperature sensor 1007 value between 00 0 Reads the LCD temperature sensor and FF 255 1008 LCD heating 1008 0 off switches the LCD heating on and off 1008 1 2 on 1009 Key press 1009 0 off serial output detects and notifies individual key press and 1009 1 on 1010 Volume potentiometer 1010 value between 00 0 reads and notifies the volume potentiometer and FF 255 setting release events 1011 Microphone 1011 0 microphone connector none selects the microphone input source 1011 2 2 covert microphone 424 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 The following CCTM commands are used during the fault finding of the remote control head kit Table 14 2 CCTM commands for fault finding of the remote control head kit CCTM command Entry at keyboard 1012 Remote kit 1012 0 off none turns the audio amplifier on and off 1012 1 on 1013 Mute audio amplifier 10120 2 mute none mutes and unmutes the audio amplifier 1012 1 zunmute 1014 Digital potentiometer 1014 value between 0 and reads the digital potentiometer 255 1017 Audio amplifier gain 1017 x none sets the audio amplifier gain 4 levels where x is the gain 0 to 3 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 425 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 2 Power Supply Faulty 3 3V regulator U1 converts the switche
234. CODEC handles the microphone and speaker signals The digital section communicates with this CODEC via a three wire synchronous serial interface VSFS VSDO and VSDI balls C204 also contains voice band filtering pre amplification and volume control The auxiliary CODEC handles transmitter power control receiver gain control auxiliary audio output and general analog monitoring functions The digital section communicates with this CODEC via a three wire synchronous serial interface ASFS ASDI and ASDO balls The DAC used for receiver gain control IDACOUT ball is a current output type Current to voltage conversion is performed by R238 The full scale output of 1 2 V is amplified by IC201 to approximately 3 V as required by the receiver The audio circuitry performs four functions m output of audio signal for speaker m input of microphone audio signal m input of auxiliary audio signal m output of auxiliary audio signal The sections of the circuitry concerned with these functions are described in the following sections TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 81 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 ejep jenas snouoJupu s lt ejep jenas snouoJupu se try 22e19JU IO CIFCUI jddng J9MOd Block diagram of the CODEC and aud Figure 3 8 jeubip lt p N3 Xd DIO 1S3 SAS NSd 320p 4t bojeue jj 4 sed jeubis NI dV ANY 21 ISSY 20D 1600 d
235. CXO circuitry under the CDC TOP can is faulty Remove the CDC TOP can 4 Locate and repair the fault in the TCXO XL500 and associated components see Figure 9 17 5 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Signals at TP501 and TP502 on page 240 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Figure 9 19 FCL circuitry under the VCXO BOT can VCXO BOT CAN FOR SYN BOT CAN DIGITAL BOARD CDC BOT CAN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 239 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 10 Signals at TP501 and TP502 Introduction Task 37 TP502 Test Point If the VCXO and TCXO outputs are correct the next stage 1s to check the signals at the TP501 and TP502 test points The procedure is divided into three tasks m Task 37 check signal at TP502 m Task 38 check signal at TP501 and ground TP501 if loop is oscillating m ask 39 check signal at TP502 with TP501 grounded These checks will reveal any faults in the mixer and LPF circuitry and any additional fault 1n the VCXO circuitry Check the signal at the TP502 test point to determine if there 1s a fault in the mixer or LPF low pass filter circuitry 1 Use the oscilloscope probe to check the difference frequency at the TP502 test point see Figure 9 18 The signal is SYN CDC FCL and s
236. Can Replacement Transmit Tests Secure the Board Table 11 2 Lowest centre and highest frequencies in MHz Lowest Centre Highest Band frequency frequency frequency B1 G2 H5 H7 K5 The following frequency ranges are reserved worldwide for use as maritime emergency frequencies or by distress beacons m DI band 156 8MHz 375kHz m H5 band 406 0 to 406 1 MHz Do not program the radio with any frequency in the above ranges There are five cans shielding the bulk of the transmitter circuitry m PAD TOP m PAF TOP m DIRC TOP m PIN TOP m LPF TOP To remove any can first remove the board from the chassis In the case of the PAD TOP and PAF TOP cans first detach the heat transfer block from the main board Secure the block again after removing the cans Follow the procedures given in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Replace all cans that have been removed only after repairing the board An exception is the B1 band however where the LPF TOP can must be in place if the transmitter is to operate correctly The following actions need to be taken when carrying out transmit tests m secure the board m ensure the proper antenna load m limit the duration of transmit tests W protect against accidental transmissions m avoid thermal and RF burns These points are discussed in more detail in the following sections Before conducting any transmit tests ensure that the board 1s adequately secured in the chass
237. Control Head The programming connector of the RJ45 control head is an RJ45 socket When the RJ45 control head is connected to the radio body the programming connector uses the following signals Table 2 7 Programming connector pins and signals PRG_RX_AUD Receive audio output 2 13V8 Power supply output Switched off Power when radio body is switched off 3 PRG TXD Asynchronous serial port 3 3V CMOS D Transmit data front view 4 PRG_PTT PTT input from microphone Digital Also carries hookswitch signal B PRG MIC AUD Fist microphone audio input AGND Analog ground Ground PRG RXD Asynchronous serial port Be 3V CMOS Receive data PRG ON OFF Hardware power on software power Digital off input Active low a Can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 45 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 3 9 Programming Connector Blank Control Head The programming connector of the blank control head 1s a 9 way standard density D range plug When the blank control head 1s connected to the radio body the programming connector uses the following signals Table 2 8 Programming connector pins and signals PRG RX AUD _ Receive audio output 2 PRG TXD Asynchronous serial port 3 3V CMOS Transmit data M PRG MIC AUD Fist microphone audio input PRG RXD Asynchronous serial port 3 3V CMOS Rec
238. D 22T 419 IdS H2L es Ki M i 3 Te 130 NO Ho MVV MIS IG IdS HO He vate EE G e v IN 65 Noe ENE EA JATU ui LE IOILdO H2 al A Ge CT OIJ Ho E Od IdS H2L Ap 283 m CYSHS L e On 19g LEALI SS ae desc JO C Q 5 L Of cS Dor EH 6012 CX US LSN d S OP aT ANS HIH S Zoty 22 29 B019 2012 J 8013 g d e se NM e WE o ER TII YOL 2 SYS 5 ansa l V e n EEN 18 G t MN te sarsa dH g 7 oe UD DES S SCC RUE T BaT galo T ae DATES epee ERN CINDY L al ZTT I 29 INO EY ys J E j CN LG HE C S OTTO DIN D DINE SIN HO c D Jg ee AW D H FGOFGS x 8 Se L Ld 7 HO L D CK GENE 22 cat BAET nn 8 OTQ 7 EDIT VY gotta 20 WG da z ee PEE T e e 7 e Zone eo gl NS DE T LTTO RE Ze ool l yyl E es ENS J BTL ang xy L NAVV i acc gel AN Z2Z 2073 8 IVIL ch T Gore i 2E LLL CONC et RR EE TUER A A A SE JM JNOA v L S A P calo c or A E SCHEI MES Em TGT 4 oats goss B GC ps Ge PASZE anz SERES SS sota Y INCA NIA nu Z Z Di o 2 C C AA N T STIS Ac S L ei 1 N GSM V7 L TA 9G lt SATa Lee gt jag P bt Ey L NNGHALVB82H AS TOTO Les T T PA rig Ines C LE eiie nme IAS 4 10h JOH ss KGT e W vata vi EBT ONILNNON ONIINNOW TI O8S6 ENNrd OBSE Ce Bl Eich Sch panes SR e e AAA e e e e A ANM e ETTY CBT ata 541 Installing a Remote Ki Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TM8100 TM82
239. D itself is via two elastomeric strips as described in Control Heads with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display on page 31 There are pads on the board for the seven keys four function keys two channel selection keys and the ON OFF key The device IC4 reads the status of the function and channel selection keys Of the 18 LEDs there are red orange and green STATUS LEDs and four green LEDs for the function keys as well as 11 green LEDs for back lighting one for each key and four for the LCD The four dual switching transistors Q1 to Q4 control the switching of the LEDs the transistors are driven by IC3 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 99 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 16 Block diagram of the control head board with 1 2 or 3 digit display Signal Types 4 analog clock me CH GPIO1 CH GPIO1 dit EM 9 Microphone PTT SE asynchronous Connector nx Aln R32 RX AUD serial data lt GER Protection MIC AUD QUT synchronous Circuitry gt serial data 13V8 SW R11 T GND CH SPI DO CH SPI DO lt Elastomeric Strips LCD GE LCD Driver pm SS e O D1 D2 V Light Pipes Eaa BEER ac LED Lenses LEDs LED Drivers Ke gt 1 0 _ I I I I I I l l l En Control head I o ga options board I tions SES s l 3 e attached via Control TONER connector Control 7777777777 K K a K K a a
240. DAC value x in range 0 to 255 of bias voltage for first PA Set synthesizer on x 1 or off x20 via DIG SYN EN line Set transmit receive switch on x21 or off x 0 via DIG SYN TR SW line TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 341 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Frequency Bands Emergency Frequencies Can Removal Can Replacement Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of the radio the frequency band is given in brackets The frequency band may be referred to as either VHF very high frequency or UHF ultra high frequency or identified by the frequency sub band such as BU or H7 For example RF output power 35W current 8A VHF 9A UHF A definition of frequency bands is given in Defining Frequency Bands on page 131 Table 12 2 Lowest centre and highest frequencies in MHz Lowest Centre Highest Band frequency frequency frequency A4 66 77 88 The following frequency ranges are reserved worldwide for use as maritime emergency frequencies or by distress beacons m B1 band 156 8 MHz 375kHz m D1 band 243MHz 5kHz m H5 band 406 0 to 406 1 MHz Do not program the radio with any frequency in the above ranges There are five cans shielding the bulk of the transmitter circuitry m PAD TOP m PAF TOP m DIRC TOP m PIN TOP m LPF TOP To remove any can first remove the board In the case of the PAD TOP and
241. Descriptions 93 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 13 Block diagram of the digital board TM8200 radios 43V3 1V8 DGND s Trans DIG TX INH d o el mitter Serial L AGND KC I Flash A A AZ DIG CH SPI CLK DIG SYN EN M E DIG CH SPI DO snok mE 2l1 l l1l2 l1 gt ITF CH SPIDI Kee eee ee ee ee eee ee r n e a e e V M0 001 I DIG SYN TR SW mccuen lt lt I DIG SYN FAST I bic CH GPO1 Frequency lt T uw Synthesizer D SYN LATCH 2 F CH PTT ere SYN DIG FREF I p TE CH HOOK ITE ON OFF A A I rrop GPIO1 7 i DSi oo 1 DiG IoP xD I l DIG SYN SPI CLK I pese Fog l V V l DIG AUX GP04 7 P ORXLE H 0 L DIGAUXTXD L maen Receiver Ei 1 1 wrisusidickcm cic Lim cic pemp ___ REN L cn 00 A DIG RX EN Digital Board DIG PSU LATCH v piGwp kick E coc2niGspto H FPGA DIGTXEN E RR L biGsiP EN LIO UE oe pue Loog D a pes EE SES SRAM BE DE DIG DAC LATCH l al a2 Ez GU lt DIG CDC ARSM I SI l Q cxpevrs LE E SCHEED E DiG coc vso II Flash 4 PSU SYS RST coc pi Bsops Pd 2 Memory CDC DIG BSDO I ne ni 17 DIG CDC ASFS Ho A 98 00 Ecc DIG AUD PA EN1 I and l RESET Audio DIG AUD PA EN2 gt DIG CDC RST EM e a in mE
242. E TOP can and if not already done the IF TOP can 2 Check the soldering of all the components of the front end tuning circuitry from C400 to T401 see Figure 10 1 and Figure 10 3 2 Check the IF amplifier bias conditions as in Step 4 and Step 5 of Task 5 4 Check the LNA bias conditions as in Step 4 and Step 5 of Task 8 5 If the checks of Step 2 to Step 4 reveal no fault go to Step 6 If there is a fault repair it and go to Step 7 6 Check the PIN switch and LPF as in Task 31 to Task 33 of Transmitter Fault Finding 725 W on page 267 or Transmitter Fault Finding 25 W on page 341 7 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application 8 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 258 Receiver Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 4 Incorrect RSSI Readings Introduction If the RSSI readings are incorrect the receiver calibration 1s suspect There are four tasks which cover the four types of settings concerned m Task 10 AGC voltage calibration m Task 11 FE tune BPF settings m Task 12 RSSI delta gain m Task 13 AGC delta gain If the receiver is properly calibrated but the fault persists then the receiver sensitivity 1s suspect Task 10 The first settings to check concern the AGC voltage calibration AGC Voltage SEHR 1 In the calibration
243. Electronics Limited November 2007 24 TMAAO3 02 Security Bracket The TMAA03 02 security bracket can be used in place of the standard U bracket in locations where you want to stop opportunistic removal of the radio by a third party or where you want to have a quick release setup that allows you to swap over radios e g leasing situation The security bracket also provides electrical isolation to the radio The parts of the TMAA03 02 security bracket are illustrated in Figure 24 1 Figure 24 1 Parts of the TMAAO03 02 security bracket Mounting rails see and THEIR 66 0 mm TRIO 73 5 mm Pictured Description Quantity 17 security bracket cradle base 1 4 short mounting rails for TM8100 screws M4x25 T T P T ContiR 2 slide locks for attaching short mounting rails to TM8100 radio not pictured 3 slide lock key 5 tall mounting rails for TM8200 self tapping screws 10Gx20 hex screws M4x30 T T P T ContiR poz for fixing security bracket in for attaching tall mounting rails to place not pictured TM8200 not pictured anti vibration washers for self tapping screws not pictured Note D and are pre assembled TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA03 02 Security Bracket 525 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 24 1 Installing the Security Bracket and Radio 24 2 Installation Planning Before installing the security bracket make sure that the site you have chosen for the installation m
244. F or VHF It is made up of Q3501 Q3502 and Q3505 which amplify the signal provided by the frequency synthesizer from its level of 7 to 10dBm up to 24dBm for the frequency bands 136 to 174MHz and 400 to 520M Hz With the 30W 35W radio the discrete component exciter is made up of Q300 and Q303 which amplify the signal provided by the frequency synthesizer from its level of 7 to 10dBm up to 26dBm With the 25 W radio the broadband exciter is a common element in all the bands as it operates across all frequencies from 66 to 520M Hz It is made up of Q300 and Q303 which amplify the signal provided by the frequency synthesizer from its level of 7 to 10dBm up to 24 5dBm for the frequency band from 66 to 530MHz The exciter operates in full saturation thereby maintaining a constant output power independent of the varying input power level supplied by the synthesizer Power Amplifier The power amplifier comprises the driver amplifier Q306 and two paralleled final devices Q309 and Q310 With the 40 W 50 W radio the signal from the exciter is amplified by Q306 to a power level of approximately 2W VHF using a PD55003 and about 3W UHF using a PD55008 The resulting signal is then amplified by Q309 and Q310 to produce a typical output power of 90 W at 155 MHz and 65 W across the UHF band when measured after the series capacitors C348 C349 C350 at the start of the directional coupler With the 30 W 35 W radio the signal from the
245. HF very high frequency or UHP ultra high frequency or identified by the frequency sub band such as BU or H7 The product code label on the radio body will 1dentify the frequency band as described in Product Codes on page 17 A definition of frequency bands is given in Defining Frequency Bands on page 131 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 247 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 1 Introduction Task 1 Determine Extent of Sensitivity Loss 248 Faulty Receiver Sensitivity This section covers the determination of the extent of the receiver s loss of sensitivity Depending on the nature of the fault a reduction in receiver sensitivity of 1 dB 1s often due to a reduction in receiver gain of many decibels It is therefore easier to measure gain loss rather than sensitivity loss Consequently if the receiver sensitivity 1s too low first check the receiver gain The procedure is given in Task 1 below Determine the receiver gain as follows The corresponding loss of sensitivity can then be deduced Depending on the extent of the loss continue with Excessive Loss of Sensitivity on page 250 or Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity on page 255 to rectify the fault 1 Receiver Fault Finding Input an RF signal not necessarily modulated of 90 dBm or 84 dBm with a trigger base radio at the RF connector Enter the CCTM command 378 to measure the receiv
246. I CLK Clock output to control head Digital 3V3 CMOS 17 SPK Speaker audio output for non remote Analog control head Balanced load configuration SPK Speaker audio output for non remote Analog control head Balanced load configuration a Can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 44 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 3 7 Microphone Connector The microphone connector of the control head is an RJ45 socket When the control head is connected to the control head connector of the radio body using the loom provided the microphone connector uses the following eight control head connector signals Table 2 6 Microphone connector pins and signals eet Pa Ste ein Sra MIC_RX_AUD Receive audio output o 2 13V8 Power supply output Switched off Power when radio body is switched off 3 MIC TXD Asynchronous serial port 3 3V CMOS Transmit data front vi TE s 4 MIC PTT PTT input from microphone Also carries Digital hookswitch signal MIC AUD Fist microphone audio input EE AGND Analog ground Analog ground MIC_RXD Asynchronous serial port Receive data 3 3V CMOS MIC_GPIO1 General purpose digital input output Open collector out 3 3V CMOS in a Can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 2 3 8 Programming Connector RJ45
247. IODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE MRA4004T3 1A 400V DIODE SMF36A TVS 36V SOD123FL DIODE SMF36A TVS 36V SOD123FL DIODE SMF36A TVS 36V SOD123FL DIODE SMF36A TVS 36V SOD123FL DIODE BAV99W dual smsig DIODE BAV99W dual smsig IC LM2674 SO8 sw Volt rgltr IC 74AHCTOA Hex inv SOIC14 IND pwr 100uH CDRH6D38 65A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A IND 0603 BLM11 B102S 0 1A Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 R18 R19 R22 R25 R26 R27 R28 R33 R34 R35 R36 R39 R40 R41 R45 R48 R51 R72 R73 RL1 SA SK1 SK2 SPARE 1 SPARE2 SPARE3 SPARE4 SPARE5 SPARE6 SPARE7 SPARE8 U1 IPN 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10010 45 057 10010 45 057 10600 05 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10600 05 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 057 10010 20 000 10305 51 000 10305 51 000 10305 51 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 036 10000 00 036 14680 10 036 14680 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 038 10000 00 036 10000 00 23 10010 00 938 10001 01 240 10000 11 240 0001 1 67 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036 10000 00 036
248. IOP GPO6 lIOP_GPIO6 1B2 3V3 CL 3V3 3 D706 BAV70W ITF_IOP_GPO5 IOP_GPIO5 1B2 Types of Signals The connector and internal signals can be of three types m output lines m input lines B bi directional lines For diagnosing faults in these three cases carry out Task 1 Task 2 or Task 3 respectively Where components need to be replaced to rectify faults refer to Figure 8 2 to Figure 8 4 for the locations of the components These figures show the three areas of the main board where the components of the interface circuitry are situated TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Interface Fault Finding 179 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 8 2 Components of the interface circuitry top side near the CDC roP and IF TOP cans IF TOP CAN CDC TOP CAN Figure 8 3 Components of the interface circuitry top side at the corner
249. IPN 528 TMAAO03 02 Security Bracket TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 Installing a Remote Kit A TMAA03 16 or TMAA03 25 remote kit can be used to install the control head of a graphical display radio remotely from the radio body The diagram below shows the parts used for this installation control head interface eT r eme i gt remote cable torso interface remote U bracket Note Although the torso interface is similar in appearance to the dual RJ45 on the telemetry radio the control head on the telemetry radio cannot be used for remote installation Note The interfaces in the TMAA03 16 or TMAA03 25 remote kit appear similar to the TMAA03 03 TMAC34 0T or TMAC34 1T However the interfaces in the remote kits are not compatible with TMAA03 03 TMAC34 0T or TMAC34 1T control head interfaces 25 1 Installation A ob Warning Mount the remote U bracket with the remote control head assembly and the U bracket with the radio body securely These units must not break loose in the event of a collision Unse cured radio units are dangerous to the vehicle occupants Caution Observe the installation warnings and safety regula tions in the installation procedures of the radio Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to damage from static discharges Refer to ESD Precautions on page 112 for more information Note Torx T10 and T20 screwdrivers
250. Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 599 35 1 VOX Operation TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 599 S ME nir e Ee ee ITI TOTO TTL TOT TOT 600 35 3 Radio Programming for the TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit 601 35 4 Radio Programming for the TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit 602 259 Inte eo i eh dear qood dope ae piede d et ad d 602 dE EE A e ere ee E E e tt 603 SRI PLI E esae ores kx diode RAXES dees E 604 36 TMAA10 07 Desktop Microphone 607 QI LN oS ob eo EE 607 ee TO 2294 4939 9 2 dedic diede ENEE e E bo d d Ue e io qi NE SG 607 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 467 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 468 NO Fe E EE do d dE ded Ed 608 OO E on ea bbe dee RPRRRARFERAATEXRERAEFESS 608 35 9 SS TE Le kee es oe P ERA AERA ERODE EOE d gri en 608 37 TMAA10 08 Desktop Microphone 609 De D tt du dou 609 Bs IMBRE 242 433 33 39 4 3 94 4 9 1 3 45 a E 609 CES er coi EE hae ees eee adsense 610 259 Radio PRO SAN Ped x wA RR cd Fro nas E oe ER RC e ci 610 Old Jeer e adea di geb C ERR CPI ER ORE d e d 611 38 TOPA SV 024 Test Unit s sessssvssssssss 613 sel POSING QEPOD aai 44d ed eR eR EES ee EE 613 due GPs Ly bead oe RAE Ede oe ee NR RASFESEXSY EE 615 200 PLE WON a 29x aX REY EX REA ERATES GR PEG E EE 617 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 TMAAO41 01 Line Interface Board Note D range hood parts
251. LL Power level W Synthesizer 383 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 ec 2 K Mi 0 CH o O gt LL ec Synthesizer Frequency MHz Table 12 12 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the UHF radio H5 and H6 bands Table 12 11 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio D1 band Power level W RF voltages V Ben a N Mi S Fe c un CO o 5 O CH O CH O CH O CH O CH I o LO OM LO On m LO O3 m LO On m LO On m SI OS LO SI SP LY S SP LO S OS LO SI SP Ui Frequency MHz 400 435 470 400 435 470 400 435 470 400 435 470 400 435 470 Power level W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 384 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W Task 26 If the synthesizer output is correct check the output at C313 of the buffer Output of Buffer in Exciter Circuit amplifier in the exciter circuit 1 If not already done remove the PAD TOP can 2 Enter the CCTM command 326 X where X defines the power level selected in Task 25 3 Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency selected in Task 25 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 5 Measure the RF voltage after C313 see Figure 12 14 Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent The required voltage sho
252. LO 9q 25 ae SE cc Ld9084T TI60PSLE ino nt ino LT nr e ii cu T G DOA z T SL AOE e e XAV ING NL Y WOELS INS 2d I TV2O1 A8 MYYGIV MS 8AET er eu Td ANOLE 3d00l1 z Ld Gs ve 29 TO SL e e e MNYGIVG NT BAET n s v Stef ed O0T Ta OT 6 8 L 9 G v THOWd T HOS PLTZO OZZN Ng8IT PLTZO O0ZZ T 49 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAAO3 31 Control Head Interface Box 566 28 TMAAO3 34 Extender Box The TMAA03 34 extender box is used in the installation of extended long run remote radio systems and provides processing and protection of signals over long distances SK201 e GEIER EXTENDER BON SK202 SK203 Not illustrated Extender box mounting washers and screws The TMAA03 34 extender box is used in the following kits m TMAA11 06 TM8250 TM38255 extended remote upgrade kit installation instructions 402 00047 xx m TMAA11 07 TM8250 TM8255 extended remote dual head upgrade kit with a standard microphone installation instructions 402 00052 xx m TMAA11 08 TM8250 TM8255 extended remote dual head upgrade kit with a keypad microphone installation instructions 402 00052 xx 28 1 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used on SK201 SYSTEM Table 28 1 Socket S201 pins and signals m sonne nsum RD 13V8 SW Switched 13V8 supply fr
253. M8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 7 Components between the digital board and the frequency synthesizer FCL TOP CAN VIAS FOR MEASUREMENTS Task 8 If the supply for the charge pump 15 correct check the reference frequency tee input from the FCL to the PLL requency 1 Measure the reference frequency at pin 8 of IC503 see Figure 9 2 pin 8 of IC503 13 012 0 002 MHz and 1 1 0 2 Vp A4 band pin 8 of IC503 2 612 0 002 MHz and 1 1 0 2 Vu 2 If the signal is correct go to Task 9 If it is not go to Step 3 3 Check IC503 see Figure 9 2 Replace C503 if it is suspect 4 Determine if the fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not the FCL is suspect go to Power Supply for FCL on page 234 200 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 9 If the supply for the charge pump and the reference frequency are correct BEER check the DIG SYN EN line input 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Check the DIG SYN EN line at pin 10 of IC503 see Figure 9 2 Enter the CCTM command 334 0 to switch off the synthesizer and measure the voltage at pin 10 pin 10 of IC503 OV DC after entry of CCTM 334 0 Enter the command 334 1 to switch on the synthesizer
254. M8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 1 1 Frequency Bands The radios are available in the following frequency bands 66 to 88 MHz A4 136 to 174MHz B1 174 to 225MHz C0 216 to 266MHz D1 350 to 400 MHz G2 400 to 470 MHz H5 450 to 530MHz H6 450 to 520MHz H7 762 to 870MHz K5 Tx 762 to 776MHz and 850 to 870MHz K5 Rx The frequency bands are implemented by different main boards in the radio body The control heads are identical for all frequency bands 1 2 RF Output Power The radio bodies are available with gt 25 W and 25 W RF output power The two RF output power options are implemented by different main boards in the radio body mechanically different radio bodies and different power connectors The control heads are identical for all RF output power options The 725 W radio is available in the following frequency bands gt 25W B1 50W G2 40 W H5 40W H7 40W K5 35 W 30 W A4 The 25 W radio is available in the following frequency bands H TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual B1 CO D1 H5 H6 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Introduction 15 1 3 Accessories Audio Accessories Installation Kits Internal Options Boards Control Head Options Boards Desktop Power Supply 16 Introduction Tait offers a large variety of audio accessories installation kits internal options boards and other accessories such as a desktop power s
255. MAA22 02 mech kit Outer foam seal for auxiliary connector 362 01112 xx TMAA22 02 mech kit Lock nut for auxiliary connector MN 354 01043 xx TMAA22 02 mech kit Rubber seal for power connector 50W 40W radio 362 01127 xx TMAA22 02 mech kit Rubber seal for power connector 25W radio 362 01114 xx Power connector PL100 SOW 40W radio 1 240 00040 xx Power connector PL100 25W radio 1 240 00027 xx Gap pad for copper plate 50W 40W radio only 1 369 01049 xx TMAA22 02 mech kit TMAA22 98 gap pad kit Heat transfer block 308 13147 xx Q2 Antenna connector SK103 mini UHF o 1 240 00029 xx Antenna connector SK103 BNC 1 240 00028 xx both incl lock washer and hexagonal nut The characters xx In an IPN stand for the issue number Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured The characters yy in an IPN or spares kit number stand for the abbreviated frequency band For more information refer to Frequency Bands on page 15 The characters zz in an IPN or spares kit number stand for the type of RF connector OO BNC 01 mini UHF TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Spare Parts 457 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 16 3 Spare parts of the control head with graphical display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Spare Parts 458 Table 16 2 Spare parts of the control head with graphical display D E LE 301 00020
256. Manual m MMA 00013 xx TMAA30 02 TM8000 3DK Application Board Service Manual m MMA 00038 xx TM8100 TM8200 Computer controlled Data Interface Protocol Definition Publication Record NN May 2005 update for 40W 50W radios August 2005 update to board issue 10 B1 H5 and H6 bands of 25W radios incorporation of accessories manual June 2006 include TM8200 3 digit display control head A4 and CO bands and information on issue 05 main board for B1 H5 and H6 bands 05 November 2007 include G2 and K5 bands update product codes of control heads new space frame and speaker clamp for control heads with 1 2 or 3 digit display Alert Notices Within this manual four types of alerts are given to the reader warning caution important and note The following paragraphs illustrate each type of alert and its associated symbol Warning This alert is used when there is a potential risk of death or serious injury Caution This alert is used when there is the risk of minor or moderate injury to people Important This alert is used to warn about the risk of equipment dam age or malfunction O D D TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 7 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Note This alert is used to highlight information that is required to ensure that procedures are performed correctly Abbreviations Abbreviation Description ACP Adjacent Channel Power ADC Analog to Digital Converter eme Intermediate Frequency 8 TM810
257. November 2007 Task 8 For all bands except K5 following the initial investigation in Task 7 check Moderately Low Sensitivity the circuitry as follows when the sensitivity loss is moderate For the K5 band these steps start on page 257 All bands except K5 LP 2 256 Receiver Fault Finding Remove the FE TOP can and if not already done the IF TOP can Check the soldering of all the components of the front end tuning circuitry from C400 to T401 see Figure 10 1 and Figure 10 3 Check the 3V supply voltage at L404 use the measurement point shown in Figure 10 3 Also check the LNA bias conditions First measure V between the collector of Q401 and ground see Figure 10 3 Ve 2 7 0 1V Secondly check I To do so unsolder and raise one terminal of L404 tombstone position see Figure 10 3 connect a multimeter between this terminal and the pad for the terminal and measure the current l 10 1mA If the checks in Step 2 to Step 5 reveal no fault go to Step 7 If there is a fault repair it and go to Step 8 Check the signal level at the output of LO1 and continue the fault diagnosis as in Power Supply for FCL on page 234 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed go to Task 9 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 10 2 Front end tun
258. O form Digital tab 610 TMAA10 08 Desktop Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Programming the MONITOR key Program the MONITOR key according to the hookswitch settings in the TM8100 or TM8200 programming application as follows 1 TM8100 radios Select the Hookswitch Monitor check box and select an option in the Hookswitch Monitor Overrides field Networks gt Basic Settings form gt Receiver Monitoring tab 2 TM8200 conventional radios Select the Hookswitch Monitor check box and select an option in the Hookswitch Monitor Overrides field Conventional gt Networks gt Basic Settings form gt Receiver Monitoring tab Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information 37 5 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the desktop microphone on the radio s microphone connector and shows the interface between the desktop microphone and the radio Table 37 1 Desktop microphone connector pins and signals Pn sem leinet E erede B _roteconnectes Inanna e pomo aaaea C Inani B ae TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 08 Desktop Microphone 611 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 612 TMAA10 08 Desktop Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 38 TOPA SV 024 Test Unit The TOPA SV 024 test unit 1s used to test and maintain Tait port
259. ODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 respectively If the digital board is suspect replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 The fault lies in the filtering basic processing or connector for the line under test Re solder components or replace damaged or faulty components as necessary Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Interface Fault Finding 181 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 8 4 Components of the interface circuitry bottom side MN 8 K e HSE ele FORT Spa roer R753 R754 inf oT is n walle ES a CH Y DIG BCAN 182 Interface Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 2 For an input line suspected or reported to be faulty proceed as follows Check Input Lines 1 For a suspect CH ON OFF line go to Step 4 For all other input lines go to Step 2 For the suspect line apply a 3 3 V DC test signal to a connector mated to the radio connector in question Check the internal signal for the line under test If 3 5 V DC is present go to Step 7 If it is not go to Step 8 For the CH ON OFF line apply a short to ground on pin 5 of a connector mated to the control head connector Check that there is 3 9 V DC present on the ITF ON OFF line and that PSU ON OFF is approximately equal to
260. OUVNEZ B 3 SAVd X SIHHO O TAILS NOILONA ONY Oe SNOISSINS GHIODndNOO wo OOO8WL 7100 TTOH TIOH TTOH ATOH TTOH SS Eon LOAWWOT B 3 3AVd X SIHHO T TAILS INSWSAONdWI NOIIOSIONd ASH LAA INSHHDO ANNOYS ven SNIINDOR SNIINDON SNIINDOR ONIINNON ONIINNON ONTLNAOW 2 dal Ge TAI YL IV SOINOWLONWTISH LIVI 2089 GWWEd 2089 SNNE d 3069 SNNE 2 2069 SNNE4 2089 HME 2069 SWWEd JIN GIN PIN EIN ZIW TIN zT T 8 6 ANS EOI E9I SEX OAS 0 0 avdo t NET ANUS gauvds pauvds ze igi N A Idaq AVINH E L LHHVdS eauwds 2 9 Z AS ji sae Pu EAE ee T 0 0 2 I0PISUdW aa Moss Ll Se St VIENS Z ANOOT TTA a do I MS SATA 9suvas cauwds anz z dNOOI 4nQ0I NOOT 3NOOI ta y S guQoT ANL anko anlo anz z 969 224 cia Es x8 9 0 0 LIS oe anor 212 STO Pio rz AGDE Wei 60 F so F Ok wen 09 95 U b Io MEN g Enous NIAL A A 6TH 5990929 EE d Ha 1 qu AS EIDA STT ELA i TT AST PLOZNT OUT Zelt es i elt ri is SANIT sSHVdS TE i ON K dS3 1dO QNS ASH LdO 8AET MSTBAET DR 0AS ZLZSH DACH MS BAET 1 ZAS Eee EE 4 ZAS i aNow anda i Beete i EE saw MS GAME ANT 62 od cann za 0001 seo i LOIdD asi H v INS j GES gd e Tous SF fords aert j H ING ING Me6ava i ILE Ee ING ING es za ING Zant d l Ser YES aap pegad 15 140 e l any LD i 359 T MSTBAET DTI OAS GEI e n 0001 asd LdO 8AEI Ir Lg H 9OIdD ae c A a T W T e ve DS j be zs mE j 901d9 401 i i OLA 9u ING ING La gt 1 JL l a HE
261. PA driver beginning with Task 13 290 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 8 Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the PAs and PA driver dMd Add dMd Add XL dMd AM4 XL daldridiNv ddda nag 119 HMd XL 909 ddall ONIdVHS LOCH O Bm O TEEN HMd esvi8 Ni4x10go MESEINS AYLINOYIO w OIGNV ANY CNV O Ec 93409 H3dVHS INIOd LSL UE H3 LJIHS LSVIG NIA XL 909 EIER QNV O LOCO dddVHS JO FL Nid x09 0x9 JO 0 Nid 10 GS Nid O 1041NO9 INIOd LSAL INE Svid Add XL 909 ua LIN svig INIOd LSL INIOd SAL COCO COCO ne TERIS 40 8 Nid JO 6 Nid Add Ajuo pueq Gy DOC C OLED 60 0 10 31V9 10 S31V9 da dr VNOILL 029910 O 20 70 10 Nid OOTIVNV Ka ju 4 SAdAL TVNDIS dd ANY HOLIMS Nid 291 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 13 Check the biasing of the first PA Q310 Check Biasing of First PA And when entering the CCTM command 331 x do not Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A specify a value X higher than that recorded 1n Task 12 Fail ure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs iL Use a multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 14 of IC301 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 The voltage s
262. PAF TOP cans first detach the heat transfer block from the board Secure the block again after removing the cans Follow the procedures given in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Replace all cans that have been removed only after repairing the board This applies to the A4 B1 CO D1 H5 and H6 bands For certain other bands the transmitter will not operate correctly unless all the cans are fitted 342 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Transmit Tests Secure Board Ensure Proper Antenna Load Limit Duration of Transmit Tests Protect Against Accidental Transmissions Avoid Thermal and RF Burns The following points need to be borne in mind when carrying out transmit tests m secure board W ensure proper antenna load m limit duration of transmit tests W protect against accidental transmissions m avoid thermal and RF burns These points are discussed in more detail below Before conducting any transmit tests ensure that the board 1s adequately secured in the chassis This 1s essential if overheating of the radio is to be avoided As mentioned earlier the heat transfer block must already be secured to the board of the assembly It is good practice to secure the assembly by at least the two external screws and one of the internal screws The screws are labelled and in Figure 5 3 on page 139 There is no need however to secure the
263. Q310 OUTPUT AT OUTPUT LEAD TO DRAIN OF Q306 AT C313 TEST SET DIREC TIONAL COUPLER RECEIVER CAPACITOR o 50 O TEST LEAD TO TEST SET TEST RF CON NECTOR TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 379 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 25 Output of Frequency Synthesizer 380 1 The first point to check in the initial RF signal path is the output SYN TX LO from the frequency synthesizer This signal is input to the exciter at C300 For test purposes select a representative power level and frequency from Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Note that the data for these tables were obtained using an RFP5401A RF probe To set the power level enter the CCTM command 326 x where X defines the level To set the frequency enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the frequency in hertz Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent to measure the RF voltage after C300 see Figure 12 14 Earth the probe to the FCL TOP can adjacent to the PA driver circuitry The required voltage should be as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured above is correct go
264. Q600 see Figure 7 2 to pin 5 of the auxiliary connector SK101 Repair any fault and go to Step 5 176 Power Supply Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 For the internal options power sense option the link LK4 should be inserted see Figure 7 2 Connect 3 3V DC more than 2 6V to be precise from the power supply to the IOP GPIO line pin 15 of the internal options connector SK102 Check that the power up signal at pin 5 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 1s high Remove the 3 3V supply and ground the IOP GPIO line to be precise the voltage on the line should be less than 0 6 V If the power up signal is now low conclude with Step 5 If it is not check for continuity and shorts to ground between D604 see Figure 7 1 and pin 15 of the internal options connector SK102 Repair any fault and go to Step 5 5 After checking all the relevant power up options and if necessary repairing any faults go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the fault could not be found or repairs failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Power Supply Fault Finding 177 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 6 Check Provision of External Power Li External power is supplied to pin 8 of the auxiliary connector SK101 The power 1s normally switched but will be unswitched if all the links LK5 to LK8 are inserted With all the links inserted the po
265. R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100p 50V NPO 5 0603 DIODE SM15T30A Transil SMC DIODE BAT54AW SOT323 DIODE BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23 DIODE BAV99 dual sw SOT23 DIODE BZX84C15V Zen SOT23 DIODE BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23 DIODE DALSC208SC6 Array IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn IND 1806 BLM41P750S EMI suppn FUSE 1206 3A 63V XSTR SMD BTS409L Mfet sw IC LF80C 8V 1A LDO rgltr IC TS912ID CMOS R2R OP Amp TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ref IC1 IC2 IC7 J1 PL100 Q1 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R R8 R9 R10 R11 R13 R14 R17 R23 R45 R47 R48 SA SK201 SK202 SK203 WI TMAAO3 31 Parts List PCB IPN 220 02174 03 IPN 000 10409 00 002 10800 00 002 19120 00 240 02021 01 240 00027 01 000 10008 47 038 15470 10 038 14470 10 038 13100 10 038 13100 10 038 15470 10 038 13100 10 038 15470 10 038 13100 10 038 14100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 14100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 16100 10 038 15220 10 036 13220 10 036 13220 10 938 10001 01 240 00016 00 240 00016 00 240 00016 00 240 00020 59 220 02174 03 330 02174 01 369 02054 00 302 40078 00 365 01807 00 302 500
266. R ES l an dS3 140 QNS i i a3a0Lp MS 8AET Sud OAS ASE LdO 8Aet 340 LY M66AVH ANT T l LPO o he ga 0001 2 i GOIdD zas t m INS d 6 l T ET I SEN L e i SOId9 dOI ING ING Se ING Z l l M66AV8 H E e H i Aaner 2 e Ted EES dn L weenv asa Lo ONS 15 aE E SLE T MS BAET oad OAS SRL Vo Le Rest i 001 sa T dS 3 LdO 8AET ce 1 H VOIdD zys b H i TAS H or T T T BER 1 Po CI mesaya 7 cH OId9 dol i H l ING ING SC ING ING 9d oe 89u Tou TASSOEGIN ZEN oza Si Oe M6GAVE asg LdO dN5 EN l Lao T H MS 8AET 53M OAG pos ang AQE qsa LdO 8Aet SS ga 0001 me Teo d Yar INS Bd va i INS ANOT 91d STA H TI re ot SP 1 aana el gordo dol tOIdD zas t t UEM JL M 6AvE asa LdO ano sa H i i ET i ING A9 20013 H aNI i l i ING ING en V9EANS zo SL va 0001 asd LdO BAET 001 oeo i Lou 098 i 0 Sta TAS 1 SNOT m pa arg L pid 0 20149 4OI v MS BAET 59H OAS x mesaya 1 COIdO9 zas v 1 t dud THSSOEALW RR desees M66AVG asg L qN9 cle ae A ga iMd ppu 0 AOE asg LdO 8A T SCH ca 0001 j t LTO i 99u DS WW var HS 16 m i z DS H E L L PLO ETA l 135673017 i UD MS 8AET OT 0AS 1 een ST TOIdD dOI Id9 zust lol CO i TOId5 Ber t t t dS3 LdO QNS t i i ING ING TN SE M66AV8 TECH E Sou acu ING 0 di 0 s ES 21d 0001 n i ANDY zys L E Loe 1 4
267. R OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE OR THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE General THE LICENSEE CONFIRMS THAT IT SHALL COMPLY WITH THE PROVISIONS OF LAW IN RELATION TO THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE 620 Law and Jurisdiction THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE SUBJECT TO AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEW ZEALAND LAW AND DISPUTES BETWEEN THE PARTIES CONCERNING THE PROVISIONS HEREOF SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE NEW ZEALAND COURTS OF LAW PROVIDED HOWEVER TAIT MAY AT ITS ELECTION BRING PROCEEDINGS FOR BREACH OF THE TERMS HEREOF OR FOR THE ENFORCEMENT OF ANY JUDGEMENT IN RELATION TO A BREACH OF THE TERMS HEREOF IN ANY JURISDICTION TAIT CONSIDERS FIT FOR THE PURPOSE OF ENSURING COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS HEREOF OR OBTAINING RELIEF FOR BREACH OF THE TERMS HEREOF No Dealings THE LICENSEE MAY NOT SUBLICENSE ASSIGN OR TRANSFER THE LICENCE OR THE PROGRAM EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT ANY ATTEMPT OTHERWISE TO SUBLICENSE ASSIGN OR TRANSFER ANY OF THE RIGHTS DUTIES OR OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER IS VOID No Other Terms THE LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS THE LICENSEE FUR THER AGREES THAT SUBJECT ONLY TO ANY EXPRESS WRITTEN TERMS OF AGREEMENT TO THE CONTRARY BETWEEN TAIT AND THE LICENSEE THIS IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN IT AND TAIT IN RELATION TO THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE
268. S Res 0603 47k 1 16w 196 Res M F SMD 0805 0e 0 125w Skt SMD 8w 2x4 Lo Prof 2mm Skt SMD 6w 2x3 Lo Prof 2mm Hdr SMD 8w 2x4 Lo Prof 2mm Hdr SMD 6w 2x3 Lo Prof 2mm CBL rbn 10core 0 7 0 1mm grey Pcb Dynamic Covert Mic Mic Capsule Electret 2 7 6mm Rbbr Mic Upper A3M2751 T3K MANL I INSTR TMAA02 06 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 21 4 2 Concealed and Dynamic Microphone Support Board top side IPN 220 01712 01 A TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones 515 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 21 43 Concealed and Dynamic Microphone Support Board bottom side CO T IPN 220 01712 01 A CO 516 TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 09g l1 S J v J C T JO T eTLTO aee H pioegd 3160 andy Ion Op Hatt SLNINONINE EE OH 133H5 EN 3 14 S JNISN3 ea 68 t4d Sd DIN Q31935NOO SOMI dI quvod Lydan gra EOZ vv 9c vT v des nul 3180 77114 ev T LG L L C gt OSEWNN IN L an 3NSSI NdI DIW JIWUNAa7dJ IBAJNOIJ GCdv0d SNOIIdO SITSNWL SGOINOHIOdI3 LIUL OC moun T Y LL 4 E 9 AELK UIS OO d SEIL JO SMLS Log ke L Z TOM Ke D HOIN oe Oo m e La Q U NOTONS DIU
269. SMD Pwr CDRH104R 47uH 1A Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323 Xstr 514427BDY PCH MOSFET SOS RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 1206 OR 5 0 25W RES 0603 82k 1 1 10W RES 0603 82k 1 1 10W RES 0603 15k 1 1 10W RES 0603 150k 1 1 10W RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W RES 0603 33k 1 1 10W RES 0603 22k 1 1 10W RES 0603 47R 5 1 10W RES 0603 2k2 5 1 10W RES 0603 2k2 5 1 10W Res 0603 4k7 1 100ppm Res 0603 4k7 1 100ppm RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 120R 5 1 10W RES 0603 OR RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 470k 5 1 10W RES 0603 OR RES 0603 OR RES 0603 OR RES 0603 OR RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W Res 0603 4k7 1 100ppm TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ref R701 R710 R720 R721 R722 R730 R731 U300 U310 IPN 038 16120 10 036 13100 10 038 15100 10 038 14220 00 038 14470 10 038 12470 00 038 12470 00 002 10800 00 002 14931 00 Description Ref RES 0603 120k 196 1 10W RES 0805 100R 196 1 8W RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W RES 0603 2k2 5 1 10W Res 0603 4k7 196 100ppm RES 0603 47R 596 1 10W RES 0603 47R 596 1 10W IC LDO REG LF80C 8V 1A PPAKT R IC L4931CD33 3 3v 250Ma Regso8 IPN 302 05263 00 302 10062 00 316 06842 00 346 1003
270. SUPPLY e 13V8 BATT SIGNAL TYPES RF SWITCH ANALOG VHF UHF only E GND TEST POINT OTHER P y V TRANS MITTER CIRCUITRY INTERFACE CIRCUITRY TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 271 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 1 First check the power supply from the power connector 13 8V Power Supply 1 10 11 12 13 Obtain a needle probe to use for measurements of the power supply at the PA driver and PAs If none 1s available remove the PAF TOP and PAD TOP cans Set the DC power supply to 13 8 V with a current limit of 10 A Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where X is the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 11 2 Enter the CCTM command 826 5 to set the radio to maximum power Attempt to place the radio in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 33 If the radio enters the transmit mode continue with Step 7 If instead a C03 error is displayed in response to the command 38 go to Task 7 in Transmitter RF Power on page 278 Measure the voltage at the point on L310 shown in Figure 11 2 VHF or Figure 11 3 UHF This is the supply at the common drain of Q309 and Q310 and should be common drain of Q309 and Q310 more than 13V DC Also measure the voltage at the point on L306 shown in Figure 11 3 This 1s the supply at
271. Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 19 2 Installing the Options Extender Board 19 2 1 Parts Required The following table describes the parts required to install an options extender board in a radio The parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in Figure 19 2 and are used to connect to the radios external options connector Table 19 2 Parts required for installation Figure 19 2 esee eonen 9 3 senio Iers 4 Jemen eses LP mosso ron o Ls mess NC 1 Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN 19 2 2 Installation Procedure 1 Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity For detailed disassembly instructions refer to Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Refer to the diagram on the following page and the instructions below 2 Remove the top cover and lid D from the radio to access the options cavity o Remove the external options connector bung Q if it is fitted 4 On the inside of the radio lid place the foam seal G over the external options connector cavity 4 5 With the top side of the options extender board facing the radio lid guide the external options connector the D range connector on the options extender board into the external options connector cavity 6 Screw the external options connector to the radio lid using the two screw lock fasteners 7 Tighten the fasteners to a torque of 0 9 N m 8
272. T BAETT G27 Bog e JNOOT AHE TEE 8 TO Ay 91 99 in ALA PP ING ING SA se 6 e e 81 41 i MOIS NS TH ING HEE P LY SR SR D H gS s ASt 8 ET ING e e Gu zz ER RR dr B EN E WWE TS ANT ANT l GO LO Joxi aoi OI LTO MIS JNT JNT ANT gt o ze C C D p M M tz SE EO PTO We Gg z 3 Ls QT TI BS SIS cn lt l UNO l H6 9 AA NIZ NOZ 4OIdO5 dol CT Qut 6 E D NT T nota SOIdO dOI 6 QT EEN ET c WE e noc NIC NG 4 SOId9 dOI a 6 QUOI 2 e GJ E e NOT NIT COT JO dol 2 QM vi e e tOIgdO dO E 70 vaoLoHUrv 2 HTS ZOIdO dO EIER 7 O SE TOId9 dOI 7 EN JNOOT Z I ING Bi e OD IN cM 1 el TSS JNOOT Ke o ang xe Z ETO 4 Abr ro NI dvi ONE S ae 2 INI q xx E E THT daa CHS S ANOT T T Ce S J t 89 5 ANS OIN Xe C LTO N9U DDA l E SE MDDI 3r Ee ANT j1no deli dng i EI OT LD INO TO C Wi D ee Per ANBAT AS pe EH pu LINON NIA ux Bld c GOLA l BhE T all cn M L NS NS BNE T ane T4 AS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAAO1 02 RS 232 Board 496 19 TMAAO1 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards D range hood parts The TMAA01 05 and TMAAO01 07 options extender boards vu provide external access to most of the signal lines provided by the radio s internal options connector The options extender board fits inside the radio in the options cavity and is connected to
273. TM command 326 1 to set the power level to very low Connect a power meter and measure the transmit power If the carrier power is correct go to Step 10 If the carrier power 1s not correct try to re calibrate the radio If the re calibration repairs the fault go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it does not repair the radio as described in Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25 W on page 267 and Transmitter Fault Finding 25 W on page 341 Repeat Step 6 to Step 9 with the power level set to high 326 4 Check whether the speaker 1s the source of the fault as described in Speaker Faulty on page 440 graphical display or Speaker Faulty on page 454 1 2 or 3 digit display If the radio transmits audio now the original speaker was faulty Reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the radio still fails to transmit reconnect the original speaker and go to Step 13 After having eliminated the synthesizer the transmitter circuitry and the speaker as cause for the fault repair the radio as described in CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 Servicing Procedures 161 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 If the main board assembly was replaced or if the repair failed re assemble the radio as described in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Conclude with the tasks of Final Tasks on page 163 Task 10 If the radio does not receive this can be ca
274. TM command has been received Enter a valid CCTM command Z 1 A CCTM command with invalid parameters has been received Re enter the CCTM command with valid parameters A valid CCTM command has been received but cannot be processed at this time Enter the CCTM command again If the error persists power the radio down and up again and re enter the CCTM command C04 An error occurred on entry into CCTM Power the radio down and up again and place the radio in CCTM again The radio has not responded within the specitied time Re enter the CCTM command X04 The DSP is not responding Check the DSP pin connections If the error persists replace the DSP X05 The version of the DSP is incompatible with the version of the radio firmware Replace the DSP with a later version a The internal configuration of the MCU is incorrect Adjust the configuration There is an error in the checksum for the model configuration ES There is an error in the checksum for the radio s database The radio temperature is above the T1 threshold and a reduction in the transmit power is impending To avoid damaging the radio stop transmitting until the radio has cooled down sufficiently The radio temperature is above the T2 threshold and the inhibiting of transmissions is imminent The supply voltage is less than the V1 threshold X38 The supply voltage is less than the V2 threshold and the radio has powered itself down The radio will not
275. TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 16 Spare Parts This section lists all serviceable parts except PCB components of the m radio body Figure 16 1 Figure 16 2 and Table 16 1 m control head with graphical display Figure 16 3 and Table 16 2 m control heads with 1 2 or 3 digit display Figure 16 4 Table 16 3 and Table 16 4 m RJ45 control head Figure 16 5 and Table 16 5 Figure 16 1 Spare parts of the radio body sheet 1 of 2 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Spare Parts 455 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 16 2 Spare parts of the radio body sheet 2 of 2 wN oo c o N E o g a AS E een emo co 4 CO uU c LLI m 456 Spare Parts Table 16 1 Spare parts of the radio body EES RE E eee ofe s perm erae su H 2 EE DICEN E DM Main board assembly 50W 40W radios Main board assembly 25W radios XMAB12 yyzz TMAA22 Ee BEE Chassis 50W 40W radio 303 11301 xx Chassis 25 W radio 303 11225 xx Gap pad for chassis 50W 40W radio only 369 01048 xx TMAA22 02 mech kit TMAA22 98 gap pad kit Control head seal 362 01115 xx TMAA22 02 mech kit TMAA22 07 seals kit Screw for power connector 50W 40W radio 346 10022 07 Screw for power connector 25W radio 346 10030 08 EK Auxiliary connector SK101 1 240 02022 xx a 1 Inner foam seal for auxiliary connector E 362 01110 xx T
276. TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 43 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 3 6 Control Head Connectors The control head loom connects the connector on the front of the radio body to the connector on the rear of the control head The connector on the front of the radio body is an 18 way two row right angled IDC insulation displacement connector SMD header socket The connector on the rear of the control head 1s an 18 way 0 1 inch pitch Micro MaTch SMD socket Table 2 5 Control head connectors pins and signals peon e Send Jm em 1 RX AUD Receive audio output Post volume Analog ACB INADA AS control AC coupled DOODODBO Y 13V8 Power supply output from radio body Power Rl power source ront View 2 of radio body 3 CH TXD Asynchronous serial port Digital 3V3 CMOS Transmit data Also carries the hookswitch signal 6 AND Amiggowd ed e D ND Digital ground foom CH ON OFF Hardware power on software Digital controlled power off input Active low p view 0 control head 10 VOL WIP DC DC signal from volume pot wiper Analog CH SPI DO Data output signal to control head Digital 3V3 CMOS CH LE Latch enable output to control head Digital 3V3 CMOS CH GPIO1 General purpose digital input output Digital 3V3 CMOS input Open collector output with pullup 14 3V3 Power supply to control head digital Power circuits CH SPI DI Data input from control head Digital 3V3 CMOS CH SP
277. TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display Overview This section describes the fault finding of the control head with graphical display for the following faults power supply faulty initial check LCD display faulty LCD backlighting faulty LCD contrast faulty LCD heating faulty function key LEDs or status LEDs faulty keypad backlighting faulty oN oFF key faulty function scroll or selection keys faulty speaker faulty volume control faulty PTT faulty The faults can be detected by visual inspection refer to Check the User Interface on page 159 or using the CCTM commands in Table 14 1 on page 424 General The following applies for all fault finding procedures power is supplied to the radio Important Do not disconnect or connect the control head while TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual To connect to ground use one of the screw bosses of the metal spaceframe or the screw bosses of the radio body If the radio does not switch on when power 1s supplied the radio may be programmed to go into the status it was in when powered down Connect a known good control head power up the radio and change the relevant setting in the programming application Remember to program the original setting before returning the radio to the customer For disassembly and re assembly instructions refer to Disassembling and Reassembling the Control H
278. TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 IPN 220 02123 01 e lt L lt L co cao Cc Ka a C Ei Li p cC Sp D x D a SE SE o o D m e f NL Ne V M A gt yy ac A nl B qd s Installing a Remote Kit 543 10 T cl Ja CN L3HS ECITCU Occ JAUN 4 1I alL LIT JEW gt 3 JNIONd Jil UN K GI ALU AWS gt JEWIIN NU Lun I ALN I LIN ALONA I Ic SDINON ircuit Diagram C 1 K SSI N3 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Installing a Remote Ki ze H ed 3110 CNS SNILNNON ER O06c 2WN2d INOA NIA T LIA B SISSHHO OIUIUM OL 931 SE gp CIA ei a E GI gT 9Sx28 29 S 3 Rm ee E LE QT d S F 83 ggss G OBS 019 DO LTE LS JNEE o 340 EE 69 gu 66n0U08 V 66n0nUudgd V C ds e cea main T S T avo Cars e e e H S8
279. Tasks on page 163 Figure 11 16 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can K5 band UHF VHF cC ir l l CR ig tO CO LO CX OI II AD aD T eo LEET ej e Ge ao 1 o MN ON oT E c5 M I eae pp IL 3 235 gt J Ca eco 29 Ss CC pcc pH ECH ll cra p x ll ra LE U mm mem Em SIE PUC Sd gt SN SIL 11 ee C3 CES ees p oco L ev ET m woc w Ww wy WW ai 2 S SIS Qccg oa VC 0 D AE EM E TFS m p uj ln Jee wiel we Z n rz E E DLC Ei GNI LC Eeer SEN mu DC CSI CN ES St d CD 3 LT E gt ED E 2D uy CH Al ea RE r LO LD LC Em d CE 0 pans E UM le w ISS E RI R cuj A et r en LSC KEE Bae DUC N azo y E gei wel 2 D BEEN aS Co Sp Ty b LC L Ct c C kC CO SE go SIS d RE E Ee E 22 PE uc OCH EX LES o Sie i coed m m Si amp e o RR i amy TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 309 Task 23
280. Tasks to be performed according to the results of the power and current measurements of Task 5 Power Task Correct Task 6 Power unchanged regardless of setting Correct Task 31 Check power at directional coupler Skewed Task 9 Power and current are skewed Low gt 0 1W Task 11 Power and current are low None at RF connector lt 0 1 W Task 31 Check power at directional coupler None at RF connector lt 0 1 W Task 7 Check for inhibiting of transmitter TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 281 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 6 If all the power and current values measured in Task 5 are correct it is likely Power Unchanged Regardless of that the power remains unchanged regardless of the power setting Setting IM Enter the following CCTM commands in turn and measure the RF output power in each case m 3264 m 3263 m 3262 m 3261 2 The above measurements should confirm that the power remains unchanged at all settings Carry out Task 12 and then Task 19 282 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 7 If the transmitter 1s drawing no current or the wrong current check Check for Inhibiting of Transmitter whether it is being inhibited This check is also required if a CO3 error occurs in Task 1 1 10 11 12 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual If not already done enter th
281. The circuit provides the reset signal PSU SYS RST to the digital section which in turn provides the watchdog signal DIG WD KICK required by the supervisory circuit There are eight internal power supplies m one SMPS 3V3 m four linear regulators 9V0 6V0 3V0 AN 2V5 CDC m three switched supplies 9V0 TX 3V0 RX 13V8 SW The SMPS is used to regulate to 3 3V from the external supply 13V8 BATT The four lower voltages required are then further stepped down with linear regulators These all take advantage of the efficiency gain of the SMPS The 9V regulator and the 13 8 V switched supply are connected to 13V8 BATT The two remaining switched supplies 9V and 3V use P channel MOSFETs The radio can be switched on using the ON OFF key on the control head or by means of external signals For the latter case hardware links are required and there are several power sense options these are discussed below Some internal power supplies can be controlled by means of digital lines depending on the mode in which the radio is operating The radio allows the configuration of different power sense options to control how the radio is powered up and down W battery power sense m auxiliary power sense ignition sense m internal options power sense NH no power sense BH emergency power sense TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 85 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 9 Block diagram of the power supply c
282. The required status 1s active pin 8 of IC403 about 3 0V active An alternative measurement point to the above is pin 24 of IC400 under the IF TOP can see Figure 10 1 If DIG RX EN is active go to Task 4 If it is not go to Step 3 Check the signal continuity from the digital board to the receiver Repair any fault and go to Step 4 If the digital board itself appears to be faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed go to Task 7 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 4 If the logic signal from the digital board is active as required check the lock Check Lock Status status of the radio 1 Enter the CCTM command 72 to determine the lock status The status should be normal lock status 111 LO1 FCL LO2 all in lock 2 If the lock status is normal go to Task 5 If the LOT is not in lock go to Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 If the FCL is not in lock go to Power Supply for FCL on page 234 If the LO2 is not in lock go to Step 3 3 Check the components around IC403 Q402 and Q403 see Figure 10 2 Repair any fault 4 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application 5 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repai
283. Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 3 Point for measuring the power supply to the PA driver VHF shown POINT 1 ON R350 POINT 2 ON R350 Lee 6338 R346 rng pn EI GERD C102 MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT POINT ON R339 POINT ON L306 Ge 2 fr R327 Q306 R328 ET S SL PAD TOP TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 347 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 2 Check Switch Circuit If the power supply to the drains of the PAs and PA driver 1s not correct the switch circuit is suspect Check the circuit as follows IM Measure the voltage at the point 1 on R350 shown in Figure 12 3 The voltage should be point 1 on R350 13 8V DC 2 If the voltage measured in Step 1 is correct go to Step 3 If it is not check for continuity between R350 and the power connector Repair any fault and conclude with Step 8 2 Measure the voltage at R339 as shown in Figure 12 3 The voltage should be R339 9V DC 4 If the voltage measured in Step 3 is correct go to Step 5 If it is not go to Task 3 and check the 9V power supply 5 Measure the voltage at the point 2 on R350 shown in Figure 12
284. UPPLIED BY TAIT AND ACCEPTED BY THE LICENSEE AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT BEING LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS IS USED BY IT IN BUSINESS AND ACCORDINGLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW NO TERMS OR WARRANTIES WHICH ARE IMPLIED BY LEGISLATION SHALL APPLY TO THIS AGREEMENT TAIT DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS WILL MEET THE LICENSEE S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE Exclusion of Liability IN NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TAIT BE UNDER ANY LIABILITY TO THE LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER PERSON WHATSOEVER WHETHER IN TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT EQUITY UNDER ANY STATUTE OR OTHERWISE AT LAW FOR ANY LOSSES OR DAMAGES WHETHER GENERAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY PUNITIVE DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY USE OR INABILITY OF USING THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS THE LICENSEES SOLE REMEDY AGAINST TAIT WILL BE LIMITED TO BREACH OF CONTRACT AND TAIT S SOLE AND TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ANY SUCH CLAIM SHALL BE LIMITED AT THE OPTION OF TAIT TO THE REPAI
285. X7r Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r CAP CER 0805 220N 10 X7R 50V Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7rx 1096 Cap 0805 270p 196 200v Grm40 Cap 0805 270p 196 200v Grm40 Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7rx 1096 Cap 0805 270p 196 200v Grm40 Cap 0805 270p 1 200v Grm40 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7rx 1096 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 4 1096 Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r CAP Cer 1206 4u7 1096 25V X7R Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD SM15T30a TranSil Smc Diode 15MA5923 8v2 1 5w Zen Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BAV99 D Sw SOT23 Diode SMD BZX84C3V3 Zen SOT23 Ind 0603 BIM18pg300 Emi Supr Ind 0603 BIM18pg300 Emi Supr Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead Ind 0603 BIM18pg300 Emi Supr Ind 0603 BIM18pg300 Emi Supr Ind 0603 BIM18pg300 Emi Supr Ind 0603 Blm11p600s 5a F Bead Ind 0603 Blm11p600s ba F Bead Fuse SMD 1A 50V 0805 UL Cert Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH Conn SMD 18w Skt M Match Xstr BC847BPNNPN PNP SOT363 Res 0603 Zero Ohm 1 16w 5 Res 2512 100R 596 1W Res 2512 100R 596 1W Res 0603 100R 1 10w 196 Res 0603 10k 1 10w 1 Res 0603 2k2 1 10w 5 Res 0603 10k 1 10w 1 Installing a Remote Kit Ref R108 R109 R110 R111 R112 R113 R114 R115 R116 R117 R118 R119 R120 R121 R122 R123 U101 U102 IPN 038 13560 10 038 13100 10 036 02270 10 036 02270 10 038 13100 10 038 12100 10 038 15100 10 038 16150 10 038 16330 10 038 14270 00 038 13560
286. Y E i l UNE OO anyeipend d020 XA du SE d XC joy abeui i VEVENT ge 411514 JI 151 D IE ddd lt I p Jon A 1 di 202 X d i A i Gy da2xa spueq Uu 434A XY 202 RS RS Rene i ANNL 34 XY 202 i i m ZHINDLLX9L Ia Ia I 1 MYS MYS jddng 1 lend lend l S m ZHINOLS 0S8 l 1 A1 2 Y pueq cy XY OAE E J TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 ions ipt ircuit Descri C 72 Frequencies of IF Stages Demodulation Automatic Gain Control Channel Filtering The frequency of the first IF stage depends as follows on the frequency band of the radio m VHE bands 21 400029MHz m UHF and K5 bands 45 100134MHz The above are nominal values the actual frequency will differ by a small amount depending on the exact initial frequency of the TCXO The frequency of the second IF stage will always be precisely 64 000kHz once the TCXO calibration has been completed The TCXO calibration does not adjust the TCXO frequency but instead adjusts the VCXO frequency which in turn adjusts the VCO or first LO frequency as well as the frequency of the first IF stage The second LO frequency remains fixed The third IF stage is completely within the FPGA and is not accessible Demodulation takes place within the FPGA Demodulated audio is passed to the DSP of the digital board for processing of the receiver audio signal Raw demodulated audi
287. Z cS E12 3831114 Geert ET E Z 487 TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual egeso ee uosuana4g uoig 3190 nda O d I4H2 LU S LNSWONSWY SS1I 3M WON 3I C dJNION DEIER W SIYA DEE Dee OL OE TOO HEE WON4 Ndl OMG Uae vOOZ Oc 90 cT TO 98d pam 2100 27114 vOd3sSTr ONOA TE TIBH NW e HH 3dAlOLlOMHd GNOO3S ENG z Lt DC FA12040 NOL P TBH TW TBH MW OH UNO OL ka Gadi BER I doUdeddliNI WHO 069 HIN A A A A es A A gt A A A A gt amp s 2 LA iL I I TA ASS Ne Co SY Oe1l 23 l4 SH SCH 10H 310H SCH CH 310H EYE VI pe ONT INNON ONT MNPO ONT NO ONT INNON ONT LNNON ONT LNAOW eTa ton DBSO SWINE DBSS SWWEd o0659 SWWdEd S SS SWWEd S SS SWWEd OSS SUE L SIN SIN b LW LW ZIW TIW S lt Z QT lt ats Ei Sie OIQUH MORA Rog T Lex As D L L CT 20 TONY AS 911910 S I3H31dIJ BAET OI WOHJ BNET ZN g ZN L E ANT EO T gt S NAA G 2892 E e cc 2 22I vr gt a D A LO s t Fe 7779 an Ze V E A 3 S axa v3 z3 ZN d INC U un GOC LU Ze GT d is 1a PP ENT 7 Ad ac THS S e N e e D H 3d S Hee ZEN l r3 d 2320 E o A 8 gt ING ETC eras ETO THL1IOIG
288. a O D amp 602 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10 05 Hands Free Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 35 1 TMAA10 04 TMAA10 05 to radio interface auxiliary i beten 1 COnNector plug_Jauxiliary connector electret l I l e microphone filter F Z 0 d b microphone oO Pp eos el ample RS E eof tans l INL signal path I l remote I T 4 microphone hands free kit connector fist control head jauxiliary d electret microphonelselect T O 12k control d 35 6 Circuit Description The remote microphone signal 1s amplified by a pre amplifier in the auxiliary connector plug The power supply to this amplifier 1s provided by the 13 8V supply on the auxiliary connector This supply 1s filtered and regulated down to approximately 3 3V The reference voltage for the regulator 1s provided by AUX_GPIO4 line The remote microphone signal is fed via AUX_MIC_AUD and an input selector to the radio s internal microphone amplifier The microphone input selected depends on the PTT source used to make the call If the remote PTT is used then AUX_MIC_AUD 1s selected If the control head microphone PTT is used then CH_MIC_AUD 1s selected Test points for all other auxiliary connections are provided on the auxiliary connector plug PCB to facilitate the connection of other devices or signals e g ignition switch signal TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TM
289. a strong adjacent channel signal it is therefore possible that the AGC may start acting when the wanted signal is well below 70dBm With frequency bands between 66 and 174MHz a noise blanker can be selected to remove common sources of electrical interference such as vehicle ignition noise The noise blanker functions by sampling the RF input to the receiver for impulse noise and momentarily disconnecting the first LO for the duration of the impulse The response time of the noise blanker 1s very fast tens of nanoseconds and is quicker than the time taken for the RF signal to pass through the front end hardware so that the LO 1s disabled before the impulse reaches the IF stage where it could cause crystal filter ring TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 5 2 Digital Baseband Processing Custom Logic Noise Squelch The remainder of the receiver processing up to demodulation 1s performed by custom logic The digitized quadrature signal from the RF hardware 1s digitally down converted to a zero IF and channel filtering 1s performed at baseband Different filter shapes are possible to accommodate the various channel spacings and data requirements These filters provide the bulk of adjacent channel selectivity for narrow band operation The filters have linear phase response so that good group delay performance for data 1s achieved The filters also decimate the sample rate down to 48kHz Custom logic als
290. able and mobile radios by providing an interface between the radio a test PC and an RF communications test set The diagram below shows the front panel of the test unit Figure 38 1 TOPA SV 024 test unit Rat Test Unit Computer Tx Audio Portables and Mobiles 3 Mod Audio Portable Audio Tap In SINAD Mobile Mic Audio On Hook Mobile Only Rx Speaker Radio Off Hook Load ons E 38 1 Test Equipment Setup The diagram on the following page shows how the test unit 1s connected to the radio the test PC and the RF communications test set Note The test unit can also be connected to a Tait Orca portable radio TOP using the TOPA SV 007 cable or to a T2000 radio using the T2000 11 cable Use with Tait Orca and T2000 radios is not described in this document TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TOPA SV 024 Test Unit 613 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 38 2 Test equipment setup Test PC serial port DB9 computer connector TOPA sV 024 R 12 E Test Unit Portables and Mobiles transmit audio SCH connector BNC E rn en receive audio e OQ el e co rot a SINAD connector Off Hook Tx PTT Load e BNC radio connector DB15 TMAA21 01 cable speaker microphone connector connector RJ45 radio with user interface power conn
291. ace If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not the repair failed replace the control head board 15 2 Some LEDs Faulty If the display functions correctly but one or more but not all of the LEDs D1 to D18 are faulty 1 Disconnect the control head loom Remove the control head board Reconnect the loom to the board 2 Use a multimeter to measure the forward voltage across each faulty LED See Figure 15 1 The voltage should be 2 0 0 4 V DC If it is go to Step 3 If it is not replace the LED and go to Step 4 3 If the forward voltage is correct the LED 1s functional but the associated switching transistor 1s suspect Replace the transistor corresponding to the LED 1n question The switching transistors associated with the LEDs D1 to D18 are Q1 to Q4 See Figure 15 2 Continue with Step 4 4 Test the user interface If the fault has been removed re assemble the control head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not replace the control head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display 451 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 15 3 All LEDs Faulty If the display functions correctly but all the LEDs are faulty 1 2 Disconnect the control head loom Replace IC3 which drives the switching transistors for the LEDs see Figure 15 2 Reconnect the loom and
292. adio m reading the programming file m obtaining the details of the Software Feature Enabler SFE m reading the calibration file m checking the user interface m checking any error messages The following tasks only need to be carried out if they relate to the fault reported m checking the transmit and transmit audio functions m checking the receive and receive audio functions Important Observe the General Information on page 107 When a radio 1s received for repair details of the Customer and the fault will be recorded in a fault database The fault reported by the Customer might concern damage to or loss of a mechanical part or the failure of a function of the radio or both Check the radio for mechanical loss or damage even if the fault concerns a function failure only Inspect the radio as follows m knob for volume control potentiometer m microphone grommet m rubber seal for RF connector m bung for auxiliary connector m bung for aperture for external options connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Servicing Procedures 155 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Replace Damaged or Missing Knob Replace Damaged or Missing Seals and Bungs Check for Additional Damage Repair Damaged Control Head The bung for aperture for external options connector should be replaced by a cover seal if an external options connector is present All the parts are illustrated 1n Spare Parts on page 455 Except f
293. age 163 If it has not replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 19 If either or both the minimum and maximum receive frequencies are Repair Receive VCO 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual incorrect the receive VCO circuitry is faulty For all bands except K5 remove the VCO TOP can For the K5 band remove the VCO BOT can Check the receive VCO The circuitry 1s based on Q504 see Figure 9 11 for all bands except K5 and Figure 9 12 for the K5 band If a fault 1s found repair it and go to Step 4 If no fault is found go to Step 6 Repeat the frequency measurements in Step 2 and Step 4 of Task 17 If the frequencies are now correct resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are still not correct go to Step 6 Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 Replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 213 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 12 Synthesizer circuitry under the vco Bor bottom side Q5001 UHF band shown VHF similar t C Li ba Bie K5 band BLO LES E R585 R595 e DECH 214 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 20 If no receive frequency is detected in the check of the receive VCO first Check Switching check that the transmit receive
294. age at the gate of Q310 is see Figure 11 11 gate of Q310 2 to 5V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured above is correct Q310 is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not correct go to step 9 Check the circuitry between pin 14 of IC301 and the gate of Q310 see Figure 11 11 If a fault 1s found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or Q310 itself is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 295 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 11 PA circuitry under the PAr TOP can VHF and UHF UHF shown VHF similar C332 C30037 CS RB S R3003 C338 R360 R356 R361 C339 Ge R3006 R354 R351 3521B1 63520B Go Ow mm S SS 321A C320 835215908352 C SS Co TS CIRCUITRY BETWEEN IC301 AND PAs R348 C A i E VIA TO PIN 14 OF IC301 VIA TO GATE OF Q309 VIA TO PIN 8 OF IC301 VIA TO GATE OF Q310 296 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait E
295. age should be DRV test point 0 1V after entry of CCTM 304 1 i Enter the CCTM command 304 Z where Z was recorded in Task 12 to change the DAC value of the clamp current 8 The voltage should increase to DRV test point 0 8 to 2 5V after entry of CCTM 304 z 9 If the voltage does change go to Task 20 If it does not go to Step 10 10 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode and go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 302 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 20 Biasing of PA Driver SET PWR test point If the voltage at the DRV test point 1s correct check that at the SET PWR test point TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Check the voltage at the SET PWR test point see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 SET PWR test point 2 to 5V If the voltage is correct go to Step 3 If it is not go to Task 21 If the PAD TOP can has already been removed go to Step 7 If it has not go to Step 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Remove the PAD TOP can Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Check the voltage on the gate of Q306 see Figure 11 13 VHF Figure 11 14 UHF Figure 11 15 K5 band gate of Q306 2 to 5V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage is correct replace
296. al Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 5 Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter RF power dMd Add XL daldlldiNV dadana dMd QNd XL 119 HMd ie mE ONIdVHS cSVI8 Nid daldiHS 13431 QNV dddVvHS AHLINOHI9 Olanv aNv XLOd9 23002 LSVId Nis H3 LJIHS NL 000 13431 QNV dddVvHS INIOd LSAL EMd GM4 svig Add HaLINIT XL 999 svig Ajuo pueq Gy V V V V O1XLNAS O lt Ca lt INIOd LSSL A HNI XL V TOYULNOO daslal id NV d3MOd dadana quvoga N3 NAS OG WALISIG HNI XL DIC INIOd LSAL LAS MEER HNI XL A QV31 1621 0 0S dd ldnoo VNOILL zo sed INIOd 1S3 L t Aad LAS LS3L Ol avq YOLOAN 42113934 NOD 4H dd HOLIMS Nid WLIDSIG T 490019 OOTIVNV ke dd 4 S3dAL TVNDIS 279 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 4 Check Forward and Reverse Powers 280 1 10 11 First check the forward and reverse powers for an indication of which part of the circuitry is suspect Enter the CCTM command 326 4 to set the transmitter power level high Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 318 to check the forward power The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the po
297. al such as plastic drill two 4 5mm 0 18 inch holes and attach the bracket with screws and captive nuts or similar 3 Attach the speaker to the mounting bracket using the thumbscrews Important Check that the speaker cable is protected from engine heat sharp edges and from being pinched or crushed TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 03 and TMAA10 06 High Power Remote Speakers 597 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 Run the free end of the speaker cable to the radio power cable and install the two receptacles in the power connector as described in the Power Connector Wiring procedure Power Connector Insert the flying lead receptacles into the power connector socket as shown Wal in the diagrams below Note The positive remote speaker wire has a white stripe 1 TMAA10 03 remote speaker 25 W radios For the TMAA10 03 remote speaker 25 W radios insert the flying lead receptacles m the positive wire and receptacle into the position nearest to the red wire and m the negative wire and receptacle into the position nearest to the black wire 13 8V red flying lead Speaker i power connector speaker connector round ace 2 TMAA10 06 remote speaker 40W 50W radios For the TMAA10 06 remote speaker 40 W 50 W radios insert the flying lead receptacles m the positive wire and receptacle into position 3 and m the negative wire and receptacle into position 2 13
298. al Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 243 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 11 VCXO and CODEC Circuitry Introduction Task 40 CCTM Checks Task 41 VCXO Tank Circuit If the signals at the TP501 and TP502 test points are correct two CCTM checks will reveal any remaining faults These possible faults concern the VCXO tank circuit and the CODEC 2 circuitry There are therefore three aspects which are covered in Task 40 to Task 42 m Task 40 CCTM checks m Task 41 VCXO tank circuit m Task 42 CODEC 2 circuitry Following any repairs of the VCXO or CODEC 2 circuitry Task 40 will need to be repeated to confirm the removal of the fault If the signals at the TP501 and TP502 test points are correct or any related faults were rectified perform the following CCTM checks 1 Enter the CCTM command 393 1 1900 Measure the voltage level at the TP501 test point see Figure 9 18 TP501 test point 1 3 0 2 V DC after CCTM 393 1 1900 2 Enter the CCTM command 72 and note the lock status lock status xyz x RF PLL yz FCL z LO2 Oz not in lock 12 in lock 3 Enter the CCTM command 393 1 1900 Again measure the voltage level at the TP501 test point TP501 test point 2 1 0 2V DC after CCTM 393 1 1900 4 Enter the CCTM command 72 and note the lock status 5 If the above voltage levels are not correct or if the FCL is out of lock in either or both of the above cases investigate the VCXO tank circ
299. al servicing tasks by means of elimination test If the PTT 1s faulty d With no PTT switch and hookswitch operated check whether pin 4 of J106 is 4 V J106 pin 4 AV If the signal is correct continue with Step 2 If the signal 1s incorrect inspect R25 for open or shorted contacts Repair if necessary Repeat Step 1 2 With the PTT switch operated check whether the same 4V are pulled to ground on the other side of R 25 If the signal 1s correct continue with Step 3 R25 GND If the signal 1s incorrect inspect D106 and C108 for short circuits Repair if necessary 3 Verify continuity between R25 and the FPGA Repair PCB track if possible 444 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 14 18 PCB layout of PTT circuitry EK top side bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 445 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 446 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 15 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display Overview This section describes the fault finding of the control head with 1 2 or 3 digit display for the following faults display faulty but not LEDs some LEDs faulty all LEDs faulty display and all LEDs faulty some but not all keys faulty all
300. aled microphone wire to the MIC pad 9 and the negative wire to AGND OU The positive wire on the microphone capsule 1s identified by a red stripe rd uon ELE i Ae SI ke Een W sill IC WI e K d ke em o F Mew ala s n ra Ver 1 u e iN Lo AU Ta r D Ki Se e On the control head PCB remove R11 2 and solder P2 3 and P3 in the positions shown Plug S2 45 and S3 on the concealed and dynamic microphone support board onto P2 and P3 on the control head PCB Re install the control head on the radio body 21 2 Radio Programming When the support kit for concealed and dynamic microphones is installed in a radio two fields in the UI Preferences form of the programming application may need to be selected Enable Options Board Preamp select this field if a dynamic microphone is installed An example of an accessory that uses a dynamic microphone is the TMAA10 02 handset Emergency Mic select Concealed if a concealed microphone 1s installed Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information 512 TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 21 3 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the concealed and dynamic microphone support kit and shows the interface between the support kit and the radio control head Table 21 1 C
301. an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11 6 If it does go to Task 26 in RF Signal Path on page 316 If it does not go to Step 6 Check that the voltage from the DAC is changing Measure the voltage at the PWR test point CDC TX PWR CTL see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 Enter the CCTM command 114 1023 The voltage should increase to PWR test point 2 4 0 1V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage at the PWR test point increases as required go to Task 22 If it does not go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on pase 399 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 307 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 22 Following the checks in Task 19 to Task 21 locate the fault and repair the Directional Coupler and Buffer l Amplifiers faults in the directional coupler or the buffer amplifiers will be located circuitry as described in the remaining tasks of the section In this task any 1 Cycle the power 2 Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter to maximum power Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode X Measure the voltage at pin 9 of IC303 in the power control circuit see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 4 The above voltage should be as given in Table 11 7 If it 1s go to Task 24 If it is not go to Step 5 5 Check the voltage at the FWD PWR test point pin 5 of IC303 and at the REV PWR test point pin
302. and measure the voltage again pin 10 of IC503 2 5 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 334 1 If the voltages measured in Step 1 and Step 2 are correct go to Task 10 If they are not go to Step 4 Remove R104 see Figure 9 7 and repeat the above measurements as follows Enter the CCTM command 334 0 to switch off the synthesizer and measure the voltage at the via between R104 see Figure 9 7 and the digital board via at R104 OV DC after entry of CCTM 334 0 Enter the CCTM command 334 1 to switch on the synthesizer and measure the voltage at the via between R104 see Figure 9 7 and the digital board via at R104 3 3 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 334 1 If the voltages measured in Step 5 and Step 6 are still not correct the digital board is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the voltages are correct go to Step 8 There is a fault between the digital board and IC503 Locate the fault Check and resolder R104 in position see Figure 9 7 and check for continuity between pin 10 of IC503 see Figure 9 2 and the digital board via R104 If there 1s a fault repair the circuit confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 201 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 10 If all the critical inputs to the PLL are
303. and repair any soldering faults around IC202 see Figure 13 2 or else replace IC202 4 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 5 With the volume at maximum check each speaker output at pins 3 and 8 of IC202 see Figure 13 2 pin 3 of IC202 AUD ITF SPK approximately 9 5 V5 AC pin 8 of IC202 AUD ITF SPK approximately 9 5 V5 AC 6 If the speaker outputs are correct the fault is unknown it could be intermittent replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If there is no AC go to Step 7 7 Check that C204 and R214 see Figure 13 2 are not faulty and are correctly soldered Repair any fault 8 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 404 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 3 Circuitry under the CDC TOP can and adjacent interface circuitry SECY pUe bE C 9 Jo uonounf poe Bec BIN awa EPZA d gt ege eal EO Pn T Sp LE 3 bora ngu sd eie e Ber Gorg 90 2 pue 80 4 Jo uopunf GI P 245 BE E E m 00 me SG fub pus gua en Ld BEES oua E ELA I R re eon dr SST Ea SS EN rr a I sem E E Eua 2 En mU
304. ant Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A And when entering the CCTM command 304 Z do not specify a value Z higher than that recorded in Task 12 Fail ure to do so might result in the destruction of the PA driver Enter the CCTM command 304 Z where Z was recorded in Task 12 Note the current reading on the DC power supply Enter the CCTM command 114 0 to switch off the power Note the current reading on the DC power supply Compare the above current readings The current should decrease by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12 6 If it does go to Task 25 in RF Signal Path on page 380 If it does not go to Step 6 Check that the voltage from the DAC is changing Measure the voltage at the PWR test point CDC TX PWR CTL see Figure 12 8 Enter the CCTM command 114 1023 The voltage should increase to PWR test point 2 4 0 1V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage at the PWR test point increases as required go to Task 22 If it does not go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 373 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 11 Circuitry under the piRC TOP can UHF shown C341 R380 le Co OO Qo D VER 2 a m A2 ol CoO CO C Con CO DX Oj gt C358 L eS SS Co Go Cm cn LE ee CO cn Sa 374 Transmitter Faul
305. anual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 Receiver Fault Finding Fault Conditions This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the receiver The fault diagnosis procedures consist of 18 tasks grouped into the following sections The symptoms of the fault in the receiver circuitry determine which sections are relevant m Faulty Receiver Sensitivity m Excessive Loss of Sensitivity m Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity m Incorrect RSSI Readings m Faulty Radio Mute m High Receiver Distortion If the receiver sensitivity 1s low begin with Faulty Receiver Sensitivity on page 248 to determine the extent of the loss in sensitivity CCTM Commands The CCTM commands required are listed in Table 10 1 Full details of the commands are given in Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM on pase 125 Table 10 1 CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the receiver Read lock status of RF PLL FCL and LO2 displays xyz O not in lock 1 in lock 101xy0 Set transmit frequency x in hertz and receive frequency y in hertz to specified values Be Read tuning voltage for front end circuitry displays voltage x in millivolts LN Read signal power at output of channel filter displays power x square of amplitude Frequency Bands Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of the radio the frequency band is given in brackets The frequency band may be referred to as either V
306. anual Description 41 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 3 3 Auxiliary Connector The auxiliary connector 1s the standard interface for external devices that are typically connected to a radio The auxiliary connector is a 15 way standard density D range socket The auxiliary connector provides a serial port three programmable input lines four programmable digital I O lines and audio I O The I O lines can be programmed for a variety of functions logic levels and in some cases direction Audio lines can also be programmed to tap into or out of different points in the audio processing chain For more information refer to the online help of the programming application Table 2 3 Auxiliary connector pins and signals EE 12 AUX_GPI1 General purpose digital input Digital 3V3 CMOS Programmable function 5 AUX_GPI2 General purpose digital input Digital 3V3 CMOS Programmable function With LK3 fitted GPI2 is an emergency power sense input 4 AUX GPI3 General purpose digital input Digital 3V3 CMOS Programmable function With LK2 fitted GPI3 is a power sense input AUX_GPIO4 Programmable function and Digital 3V3 CMOS AUX GPIO5 direction input open collector Pads available to fit a higher power output with pullup EN EXC driver transistor on GPIO4 line AUX_GPIO7 11 AUX_TXD Asynchronous serial port Digital 3V3 CMOS Transmit data 3 AUX_RXD Asynchronous serial port Digital 3V3 CMOS Receive da
307. application open the Haw Data page and click the Receiver tab 2 Note the settings listed in the AGC Voltage Cal Pts field The nominal settings should be as listed in Table 10 4 The AGC values depend on which demod IC is fitted IC400 The IC is either an RF9667 or an RF2667 3 If the settings are correct go to Task 11 If they are not go to Step 4 4 Recalibrate the receiver and check the settings again 3 If the settings are now correct go to Step 6 If they are not go to Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity 6 Check if the RSSI fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Task 11 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 259 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 10 4 Nominal AGC data A4 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO 1810 40 1710 40 AGC1 1985 40 1845 40 AGC2 2135 50 1965 50 B1 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO 1790 40 1750 40 AGC1 1960 40 1900 40 AGC2 2110 50 2040 50 CO band RF2667 RF9667 1700 40 Not used 1840 40 1960 50 1775 40 Not used 1925 40 2070 50 Receiver input power dBm Standard radio Trigger base radio AGCO AGC1 AGC2 D1 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO 1855 40 1750 x 40 AGC1 2050 40 1900 40 AGC2 2220 50 2050 50 G2 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO 1845 40 AGC1 2020 40 Not used AGC2 2159 50 H5 band RF2667 RF9667 AGCO 1860 40 1725 40 AGC1 204
308. ard B1 band 50W 220 01723 04 m Main board CO band 25 W 220 01742 04 m Main board D1 band 25 W 220 01717 02 m Main board H5 and H6 bands 25 W 220 01697 11 m Main board K5 band 30 35 W 220 02146 06 m Main board G2 H5 and H7 bands 40W 220 01722 04 m Control head board 1 digit display 220 02070 01 m Control head board 2 digit display 220 01699 03 m Control head board 3 digit display 220 02151 02 m Control head board graphical display 220 01718 01 m Control head board RJ45 220 01720 05 m Programming application TM8100 version 3 02 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Programming application TM8200 Calibration application Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 version 4 02 version 4 05 Associated Documentation Manuals PCB Information The following associated documentation 1s available for this product MMA 00002 xx MMA 00003 xx MMA 00051 xx MMA 00028 xx MMA 00006 xx MMA 00004 xx MMA 00016 xx TM8100 Users Guide TM8200 Users Guide TM8235 User s Guide TM8100 TM8200 Installation Guide TM8100 Operators Guide TM8200 Operator s Guide TM8100 TM8200 Main Board A4 25 W MMAB12 B1 00 814TM8100 TM8200 Main Board B1 25 W MMA 0003 1 xx MMA 00050 xx MMA 00032 xx board IPN 220 01700 05 TM8100 TM8200 Main Board B1 25 W boards after IPN 220 01700 05 TM8100 TM8200 Main Board CO 25 W TM8100 TM8200 Main Board D1 25W MMAB12 H5 00 814TM8100 TM8200 Main Board
309. ard and reverse RF power and the inhibiting of the transmitter VCO TOP CAN UHF ONLY DIRC TOP CAN D TX INH TEST POINT REV PWR TEST POINT Ce co TX INH TEST POINT 394 mu 9900 TEST POINT m IF TOP CAN 9VO TX TEST POINT GND TEST POINT TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 349 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 2 Transmitter RF Power Introduction If there is no fault with the power supplies check the transmitter RF power and correct any fault The procedure 1s covered in the following eight tasks m Task 4 check forward and reverse powers m Task 5 check RF output power m ask 6 power unchanged regardless of setting m Task 7 check for inhibiting of transmitter m Task 8 check temperature sensor B ask 9 power and current are skewed m Task 10 repair output matching circuitry m Task 11 power and current are low The measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter RF power are summarized in Figure 12 5 Data required for the first task checking the forward and reverse powers are supplied in Table 12 3 Table 12 3 Voltages in millivolts corresponding to nominal forward and reverse powers Frequency band Forward power 318 command Reverse power 319 command 350 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service
310. are Feature Enabler SFE Task 6 Read the Calibration File Task 7 Check the User Interface Use the programming application to obtain and record the details of any software enabled features Tools Optional Features For more information refer to the online help of the programming application Use the calibration application to read the calibration file and save it on the test PC If the calibration file cannot be read set up a suitable default calibration file and load it to the radio Check the user interface as follows This task does not apply to the blank control head 1 Use the programming application to activate backlighting deactivate silent and quiet modes and view the programmed function keys channels and scan groups 2 Turn on the radio make sure that the volume control is not set to low and check the start up sequence m the LEDs light up red briefly m the speaker gives two short beeps m LCD and keypad backlighting activates m the LCD displays a power up message then a channel number or an error message 3 Check the following elements of the user interface m volume control With the graphical display use CCTM command 1010 to read the volume potentiometer The returned value should be between O and 255 m LCD Check visually or with the graphical display use CCTM command 1006 1 to switch on all LCD elements Power cycle the radio to reset the LCD to its original state m PTT ke
311. are features Technicians at CSOs should contact Technical Support at TEL Supply the serial number of the radio under repair and the serial number of the replacement main board assembly located on a label on the main board assembly If it is known that the radio had software features enabled go to Step 6 Otherwise go to Step 7 Ask the CSO or TEL for a licence file for the replacement main board assembly The CSO will supply the required file Go to Step 8 Ask the CSO or TEL if the radio under repair had any software features enabled and if so to send a licence file for the replacement main board assembly T he CSO or TEL will either indicate that the radio had no software features enabled or supply the required file If the radio had no software features enabled go to Task 3 If the required file was supplied go to Step 8 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 3 Final Inspection Task 4 Final Test Task 5 Final Administration 8 On receiving the licence file run the programming application on the test PC On the menu bar click Tools gt Optional Features The Software Feature Enabler dialog appears 9 Use the licence file to enable the appropriate software features The procedure is given in the on line help facility under the heading Enabling a feature Go to Task 3 Make a final inspection of the exterior to check that no mechanical parts have been
312. are required for most of the screws in this installation The circled numbers in the following sections refer to the items in Figure 25 1 on page 530 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing a Remote Kit 529 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 1 1 Overview Installing the control head remotely is done in six steps 1 Remove the control head from the radio body if necessary 2 Install the torso interface D onto the radio body 3 Mount the remote U bracket in the required position 4 Install the control head interface onto the control head and install the remote control head assembly in the remote U bracket 5 Mount the U bracket in the required position and install the radio body in the U bracket 6 Route the remote cable between the remote control head assembly and the radio body 25 1 2 Parts Required The following diagram identifies the parts for remote control head installation and shows how they fit together Figure 25 1 Parts for remote control head installation torso interface RJ45 bung control head interface control head interface loom remote U bracket torso interface loom remote cable earthing tag self drilling screw earthing tag screw amp G e D 4 thumb screw remote cable grommets 530 Installing a Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 1 3 Removing the Control Head from the Radio Body if
313. assembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 3 Reassembling the Radio Body Inspect all disassembled parts for damage and replace them if necessary Reassembling the The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 4 on A D page 141 This figure shows the gt 25 W configuration 1 If the power connector has been replaced m With the gt 25 W radio use a Torx T6 torque driver to tighten the two screws to 11b in 0 11 N m m With the 25 W radio use a Torx T10 torque driver to tighten the two screws to 3lb in 0 34 Nm 2 If the outer foam seal or the inner foam D range seal have been removed fit new seals to the heat transfer block 3 With the 7225 W radio the rectangular gap pad QU must be replaced gt 25W each time the heat transfer block is separated from the main board 4 m Remove any residue of the old rectangular gap pad from the underside of main board and the heat transfer block m Peel off the transparent film on one side of the gap pad and evenly press the gap pad on the contact surface of main board refer to Figure 5 6 m Peel off the transparent film on other of the gap pad Figure 5 6 Contact surfaces on the bottom side of the main board contact surface tin plated of rectangular copper plate Audio PA area gap pad TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 143 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007
314. audio signal for the speaker is generated by 1C204 VOUTAUXP ball This signal is post volume control and has a pre emphasized frequency response The signal is then processed by R218 R217 and C231 C205 to restore a flat frequency response and reduce the signal level to that required by the audio power amplifier The top of C231 C205 1s where side tones are summed in and the CDC RX AUD signal is obtained C201 and R211 pre emphasize and attenuate the side tone signal to give a flat side tone frequency response and reduce the input to an appropriate level IC201 pins 8 to 10 amplifies the signal at the top of C231 C205 by 19dB and drives the CDC RX AUD system interface line via C212 and R225 The capacitor C212 provides AC output coupling and R225 ensures stability The DC bias for this amplifier is derived from IC204 The signal at the top of C231 C205 is fed via C204 to the audio power amplifier IC202 IC202 has 46dB of gain and a differential output configuration C209 C211 R252 and R253 ensure stability of the amplifier at high frequencies When operational the output bias voltage for C202 1s approximately half the radio supply voltage When not operational the output becomes high impedance Power up power down and muting of IC202 1s controlled by two signals from the digital section DIG AUD PA ENT and DIG AUD PA EN2 The network consisting of Q200 Q201 R200 to R206 R210 and R250 converts the two digital signals to the
315. basic block diagram of the main board refer to Figure 2 14 on page 48 For a more detailed block diagram of the transceiver refer to Figure 2 16 on page 53 Control Head Board The control head board of the control head with graphical display includes m the circuitry needed for the controls and indicators on the front panel m with a RISC processor and custom logic implemented on an FPGA and memory For a block diagram of this control head board refer to Figure 3 15 on page 97 The control head with graphical display may have a concealed microphone inside the control head and also has provision for a separate circuit board that may be designed to perform a variety of tasks including but not limited to Bluetooth connectivity No separate circuit board is required for a dynamic microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 47 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 14 Hardware architecture of the main board J0128UU0 suondo jeujaiu J0123UUO Ayeijixnyy 10128UU0 PeaH 011U07 J0122uU0 J9MOd 92PLIOIUI lt oipny pue 23002 ejep jenas snouoJupu s Aginda opne pue 32007 10 Hed Z ejep jeas snouosypu se MYND sayiwsuen 10 yed ejbip E L bojeue oi jeubip N Jd z J9MeAuo eybip o1 bojeue 7 191 uISUeJ Jeziseu1u g fouenbaJJ UNMS e JI J0129UU0 JY a S Ela pieog e 161q Ayddns aw p1eog uien TM8100 TM820
316. before the impulse reaches the IF stage where it could cause crystal filter ring 74 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 3 Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry Introduction Power Supplies Performance Requirements Effect of Tuning Range Switch mode Power Supply For a block diagram of the frequency synthesizer circuitry refer to Figure 3 5 and Figure 3 6 FCL for the A4 band and Figure 3 7 VCO for the K5 band The frequency synthesizer includes an active loop filter one or two VCOs and buffer amplifiers and a PLL IC The last named uses conventional integer N frequency division and includes a built in charge pump Speed up techniques ensure a transmit receive settling time of less than 4 5ms while retaining low noise characteristics in static operation Several power supplies are used by the frequency synthesizer owing to a combination of performance requirements and the availability of suitable components The PLL IC includes analog and digital circuitry and uses separate power supplies for each section The digital section is run on 3V while the analog section is run on approximately 5 V The VCOs and buffer amplifiers run off a supply of about 5 3V The active loop filter requires a supply of 14 to 15V 15 5V for the K5 band and a reference voltage of approximately 2 5 V Low noise and good regulation of the power supply are essential to the performance of t
317. ber 2007 Table4 7 CCTM commands for the control head graphical display 1000 Switch all LEDs 1000 x None Switches all the function key and where x is the required state STATUS LEDs on or off O off 120n 1001 Switch selected LED 1001 xy None Switches a selected function key or where x identifies the LED STATUS LED on or off O F1 1 F4 2 yellow 3 green 4 red and y is the state O off 120n 1002 LED intensity 1002 x None Sets the LED intensity where x is the intensity level O off 1 low 22medium 3 high AEN 1003 Keypad back lighting 1003 x None Activates the keypad back lighting where x is the intensity level at a specified intensity O off 1 low 22medium 3 high aa 1004 LCD back lighting 1004 x None Activates the LCD back lighting at where xis the intensity level a specified intensity O off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1005 Display contrast 1005 x None Sets the contrast of the display to a where x is the contrast level specified level any integer from O to 15 uu NN 1006 Display elements 1006 x None Switches all the elements of the where x is the required state display on or off O off 1 on MEN 1007 LCD temperature sensor 1007 Reads the output of the LCD temperature sensor Command Weg X corresponds to the oe reading an integer between 00 and FF 1008 LCD heating 1008 x None Switches the LCD heating on or off where x is the required state O off 120n 1009 Key press
318. bes the steps after completion of the fault diagnosis 1 Note Note TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Use the programming and calibration applications to load the pro eramming and calibration files read or set up in Initial Tasks If the radio had to be reprogrammed with a default programming file the following additional actions are required If the radio is to be returned direct to a Customer who has no programming facil ities the appropriate programming file needs to be obtained and uploaded or the data obtained to create the file If the radio 1s to be returned to a Dealer or direct to a Customer who does have programming facilities the Dealer or Customer respectively need to be informed so that they can program the radio appropriately If the main board assembly has been replaced certain software features may need to be enabled before the programming file can be loaded See Task 2 on page 164 Test the radio as described in Final Test on page 165 It may be necessary to also re calibrate to make the radio functional in particular if the main board assembly had to be replaced or if a default calibration file had to be loaded Refer to the online help of the calibration application Servicing Procedures 163 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 2 Enable Software Features SFE 164 If the main board assembly has been replaced level 1 service centres should return the faulty board to the
319. block must be secured to the main board The lid of the radio body may be left off After completing any measurement or test requiring activation of the transmitter immediately return the radio to the receive mode Under certain circumstances the microprocessor can key on the transmitter Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from such accidental transmissions Note The frequency ranges 156 8 MHz 375kHz 243MHz 5kHz and 406 0 to 406 1 MHz are reserved worldwide for use as mari time emergency frequencies or by distress beacons Do not pro eram transmitters to operate in any of these frequency bands General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 4 Setting up the Test Equipment Connect Equipment Settings for Receive Tests Settings for Transmit Tests Product Support CD This section covers the setting up of the test equipment for servicing the radios as well as related aspects m setting up of test equipment including test unit m basic programming and calibration tasks m invoking CCTM computer controlled test mode m summary tables of CCTM commands and error codes m visual and audible indications provided by radio The last named aspect applies to control heads with UI and concerns the STATUS LEDs and LCD screen and the various alerts and confidence tones emitted from the speaker Connect the test equipment to the radio as shown in Figure 4 2
320. buffer and a band limited operational amplifier back to the gate of Q306 In this way the transmitter 1s protected against bad mismatches With the 30W 35W radio the power control loop processes the voltages from the forward and reverse power sensors in the directional coupler This signal is fed back to the exciter device Q303 as well as to the driver Q306 This is to maintain the power control dynamic range With the 25 W radio the power control loop senses the forward power by means of the diode D304 This signal 1s fed to the buffer and a band limited operational amplifier back to the gate of Q306 A voltage clamp one of the operational amplifiers of IC301 for Q306 limits the maximum control loop voltage applied to its gate With the 40W 50W and 30 W 35 W radios the directional coupler actively senses the forward power and the reverse power and feeds them back to the power control circuit With the 25 W radio the directional coupler actively senses the forward power and feeds it back to the power control circuit If the directional coupler detects too much reverse power indicating a badly matched antenna the transmitter will be reduced to the lowest power setting For added protection a temperature sensor ensures that the transmitter power is reduced to very low levels should a temperature threshold be exceeded If the temperature does not decrease the transmitter 1s switched off TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Desc
321. c 345 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 295 PCB InDIDRDADONH x xa ses sans ad eR CEU REOR ACA e ROCCO e RR a 576 30 TMAA04 05 Ignition Sense Kit 579 30 1 Hardware Configuration for Ignition Sense 579 D an bide tot uma ste de Mi ie va 579 2205 TUNI ER E PERS 580 34 TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 581 211 idos band Repeater Mee 142a ma coke ee EAE ARR E AC 581 21 4 tonne toa GPS RT Lure nodes dor rx ad qox Rea 584 3129 Connecting to De lotion Simal ead dee de acd oed a de Re Poe e 584 OLA Conuiecungtoan External Alert Devices ic su vow 585 ILa Merece SOEUR a A d dde dede dea dod CR ded mra 586 587 32 TMAA10 01 Desktop Microphone ll 589 SEL LES ceto S 3E E 3 3 d 39 5 9rd c3 ddr ard dab aca dE XE arde ved 589 e UMORE NR EN ce A dod dU eee es EE WE dod RE dt ROC ed d 589 SO I ss L2 273 496 Rd ER E do Re REC Ede d a 590 Jede TAS BODIE eaae Vor Ee RR REOS AEG ice RE Poe Yd eS 590 Bs EE EEN A i doe 2x REOR dH RAHERW OE Rd ER RE Ys Sy E 349 LMAAIO 02 EIGQS E S uum 64 sde rista EH EE DS HER NEREA 593 deit ere CPP 593 dE Rado FO aiu uu aus 3e dede 34 ee OR Kod eed d 595 2059 DO BODIE e ae orb Erden RR EH A EU don A ER en o d f d 596 34 TMAA10 03 and TMAA10 06 High Power Remote Speakers 597 Ski TO aa axe qoe 6 OE EEE HEA CHEESES REG S 449 245 545 397 35 TMAA10 04 Remote PTT
322. ce the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 408 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 5 Circuitry in the vicinity of the internal options connector SK102 top side E oH WB Internal options connector EI C707 ooo Resa 253 CE 13 3 No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector Introduction This section covers the case where the receiver operates normally but there is no speaker audio at the auxiliary connector In other words there 1s no signal at pin 13 AUD TAP OUT of the connector The fault diagnosis procedure comprises two tasks m Task 8 check signal from CODEC m Task 9 check LPF and buffer amplifier in CODEC circuitry These tasks need to be followed by those of Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector on page 420 if there is also a fault with the transmit modulation using the auxiliary connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio
323. ce Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 22 If no receive frequency 1s detected but the switching network is not faulty Check Receive Buffer Amplifier check the receive buffer amplifier If the amplifier is not faulty there might not for the be a fault in the receive VCO that was not detected earlier K5 band 1 Remove the VCO BOT can 2 Check the receive buffer amplifier in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off a Measure the voltages at the base of Q5100 and at pin 4 of IC5100 see Figure 9 12 base of Q5100 0 7 0 1V DC receive mode pin 4 of IC5100 2 0 0 5V DC receive mode 4 Then check the receive buffer amplifier in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on 5 Again measure the voltages of Q5100 and IC5100 base of Q5100 OV DC transmit mode pin 4 of IC5100 OV DC transmit mode 6 If the voltages are correct the receive VCO is suspect go to Step 7 If they are not the receive buffer amplifier 1s suspect go to Step 9 pa Remove the VCO TOP can 8 Check the receive VCO circuitry based on Q504 see Figure 9 11 Conclude with Step 10 9 Check the first buffer stage based on Q5100 and the second stage based on IC5100 see Figure 9 12 10 Ifa fault is found repair the circuit and confirm that the voltages are TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual now correct If they are go to Final Tasks
324. ceiver distortion the TCXO is suspect or alternatively the matching circuitry for the crystal filters XF400 and XF401 There are two tasks m Task 17 TCXO calibration and repair of TCXO m Task 18 second IF and repair of matching circuitry Recalibrating the TCXO might often be sufficient to rectify the fault Task 17 First check the TCXO calibration and if necessary repair the TCXO TCXO Calibration and Repair of TCXO TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual M Use the calibration application to check the TCXO calibration Open the Haw Data page and click the Volt Ref TCXO VCO VCXO tab Note the values listed in the Tx TCXO and Rx TCXO fields of the TCXO group box The values should be Tx TCXO and Rx TCXO values between 20Hz and 20Hz If the calibration values are correct go to Step 4 If they are not recalibrate the TCXO and go to Step 8 Remove the CDC TOP can Check the components of the TCXO which is based on XL500 see Figure 10 5 Repair any fault Recalibrate the TCXO and check the TCXO calibration values again as in Step 1 and Step 2 If the calibration values are now correct go to Step 8 If they are not go to Task 18 Check if the distortion fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Task 18 Receiver Fault Finding 265 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 18 If the TCXO 1s not faulty check the second IF and if n
325. cessary also check the signal at the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310 This is the last point in the initial RF signal path 1 10 11 12 13 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual With the radio still in transmit mode measure the RF voltage at the drain of Q306 B1 or after C317 and C389 other bands See Figure 11 21 and use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent The required voltage should be as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured above is correct go to Step 7 If it 1s not go to Step 4 Check the components between C307 and Q306 see Figure 11 21 for VHF and UHE and Figure 11 21 for the K5 band If the above checks reveal a fault go to Step 6 If they do not go to Task 12 in Biasing of PA Driver and PAs on page 290 Repair the fault Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If not already done remove the PAF TOP can Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the power level to the maximum and then the command 38 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF voltage at the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310 see Figure 11 23 to Figure 11 25 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If an RF voltage 1s present there is no fau
326. check the biasing of the two PAs and the PA driver The procedure is covered in this section There are thirteen tasks grouped as follows Task 12 prepare to check biasing Task 13 to Task 15 check biasing of first PA Task 16 to Task 18 check biasing of second PA Task 19 and Task 20 check biasing of PA driver Task 21 to Task 24 repair circuitry The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the PAs and PA driver are summarized in Figure 11 8 Task 12 If the transmitter is not being inhibited check the biasing of the two PAs Prepare to Check Biasing 1 2 and the PA driver First make the following preparations Set the current limit on the DC power supply to 3A Enter the CCTM command 331 to check the DAC value of final bias 1 CDC TX FIN BIAS 1 at maximum power Record the value X returned Enter the CCTM command 332 to check the DAC value of final bias 2 CDC TX FIN BIAS 2 at maximum power Record the value y returned Enter the CCTM command 304 to check the DAC value of the clamp current at the driver gate Record the value Z returned Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Switch off all biases by entering the following CCTM commands in sequence m 3311 m 3321 m 3041 m 1141023 m 3340 m 3350 Note the current reading on the DC power supply This will be less than 500mA With the radio still in transmit mode check the biasing of the PAs and
327. ck for faulty shorted or misplaced components in the circuit between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310 see Figure 11 6 oc Repair any fault revealed by the above checks and go to Step 5 If no fault could be found go to Step 4 4 Remove the test lead and test capacitor resolder the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 for the VHF and UHF bands or C350 for the K5 band in position see Figure 11 26 and go to Task 26 5 With the test lead still connected to the test set enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum 6 Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 7 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 8 Measure the RF output power This should be RF output power more than 70W VHF more than 60W UHF more than 52W 700MHz more than 58W 800 MHz 9 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 10 Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 11 Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 12 Remove the test lead and test capacitor and resolder the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 for the VHF and UHF bands or C350 fo
328. correct check the SYN LOCK line SYN LOCK Line 1 output Enter the CCTM command 72 to determine the lock status in receive mode Note the status lock status xyz x RF PLL y FCL z LO2 O not in lock 1 in lock Check the SYN LOCK line by measuring the voltage at pin 14 of IC503 see Figure 9 2 The voltage should depend on the lock status as follows lock status 111 or 110 3 0 0 3V DC at pin 14 of IC503 lock status 011 or 010 OV DC at pin 14 of IC503 If the voltage measured in Step 2 is correct go to Loop Filter on page 204 If it is not go to Step 4 Check for continuity between pin 14 of IC503 and the digital board via R568 see Figure 9 2 and L102 see Figure 9 7 If there is a fault go to Step 6 If there is no fault the digital board is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Repair the fault Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 202 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 8 Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can top side
329. cs Limited November 2007 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 413 13 4 Faulty Receiver Introduction This section covers the case where the receiver does not operate although there is no apparent fault in the receiver circuit itself There are two tasks m Task 10 check level shifter m Task 11 check QN test point The latter check will isolate the module at fault if the level shifter is not the cause of the problem Task 10 Check the operation of the base band CODEC and receiver AGC as Check Level Shifter described below This concerns the level shifter circuit It is assumed that the receiver and power supply circuitry were checked and no faults were found 1 If not already done remove the CDC BOT can 2 With no RF signal applied check the voltage at pin 14 of IC201 see Figure 13 7 3 If the above voltage is correct go to Task 11 If it is not go to Step 4 4 Check the voltage at pin 12 of IC201 see Figure 13 7 5 If the above voltage is correct go to Step 8 If it is not go to Step 6 6 Check for and repair any shorts to ground at the junction of R238 and pin 12 of IC201 see Figure 13 7 ie Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 8 Check the circuitry R238 R239 R240 around pins 12 13 and 14 of IC201 see Figure 1
330. ct code m hotsurface safety warning m RF exposure safety warning Figure 1 3 Labels of the TM8100 and TM8200 product lines IC 737A TMAH6C S N 19061964 CE Q N46 IGG castatec IUH by Digital Voice Systems Inc Motorola TMAB22 H600 Inc and Tait Electronics Ltd 450 530 MHz Details in user documentation Tait Electronics Ltd NZ TAIT Made in New Zealand TMAH6C Restricted to occupational use to satisfy FCC RF exposure limits See user s guide for operating requirements ATTENTION 1 6 Specifications For up to date specifications refer to the area on the TaitWorld website reserved for TM8100 and TM8200 products TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Introduction 19 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 20 Introduction TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 Description This section describes the mechanical design and architecture of the radio explains the operation of the transceiver and the control head and gives pinouts of the radio connectors 2 1 Mechanical Design Overview The radio consists of the following main components m control head OU m radio body Figure 2 1 Components of the radio 3068z 01 The control head clips firmly to the front face of the radio body where a seal provides IP54 class protection A control head loom connects the control head to the radio body Two dot dash dot marks a
331. ctor and is a 13 8 V switched supply Digital logic components are used in the line interface board so there is a5 V regulator provided Initially the 13 8V from the radio 1s filtered and used for the audio line driver U5 with reference to analogue ground This 13 8 V is also used to supply the 5V regulator which is filtered separately for either 5 V digital or analogue devices A simple voltage divider is used to provide a 2 5 V half rail for the digital and a 2 2V rail for the analogue sections TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 9 PCB Information 17 9 1 TMAA01 01 Parts List PCB IPN 220 65202 04 Ref IPN Description Ref IPN Description C1 014 08100 03 Cap Tant SMD 10u 35v 20 D R10 038 13100 10 RES 0603 100R 1 1 10W C2 015 26100 08 Lap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v R11 038 14330 10 RES 0603 3k3 1 1 10W Gs 014 07470 01 Cap Tant SMD 4u7 25v 10 B R12 038 14560 00 RES 0603 5k6 5 1 10W C4 014 18100 05 Cap Tant SMD 10u 10v 10 A R13 038 16330 10 RES 0603 330k 1 1 10W C5 015 26100 08 Lap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v R14 038 16330 10 RES 0603 330k 1 1 10W C7 014 07470 01 Cap Tant SMD 4u7 25v 10 B R15A 038 13680 00 RES 0603 680R 5 1 10W C8 018 14100 00 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 R16A 038 13120 00 RES 0603 120R 5 1 10W C9 018 14100 00 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 R17 038 13680 00 RES 0603 680R 5 1 10W C10 015 26100 08 Lap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v R18 038 15100 10 RES 0603 10
332. cul 38 3 3 C amp L Tuut LO Gnd Q E U NMbad SLNSWONIAWS SSI N3 8 J3NION3 EBS CO 2A7T x x x CO AND E 202 ANG U319H5IAW UC 11 90 pesn enre aa sanjeA en32e 104 151 SEd au 01 Jajay juo eAnjeoipul cO ge WB ale WeIHeID dewys y ui s njea JUBUOdWOD aul GOINOHIO3 L L L L 0H 3710H 3710H TELLE Lors ONT IN ONT INNON ONT INNON ONT INNON mm 2909 EME 2009 E WWEd 2009 EE d 2009 EME 10H V3 10H c lOH T3 10H 4 A A A A A A lt Ss yz z lt l JoU lt UT audO I pet ous JE Pe DUS n um A ER ZD LE oldny DIN NI OI0ny XI T BKT WO 7 N T O D D LJ cm A t x O 440 TONE Um vile dN99 NI d V1 OIGNV OIGNV GOW A s E D 3 JUT tid ang orW lqoN TD 7 9 qeuod MS NOILISOd E H SMOHS LI LlOGHHOONI SI TOGWAS Tk GNOILISOd 3 g8H SMS ONE CTT CO S9 geuoqd A A A cdi sy TOTS OIM Sonn WAO T T T e Tal ONE xH OIM N ab RUE K O Tod s 9IIqolN NN did 7 KL D L Ld DIW zid O ajqeuod q D N v SNId quo1 Lada SE ET aut oO d gt s Td s O lOd g 3SNaS e qeuog Cd 5 Olavy a TMS qc e 3 UddS algo e MS 9 qeuo H31ndWo2 o a EURE S Eent a ago A x EC a jqeuod VES H c 2 1qo 0 o c lc RU UxLl OIH 2 2 S qeiog gt p d e d D TO
333. d see Figure 9 7 The result should be via at R105 3 3 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 389 0 If the voltages measured in Step 8 and Step 10 are correct go to Step 12 If they are not the digital board is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check and resolder R105 in position see Figure 9 7 and check for continuity between the collector of Q505 see Figure 9 4 and the digital board via R105 If a fault is found repair the circuit and confirm that the voltages are now correct If they are go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 207 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 16 Check TP503 Test Point 208 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding If the reference voltage feedback voltage and DIG SYN FAST line are all correct check the voltage at the TP503 test point 1 Note 10 Measure the voltage at the TP503 test point see Figure 9 8 The oscilloscope should show a DC level less than 3 0 V with no sign of noise or modulation TP503 test point lt 3 0V DC If the correct result is obtained go to Step 3 If it is not go to Step 5 The loop filter 1s faulty but the above measurements do not provide more specific information Check IC504 IC505 Q511 see Figure 9 4 and associated components Check the following co
334. d by pulse width modulation For a circuit diagram and PCB layout refer to Figure 14 3 on page 428 and Figure 14 4 on page 429 If the LCD backlighting 1s faulty 1 Make sure that LCD backlighting has been enabled in the program ming application Check the 3 3 V supply voltage at pin 1 S1 of Q102 Q102 pin 1 51 3 3V If the signal is correct continue with Step 3 If the signal 1s not correct refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 426 Send CCTM command 1004 3 to switch on LCD backlighting Check the signal at pin 2 G1 of Q102 Q102 pin 2 G1 GND with backlighting switched on If the signal 1s correct continue with Step 5 If the signal 1s not correct visually inspect pin 2 for open contact Otherwise the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced Check the signal at pin 7 DA1 of Q102 Q102 pin 7 D1A 3 3V with backlighting switched on If the signal is correct continue with Step 6 If the signal is not correct replace Q102 Visually inspect whether the contact of pin 8 of connector J102 is open or shorted Check the signal at pin 8 of connector J102 J102 pin 8 3 3V with backlighting switched on If the signal is correct replace the LCD 430 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 5 LCD Heating Faulty The heating incorporated in the LCD module is controlled by a data line from the FPGA
335. d therefore with suspect receive VCO and related circuitry The minimum and maximum receive frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands are defined in Table 9 3 There are six aspects m Task 17 check receive VCO m Task 18 repair PLL feedback m Task 19 repair receive VCO m Task 20 check switching to receive mode m Task 21 repair switching network m ask 22 check receive buffer amplifier not for the K5 band The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the VCO and related circuitry are summarized in Figure 9 9 and Figure 9 10 Table 9 3 Minimum and maximum receive frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands Frequency band Receive frequency in MHz Figure 9 9 Measurement points for the VCO in UHF radios K5 band PLL FEEDBACK IC506 Q510 l i i VCO 1 OE 4 o UY LOOP VOLTAGE A i i Coupler V SYN RX LOL l VCO2 VCO K5 BAND TO R545 TO R577 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 209 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 10 Measurement points for the VCO and related circuitry in UHF radios except K5 band Qquvog VLIOIQ NS NAS 9Id E MS HLNAS 910 eo MS QL NAS SIC cest 9060 JO 9 Nid O 393H9 OL VIA GH O GNV 80S HOLIMS AS y HOLIMS HI 90SD 10 Nid ddldnoo QNV daldridWv 00 LS JO t Nid H3Al3O3H dada4nag JAI3O3H FEE AHLINOHIO
336. d 13 8 V supply from the radio body to 3 3V A 1 5V regulator U203 converts the 3 3V to 1 5 V A power sense module U202 verifies the outputs of the voltage regulators and in the case of a fault creates a power reset signal which is processed by the FPGA If the start up of the control head fails the radio body reduces the switched 13 8 V supply shortly after power is supplied Figure 14 1 Circuit diagram of the power supply circuitry J103 Control Head Connector e O co cc ames qu EL Ki AA PWR RESET 8 wi WDI qu BET Kena D203 SI For all faults check that the supply voltages are correct 1 Note Check the 3 3 V supply voltage between E202 and C210 E207 210 3 2 V If the signal 1s correct continue with Step 4 If the signal 1s not correct visually inspect the components E202 D201 L201 R205 and R206 for open or shorted contacts Replace if necessary Continue with Step 2 Check the 13 8 V supply voltage 9 7 V to 17 2 V between pin 2 of the control head connector J103 and pin 8 of U1 J103 pin 2 13 8V V589 7V KA U1 pin 8 13 8V V 9 7V 17 2V If the signal is correct continue with Step 3 A fault in the control head can cause the radio body to reduce the switched 13 8 V supply shortly after power is supplied In this case the control head must be supplied directly through pin 2 of con nector J103 426 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Displa
337. d 1S1 ET E00 d HMd 1 29 10 8 Nid 10 6 Nid H3azis JHLNAS AONano dds 90 0 o OLED 60 60 10 31V9 ELORE ddldnoo IWNOIL 02910 DSOIWNY ke dd lt SAdAL IVN9IS dd 1 ANV HOLIMS Nid 361 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 13 Check the biasing of the first PA Q310 Check Biasing of First PA And when entering the CCTM command 331 x do not Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A specify a value X higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs iL Use a multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 14 of IC301 see Figure 12 8 The voltage should be pin 14 of IC301 lt 100 mV initially 2 Note the current reading on the DC power supply As mentioned in Step 7 of Task 12 this will be less than 500mA 2 Enter the CCTM command 337 X where X was recorded in Task 12 4 Check that the voltage changes to pin 14 of C301 2 to 5V after entry of CCTM 331 x 5 Also note the current reading This should increase by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12 6 6 If the voltage and current are both correct go to Step 7 If the voltage is correct but not the current go to Task 14 If neither the current nor the voltage is correct go to Task 15 T Enter the CCTM command 331 1 to switch off final bias 1 and go
338. d 90 space frames 319 30073 00 and 319 30073 01 C t pe DE LPs E o bco The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured a Spares kit TMAA22 01 contains an assembled 2 digit display control head without the control head board Spares kit TMAA22 90 contains an assembled 1 digit display control head without the control head board Neither spares kit includes the optional parts of the concealed microphone b Space frames D without speaker clamp NV before April 2007 should be replaced with space frame 319 30073 02 and speaker clamp 303 501 11 xx TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Spare Parts 461 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 462 Spare Parts Table 16 4 Spare parts for the 3 digit display EE Control head loom with female female adaptor k 219 02882 xx female female adaptor 210 00021 41 EE H 2m frame before April 2007 Dmm Es frame since April 2007 319 30073 02 CS Ie ui Speaker clamp since April 2007 not for use with leegen Ca frames 319 30073 00 and 319 30073 01 Rm pr pee Sms rpm The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured a Space frames 6 without speaker clamp U before April 2007 should be replaced with space frame 319 30073 02 and speaker clamp 303 501 1 1 xx TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait El
339. d assembly are identified in Figure 4 3 and Figure 4 4 The figures also show the locations of the connectors on the board Figure 4 3 Shielding cans and connectors top side of main board assembly PIN TOP LPF TOP L DIRC TOP FE TOP PAF TOP VCO TOP UHF only IF TOP SYN TOP PAD TOP FCL TOP CDC TOP PL101 Factory Connector SK102 Digital Board Internal Options Connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 119 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 4 4 Shielding cans and connectors bottom side of main board assembly SK103 RF Connector NB BOT VHF only Copper Plate SK100 Control Head Connector Copper Plate VCO BOT LO2 BOT SYN BOT VCXO BOT CDC BOT PL100 Power Conenctor IM Digital Board SK101 Auxiliary Connector Can Removal Cans are best removed and installed using a can removal tool If this tool 1s and Installation available technicians should refer to the documentation supplied with the tool for the correct procedures If the tool 1s not available a hot air tool may be used instead However technicians require training in the best techniques to employ in the absence of a can removal tool Such training is part of the accreditation process for service centres 120 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Spare Cans It is good practice to discard any can that has been removed and replace it
340. d from the digital board should all be active digital signals 3 3 0 3V If the digital signals are correct the CODEC 2 circuitry is suspect go to Step 6 If they are not go to Step 4 If any or all digital signals are missing check the connections between IC205 and the digital board see Figure 9 17 If there are faults such as open circuits in the connections repair the circuitry and repeat Task 40 If the connections are not faulty then the digital board 1s faulty Replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 The CODEC 2 circuitry comprises IC205 and associated components under the CDC TOP can see Figure 9 17 as well as R246 under the CDC BOT can see Figure 7 3 on page 174 Locate the fault Repair the circuitry Note that if the circuitry is functioning properly probing the TP501 test point see Figure 9 18 during power up will show a five step staircase signal followed by a random nine step staircase signal this is the expected power up auto calibration sequence Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 9 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Replace all cans Repeat Task 40 to confirm the removal of the fault If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 245 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 246 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service M
341. d has been installed unless the external options cover seal is installed Important The radio does not meet the IP54 protec cables connected to the external options connector must be less than three metres 10 feet 1n length 18 1 Operation The TMAA01 02 RS 232 board provides a suitable interface to external devices requiring full RS 232 level compatibility As well as supporting transmit and receive data lines the board also supports RTS and CTS hardware flow control lines 18 1 1 Hardware Flow Control TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Although the serial transmit and receive lines are dedicated connections on the internal options connector the RTS and CTS lines have to be assigned For hardware flow control these lines are set up in the programming application RTS should be assigned to IOD GPIO3 and CTS should be assigned to IOP_GPIO1 Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information TMAA01 02 RS 232 Board 489 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 18 2 Installing the RS 232 Board damage from static charges Refer to ESD Precautions Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to on page 112 for more information 18 2 1 Parts Required The following table describes the parts required to install an RS 232 board in a radio The parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in Figure 18 1 and are used to connect to the radio s external opti
342. d in the Subaudible Signalling tab of the Basic Settings form During the lead out delay period no signalling such as CTCSS or DCS is present Table 29 6 Transmit tail in the Basic Settings form Subaudible Signalling tab CTCSS Settings Lead Out Delay any duration up to 1000ms DCS Settings Lead Out Delay any duration up to 1000ms 574 TMAAO04 04 Crossband Linking Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 29 3 Operational Testing m On the receiving radio inject an on channel RF signal at a level of 70dBm modulated to 3kHz deviation wide bandwidth channel or 1 5kHz narrow bandwidth channel at 1 kHz AE 2 On the transmitting radio the resulting deviation should be m 3kHz with a tolerance of 200Hz on a 25 kHz wide bandwidth channel m 1 5kHz with a tolerance of 200 Hz on a 12 5 kHz narrow bandwidth channel 29 4 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the crossband linking cable on the radios auxiliary connectors and shows the interface between the cable and the radios Figure 29 1 TMAA04 04 crossband linking cable auxiliary connector crossband linking board auxiliary connector radio 1 radio 2 Table 29 7 Auxiliary connectors pins and signals m e S Ze O 9 e 8 Ze TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA04 04 Crossband Linking Cable 575 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 29 5 PCB In
343. de Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent to measure the RF voltage after C3500 see Figure 11 21 Earth the probe to the FCL TOP can adjacent to the PA driver circuitry The required voltage should be as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 or Table 11 11 H7 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured above 1s correct go to Task 27 If 1t 1s not go to Step 7 Check C3500 for VHF and UHF see Figure 11 21 or C300 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 If this component 1s not faulty go to Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 If this component is faulty replace 1t and return to Step 2 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 21 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can UHF and VHF UHF shown VHF similar OUTPUT OF PA DRIVER OUTPUT OF STAGE 3 OF EXCITER AT C307 p FA JUNCTION OF R3527 R3525 AND C3512 R3539 R3526 C3509 B1 BAND OUTPUT OF STAGE 2 OF EXCITER OUTPUT OF STAGE 2 OF EXCITER AT C3509 C3516 R3520 R35 10 C3515 GC Oo dba pa Ro Om ND S Ken Tg GD g LU A Oo on LW i C3510
344. dication of a fault in the transmitter is a reduction in range This implies that the power output is wrong or too low Another type of fault is manifested when the radio always transmits at full power even if set otherwise Regardless of the fault the lock status should be normal Fault Diagnosis The procedure for diagnosing transmitter faults is divided into tasks which Tasks are grouped into the following sections m Power Supplies m Transmitter RF Power m Biasing of PA Driver and PAs m RF Signal Path Before beginning the fault diagnosis with Power Supplies note the following information regarding CCTM commands frequency bands can removal and replacement and transmit tests CCTM Commands The CCTM commands required in this section are listed in Table 12 1 Full details of the commands are given in Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM on page 123 Table 12 1 CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the transmitter 101 xy 0 Set transmit frequency x in hertz and receive frequency y in hertz to specified values Set DAC value x in range 0 to 1023 of transmit power Read clamp current at gate of PA driver displays DAC value x in range O to 255 304 x Set DAC value x in range 0 to 255 of clamp current at gate of PA driver Set transmitter power level x O off 1 very low 2 low 3 medium 4 high 5 maximum Read bias voltage for first PA displays DAC value x in range 0 to 255 Set
345. e Again measure the RF output power This should be RF output power more than 70W VHF more than 60W UHF more than 52W 700MHz more than 58W 800 MHZ T Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 8 Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 p Repeat Step 5 to Step 7 10 Remove the test lead and test capacitor and resolder the blocking capacitors C361 C362 and C363 for VHF and UHF or C363 tor the K5 band see Figure 11 27 in position 11 Ifthe power in both the above cases is now correct the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 334 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 28 Components of concern on the bottom side of the main board VHF COPPER PLATE JI CO l D a R381 EE V VCO BOT CAN i T R34 ra R3091 R393 NB BOT CAN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 335 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 29 Components of concern on the bottom side of the main board UHF COPPER PLATE VCO BOT CAN 336 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Serv
346. e rubber seal and wires The TMAA02 07 kit is used for radios with a graphical display control head For radios with 1 2 or 3 digit display control heads the TMAA02 06 kit is used refer to TMAAO02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones on page 519 22 1 Installation damage from static discharges Refer to ESD Precautions on page 112 for more information Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to Removing the Radio To install the concealed microphone capsule the control head must be Control Head removed from the radio is not damaged Damage to this seal reduces environmental Important During this procedure take care that the control head seal protection 1 On the underside of the radio insert a 5mm 3 16 inch flat Se control head seal bladed screwdriver between the N control head and the control head SC indication of d point c TP lever point seal in either position or gt Insertion points and are LZ lever points and are indicated on the radio chassis by a dot dash dot pattern eme 2 Use the screwdriver to lift the control head off the chassis clip then repeat in the other position 3 Unplug the control head loom from the radio body TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO02 07 Concealed Microphone 519 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Installing the Microphone Capsule Importan
347. e CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Check the logic signal at the TX INH test point see Figure 11 4 The signal should be TX INH test point about OV inactive If the signal 1s inactive as required go to Step 4 If it 1s active about 1 1 V the transmitter 1s being inhibited go to Step 5 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode and go to Task 12 in Biasing of PA Driver and PAs on page 290 Check the logic signal at the D TX INH test point see Figure 11 17 on page 310 VHF or Figure 11 4 UHF The signal should be D TX INH test point about OV inactive If the signal is inactive as required go to Step 8 If it is active about 3 2V the temperature sensor 1s suspect go to Step 7 Enter the CCTM command 82 to place the radio in receive mode and go to Task 8 The lock status 1s possibly no longer normal Enter the CCTM command 72 and check the lock status Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode The normal lock status is 110 If it is not proceed to the relevant section If it is go to Step 11 Check for short circuits on the DIG TX INH line from the D TX INH test point Repair any fault confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 283 Tait Electronics Lim
348. e Figure 9 8 While holding the probe at C565 use the tweezers to momentarily apply 3V DC to the junction do not touch the board with your hand and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans when you remove them The voltage should change to C565 lt 0 5V DC 6 If the loop voltage is correct go to Task 12 If it is not the loop filter circuitry is suspect go to Task 13 204 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 12 If the loop voltage 1s correct the loop filter 1s functioning properly VCO Faulty The VCO and related circuitry 15 therefore suspect The section to proceed to depends on the type of the radio and the nature of the fault 1 With a UHF radio go to Step 2 With a VHF radio go to VCO and Related Circuitry VHF Radios on page 224 2 If a UHF radio exhibits a lock error or a receive fault the receive VCO 1s suspect go to Receive VCO and Related Circuitry UHF Radios on page 209 If it exhibits a system error or a transmit fault the transmit VCO 1s suspect go to Transmit VCO and Related Circuitry UHF and 800 MHz Radios on page 218 Task 13 If the loop filter circuitry is suspect first check the reference voltage for Check Reference Le E Voltage 1 Remove the SYN BOT can 2 Measure the reference voltage at pin 5 of IC505 see Figure 9 4 The result should be IC505 pin 5 2 8 0 1V DC 63 If th
349. e antenna The RF power amplifier and exciter of the 30W 35W K5 band radio is a four stage line up with approximately 38dB of power gain The output of the frequency synthesizer 1s first buffered to reduce kick during power ramping The buffer output goes to a discrete exciter that produces approximately 500mW output This is followed by an LDMOS driver producing up to 6 W output The final stage consists of two parallel LDMOS devices producing enough power to provide 30W at 762 to 806 MHz and 35 W at 806 to 87 0M Hz at the antenna The RF power amplifier of the 25 W radio 1s a four stage line up with approximately 37 dB of power gain The output of the frequency synthesizer is first buffered to reduce kick during power ramping The buffer output goes to a broad band exciter IC that produces approximately 200m W output This 1s followed by an LDMOS driver producing up to 2W output that is power controlled The final stage consists of two parallel LDMOS devices producing enough power to provide 25 W at the antenna The output of the RF power amplifier passes through a dual directional coupler used for power control and monitoring to the PIN switch The PIN switch toggles the antenna path between the receiver and transmitter 1n receive and transmit modes respectively Finally the output is low pass filtered to bring harmonic levels within specification The steady state power output of the transmitter is regulated using a hardware control loop
350. e command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode J Measure the RF voltage at the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310 see Figure 12 15 10 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 11 Ifan RF voltage is present there is no fault in the initial RF signal path go to Task 29 If there is no RF voltage go to Step 12 12 Check the components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310 see Figure 12 15 13 Ifa fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 386 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 15 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the PAs Q309 and Q310 UHF shown PAF TOP can PAD TOP can TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 387 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 29 If as determined in Task 25 to Task 28 there is no fault in the initial RF Check Power at Directional Coupler signal path investigate the final signal path This part of the circuitry may also require investigation following certain checks in Transmitter RF Power Begin by checking the directional coupler as follows 1 2 10 11 12
351. e controlled by two FPGA signals and two transistors Q2 resulting 1n four intensity levels off low medium and high The keypad backlighting LEDs are arranged in two groups for the main keypad and one group for the on off keypad each group consisting of three LEDs Figure 14 7 Circuit diagram of the keypad backlighting circuitry Main Keypad 3V3 3V3 13V8 13V8 13V8 H30 H617 R614 s Le 1 P 2 V D607 V D609 V D605 KEY BRIGHTO 10K EN 10K C a cs Ss Q2 V D610 V D611 V D606 FPGA N k V D608 vDei2 OnOff y D618 KEY BRIGHT1 k Keypad Ta KE ou ES 4 R613 R615 R618 R619 One LED or If one LED or one group of three LEDs is faulty One Group of LEDs Faulty 1 Send CCTM command 1003 x where x is the intensity 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high to switch on keypad backlighting 2 Check the 13 8 V supply voltage of the relevant branch 3 From top to bottom check the resistor the three LEDs and the transistor of the relevant branch for continuity R30 4 7Q R617 4 7Q R614 4 7Q D607 1 9V on D607 1 9V on D605 1 9V on D610 1 9V on D609 1 9V on D606 1 9V on D608 1 9V on D611 1 9V on D618 1 9V on Q603 1 9V on Q609 1 9V on Q610 1 9V on R615 56Q R618 56Q R619 56Q All LEDs Faulty or If all LEDs are faulty or the intensity 1s faulty Intensity Faulty 1 Send CCTM command 1003 x where x is the intensity 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high to switch on keypad backlighting 43
352. e fault Repair the circuitry Note that the TCXO input to the mixer see Figure 9 18 should be TCXO input at R521 pin 4 of IC501 TCXO input square wave with frequency of 13 MHz and amplitude of 3 0 0 2 Vpp A4 band TCXO input at R520 pin 4 of IC506 TCXO input square wave with frequency of 10 4MHz and amplitude of 3 0 0 2 Vpp Also the VCXO input to the mixer see Figure 9 18 although noisy and difficult to measure should be VCXO input at R522 pin 1 of IC501 VCXO input sine wave of 20 10 mon A4 band VCXO input at R510 pin 1 of IC506 VCXO input sine wave of 20 10 mon Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 6 If the repair failed resolder R527 in its original position as shown in Figure 9 18 replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 242 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 6 Resolder R527 in its original position as shown in Figure 9 18 7 Replace all cans 8 Use the oscilloscope probe to check the difference frequency at the TP502 test point see Figure 9 18 The signal is SYN CDC FCL and should be TP502 test point sine wave of 1 1 0 2V on 1 5 0 1V DC 9 If the signal is correct the fault has been removed go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the signal is not correct the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manu
353. e highest frequency in the radios frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz The required values for the different frequency bands are given in Table 12 2 Enter the CCTM command 826 5 to set the radio to maximum power Attempt to place the radio in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 33 If the radio enters the transmit mode continue with Step 7 If instead a C03 error is displayed in response to the command 33 go to Task 7 in Transmitter RF Power on page 354 Measure the voltage at the point on L310 shown in Figure 12 2 This 1s the supply at the common drain of Q309 and Q310 and should be common drain of Q309 and Q310 more than 13V DC Also measure the voltage at the point on L306 shown in Figure 12 3 This 1s the supply at the drain of Q306 and should be drain of Q306 more than 13V DC Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the power supply measured in Step 7 and Step 8 1s not correct go to Task 2 If it 1s go to Task 3 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 345 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 2 Point for measuring the power supply to the PAs UHF shown MEASUREMENT POINT ON L310 C399A C399B C399C C399D C399 C399F C399G C399H C399 C399K C399L C393 C399M C399N i C3990 C399P ST Es E D 346
354. e installation warnings and safety regula tions in the installation procedures of the radio Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to damage from static discharges Refer to ESD Precautions on page 112 for more information Note Torx T10 and T20 screwdrivers are required for most of the screws in this installation The circled numbers in the following sections refer to the items in Figure 26 1 on page 546 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 545 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 1 1 Overview Installing the control head remotely is done in six steps 1 2 3 4 Remove the control head from the radio body if necessary Install the torso interface D onto the radio body Mount the remote U bracket in the required position Install the control head interface 2 onto the control head and install the remote control head assembly in the remote U bracket Mount the U bracket in the required position and install the radio body in the U bracket Route the remote cable between the remote control head assembly and the radio body 26 1 2 Parts Required The following diagram identifies the parts for remote control head installation and shows how they fit together Figure 26 1 Parts for remote control head installation torso interface control head interface remote U bracket remote cable self drilling screw D 4 thumb
355. e voltage is correct go to Task 14 If it is not the reference voltage circuitry is suspect go to Step 4 4 Resolder R542 in position and check the C multiplier Q512 see Figure 9 8 5 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit and confirm that the reference voltage 1s now correct If it 1s go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 205 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 14 If the loop filter is suspect but the reference voltage 1s correct check the Check Feedback Voltage feedback voltage 1 Measure the feedback voltage at pin 6 of IC505 see Figure 9 4 The result should be 2 If the voltage is not correct the loop filter is faulty go to Step 3 If the voltage is correct resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 8 and go to Task 15 3 Check IC504 IC505 Q511 see Figure 9 4 and associated components 4 Check the following components see Figure 9 8 A4 band C5085 to C5089 B1 band C5085 to C5089 CO band C5085 to C5088 D1 band C5085 to C5088 H5 band C5085 and C5086 H6 H7 bands C5085 and C5086 K5 band C590 and C591 Note On early issue boards C548 is fitted instead of these components 5 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit repeat the measurement of the feedback voltage in Step 1 and resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 8 6 If
356. ead on page 147 If the repair fails or no fault could be found replace the control head board After completing the repair carry out the tasks in Initial Tasks on page 155 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 423 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 1 CCTM Commands The following CCTM commands are used during the fault finding of the control head Table 14 1 CCTM commands for fault finding of the control head CCTM command Entry at keyboard Response on screen 1000 All function key LEDs and status LEDs 1000 0 off none sequentially switches the function key LEDs and 1000 1 on the status LEDs on and off 1001 Individual function key LEDs and 1001 xy none status LEDs where x is the LED number O F1 switches individual LEDs on and off 1 F4 2 yellow 32 green 4 red and y is the state O off 1 on 1002 LED intensity 1002 0 off none sets the LED intensity 1002 1 low 1002 2 2 medium 1002 3 high 1003 Keypad backlighting 1003 0 off none Activate keypad backlighting at specified 1003 1 low intensity 1003 2 2 medium 1003 3 high 1004 LCD backlighting 1004 0 off none Activate LCD backlighting at specified intensity 1004 1 low 1004 2 2 medium 1004 3 high 1005 LCD contrast 1005 x none sets the LCD contrast 16 levels where x is the contrast level O to 15 1006 LCD elements 1006 0 off none switches all LCD elements on and off 1006 1 2 on 1007 L
357. eater mode 2 On the receiving radio inject an on channel REF signal at a level of 70 dBm modulated to 3kHz deviation wide bandwidth channel or 1 5kHz narrow bandwidth channel at 1 kHz AE On the transmitting radio the resulting deviation should be gm 3kHz with a tolerance of 200 Hz on a 25 kHz wide bandwidth channel m 1 5kHz with a tolerance of T 200Hz on a 12 5 kHz narrow bandwidth channel TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 583 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 31 2 31 2 1 31 2 2 31 3 31 3 1 Connecting to a GPS Device The cable provides an RJ 45 socket which is used to connect a TM8260 dual radio system to a GPS device such as a Garmin 16HVS antenna receiver product code TMAA05 01 GPS data is sent from the antenna to both radios Installation Plug the GPS receiver antenna directly into the RJ 45 socket The socket is the correct type for the antenna therefore the adaptor that 1s supplied with the GPS antenna is not required For information on antenna mounting refer to the instructions provided with your GPS device Radio Programming Program one or both radios with GPS settings as required For detailed configuration and programming information contact your local Tait dealer Connecting to the Ignition Signal The cable s external interface connector can be used to connect a TM8260 dual radio system to the vehicle s ignition signal
358. ecessary repair the Second IF and Repair of Matching Circuitry 1 266 Receiver Fault Finding matching circuitry Input a large unmodulated RF input signal exceeding 90 dBm at the RF connector Use a needle probe to measure the frequency of the signal at the QN test point access is through the hole in the IF TOP can see Figure 10 1 The frequency is the second IF and should be frequency at QN test point 64 000kHz If the second IF 1s correct go to Step 6 If it 1s not go to Step 4 Recalibrate the TCXO Check if the distortion fault has been removed If 1t has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Step 6 Remove the IF TOP can Check the components between T401 and IC400 these form the matching circuitry for the crystal filters XF400 and XF401 see Figure 10 1 Repair any fault confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 11 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W Introduction Fault Diagnosis Tasks CCTM Commands This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the 40 W 50 W and 30W 35W transmitter circuitry The main indication of a fault in the transmitter is a reduction in range This implies that the power output is wrong or too low Another type of fault 1s exhibited w
359. econnect the 13 8 V supply and press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up or the correct regulator voltage is restored go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 174 Power Supply Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 4 The radio may be configured for one or more of the following power up Check Power up Configuration options W battery power sense m auxiliary power sense m emergency power sense m internal options power sense A particular option 1s implemented by inserting the link mentioned in Table 7 1 If there is a fault with a power up option for which the radio is configured first confirm that the configuration is correct 1 Confirm that the correct link or links have been inserted for the required power up options see Figure 7 2 and Table 7 1 For all except the battery power sense option also check the radio programming as follows 2 Open the Programmable 1 0 form 3 Under the Digital tab scroll to the relevant digital line listed in the Pin field m internal options power sense IOP GPIO m auxiliary power sense AUX GPL m emergency power sense AUX GPI2 4 For the first two lines confirm that the Power Sense Ignition option has been selected in the Action field and High or Low in the Active field For the third line confirm that Enter Emergenc
360. ect but not the current either the enhn first PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect And when entering the CCTM command 331 x do not specify a value X higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A 1 If the PAF TOP can has already been removed go to Step 5 If it has not go to Step 2 2 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 3 Remove the PAF TOP can 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 5 Enter the CCTM command 337 X where X was recorded in Task 12 6 Check that the voltage at the gate of Q310 is see Figure 12 9 gate of Q310 2 to 5V ra Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 8 If the voltage measured above is correct Q310 is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not correct go to step 9 9 Check the circuitry between pin 14 of IC301 and the gate of Q310 see Figure 12 9 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or Q310 itself is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 365 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 15 If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 13 is c
361. ector RF connector mini UHF or auxiliary BNC connector DB15 TMAA23 02 cable 50W 40W radios TMAA20 03 cable 25W radios DC power supply FW e o oJ Q Q 9 banana plugs 614 TOPA SV 024 Test Unit RF comms set RF in out N type audio monitor out BNC Oscilloscope Co AC input BNC TMAA21 01 cable microphone connector RJ45 TMAA20 02 cable programming connector DB9 radio with blank control head TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 38 2 Operation This section explains the function of the TOPA SV 024 test unit controls The procedure for using the test unit 1s described in the relevant section on test equipment setup 38 2 14 Portable Mobile Switch This 2 way toggle switch is used to switch attenuation resistors R4 R5 R6 in and out of the line from the radios positive speaker output to the positive Rx Audio SINAD output of the test unit before the isolating transformer m When set to Portable the attenuation resistors are switched out m When set to Mobile the attenuation resistors are switched in attenuation 10 1 Important Selecting the wrong switch position may result in incorrect SINAD readings and damage to the test unit 38 2 2 Mod Audio Audio Tap In
362. ectronics Limited November 2007 Figure 16 5 Spare parts of the RJ45 control head Torx T10 5 b in 0 6N m Table 16 5 Spare parts of the RJ45 control head EC CE E Control head board XMAC30 2 Control head loom with female female adaptor 1 219 02882 xx female female adaptor 210 00021 41 pe e 346 10030 08 3x8 PT screw TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Spare Parts 463 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 464 Spare Parts TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Part C Accessories 17 TMAAO1 01 Line Interface Board 469 E64 SIRE 222 5232q4 99923 43 EX RU RUE ark d ed ta on qid X 469 172 Contiguring the Line Intertace Board age cd ERR 469 17 9 Installing the Line Interface Board sisi x9 p bed ste 473 17 4 Programming Information 476 15 5 Inernet a T a ausis EE ooh 4 dedi sitio tn 477 176 Line Interface Board Application casos aa naeh dE 478 15 7 Liune lutesce Dou Get auae ded dre EE de ode ded n 479 LS OECD SCHEDE 5h Vet ee eh dd od clito 481 ILS PODDA 2 222333 9 0 3922 mn ets 34 221 3 4 483 18 TMAAO01 02 RS 232 Board 489 1 hi EE Ee EE Ne SE ee eee TT TT 489 15 2 huius the R5 232 BOB A A ss ha Eh eee cen ba danas 490 153 Intesboe DeC NOB oo Ah de Ro RS ue CREER RC e ed 492 14 PLBDUUHSQUOM RA eo 33 P RW Ae pd Ped qub Rd P 493 19 TMAA01 05 and TMAAO01 07 Options Extender B
363. ed November 2007 Task 24 In this task any faults 1n the power control and shaping filter circuitry will Power Control and Shaping Filter 1 10 11 12 13 be located Measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC303 see Figure 12 8 in the power control circuit The voltage should be pin 8 of IC303 7 4 0 5V If the voltage is correct go to Step 3 If it is not enter the CCTM command 32 and return to Task 23 Measure the voltage at pin 10 of IC303 see Figure 12 8 in the power control circuit The voltage should be pin 10 of C303 4 8 0 5V If the voltage is correct go to Step 5 If it is not go to Step 8 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Check C322 C324 R342 R347 see Figure 12 8 in the power control circuit Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 5 Replace IC303 see Figure 12 8 if none ofthe other components is faulty Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Measure the voltage at pin 1 of IC301 see Figure 12 8 in the shaping filter circuit The voltage should be pin 1 of IC301 4 8 0 5V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured in Step 8 is correct go to Step 11 If it is not go to Step 12 Check the components R334 see Figure 12 8 and C319 see Figure 12 12 and go to Step 13 Check
364. ed to be programmed to recognize the presence of a keypad microphone there are no fields in the programming application that need to be configured DTMF dialling is not available for radios with a 3 digit control head 23 2 3 Radios with a Graphical Display Control Head Conventional Mode Trunked Mode If required select the following check boxes m Selcall Call Dialling in the Selcall Identity form m DTMF Call Dialling in the DTMF Signalling form m Phone Patch Call Dialling in the Phone Patch form Select an option in the Default Dialling Type field Conventional UI form This sets the behaviour of the alphanumeric keys from the default radio display If required select the check boxes m DTMF Dialling in the Dialling tab of the Call Options form m PABX Calls in the DTMF Call Dialling form m PSTN Calls in the Call Types tab of the Call Options form TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO02 08 Keypad Microphone 523 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 23 3 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the keypad microphone on the radio s microphone connector and shows the interface between the keypad microphone and the radio Table 23 1 Keypad microphone connector pins and signals m swa utero p quem po qmemmo 13 8V power supply audio from the microphone pope em pm S jo emeng 524 TMAAO02 08 Keypad Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait
365. eds 35 W go to Step 14 If it does not go to Task 30 Remove the test lead and test capacitor resolder the coupling capacitors 1n position and go to Task 31 388 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 16 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can and the points for attaching the test lead and test capacitor UHF shown SOLDER ND SHEATH TO GND DIRC Op 3993 C3997 C399U 399 399 399 C399 399 MOUNTING POINT FOR TEST CAPACITOR TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 389 Task 30 If the RF output power measured in Task 29 1s low there is a fault in the Repair Circuitry 1 E 10 11 L2 13 circuit between the common drain of the PAs and the test capacitor If not already done remove the PAF TOP can Check for faulty shorted or misplaced components in the circuit between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310 see Figure 12 6 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks and go to Step 5 If no fault could be found go to Step 4 Remove the test lead and test capacitor resolder the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 in position see Figure
366. eets the following criteria 1 The site has enough height for the radio to be easily installed and removed The measurements given at the bottom of Figure 24 1 are the heights of the radios and base only Allow extra space for manipulation Note You will need more space if you are installing a TM8200 radio 2 The site has enough depth for the radio Check that the front and rear overhang of the radios will fit where you are mounting the security bracket 3 The site allows for good air circulation particularly at the rear of the radio Installation Important The security bracket must be securely installed Otherwise Procedure there is a risk that the whole assembly of the radio and secu rity bracket may become loose over time or as a result of serious impact Note Because some model control heads are taller than others each security bracket kit comes with two different heights of mounting rail and mounting screws depending on the radio type you are installing Once you have identified a suitable site for the security bracket and radio installation is as follows 1 Use the four self tapping screws and washers to fix the security bracket base in place The base actually has five screw holes available but the centre screw hole does not need to be used The layout and dimensions of the five screw holes is identical to the T2000 cradle 2 Depending on whether you are installing a TM8100 or TM8200 radio select the cor
367. eive data 5 PRG ON OFF Hardware power on software power Digital off input Active low front view 13V8 Power supply output Switched off Power when radio body is switched off PRG_PTT PTT input from microphone Digital Also carries hookswitch signal 8 AGND Analog ground a Can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 46 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 4 Hardware and Software Architecture Overview This section describes the hardware and software modules of the radio and their interaction in the functioning of the radio 2 4 1 Hardware Architecture The electrical hardware of the radio 1s implemented on a main board inside the radio body and a control head board inside the control head For a detailed description and block diagrams of individual circuits refer to Circuit Descriptions on page 21 Main Board The main board inside the radio body includes the following circuitry m transmitter m receiver m frequency synthesizer m digital board with a RISC processor and custom logic implemented on an FPGA memory and a DSP m CODEC and audio m interface m power supply The main board has an internal options connector which allows internal options boards to access a variety of discrete and programmable signals For more information refer to Internal Options Connector on page 43 For a
368. elements indicators LCD speaker and concealed microphone optional W space frame and seals m control head board with SMT components shielding cans connectors and volume potentiometer m control head loom with female female adapter m adapter flange The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2 4 on page 29 The front panel assembly 6 consists of an injection moulded plastic part with an integrated transparent light pipe element for the radio STATUS LEDs a transparent lens which cannot be replaced a cloth membrane which is fixed to the speaker grille and a foam seal inside a rectangular LCD recess behind the lens A label with the radio model number is attached to the front panel assembly with self adhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes Three clips on the rear side of the front panel assembly snap onto the space frame to hold the keypads D and 3 the LCD assembly 2 and the speaker D in place The rear side of the front panel assembly also has four screw bosses to fasten the control head board The knob for the volume control potentiometer OI is fitted to the shaft of the volume control potentiometer which 1s soldered to the control head board The main keypad for the function selection and scroll keys and the power keypad 2 protrude through apertures in the front panel assembly 1 The rear sides of these keypads connect directly to the relevant contacts o
369. ength m Strip away about 60mm 2 inches of the cable outer sheath on the end without a connector m Cut off the exposed orange red black and bare wires m Strip about 6mm 0 2 inches of the coating off each of the five remaining wires 2 Secure the radio to handset cord in the handset PCB P clip as shown in the diagram 4 Connect the five wires to the handset PCB connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 02 Handset 593 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 33 1 Handset PCB connector wiring Handset PCB Colour Reference Connector 2 white 3 o 900 si Or violet DD d Ch B e RES Jh 21 brown 5 Lt S Tre LS QUO 33 1 2 Handset Installation 1 Press the pushbutton and remove the handset from the locking cradle 2 Disassemble the locking cradle by removing the four locking cradle Screws 3 Screw the handset mounting plate to the required mounting surface Note that mounting screws are not provided in this kit 4 Clamp the top part of the locking cradle onto the mounting plate and secure it with the four locking cradle screws 33 1 3 Connecting the Handset to the Radio ever the handset to radio cord 1s plugged into the microphone Important The handset microphone grommet must be installed when socket When installed the grommet has two functions B to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there is movement of the microphone cord and m
370. enters the emergency mode This mode can also be activated by making an emergency call or by pressing a key that has been programmed appropriately The concealed microphone is typically fitted when the emergency power sense option is selected If the radio is off when the emergency mode is activated the radio is powered up but the display on the control head is not switched on If the radio is on when the mode 1s activated the display is frozen In the latter case if the ON OFF key is pressed the display is switched off but the radio remains in the emergency mode While in this mode the radio cycles between transmit and receive To exit the emergency mode the ON OFF key needs to be pressed again TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 89 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Connector Power Power from the radio primary power source is fed to the auxiliary internal supply Options options control head and microphone connectors Whether power to these connectors is unswitched switched or not supplied is determined by hardware links LK5 to LK8 on the top side of the main board as shown in Figure 3 11 and Table 3 4 Unswitched power means that power will always be supplied to the connector while the primary power source 1s connected to the radio and is alive The supply to the connector is not affected by the state of the radio Switched power means that when the radio 1s off or in standby mode the power to the connector
371. er The directional coupler PIN switch and LPF make up the final signal path The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the signal path are summarized in Figure 11 20 Figure 11 20 Measurement points for diagnosing faults in the RF signal path SIGNAL TYPES STAGE 3 SYNTHESIZER RF EXCITER OUTPUT OUTPUT SYN TX LO gt ANALOG C3500 TEST C300 for CAPACITOR K5 band L o _ GATES OF PA DRIVER STAGE 2 STAGE 1 50 Q TEST Q309 Q310 OUTPUT AT OUTPUT OUTPUT LEAD TO DRAIN OF Q306 AT C3509 AT C3505 TEST SET DIREC TIONAL COUPLER RECEIVER PIN SWITCH TEST CAPACITOR 50 O TEST LEAD TO TEST SET RF CON NECTOR TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 315 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 26 Output of Frequency Synthesizer 316 1 The first point to check in the initial RF signal path is the output SYN TX LO from the frequency synthesizer This signal is input to the exciter at C300 For test purposes select a representative power level and frequency from Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 or Table 11 11 H7 Note that the data for these tables were obtained using an RFP5401A RF probe To set the power level enter the CCTM command 326 x where X defines the level To set the frequency enter the CCTM command 101 X X 0 where X is the frequency in hertz Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mo
372. er output level Note the value X returned for the receiver output level Depending on the frequency band in which the radio operates the value should be receiver output level x normally between 500 000 and 6000 000 Note that a change in the input level of 10dBm should result in a ten fold change in X If necessary measure the RF voltage at the QN test point see Figure 10 1 There is access through a hole in the IF TOP can For comparison the voltages corresponding to the above values of X are x 500 000 12MVpp x 6000 000 120MVp With an unmodulated RF signal the frequency should be 64 000kHz provided that the LOT FCL and LO2 are locked and on the correct frequency Given the value of X go to the relevant section as follows m X lt 1500 go to Excessive Loss of Sensitivity on page 250 sensitivity 1s very low m X lt 500 000 go to Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity on page 255 sensitivity 1s low TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 10 1 Receiver circuitry under the IF TOP can top side
373. erature of components under the can being removed as well as under any adjacent cans The circuit board might suffer damage as a result The following test equipment 1s required for servicing the radio m test PC with programming and calibration applications loaded m RF communications test set audio bandwidth of at least 10kHz m oscilloscope m digital current meter capable of measuring up to 20A m multimeter m DC power supply capable of 13 8 V and 20A for the gt 25 W radios and 10A for the 25 W radios m spare control head m service kit Separate instruments may be used in place of the RF communications test set These are an RF signal generator audio signal generator audio analyser RF power meter and modulation meter 110 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Service Kit The TM8100 TM8200 service kit TMAA21 00 includes m the special tools needed to service the radio m atest unit and the items needed to connect a radio to a test unit m the programming and calibration cables and adapters m the printed service documentation Table 4 1 Contents of service kit TMAA21 00 EE Where xx represents the issue number of the manual You can generally order only the latest issue of a manual TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 111 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 3 Servicing Precautions Introduction Use of Torque drivers No
374. ere is no modulation although there is modulation at the auxiliary connector There are two tasks m Task 15 apply AUD TAP IN signal m Task 16 check CODEC 2 device If there was also a fault with the speaker audio at the auxiliary connector it is assumed that this has now been rectified Task 15 First check the modulation and if necessary the DC offset Apply AUD TAP IN Signal mE L Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode The frequency is that of channel 1 2 Check the modulation via the microphone input 3 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 4 If the modulation is correct go to Step 5 If it is not go to Task 12 of Faulty Modulation on page 416 5 Apply a 1kHz AC coupled signal of 0 7 V pp at pin 7 AUD TAP IN of the auxiliary connector alternatively as ITF AUD TAP IN at the junction of R237 and R241 see Figure 13 10 6 Enter the CCTM command 323 15 7 Check the DC offset voltage at pin 7 pin 7 of auxiliary connector approximately 1 5V DC offset 8 If the above DC offset is correct go to Step 9 If it is not go to Step 11 9 Remove the CDC TOP can 10 Check for and repair any soldering faults around IC205 or else replace IC205 see Figure 13 10 Conclude with Step 12 11 Check for shorts at pin 7 of the auxiliary connector If there are none go to Task 16 If there are repair the fault and conclude with Step 12 12 Confirm the removal of the fault
375. ered by the rubber seal to ensure that the control head remains sealed to IP54 standards For more information refer to TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones on page 511 The plastic space frame 9 clips into the six recesses inside the front panel assembly 2 The front side of the space frame holds the keypad with the four light pipes the LCD the speaker clamp and the speaker in place and at the same time allows access to their electrical contacts The rear side of the space frame has three holes for the screws of the control head board The control head board is a printed circuit board in SMT design with components on the top and bottom sides There are different boards for the control heads with 1 2 and 3 digit display s The control head board is clipped and then fitted to the space frame with three 3x8 PT screws G The side facing the radio body has the connectors for the connection of the control head loom the speaker an optional control head options board 2 and pads for the leads of the optional concealed microphone 8 The side facing the front panel has the volume control potentiometer the microphone connector the indicator and backlight LEDs the contacts for the keypads and the LCD The control head loom D with the female female adapter connects the connector on the control head board 9 to the control head connector of the radio body For more information refer to Contr
376. ernal connection of LCD module W speaker connector 2 leads m soldering pads 2 leads for an optional concealed microphone m control head options connector for optional circuit board Protection circuitry 1s provided for the microphone connector For pinouts of the control head connector and the microphone connector refer to Connectors on page 38 For more information on the control head options connector please contact Tait Electronics Limited When battery power 13 8V is applied to the radio a press of the ON OFF key will create an active low signal CH ON OFF back to the radio body to initiate the power on or power off sequence This key press will also be detected by the FPGA of the control head through Q611 as an active high signal For more information on the start up process refer to Software Architecture on page 49 96 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 15 Block diagram of the control head board with graphical display Contact made when key d On Off Key KJ LCD LCD Loom LED Light Pipes Lenses Contact made when key pressed Function Scroll Selection Keys FPGA JTAG Signals gt FPGA JTAG TCK gt FPGA JTAG TMS ce gt FPGA JTAG TDO lt JTAG FPGA TDI Signal Types gt analog clock T1 digital asynchronous serial data _ _ synchronous serial data Concea
377. ess than 500mA 2 Enter the CCTM command 304 Z where Z was recorded in Task 12 to switch on the clamp current 3 Note the current reading on the DC power supply 4 Compare the above current readings The current should increase by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12 6 If it does go to Task 21 It it does not go to Step 5 5 Check as follows that the voltage from the DAC is changing First enter the CCTM command 304 1 to switch off the bias 6 Measure the voltage at the DRV test point CDC TX DRV BIAS see Figure 12 8 The voltage should be DRV test point lt 0 1V after entry of CCTM 304 1 i Enter the CCTM command 304 Z where Z was recorded in Task 12 to change the DAC value of the clamp current 8 The voltage should increase to DRV test point 0 8 to 2 5V after entry of CCTM 304 z 9 If the voltage does change go to Task 20 If it does not go to Step 10 10 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode and go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 370 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 20 Biasing of PA Driver SET PWR test point If the voltage at the DRV test point 1s correct check that at the SET PWR test point TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Check the voltage at the SET PWR test point see Figure 12 8 SET PWR test point
378. exciter is amplified by Q306 to a power level of approximately 3W VHF using a PD55008 The resulting signal is then amplified by Q309 and Q310 to produce a typical output power of 45 W when measured after the series capacitors C348 C349 C350 at the start of the directional coupler With the 25 W radio the 24 5dBm signal from the exciter is reduced by a band dependent pi attenuator and is amplified by Q306 The resulting signal is then amplified a second time by Q309 and Q310 to produce a typical output power of 40 W when measured after the series capacitors C348 C349 C350 at the start of the directional coupler TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 67 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ircuitry Block diagram of the transmitter c Figure 3 2 Jeyiduiy saying YMd AMI XL JOSU lt oN d A31 XL ejaduia bui dno Jeuuau oipny JO pue 1D HMd XL202 Buideus iuo MOS MOT 3400 Jeyijduiy Jong J2MOd 2519194 Jeylus D 9 9 pue Jadeys JeqM01 CSVI8 Nid XL 20D Jeylus D 9 9 pue Jadeys SVI8 Nid XL 207 sad Jayng JaMOg pJeMJOJ 011005 J2MOd HUEN SVI8 AUG XL 20 seig JazisayyuAs Jajdno gt Aduanbal4 O1XLNAS jeuonaiig ei gt Q pieog XDOTNAS gt jeubiq MNS9N 7j NASOIG V L HNI XL 910 A 11V8 8AEL XLOA6 ejep jenas snouoJtpufs lt b ejep jenas snouoJupu se lt Jeubip lt
379. f Q5001 OV DC receive mode Check the transmit buffer amplifier in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on Measure the voltage at pin 6 of Q5001 pin 6 of Q5001 0 7 0 1V DC transmit mode If the voltages are correct the transmit VCO is suspect go to Step 7 If they are not the transmit buffer amplifier is suspect go to Step 9 Remove the VCO TOP can Check the transmit VCO circuitry based on Q510 see Figure 9 11 Conclude with Step 10 Check the buffer circuitry based on Q5001 see Figure 9 12 If a fault is found repair the circuit and confirm that the voltages are now correct If they are go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 For the K5 band 1 Remove the SYN TOP can 2 Check the transmit buffer amplifier in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off 3 Measure the voltage at pin 4 of IC506 see Figure 9 11 pin 6 of IC506 OV DC receive mode 4 Check the transmit buffer amplifier in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on 5 Measure the voltage at pin 4 of IC506 pin 4 of IC506 5 0 1 V DC transmit mode Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 11 12 13 14 TM8100 TM8200 Service
380. f it is not go to Step 3 S Check the C multiplier Q512 see Figure 9 2 and check IC503 itself 1f necessary replace the transistor or IC 4 If there 1s a fault repair the circuit confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 198 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Test and measurement points for the synthesizer PLL and loop filter Figure 9 6 WLISIG lt p _ AH UO OIanv aNv I H0071 NAS 40010 44 DOWNY ke ju 4 S3dAL IWNDIS 1SV4 NAS 91 i Na NAS Sid GOW OOA 2077 AA1 009 NAS OZSH ANY 99SH g9cu H31H3ANI JO NOILLONNP GASCH Ga O 10 FL Nid ONIWH3 E TI l G0G0 JO TIETE 01937109 dOO1 JO LNdLNO coo M 10 8 Nid V V l 9ESO T lt HANS CNV AYLINOUIO fos e nano MN ooo l ADNINOJH4 Tid dOO1 de JON3H3i3H mK TURNUS a Mus gt E I 40 NOLLONAr e 40 9 Nid pou l dazis3 HINAS O COS JOVIT1OA MOV8QO334 Tld EE 94 Nid 3oN3H33H i AOo9Nanoaqu 9097 li preu uarniJ dOO1 CNV cds Td HOH i NV OAE dnd 398vHO HOH AlddNS Qul H901 NAS H923H9 OL VIA 1SV1 NAS DIG H923H9 OL VIA Na NAS SIG MOAHO OL VIA quvoga VLISIQ 199 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding T
381. f manufacture TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Introduction 17 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Control head user interface and Badging and hardware options configuration variants 10 blank control head no display 9 pin D OT Tait TM8105 range connector OA Auriga 20 2 digit display control head OT Tait TM8115 OE ECG TM8115 AT Tait Auriga dual badge RJ45 control head two RJ45 connectors Tait TM8252 31 RJA5 control head for multi body two OT Tait TM8200 RJ45 connectors RS485 1T Tait TM8200 termination resistor in 2T Tait TM8200 termination resistor out 32 RJ45 control head two RJ45 connectors OT Tait TM8124 customer specific product 34 RJA45 control head for dual head two Tait TM8200 RJ45 connectors RS485 40 graphical display control head OT Tait TM8200 OE ECG TM8200 1T Tait TM8200 yellow Tait TM8200 green 2T 42 graphical display control head 1T Tait TM8200 yellow 2T Tait TM8200 green 50 1 digit display control head OT Tait TM8110 AT Tait Auriga dual badge 60 3 digit display control head Tait TM8235 Note Product codes not listed here identify control head configurations of the digital TM9100 product line 18 Introduction TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 1 5 Labels Four external labels are attached to the bottom of the radio body m compliance information m serial number and produ
382. f the following m TCXO H mixer m loop filter gm VCXO m frequency control block The FCL provides the reference frequency for the RF PLL The FCL generates a high stability reference frequency that can be both modulated and offset in fine resolution steps The RF PLL consists of the following m RF PLL device m loop filter gm VCO m VCO output switch The RF PLL has fast locking capability but coarse frequency resolution This combination of control loops creates improved frequency generation and acquisition capabilities Note that patents are pending for several aspects of the synthesizer design The RF PLL is a conventional integer N type design with frequency resolution of 25kHz 30kHz for the 66 to 88 MHz A4 band In transmit mode the loop locks to the transmit frequency In receive mode it locks to the receive frequency minus the first IF frequency except for the A4 band where it locks to the receive frequency plus the first IF frequency In the 762 to 870 MHz K5 band there are two VCOs In transmit mode the loop locks to the transmit frequency In receive mode it locks to the receive frequency plus the first IF frequency when the receiver 1s operating in the lower sub band 762 to 776 MHZ and it locks to the receive frequency minus the first IF frequency when the receiver 1s operating 1n the upper sub band 850 to 870M HZ Initially the VCO generates an unregulated frequency in the required range This is
383. f the receiver circuitry 05 issue boards B1 H5 H6 bands Figure 3 3 aasn LON N3 ON XH SIG Quvoa 1VLIOIG OGIdS NAS 9IG Na Xd DIG Ad LIn oui 3OVJH3 NI 411111 dOO1 ANNL 34 XY 909 OSV X4 Odd AH UO OIanv ANY NO 309 XH HOI In daowad SE E 3univHavno dO 909 XH NI 909 XH dl 909 XH c ddd ASVLS 4l LSUIs MYOMLAN SVId JdHA XY 909 AlddNS H3MOd XH OAEt lt a eee ee em L 144 ASVLS 4l Le YAZISAHLNAS AON3nO3H43 OSO XH NAS LOT XY NAS oS H3XIIN H3 LLINSNVH L 44 Xu XL 431114 SSVI ddd viva 1VIH3S SNONOUHONAS T TT viva WIHIS e _ SNONOHHONASV WLISIG lt p A0019 4 3n901VNV ken dd 4 4 H3AI3O3H S3dAL VNDIS Circuit Descriptions 71 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 itry B1 H5 H6 bands after PCB issue 05 and other bands IVer circu Block diagram of the rece Figure 3 4 e ep elas snouoJupu s ke a e ep eles snouoJupu se JazisayyUAs job fouanbauy jeubip UO J93jnusueJ bojeue lt IN sad jeubis NJENXYOIC x STIS NASI H 1 S EE EEN 1 T a OG IdS NASOIG 1 E S E U I l 2 Ke 1 1 e S Eod A 9 Na XY 5Id seen V V V_ V o f juo ZHN 71 99 Jo 0007 Tid Jeyue g QNDV 9SION ei J 2DVNIdXH202 0 E nt ANNL 34 XY 202 E ue d V i DATO NO 202 X
384. face test equipment setup RF signal RF RF RF modulation audio generator B analyser voltmeter external 40dB pad AF distortion meter 7 600W frequency step attenuator counter 2 wire in out SK1 pins 14 amp 15 audio voltmeter a Ge RF power external SK1 pin 7 GND Speaker options connector TM8100 radio SK1 pin 3 PTT IN IK SK1 pin 12 BUSY GATE microphone mm connector testsignal muc m PTT H test signal speech test mic amp PTT 1 Note On PCB issue 220 65202 01 and earlier pin 5 of SK1 is ground 17 2 3 Configuration Procedure The line interface board configuration must be completed before the board is installed in the radio as the top side of the line interface board 1s not accessible once the board 1s screwed to the radio lid To configure the line interface board carry out the following steps 1 Program the radio in which the line interface board 1s being installed The default test settings are shown in the following tables Programming Information on page 476 explains the required input and output line interface connections Note A general description of LOD GPIO lines used with the line interface board is given in Table 17 6 on page 476 Table 17 2 Line interface default test settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab jo GPO2 Outpat fo NoAdon Jeu None none Je
385. fault with the transmit modulation notwithstanding modulation at the auxiliary connector go to Task 15 of Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector on page 420 If there 1s no other fault go to Final Tasks on page 163 410 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 6 Circuitry in the vicinity of the auxiliary connector bottom side AUXILIARY CONNECTOR SK101 C605 ancre DES TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 411 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 9 If there 1s no test signal at the internal options connector then either Check LPF and CODEC 1 1s faulty or there is a fault in the LPF or buffer amplifier Buffer Amplifier 1 10 Remove the CDC BOT can Check the signal at the junction between R224 and IC204 see Figure 13 7 This should be junction of R224 and IC204 0 7V with 2 4V DC offset If the above signal is correct go to Step 4 If it is not CODEC 1
386. for step 4 Plug the control head interface control head loom 8 into the connector on the control head head be careful not to damage the space frame seal C Important When fitting the control head interface to the control 4 Use the two screws from step 2 to fit the control head interface to the control head through the two screw holes at the rear of the control head interface TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Installing the 1 Position the control head assembly in the remote U bracket and Remote Control Head Assembly in position it for a good viewing angle the Remote U Bracket Note Adjusting the contrast on the control head display may also improve its readability 2 Screw the remote control head assembly into position using the two thumb screws provided 25 1 7 Mounting the U Bracket and Installing the Radio Body Mounting the Install the U bracket on any sufficiently flat surface using selt drilling screws U Bracket and washers Caution When drilling holes in the vehicle check that drilling at the selected points will not damage existing wiring petrol tanks fuel lines brake pipes or battery cables Important When mounting the U bracket check whether the mounting surface needs to be reinforced Important Install the U bracket using at least four screws jm If the U bracket is being mounted over a curved surface bend the U bracket tabs slight
387. formation 29 5 1 TMAAO4 04 Parts List PCB IPN 220 02127 03 Ref IPN Description Ref IPN Description C2 018 27470 00 CAP CER 0603 4U7 6V3 10 X5R 220 02127 03 PCB TMA cross band link amp RS232 C10 018 27470 00 CAP CER 0603 4U7 6V3 10 X5R 219 03005 00 CBL assy XB TMA 330 02127 02 STEN BTM Cross Band LNK amp RS232 J1 240 00031 00 PLG 15wy drng UL CSA pnl mtg 402 00030 xx TMAA04 04 Crossbnd Lnking Cble Inst R1 038 14120 10 RES 0603 1k2 1 1 10W R2 038 14120 10 RES 0603 1k2 1 1 10W R3 038 14120 10 RES 0603 1k2 1 1 10W R6 038 14120 10 RES 0603 1k2 1 1 10W SA 938 10001 01 SMT Alloy Lead Free sac 29 5 2 Crossband Linking Board Layouts B A IPN 220 02127 03 R1 o 9 C1 6 Mc S amp mBADMARK C I 2 C10 P4 IER Al EAM ER K 6 i Ut Se E 9 oin B A B 576 TMAAO04 04 Crossband Linking Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ircuit Diagram 29 5 3 Crossband Linking Board C wh O we oq ws o
388. from SMPS VCL SUPPLY m Task 4 6V DC supply from 6V regulator in PSU module 6V0 m Task 5 5V DC supply following filtering of 6V supply 45V DEC m Task 6 3V DC supply from 3V regulator in PSU module 3V0 AN The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the power supplies are summarized in Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Measurement points for the frequency synthesizer power supply circuitry FREQUENCY PIN 4 SYNTHESIZER 6V0 Q500 AND O R533 PIN 5 OF IC606 FILTERING OF SUPREY FOR PLL AND LOOP FILTER FILTERING OF SUPPLY FOR VCO CIRCUITRY 14 V 15 5 V 9V0 9 V SMPS SUPPLY 5V DEC VCL SUPPLY e PIN 4 OF Q508 3V0 AN Qu SUPPLY SIGNAL TYPES S RF PINS 7 AND 15 gt ANALOG OF IC503 M DIGITAL AGND INTERFACE CIRCUITRY INVERTER CIRCUITRY SUMMER TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 189 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 2 Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can and the 6V regulator IC606 top side VHF bands A4 band differences Pin 5 5 pin device pin not used M RON 1651 gt P 6509 ROS GO Ci m Ee C Lal KO LO LS ES amp 2 6518 E594 En ls R5010 ZEE E er ze e F C903 87
389. g First check the two power supplies 3V0 AN and 3VO RX for the receiver circuitry Remove the board from the chassis Check for 3 0 V DC 3V0 AN at the TP601 test point near the LO2 BOT can see Figure 10 2 TP601 test point 3 0V DC If the voltage is correct go to Step 4 If it is not the 3 V regulator IC603 is suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 Remove the LO2 BOT can Check for 3 0V DC 8V0 RX around the collector feed to Q402 or Q403 of LO2 see Figure 10 2 Q402 or Q403 collector 3 0V DC Alternative measurement points are m K5 band the collector feed to IC404 or IC405 of the RF LNA under the FE TOP can see Figure 10 4 All other bands the collector feed to Q401 of the RF LNA under the FE TOP can see Figure 10 3 All bands Q404 of the IF amplifier under the IF TOP can see Figure 10 1 If the voltage is correct go to Task 3 If it is not the 3V RX switch based on Q604 and Q605 in the PSU module is suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 10 2 Receiver circuitry under the L02 Bor can UHF shown SE E Beg 64 2 Bal 8418 Rug Rua Fe uH d gs pas SE Figure 10 3 Receiver circuitry under the FE TOP can top side all bands except K5
390. g of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display 449 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 15 1 Display Faulty but not LEDs Elastomeric Strips If all the LEDs function correctly but the display functions only partially or Faulty not at all first check the elastomeric strips 1 Disconnect the control head loom from the control head Remove the control head board 2 Remove the elastomeric strips and check the conductors in the strips for continuity Replace the strips if they are faulty 3 Ensure that the conductors along the edges of the strips are clean Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens cleaning cloth to clean the edges 4 Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens cleaning cloth to clean the pads for the LCD on the control head board 5 Insert the elastomeric strips in their slots in the space frame 6 Re assemble the control head board 7 Reconnect the control head loom to the control head and test the user interface If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not replace the LCD as follows LCD Faulty If the elastomeric strips are not the cause of the fault replace the LCD 1 Disconnect the control head loom Remove the control head board and disassemble the control head 2 Remove the LCD 3 Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens cleaning cloth to clean the electrical contact points on the spare LCD Carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD Take care not to
391. ge 163 Task 14 If the signal at the TP503 test point is incorrect but the other checks in the Check Bias Network hove tasks reveal no fault check the bias network 1 Remove the CDC TOP can 2 Check the voltage at the junction of R229 and R232 see Figure 13 10 junction of R229 and R232 1 5V DC 3 If the voltage 1s correct go to Step 4 If it is not go to Step 5 4 CODEC 1 IC204 is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 9s Check the soldering of R229 and R232 and check for shorts across R232 see Figure 13 10 Repair any fault 6 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 418 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 10 Circuitry under the cpc TOP can CDC TOP JUNCTION OF R229 AND R232 ITF AUD TAP IN JUNCTION OF R237 AND R241 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 419 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 13 6 Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector Introduction This section covers the case where the transmitter operates normally but th
392. ge is correct go to VCXO and TCXO Outputs on page 237 If itis not the 3V regulator IC603 is suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 Figure 9 17 TCXO circuitry under the CDC TOP can VIA FOR MEASURING 3 V DC SUPPLY IF TOP CAN 236 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 9 VCXO and TCXO Outputs Task 35 If the 3V power supply is not faulty check the VCXO output as follows VCXO Output 1 Use an oscilloscope probe to check the VCXO output at the following position C536 probe the via next to C536 see Figure 9 18 The signal should be VCXO output at C536 sine wave of 1 1 0 2V on 1 4 0 2V DC A4 band IC509 pin 4 probe the via next to R5044 see Figure 9 18 The signal should be VCXO output at pin 4 of IC509 square wave of 1 5 0 2 Vop 2 If the signal 1s correct go to Task 36 If it 1s not go to Step 3 5 The VCXO circuitry under the VCXO BOT can 1s faulty Remove the VCXO BOT can 4 Locate and repair the fault in the VCXO Q501 Q503 XL501 and associated components see Figure 9 19 5 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Task 36 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks
393. gnal at pins 10 and 12 of connector J102 J102 pins 10 and 12 3 3V with heating switched on If the signal is not correct replace the LCD Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 431 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 6 Function Key LEDs or Status LEDs Faulty The function key LEDs F1 and F4 and the red green and amber status LEDs each are controlled by an FPGA signal and a transistor Q604 to Q608 The brightness level 1s controlled by two FPGA signals resulting in four intensity levels off low medium and high Figure 14 5 Circuit diagram of the function key LEDs and status LEDs F1 Key V D613 F4 Key V D614 Red V D615 Green V D616 Amber V D617 N IND BRIGHT D I 14 Q604 a Q605 a Q606 d Q607 C Q608 iz zl e S SS IND BRIGHT2 LED FUNC 1 LED FUNC 4 LED IND TX LED IND RX LED IND BUSY LED Faulty If one of the function key LEDs or status LEDs is faulty 1 Send CCTM command 1001 x 1 where x 1s the LED number O F1 1 F4 2 amber 3 green 4 red to activate the relevant LED 2 Check the resistors R34 R35 and R36 in the paths of the green LEDs R34 0Q R35 0Q R36 0Q 3 Measure the voltage at the point between the LED and the transistor D613 Q604 F1 key LED 1 87V on 1 40V off D614 Q605 F4 key LED 1 87V on 1 40V off D615 Q606 red status LED 1 92V on 1 57V off D616 Q607 green status LED 1 87V on 1 40V
394. h radios are receiving activity when cross band repeater mode 1s activated the radio system can rapidly cycle between transmit and receive Set Tx Inhibit to Busy to prevent this from happening by not allowing the radio system to transmit when there is another busy signal An alternative 1s to set different debounce times for each radio such as 10 and 100 ms which will separate each radios entry into cross band repeater mode If the cross band repeater is programmed to only re transmit valid signals and one radio is receiving an invalid signal such as invalid CT CSS the mute will stay closed and no re transmission will occur However if the other radio then receives a valid signal the radio will attempt to re broadcast this over the other signal Set Tx Inhibit to Busy or Mute to prevent this re transmission occurring System Timing For the cross band repeater to operate correctly with other base stations or repeaters system timing must be taken into account If using subaudible signalling and the transmitter requires a tail then this can be configured according to Table 31 4 During the lead out delay period no signalling such as CTCSS or DCS is present Table 31 4 Transmit tail in the Basic Settings form Subaudible Signalling tab Red qs TTT CTCSS Settings Lead Out Delay any duration up to 1000 ms DCS Settings Lead Out Delay any duration up to 1000ms 31 1 3 Operational Testing 1 Enable cross band rep
395. h the remaining corners into position 4 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity Figure 37 1 Correct desktop microphone grommet seating microphone V grommet xX control head 37 3 Adjustment Adjust the output level of the desktop microphone using the control accessible from the underside of the desktop microphone The microphone sensitivity is set to maximum Vin by turning the control fully clockwise TT adjust output level here 37 4 Radio Programming UI Preferences form Check the settings of the following fields in the UI Preferences form of the TM8100 or TM8200 programming application m IMS3100 radios Set the Control Head Mic Gain field to Normal and clear the Enable Options Board Preamp check box These are both default settings m TM8200 radios In the Audio tab clear the Dynamic Mic Support check box This 1s the default setting Programming the Program the FUNCTION key as follows FUNCTION key 1 Set the required action for the function key m TM8100 radios Assign a function to one of the function keys in the Function Key Actions field in the Key Settings form m TM8200 radios Assign a function to one of the function keys in the Function Key Actions field 1n the Conv Key Settings form conventional radios or MPT Key Settings form trunking radios 2 Set CH GP101 to Input Active Low and assign the action Simulate F1 to F4 Key Programmable I
396. he current limit on the DC power supply to 2A Enter the CCTM command 331 to check the DAC value of final bias 1 CDC TX FIN BIAS 1 at maximum power Record the value X returned Enter the CCTM command 332 to check the DAC value of final bias 2 CDC TX FIN BIAS 2 at maximum power Record the value y returned Enter the CCTM command 304 to check the DAC value of the clamp current at the driver gate Record the value Z returned Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Switch off all biases by entering the following CCTM commands in sequence m 3311 m 3321 m 3041 m 1141023 m 3340 m 3350 Note the current reading on the DC power supply This will be less than 500mA With the radio still in transmit mode check the biasing of the PAs and PA driver beginning with Task 13 360 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 7 Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the PAs and PA driver dMd Add XL dMd AM4 XL daldr1dlNVv dd4dna 119 HMd XL 909 Bala ONIdVHS TIS O Br INIOd 1S3 uMd ZSYIg NIA XL 99 SatalHs AYLINOUIO A Olanv aNv ON O LOGO 93009 d3dVHS JO 8 Nid INIOd 1S3 UE L vig NI2xLogo BE2iIHS EIER CNV O LOCO JO FL Nid ae 30x98 309 JO OF Nid 10 S Nid INIOd BEI AE TOYULNOO svig Aud XL 909 Ua LIA svig INIOd LSAL Add LNIO
397. he initial RF signal path of the UHF radio G2 band RF voltages V Power Frequency level W MHz Synthesizer Exciter Exciter Exciter Driver output stage 1 stage 2 stage 3 output O 350 375 400 md 2d um Aa NJ H H H ooo NNN Ul 350 375 400 350 375 400 N O NO O 350 3 5 400 350 373 400 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 319 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 11 10 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the UHF radio H5 band RF voltages V level W Synthesizer Exciter Exciter Exciter Driver output stage 1 stage 2 stage 3 output Table 11 11 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the UHF radio H7 band RF voltages V level W Synthesizer Exciter Exciter Exciter Driver output stage 1 stage 2 stage 3 output 320 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 11 12 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the radio K5 band RF voltages V Power Frequency level W MHz Synthesizer Exciter Exciter Driver output stage 1 stage 2 output TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 321 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 27 Output of First Stage of Exciter 322 If the synthesizer output is correct check the output at C3505 for the VHF UHF bands or C313 for the K5 band of the f
398. he synthesizer A 6V regulator IC provides good line regulation of the 9 V supply and good load regulation Good regulation of the power supply line and load 1s essential for meeting the transient ACP requirements The regulator output voltage 1s electrically noisy however and filtering is essential Filtering of the power supply 1s achieved with two capacitance multipliers Q508 and C585 for the VCO supply and Q512 and C579 for the PLL and loop filter supply The VCO or VCOs use a separate capacitance multiplier because these multipliers have poor load regulation and the VCOs impart sufficient load transients to warrant a separate supply For reasons of noise performance the VCOs are designed to be tuned within a range of 2 to 12V Active tuning circuitry 1s required An active loop filter incorporating an IC operational amplifier achieves this range with a suitable power supply voltage Normal synthesizer switching behaviour involves overshoot which dictates that the tuning voltage range must extend above and below the range of 2 to 12V The 14V limit 15 5V for the K5 band is a result of limits on the working supply voltage of the IC operational amplifier The power supply VCL SUPPLY for the active loop filter is provided by a SMPS which is in turn powered by 9 V The SMPS consists of an oscillator switching circuit and a detector The output voltage is monitored by a feedback circuit that controls the DC bias of the switching circuit t
399. he voltage should be pin 1 of D5004 5 0 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to switch off the supply Again measure the voltage at pin 1 of D5004 pin 1 of D5004 2 1 0 4V DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 If the voltages measured in Step 9 and Step 11 are correct go to Task 33 If they are not the switching network is suspect go to Task 32 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 231 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 32 Repair Switching Network 232 If the transmit receive switch is not functioning correctly first check the DIG SYN TR SW line to confirm that the digital board 1s not the cause If the digital board 1s not faulty the switching network 1s suspect 1 10 Enter the CCTM command 338 0 to set the transmit receive switch off receive mode Measure the voltage on the DIG SYN TR SW line at pin 3 of Q5003 see Figure 9 15 pin 3 of Q 5003 5 0 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on transmit mode Again measure the voltage at Q5003 pin 3 of Q5003 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 If the voltages measured in Step 1 and Step 2 are correct go to Step 9 If they are not remove R103 see Figure 9 7 and go to Step 4 Enter the CCTM command 335 0 and measure the voltage at the via between R103 and the digital board see Figure 9 7 via at R103 3 3 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 0
400. heck for continuity and shorts to ground in the path between the power connector PL100 and pin 7 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 Locate and repair the fault Reconnect the 13 8 V supply Confirm the removal of the fault by measuring the voltage at pin 7 of IC602 If the voltage is correct continue with Step 4 If it 1s not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If 1t does not go to Step 5 Check the digital power up signal at pin 5 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 the signal 1s active high namely when the voltage exceeds 2 0V DC Measure the voltage at pin 5 pin 5 of IC602 more than 2 0 V DC If it exceeds 2 0V go to Task 2 If it does not go to Step 6 Keep the probe of the multimeter on pin 5 of IC602 and press the ON OFF key The voltage should exceed 2 0V DC while the key is depressed If it does go to Task 2 If it does not go to Step 7 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply at the power connector PL100 Check for continuity and shorts to ground in the path from pin 5 of IC602 via R600 and via Q709 in the interface circuitry see Figure 8 4 to pin 9 of the control head connector SK100 ITF PSU ON OFF line Locate and repair the fault Go to Step 8 Reconnect the 13 8 V supply Press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it does not go to Step 9 With the probe of the mul
401. heck C715 at the internal options connector see Figure 8 2 5 Repair any fault found in the above checks If no fault could be found replace IC605 6 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 178 Power Supply Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 8 Interface Fault Finding Introduction This section covers the diagnosis of faults involving signals output from or input to the radios internal circuitry via the control head internal options power or auxiliary connectors For most inputs and outputs filtering or basic processing is applied between the internal circuitry and the connectors Internal and The signals at the internal circuitry and those at the connectors are Connector Signals distinguished as internal signals and connector signals respectively On the circuit diagram for the internal circuitry dashed lines enclose connector signals Internal signals are all named signals outside these enclosures In Figure 8 1 which shows part of the internal options connector as an example IOP GPIO is a connector signal and ITF IOP GPIO is an internal signal Figure 8 1 Example illustrating the convention for internal and connector signals TO INTERNAL OPTIONS CONNECTOR 3V3 CL 8V3 3 D705 BAV70W ITF IOP GPO7 IOP_GPIO7 1B2 6B4 43V3 CL 8V3 3 D706 BAV70W ITF
402. hen the radio always transmits at full power even if set otherwise Regardless of the fault the lock status should be normal The procedure for diagnosing transmitter faults is divided into tasks which are grouped into the following sections m Power Supplies m Transmitter RF Power m Biasing of PA Driver and PAs m RF Signal Path Before beginning the fault diagnosis with Power Supplies note the following information regarding CCTM commands frequency bands can removal and replacement and transmit tests The CCTM commands required in this section are listed in Table 11 1 Full details of the commands are given in Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM on page 123 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 267 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 11 1 CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the transmitter Set transmit frequency x in hertz and receive frequency y in hertz to specified values Set DAC value x in range 0 to 1023 of transmit power 304 x Set DAC value x in range 0 to 255 of clamp current at gate of PA driver Read forward power level displays corresponding voltage x in millivolts Read reverse power level displays corresponding voltage x in millivolts Set transmitter power level x O off 1 very low 2 low 3 medium 4 high 5 maximum Read bias voltage for first PA displays DAC value x in range 0 to 255 Set DAC value x in ra
403. hould be TP502 test point sine wave of 1 1 O 2V on 1 5 0 1V DC A4 band The signal should be TP502 test point triangular wave of 1 5 0 2V on 1 5 0 1V DC If the signal is correct go to Task 38 If it is not go to Step 3 The mixer or LPF circuitry under the FCL TOP can 1s faulty Remove the FCL TOP can Locate the fault in the mixer IC501 and associated components or LPF circuitry IC502 pins 5 to 7 and associated components see Figure 9 18 A4 band Check the mixer IC501 IC506 and associated components or LPF circuitry IC502 pins 5 to 7 and associated components see Figure 9 18 Also check L501 and associated components and buffer Q504 IC509 and associated components Repair the circuitry Note that the TCXO input to the mixer see Figure 9 18 should be TCXO input at R521 pin 4 of IC501 TCXO input square wave with frequency of 13 MHz and amplitude of 3 0 0 2 Vpp A4 band TCXO input at R520 pin 4 of IC506 TCXO input square wave with frequency of 10 4 MHz and amplitude of 3 0 x 0 2 Vpp 240 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Also the VCXO input to the mixer see Figure 9 18 although noisy and difficult to measure should be VCXO input at R522 pin 1 of IC501 VCXO input sine wave of 20 10 mV A4 band VCXO input at R510 pin 1 of IC506 VCXO input sine wave of 20 10 mV Confirm the re
404. hould be pin 14 of IC301 lt 100 mV initially 2 Note the current reading on the DC power supply As mentioned in Step 7 of Task 12 this will be less than 500mA 2 Enter the CCTM command 337 X where X was recorded in Task 12 4 Check that the voltage changes to pin 14 of C301 2 to 5V after entry of CCTM 331 x 5 Also note the current reading This should increase by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11 6 6 If the voltage and current are both correct go to Step 7 If the voltage is correct but not the current go to Task 14 If neither the current nor the voltage is correct go to Task 15 T Enter the CCTM command 331 1 to switch off final bias 1 and go to Task 16 Table 11 6 Gate biases for the PAs and PA driver at high power Offset currents in mA Frequency band 292 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 9 Test points and components of the shaping filter VHF C CO FD FS SD CU Ted Ii ISTI ICO lei leri lOa IT za ai ai eg e ka ka y Ge ea ees CH O1 IN tT CCo oD mye es CE lie SET PWR TEST POINT CC 30 SI DRV TEST POINT CO R311 IN lt SEI LE C SCH REV PWR TEST POINT en o mL FIN2 TEST POINT CY CY 2 C p i 4 CT oc icc e FIN1TEST POINT FWD PWR TEST POINT PWR TEST POINT IF TOP CAN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault F
405. i T 6cu ES TAS i L MS BAET DH 0AG e Qu zZ c i i Ad0Lr ind cud I ETT INC INO avi anv SE zys e S ING Epu seu Mi 1 6u LAO out Org 5 ye L is 9 ANOT S dS3 ldO QN5 i Lddd avTau 819 asad LdO 8AEI M66AV8 i i ING 1ddq avisH ds LVO0vVHR 0 SI SE 001 0 i Re vou eta r3 T gom lv em veu clu 9u T UE _ i PTT l anv DIN XAY NI DIN oe TTA Tr T x ING anon ara ING i TT T E cd Bein l SE dex Lao ans asad ldO SAK TL ta has aes IMS i i i ING NI dg XY i adoLo ceu da MS BAET ius M6GAVE 1 1 i 092 622 ld ar o 0007 o NI dWL G V ae z i 4 T z Ds f ees sri i ma NI dVI dav i M66AVG cu i b TIG dd0Ly ING ANOT M66AVE 097 190 dN5 ING i 6 9 zsa eal asd ldO BAET 01d SE NA l 0 0 i ISSA zust i ts ISSA dOI H B H IS zu i 8 H me6ava CH i ii oray rn dS3 L1dO 8A T i i BED 0001 i i AXA ae 5 es ee i 9TT ST 09T ldO aNd i ANS ING ING M66AVE M66AVa H Mii POLOUVEL LTA om 61d 81d 001 8 6 0 l l l H AdOLP eq SIT oti 7 z S e DS axa dol es 0001 do MN met NICL Le Len voronvre 9TH i AXL st Wy WE mot NITI L S 1 zr ms QGXI dOI LIT EH i i H H zezew L M66AVXH M66AVXG E 4202 61a gtd 1 4uoor Ta ANOOT i i S 8A 9 9 ZO M AET zus 29 sale 1 Ez 7 T 3NOOT
406. i ONIHAEIIA d3 Ld3ANI LOT XY NAS ETEEN H31dnoo ONV i i H3 LLIIN H3ININR S daldridWwv SNVHL CN EME 431114 39VvLIO 4007 LINSNVEL dOO1 Tid O1XLNAS ODA LINSNVYL N L TWLIDIG lt p posu i ANA L00SO SNe 412153 HLNAS AON3ano3auJ 10 9 Nid 39070 4 Kiddns 9081 OOTVNV ka At xovaaapd Tid i ee AINO SGNV ZH 9H SH Z9 VAUY Q3QvHS du eege EE Man ecc S3dAL 1VNDIS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 210 Task 17 Check that the correct receive frequency is synthesized This is the Check Receive VCO frequency of the receive VCO output SYN RX LOT at the RX port shown in Figure 9 41 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off receive mode Using a frequency counter proceed as follows to observe the receive frequency at the RX port before and after grounding the junction between C541 and R547 see Figure 9 11 While holding the probe from the counter on the RX port use a pair of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction The frequency should change to RX port maximum receive frequency see Table 9 3 The loop filter will hold its output steady at 13 3 V 14 7 V for the K5 band This should result in a frequency equal to the maximum given in Table 9 3 If the receive frequency measured in S
407. i D UL CSA P Mtg R2 038 15100 10 RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W 240 06010 29 Conn 9w Hood Cvr Lets RV2 042 05100 06 4 Res Pre TH 10k 6mm Top R3 038 14100 10 RES 0603 1k0 1 1 10W 600 00010 00 Pkg Kit Opt Int parts RV3 042 05100 06 Res Pre TH 10k 6mm Top 219 00329 00 Loom TMA Int Opt R4 038 15100 10 RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W 347 00011 00 Scrw 4 40 3 16 Unc P P Bik R5 038 16470 00 RES 0603 470k 5 1 10W 349 02062 00 Scrw M3 8 T T P T ContiR R8 038 17100 10 RES 0603 1M 1 1 10W 354 01043 00 Fsnr Scrw Lok 1pr 4 40 R9 036 02100 03 RES Pwr 1218 10R 5 1W 362 01108 01 Seal Drng Cvr 9way TMA 362 01111 00 Seal Drng 9way TMA TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 483 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 9 2 TMAAO1 01 Grid Reference List PCB IPN 220 65202 04 Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit Ref PCB Circuit C1 B2 2 A2 MIA G6 2 A 1 G3 1 D5 C2 B1 2 A2 MI5 A1 2 A 1 D11 C3 C5 2 A4 MT6 G1 2 48 RS C4 F6 1 D5 1 G4 C5 D8 2 33 Q1 G5 1 E9 1 G9 C7 B6 2 A4 Q2 E2 1 610 1 9 C8 D2 2 F6 Q3 C6 1 D4 1 H9 C9 D2 2 G6 1 F9 C10 B6 2 B4 R1 B1 2 B2 SK1 D1 2 B8 C12 E2 1 K3 R2 D6 1 E7 2 F9 C13 F8 2 C3 R3 D2 1 E12 2 C8 C14 D2 2 B6 R4 F8 2 G3 2 G9 C15 C2 2 C6 R5 E6 1 E6 SK1 D1 1 K13 C16 C7 1 B10 R8 E6 1 D5 1 J13 C17 E3 1 K4 R9 C6 2 B3 1 H13 C18 E3 1 J7 R10 B6 2 A4 1 B13 C19 E6 1 A9 R11 C4 1 D2 1 13 C20 C6 1 49 R12 E6 1 E5 1 D13 C21 F3 1 K8 R13 E6 ES 1 E13 C22 D6 1 A10 R14 C7 1 E4 SK2 B3 2 F1 C24 C1 2 G8 R15A A7 2 E8 2 6 G25 E5 1 H2 R15
408. ice Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 30 Components of concern on the bottom side of the main board K5 band copper plate VCO BOT can 7 leese Sean 2 eus ES anis or ise mm um TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 337 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 31 Circuitry under the LPF TOP can 63552 JR3530 338 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 35 If there are no faults in the final RF signal path up to and including the PIN Check Components switch then the fault should lie in the LPE Check the LPF as follows of LPF 8 2 10 11 12 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual If not already done remove the LPF TOP can Connect the RF connector to the test set Check the capacitors and inductors of the LPF between the PIN switch and the RF connector See Figure 11 31 Check for shorts open circu
409. ice Manual Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 553 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 4 PCB Information 26 4 1 Parts List Ref IPN C1 016 08100 03 C100 018 14100 00 C101 018 14100 00 C102 015 02470 06 C103 015 02470 06 C110 018 16100 00 C300 015 06470 01 C301 016 07470 01 C310 015 26100 08 C312 014 07470 05 C320 016 08100 03 C400 018 16100 00 C401 015 07220 08 C410 018 16100 00 C411 018 13100 00 C420 018 16100 00 C421 018 13100 00 C422 015 07220 08 C423 015 07220 08 C430 015 07220 08 C500 015 26100 08 C600 015 26100 08 C601 015 26100 08 C610 015 26100 08 C611 015 07220 08 C612 015 07220 08 C700 015 26100 08 C701 015 07220 35 C702 015 07220 35 C703 015 06470 01 C704 018 16100 00 C705 018 16100 00 C706 018 13220 00 C707 015 06470 01 C708 015 07220 35 C710 015 07220 35 C711 015 07220 35 C712 015 07220 35 C730 015 26220 18 C73 015 26220 18 C732 018 14100 00 C733 018 14100 00 C734 015 07220 08 C735 015 07220 08 D100 001 10000 99 D101 001 10000 99 D102 001 10000 99 D103 001 10000 99 D104 001 10000 99 D110 001 10084 91 D201 001 10000 99 D211 001 10000 99 D300 001 10000 99 D720 001 10841 10 D730 001 10014 03 D731 001 10014 03 Description Cap Elec SMD 10uF 35V 105 2000 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 Cap Cer 1210 47p NPO 500v Cap Cer 1210 47p NPO 500v Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r 10 Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20 50v Cap Elec SMD 4u7 6 4 16v 20 Cap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v Cap
410. icrophone pre amplifier under quiet conditions and reducing the gain under noisy acoustic conditions The ALC function resides in the DSP and controls the microphone programmable gain amplifier in the CODEC The ALC has a fast attack about 10ms and slow decay up to 2s gain characteristic This characteristic ensures that the peak signal level 1s regulated near full scale to maximize dynamic range The output of the automatic level control provides the input to the DSP audio processing chain at a sample rate of 8kHz Optional processing such as encryption or companding is done first if applicable Pre emphasis if required 1s then applied The pre emphasized signal is hard limited to prevent overdeviation and filtered to remove high frequency components The sample rate 1s then interpolated up to 48kHz and scaled to be suitable for the frequency synthesizer The data and signalling encoders inject their signals into various points within the audio processing chain The injection point depends on the encoders bandwidth and whether pre emphasis 1s required TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 6 2 Frequency Synthesizer Introduction Frequency Control Loop RF PLL Operation of Control Loop As shown in Figure 2 16 the frequency synthesizer consists of two main parts m FCL frequency control loop m RFPLL comprising RF PLL device loop filter VCO and VCO output switch The FCL consists o
411. igh B1 band QG2 band H5 band H7 band K5 band e Medium B1 band G2 band H5 band H7 band K5 band e Low B1 band G2 band H5 band H7 band K5 band e Very low B1 band G2 band H5 band H7 band K5 band Current at high power gt 25W radios e B1 band radios G2 band radios H5 band radios H7 band radios K5 band radios Peak deviation sweep tone of 300Hz to 3 KHz e Narrow band e Medium band e Wide band Distortion e 1 kHz at 1 5kHz deviation narrow band e 1 kHz at 3 0kHz deviation wide band CTCSS deviation e Narrow band e Medium band e Wide band 23 2W to 29 2W 11 1W to 14 0W 4 6W to 5 8W 0 9W to 1 2W 46 3W to 58 3W 37 1W to 46 7W 37 1W to 46 7W 37 1W to 46 7W 26 W to 33 7W 23 2W to 29 2 VV 18 5W to 23 3W 18 5W to 23 3W 18 5W to 23 3W 13 4W to 16 8W 13 9W to 17 5W 13 9W to 17 5W 13 9W to 17 5W 13 9W to 17 5W 4 5W to 5 8W 9 3W to 11 7W 9 3W to 11 7W 9 3W to 11 7W 9 3W to 11 7W 1 8W to 2 2W lt 2 bkHz 4 0kHz lt 5 0kHz 3 3 250 to 350Hz 500 to 560Hz 580 to 680Hz 166 Servicing Procedures TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 6 3 Final tests of receiver functions Receive sensitivity 118dBm for 12dB SINAD Mute opening e Country gt 6dB and 10dB SINAD e City gt 8dB and 14dB SINAD e Hard gt 18dB and lt 22dB SINAD Audio power
412. igure 5 13 1 Note whether the cover seal is fitted or not If it is fitted remove the two screws D and remove the cover seal Note that the radio must be returned to the customer in its original configuration 2 Note whether an options board not shown 1s fitted inside the control head If a an options board is fitted remove the screws and remove the options board J Remove the lock nuts and remove the foam seal and the control head loom 9 Figure 5 13 Components of the blank control head 3 16 inch bmm x2 Alb in 0 45N m 3829z_01 1 UNX 4 40 x 3 16 inch pan Pozi screw x2 4 front panel 2 cover seal 5 foam seal 3 lock nut pair 6 control head loom with female female adapter 154 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 6 Servicing Procedures Scope of Section This section gives the full sequence of tasks required when servicing a particular radio These tasks are m initial inspection visual inspection and fault diagnosis m repair final inspection test and administration For disassembly and reassembly instructions refer to Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 6 1 Initial Tasks List of Tasks Task 1 Initial Administration Task 2 Visual Inspection The following tasks need to be carried out for all radios m initial administration m visual inspection m powering up the r
413. igure 5 8 Note that the loom runs through a slot in the space frame 9 Figure 5 8 Speaker orientation and connectors of the control head board graphical display legs of the pads for leads of connector for connectors for speaker clamp concealed microphone loom of LCD assembly optional circuit board oo 00000 0000000000 speaker terminals connector for speaker connector for control head loom 3470z 01 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 147 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 7 Unscrew the four screws and remove the control head board 8 If a concealed microphone 1s fitted pull the concealed microphone 5 capsule out of its rubber seal when removing the control head board If necessary unsolder the leads from the pads on the control head board refer to Figure 5 8 9 Remove the light pipes D and 10 The space frame clips into three clips ofthe front panel Unclip the spaceframe and remove it along with the two seals Check the seals and replace them if necessary 11 Remove the speaker P and speaker clamp 19 Important When fitting the speaker and the speaker clamp observe the orientation of the speaker terminals Make sure that the larger of the three legs of the speaker clamp is placed between the two clips of the front panel assembly as shown in Figure 5 8 on page 147 12 Remove the LCD assembly 2 main keypad and power keypad 4 Importan
414. in board The 225 W radio has a black power connector D and the 25 W radio has a white power connector For more information on the connectors refer to Connectors on page 38 For heat dissipation one of the screw bosses inside the chassis is in contact with the underside of the main board A larger copper plate at the underside of the main board connects to the body of the heat transfer block The 725 W radio has an additional gap pad between the heat transfer block and the main board 9 which connects to an additional copper plate at the bottom side of the main board The aluminium heat transfer block dissipates heat from the main board to the heat fins of the chassis The heat transfer block has a contact surface to the larger copper plate at the underside of the main board D I and a contact surface to the rear of the chassis All contact surfaces are coated with thermal paste Two self adhesive foam seals 9 and around the aperture of the auxiliary connector on either side of the heat transfer block and the power connector seal inside the aperture of the power connector are fitted to the heat transfer block TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 1 2 Control Head with Graphical Display Overview Front Panel Assembly Knob for Volume Control Potentiometer Keypads LCD Assembly The control head can be divided into the following main areas m front panel with control
415. inding gt 25W 293 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 10 Test points and components of the shaping filter UHF and K5 bands UHF shown K5 band similar Cal CO J CX led r le KO Or CY Ia Ia Ia Ia Ia la ICH es e CE O CO KO CO ICH on CY CY a cr OZ Q co CY G x R312 Besse SN Kam ae ees DIRC TOP CAN UHH 4 345 7 Be REV PWR TEST POINT Ca FWD PWR TEST POINT PWR TEST POINT 294 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W VCO TOP CAN SET PWR TEST POINT FIN1TEST POINT FIN2 TEST POINT DRV TEST POINT IF TOP CAN TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 14 If the voltage measured 1n Task 13 is correct but not the current either the Shaper and Level Shifter first PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect And when entering the CCTM command 331 x do not Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual specify a value X higher than that recorded in Task 12 Fail ure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs If the PAF TOP can has already been removed go to Step 5 If it has not go to Step 2 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Remove the PAF TOP can Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 331 X where X was recorded in Task 12 Check that the volt
416. ines are provided on four pins of the auxiliary connector AUX GPIO4 to AUX GPIO7 one on the control head connector CH GPIO1 and seven on the internal options connector IOP GPIO1 to IOP GPIO Those on the auxiliary and control head connectors are formed by combining two uni directional lines For example the line AUX GPIO4 at pin 10 of the auxiliary connector is formed from ITF AUX GPI4 and DIG AUX GPO4 The circuitry is the same in all five cases and is explained below for the case of AUX GPIO4 An output on the line AUX GPIO4 originates as the 3 3 V signal DIG AUX GPO4 from the digital section The signal is first inverted by Q703 pins 3 to 5 and the output divided down to 1 6V by R748 and R753 to drive the base of Q703 pins 1 2 and 6 When the latter s collector current is low the base current is a maximum and creates a small voltage drop across R761 causing the collector emitter to saturate As the collector current increases the base current decreases proportionally until the voltage across R761 reaches 1 V At this point the base emitter begins to turn off and the base current diminishes rapidly The net effect 1s a current limiting action The current limit value is approximately 18mA the inverse of the value of R761 The output configuration is open collector with a pull up to 3 3V by default Pull up options to 5V and 13 8 V are also available On AUX GPIO4 only the optional MOSFET Q707 which has a high current drive ma
417. information that will enable you top service the radio correctly It includes the following sections m Repair Levels Accreditation and Website Access m Tools Equipment and Spares m Servicing Precautions m Setting up the Test Equipment m Replacing Board Components m Shielding Cans and Connectors m SMT Repair Techniques m Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM m Defining Frequency Bands m Visual and Audible Indications 4 1 Repair Levels Accreditation and Website Access 4 1 1 Repair Levels This manual covers level 1 and level 2 repairs of the radios Important The circuit boards in the radio are complex and must be serviced only by an Accredited Service Centre ASC See Accreditation of Service Centres on page 108 If you attempt a repair without the necessary equipment tools or training you could permanently damage the radio Level 1 Level 1 repairs comprise the replacement of control head boards main Requirements board assemblies and other parts of the radio including non SMT components such as connectors and volume control potentiometer on the control head board For level 1 repairs basic electronic repair skills are sufficient You require m standard service centre tools and equipment m special drivers and bits see page 110 m a TM8100 TM8200 service kit see page 111 m a spare control head for diagnostic purposes TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 107 Tait Electronics Lim
418. ing voltages and corresponding DAC values Tuning voltages at five different frequencies FE TUNEO FE TUNE1 FE TUNE2 FE TUNES FE TUNE4 Frequency band A4 band Frequency MHz DAC value Voltage V B1 band Frequency MHz DAC value Voltage V CO band Frequency MHz DAC value Voltage V D1 band Frequency MHz DAC value Voltage V H5 band Frequency MHz DAC value Voltage V H6 band Frequency MHz DAC value Voltage V 65 9 U to 40 O to 0 47 135 9 3 x 20 0 44 0 24 173 9 41 20 0 48 0 24 399 9 U to 36 U to 0 43 449 9 41 20 0 48 0 24 72 1 89 15 1 05 0 18 145 1 88 15 1 04 0 18 187 1 104 15 1 22 0 18 228 1 103 15 1 2 0 18 417 1 94 15 1 11 0 18 470 1 St 3e 15 1 07 0 18 K5 band only 77 1 134 15 1 58 0 18 155 1 136 15 1 60 0 18 200 1 149 15 1 75 0 18 241 1 Dit 1 7 0 18 435 1 106 15 1 25 0 18 490 1 134 15 1 58 0 18 82 1 173 15 2 04 0 18 164 1 1 4 x 15 2 04 0 18 213 1 187 x 15 2 20 x 0 18 253 1 187 15 2 2 0 18 452 1 156 15 1 84 x 0 18 510 1 176 15 2 07 0 18 88 1 218 15 2 56 0 18 174 1 21015 2 97 0 18 225 1 220 15 2 59 0 18 266 1 224 10 2 6 0 12 470 1 191 3 15 2 25 0 18 530 1 210 15 2 4 x 0 18 For the K band check the circuitry as follows when the sensitivity loss is moderate For all other bands the s
419. io draws about 50mA When the line becomes inactive the radio is shut down completely regardless of whether it was on or in stand by mode With the line inactive the radio draws less than 1mA In a vehicle installation this avoids flattening the battery when the ignition key 1s off This option 1s similar to the auxiliary power sense option except that the IOP GPIO line of the internal options connector is used Link LK4 is required to connect the line to the power up circuitry This line 1s active high it 1s on when the level exceeds 2 6 V and off when the level falls below 0 7 V the line tolerates maximum inputs of 5 V The behaviour of the ON OFF key is the same as with the auxiliary power sense option If no power sense option is selected the radio can only be powered up and powered down by means of the ON OFF key For this option the links LK1 LK2 and LK4 must be removed The advantage of this option over the battery power sense option is that the radio draws less than 1 mA when it is switched off This option uses the AUX GPI2 line of the auxiliary connector Externally this line is typically connected to a hidden switch Internally link LK3 is required to connect the line to the power up circuitry The line 1s active low and has an internal pull up resistor to the external supply voltage The line is on when the level falls below 0 7 V When the line becomes active when the hidden switch 1s pressed for two seconds the radio
420. ional fault repair any additional damage as described below conclude with the tasks of Final Tasks on page 163 If the control head is damaged detach it from the radio body as described in Removing and Mounting the Control Head on page 136 The procedure includes inspecting the interior of the control head for evidence of other damage Disassemble the control head and repair all damage as described in Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head on page 147 Then re assemble the control head and re attach it to the radio body 156 Servicing Procedures TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 3 With the radio connected to the test equipment as described in Setting up Power Up the Radio 1 Note TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual the Test Equipment on page 115 attempt to power up the radio Apply power to the radio If the radio 1s programmed not to start on power on press the ON OFF switch If the radio powers up but keeps resetting itself check the power sensing circuitry If the radio powers up but fails to enter user mode or displays an error refer to Table 6 1 on page 160 If the radio powers up successfully go to Task 4 If it does not go to Step 3 Check the fuses cables and the power supply Check whether the control head loom the control head or the radio body is faulty by first connecting a spare control head loom and then a spare control head
421. ions on page 112 for more information Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to Disassembling the To install the concealed microphone capsule and concealed and dynamic Radio Control Head microphone support board the control head must be removed from the radio and disassembled For detailed disassembly instructions refer to Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Installing the 1 Disassemble the control head in order to gain access to the speaker a a grille This will mean removing the control head PCB the space Dynamic frame and the speaker Microphone Board 2 Drill a 1 mm diameter hole in the concealed microphone cavity in the position indicated by the small dimple TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO2 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones 511 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 taken when installing the microphone capsule and seal Important Lo maintain the IP54 protection class great care must be 3 Note into the concealed microphone cavity Push the microphone capsule and capsule seal into the concealed microphone cavity G with the capsule wires 4 towards the speaker grille Reassemble the control head This includes reinstalling the speaker head PCB m A the space frame D and the control Plug the speaker lead into the speaker connector 9 On the control head PCB solder the positive conce
422. ircuitry 9V0 Lo E V a Regulator k A 9 V Tx Switch 99 lt gt 3V3 x gt Regulator CG 2V5 Regulator Power Supply DVD Regulator 3VRx4 Switch 13V8 BATT 9V0 TX 9V0 3V0 AN 13V8 BATT 3V0 AN 9V0 3V3 2V5 CDC 3V0 AN 3V0 RX DIG RX EN DIG TX EN DIG SLP EN 3V3 Trans mitter Frequency Synthesizer VV V V V V Receiver DIG PSU LATCH OR Gate K O lt t 13V8 PWR SENSE IOP PWR SENSE IGNITION SENSE EMERGENCY 6 Hardware Links DIG WD KICK PSU SYS RST Digital Board Signal Types RF gt analog clock TL digital gt asynchronous serial data gt synchronous serial data 86 Circuit Descriptions 3V3 AGND a CH ON OFF ITFIOP GPIO7 gt 13V8 Switch Reverse Protection AUX GPI3 AUX GPI2 313 13V8 SW 13V8 BATT TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Interface gt The emergency power sense option can be used in conjunction with any of the other four options The different power sense options have to be facilitated by hardware means as the software cannot act before 1t 1s powered up The radio provides four hardware links LK1 to LK4 on the top side of the main board which can be configured to attain the power sense option desired Figure 3 10
423. ircuitry Introduction A D and D A Conversion Device 1C203 Device IC205 Device IC204 Base band CODEC Voice band CODEC Auxiliary CODEC Audio Circuitry For a block diagram of the CODEC and audio circuitry refer to Figure 3 8 The analog to digital conversion and digital to analog conversion 1s performed by the devices IC203 IC204 and IC205 IC203 is an eight channel DAC that provides control of transmitter biasing front end AGC front end tuning and the output of analog RSSI signals The digital input data are fed to IC203 in synchronous serial form Three of the DAC channels are not used IC205 contains two CODECs One is used by the FCL The second is used for auxiliary audio input and VCO modulation output The digital section communicates with this device via a four wire synchronous serial interface IC204 contains base band voice band and auxiliary CODECs and some analog signal conditioning The reference voltage nominally 1 2 V for these CODECs is provided internally by IC204 but is decoupled externally by C228 The base band CODEC handles the I and Q outputs IRXP IRXN QRXP and QRXN balls of the receivers second IF stage The analog signals are differential and biased at 1 2 V nominally The digital section communicates with this CODEC via a two wire synchronous serial interface BSDO and BSOFS balls The digital to analog conversion section of the base band CODEC is not used The voice band
424. irst stage of the exciter circuit 1 If not already done remove the PAD TOP can 2 Enter the CCTM command 326 X where X defines the power level selected 1n Task 26 oF Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency selected 1n Task 26 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 5 Measure the RF voltage after C3505 for the VHF UHF bands see Figure 11 21 or Q300 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent The required voltage should be as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 6 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode FE If the voltage measured above 1s correct go to Task 29 If 1t 1s not go to Step 8 8 Check the components around Q3501 for the VHF UHF bands see Figure 11 21 or Q300 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 9 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks Replace Q3501 for the VHF UHF bands see Figure 11 21 or Q300 for the K5 band see Figure 11 22 if none of the other components 1s faulty 10 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 28 If the output of the first stage of the exciter circuit 1s correct check that of
425. is This is essential if overheating of the radio is to be avoided As mentioned earlier the heat transfer block must already be secured to the main board of the assembly It is good practice to secure the assembly by at least the two external screws and one of the internal screws The screws are labelled and 9 in Figure 5 3 on page 139 There is no need however to secure the lid of the radio body TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 269 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Ensure Proper Antenna Load Limit Duration of Transmit Tests Protect Against Accidental Transmissions Avoid Thermal and RF Burns The radio has been designed to operate with a 50 Q termination impedance but will tolerate a wide range of antenna loading conditions Nevertheless care should be exercised Normally the RF connector on the board will be connected to the RF communications test set as shown in Figure 4 2 on page 116 But for those tests where this connection is not necessary a 50 2 load may be used instead Do not operate the transmitter without such a load or without a connection to the test set Failure to do so may result 1n damage to the power output stage of the transmitter After setting the frequency and power level if necessary enter the CCTM command 33 to perform a transmit test This command places the radio in transmit mode After completing the measurement or check required immediately enter
426. is section refer to the items in Figure 2 8 on page 36 Front Panel The front panel is an injection moulded plastic part with an aperture for fitting the programming connector which is part of the control head loom A label with the model number is attached to the front panel with self adhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes Control Head Loom The programming connector at one end of the control head loom and a foam seal are screwed to the front panel with a pair of lock nuts When the programming connector is not in use the seal is fitted with two screws to ensure that the control head is sealed to IP54 standards The control head loom with the female female adapter connects to the control head connector of the radio body For more information refer to Control Head Connectors on page 44 There is provision 1n the blank control head for the fitting ofa custom circuit board Figure 2 8 Components of the blank control head 3 16 inch bmm Alb in 0 45 N m 38297 01 D UNX 4 40 x 3 16 inch pan Pozi screw x2 4 front panel 2 cover seal 5 foam seal 3 lock nut pair 6 control head loom with female female adapter 36 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 2 User Interfaces Figure 2 9 shows the controls and indicators of the user interfaces For more information refer to the following user s guides m TM8100 1 digit
427. issue number of the board increments When this happens the IPN changes new PCB Information 1s published and a technical note 15 created In between major changes minor changes may be made to a board For example one component may be changed There 1s no change to the issue number of the board but if the minor change 1s important a technical note 1s created IPN and PCB Information will not alert you to a minor change only the technical notes will It is good practice to print and store a copy of every technical note TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 117 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Verify the Before ordering the part make sure that the specifications of the damaged specifications part are identical to the specifications given in the BOM It is particularly important for tolerances to be the same When the replacement component arrives verify specifications again before installing the part Obtain To determine whether the required component can be ordered as a stand S aeeoa alone part see Spare Parts on page 455 If the item can be ordered as a stand alone part order it from your nearest Tait CSO If the item 1s available only as part of a spares kit check with Tait regarding the availability of the lat 118 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 6 Shielding Cans and Connectors The shielding cans on the top and bottom side of the main boar
428. ited November 2007 Level 2 Requirements Level 2 repairs comprise repairs of control head boards and except for special items main board assemblies The special items are m digital board m RF PAs Q309 and Q310 m CODEC 1 IC204 m copper plate Replacements of the connectors on the main board assembly are level 2 repairs because these repairs entail the disassembly of the main board assembly For level 2 repairs you require expertise in SMT repairs of circuit boards with a very high complexity and extreme component density You require the tools and equipment required for level 1 repairs as well as standard SMT repair tools A can removal tool 1s strongly recommended but not mandatory 4 1 2 Accreditation of Service Centres Note All existing Accredited Service Centres must apply for an endorsement to work on TM8100 TM8200 radios When the endorsement 15 granted they will be permitted to carry out level 1 and level 2 repairs on the radios whether the radio 1s under warranty or not If your service centre would like to apply for Accredited Service Centre ASC status please contact Tait Technical Support at the address in the front of this manual You will need to provide evidence that your centre meets the criteria for accreditation Any centre applying for accreditation must also m make suitable staff available for training by Tait personnel m allow the service facilities to be assessed m provide adequate documen
429. ited November 2007 Task 26 If no transmit frequency is detected in the check of the transmit VCO first Check Switching to Transmit Mode li TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual check that the transmit receive switch 15 functioning correctly Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to switch on the supply to the transmit VCO Measure the voltage at the second collector pin 6 of Q506 see Figure 9 11 The voltage should be pin 6 of Q506 5 0 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 Enter the CCTM command 385 0 to switch off the supply Again measure the voltage at the second collector of Q506 pin 6 of Q506 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 If the voltages measured 1n Step 2 and Step 4 are correct go to Task 27 If they are not the switching network is suspect go to Task 21 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 221 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 27 Check Transmit Buffer Amplifier 222 If no transmit frequency is detected but the switching network is not faulty check the transmit buffer amplifier If the amplifier is not faulty there might be a fault in the transmit VCO that was not detected earlier For all bands except K5 1 10 Remove the VCO BOT can Check the transmit buffer amplifier in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off Measure the voltage at pin 6 of Q5001 see Figure 9 12 pin 6 o
430. ited November 2007 Task 8 If the transmitter 1s being inhibited and the logic signal at the D TX INH test Check Temperature Sensor point 1s active a fault in the temperature sensor may be the cause IM Enter the CCTM command 47 to check the temperature reading 2 Of the two numbers returned the first is the temperature in degrees celsius and should be about 25 C If it is go to Task 12 in Biasing of PA Driver and PAs on page 290 If it 1s not go to Step 3 J If not already done remove the PAF TOP can 4 Check D301 and the surrounding components see Figure 11 6 UHF shown 5 If there is no fault go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 284 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 6 PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can and part of the directional coupler under the DIRC TOP can VHF and UHF bands PAF TOP L310 EK R353 11 C3003 O7 EL S C333 A G S G 3522k 35221 3522M C3522N 35220 C3522P DIRC TO 035225035221 3522003522V
431. iter circuit 1s correct check that of the third and final stage at C307 only m With the radio still in transmit mode measure the RF voltage after C307 see Figure 11 21 Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent The required voltage should be as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 or Table 11 11 H7 2 If the voltage is correct go to Task 30 If 1t is not go toStep 3 3 With the radio still in transmit mode measure the RF voltage at the junction of R3525 and C3512 see Figure 11 21 The voltage should be junction of R3525 and C3512 1 3 0 2V VHF 1 8 0 2V UHF 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the voltage measured in Step 3 is correct go to Step 7 If it is not go to Step 6 6 Check the components around Q3504 see Figure 11 21 Repair any fault Replace Q3504 if none of the other components 1s faulty Conclude with Step 8 J Check the components around Q3505 see Figure 11 21 Repair any fault Replace Q3505 if none of the other components is faulty 8 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 324 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 30 If the exciter output 1s correct check the output of the PA driver at the Output of PA Driver drain of Q306 If ne
432. its and faulty components Repair any fault In the case of the B1 band replace the LPF TOP can before continuing Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 8 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF output power This should be RF output power more than 70W VHF more than 60W UHF more than 52W 700MHz more than 58W 800MHZz Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 8 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 If the power in both the above cases is now correct the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it does not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 339 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 340 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W Introduction This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the 25 W transmitter circuitry The main in
433. k 1 1 10W C12 015 26220 08 CAP CER 220N 50V 10 0805 X7R R19 036 13270 00 RES 0805 270R 5 1 8W C13 015 26100 08 Lap Cer 0805 100n 10 X7r 50v R20 038 15100 10 RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W C14 018 14100 00 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 R21 038 14330 10 RES 0603 3k3 1 1 10W C15 018 14100 00 Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r 10 R22 038 10000 00 RES 0603 OR C16 014 06220 00 Cap Tant SMD 2 2Mf 50v R23 038 15100 10 RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W C17 015 26220 18 AP CER 220N 50V 10 0805 X7R R24 038 14330 10 RES 0603 3k3 1 1 10W C18 016 08470 01 Cap Elec SMD 47uf 6 4 16v R25 038 15100 10 RES 0603 10k 1 1 10W C19 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R26 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W C20 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R27 038 15820 10 RES 0603 82k 1 1 10W C21 014 07470 01 Cap Tant SMD 4u7 25v 10 B R28 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W C22 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R29 038 16120 10 RES 0603 120k 1 1 10W C25 015 26220 18 AP CER 220N 50V 10 0805 X7R R30 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W C26 018 13150 00 Cap 0603 150p 50v NPO 5 R31 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W C27 015 26220 08 Cap 0805 220n 10 X7r 16v R32 038 16120 10 RES 0603 120k 1 1 10W C28 015 26220 18 AP CER 220N 50V 10 0805 X7R R34 038 12560 00 RES 0603 56R 5 1 10W C29 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R35 038 14100 10 RES 0603 1k0 1 1 10W C30 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R36 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W C31 018 15100 00 Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r 10 R37 038 15100 10 RES 0603
434. key when you have finished talking Note The monitor key can be locked in the on position To do this hold the monitor key down and slide the monitor key towards you The monitor key should now be locked on 32 2 Installation whenever the desktop microphone is plugged into the microphone socket When installed the grommet has two O Important The desktop microphone grommet must be installed functions B to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there 15 movement of the microphone cord and m toensure that the control head is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Plug the microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head 2 Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the grommet into the microphone socket cavity TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 01 Desktop Microphone 589 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position 4 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity Figure 32 1 Correct desktop microphone grommet seating AL microphone grommet x control head 32 3 Adjustment Adjust the output sensitivity of the desktop microphone using R5 R5 1s accessible from the underside of the desktop microphone as shown The microphone sensitivity 1s set to maximum by rotating R5 counterclockwise 32 4 Interface Specification The following table
435. ktop microphone plugs into the microphone socket on the radio control head E LOCK The desktop microphone has an internal pre amplifier and E S an adjustable output control on the underside of the ae desktop microphone base key grommet key 36 1 Operation Hold down the MONITOR key and check whether the channel is clear If the channel is clear press the TRANSMIT key PTT to transmit Speak clearly into the microphone and release the TRANSMIT key when you have finished talking Note The MONITOR key can be locked in the on position To do this EJ hold the MONITOR key down and slide the LOCK key towards you The MONITOR key should now be locked on 36 2 Installation whenever the desktop microphone is plugged into the microphone socket When installed the grommet has two functions Important The desktop microphone grommet must be installed B to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there is movement of the microphone cord and m toensure that the control head is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Plug the microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 07 Desktop Microphone 607 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the grommet into the microphone socket cavity 3 Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into po
436. l 140x3 2mm C1 018 16100 00 Primary auxiliary connector C2 018 14101 00 C1 018 16100 00 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R C3 018 15100 00 C2 018 14101 00 CAP 1n 50V NPO 5 0603 D1 001 10100 00 C3 018 15100 00 CAP 10n 50V 10 0603 X7R D3 001 10280 00 D1 001 10100 00 DIODE SMF10A TVS 10V SOD123FL D4 001 10011 74 D2 001 10070 07 DIODE BAS70 07W dual SOT343 F1 036 10000 00 D3 001 10280 00 DIODE SMF28A TVS 28V SOD123FL Q1 000 10084 72 D4 001 10011 74 DIODE MRA4004T3 1A 400V R1 038 13560 10 F1 265 10026 00 FUSE 0805 800mA 50V R2 038 14120 10 F2 265 10026 00 FUSE 0805 800mA 50V R3 038 12820 00 Q1 000 10084 72 XSTR BC847BS NPN Dual SOT363 RA 038 15470 10 R1 038 13560 10 RES 0603 560R 1 1 10W R5 038 15330 10 R3 038 12820 00 RES 0603 82R 5 1 10W R6 038 14680 10 R4 038 15470 10 RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W R7 038 13120 00 R5 038 15330 10 RES 0603 33k 1 1 10W R8 036 14560 10 R6 038 14680 10 RES 0603 6k8 1 1 10W R9 036 14560 10 R7 038 13120 00 RES 0603 120R 5 1 10W R10 038 10000 00 R9 036 14680 10 RES 0805 6k8 1 1 8W R11 038 10000 00 R11 038 10000 00 RES 0603 OR 5 1 10W SA 938 10001 01 SA 938 10001 01 SMT Alloy Lead Free sac 220 01755 01 220 01755 01 PCB cross bnd extnl 1 F cbl 1 F2 is a spare fuse 31 6 2 Linking and Interface Cable Board Layouts B A eV PN A ibd h dh 3 k J3 J4 nt m Ne 97 ume eo mm TD C e en O LE BENE e FN EUR 2 ai NC e R10 Tee ww RI R11 as Ce 00 CP x x oo SS Z d 19 we Nd i Me 1 R8 ne
437. l bands except K5 For the K5 band go to Task 8 on page 256 1 Using the calibration application check the calibration of the front end tuning circuitry Open the Raw Data page and click the Heceiver tab 2 Record the values listed in the Rx FE Tune BPF Settings field these are the DAC values of the FE front end tuning voltages for the five frequencies FE TUNEO to FE TUNEA FE TUNEO is the lowest frequency and FE TUNE4 the highest fre quency in the radios frequency band the values are given in Table 10 2 3 For each of the frequencies FE TUNEO to FE TUNE4 in turn carry out the following procedure Enter the CCTM command 101 a a 0 where is the frequency in hertz Enter the CCTM command 376 and record the value returned this is the in millivolts 4 Compare the values measured in Step 2 and Step 3 with the nominal DAC and voltage values listed 1n Table 10 2 5 If the DAC and voltage values are correct go to Step 8 If they are not go to Step 6 6 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application and check the DAC and voltage values again T If the DAC and voltage values are now correct the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not go to Step 8 8 Go to Task 8 if the receiver output level X measured in Task 1 was less than 40 000 otherwise go to Task 9 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 255 Tait Electronics Limited
438. lace the heat transfer block and conclude with Step 8 Repeat Task 1 to confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 275 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 3 If the supply from the power connector is correct check the 9 V DC supply 9V Power Supply 1 Enter the CCTM command 326 1 to set the transmitter power level very low 2 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 3 Measure the supply voltage between the 9V0 TX test point and the GND test point see Figure 11 4 supply 9VO TX 9 0 0 5V DC 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the supply measured in Step 3 is correct go to Task 4 in Transmitter RF Power on page 278 If it is not the 9V regulator IC601 and the associated switching circuitry Q603 are suspect go to Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 276 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 4 Test points for checking the 9V supply the forward and reverse RF power and the inhibiting of the transmitter ejus pueq Sy JHN NVO dOL Jl INIOd LSAL ONE INIOd 1S3L Rea mE doni G IE en E Kale 3 INIOd 1S3L l HMd AaH INIOd 1S3L XL 0A6 CA INO MA
439. lation Parts 26 3 1 Disassembling the Torso Interface Disassemble only as much as is necessary to replace the defective parts Re assembly is carried out in reverse order of disassembly 1 Release the clip of the PCB bracket and remove the control head board 2 Disconnect the torso interface loom e Unscrew the four PT type screws and remove the PCB bracket Figure 26 4 Parts of the torso interface Description IPN D control head board 2 torso interface loom 219 02882 XX 3 x 8 PT screw x4 346 10030 XX 4 PCB bracket 302 10063 XX2 5 front panel 316 06843 XX 6 label 365 01751 XX D RJ45 bung 302 50002 XX 4 Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN 552 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 3 2 Disassembling the Control Head Interface Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts or to swap the Micromatch connector loom Re assembly is carried out in reverse order of disassembly 1 Unscrew the seven PT type screws D and remove the PCB 2 Remove the control head interface loom not illustrated Figure 26 5 Parts of the control head interface Description IPN D 3 x 8 PT screw x7 346 10030 XX 2 control head interface PCB 3 control head interface 316 06842 XX control head interface loom 219 02914 XX Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN TM8100 TM8200 Serv
440. lbf in be tightened correctly before screwing the options extender Important The external options connector screw lock fasteners must board onto the mounting posts 8 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards 499 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 rA Screw the options extender board to the mounting posts on the radio lid using four M3x8 self tapping screws 9 Tighten the M3x8 screws to a torque of 1 9 N m 17 bf in the radios options cavity the internal options connector Important For the options extender board to be installed correctly in loom must be looped in the way shown in Figure 19 2 8 Plug the unattached end of internal options connector loom into the internal options connector on the radio main PCB 9 Refit the radio lid and top cover to the radio and screw the external options cover seal D over the external options connector using the two 4 40x3 16 screws 2 Figure 19 2 Options extender board installation screw lock fasteners radio lid external options connector bung mounting posts foam seal M3x8 self tapping screws external options connector cavity internal options loom options extender board external options cover seal St gt eG external options connector 4 40x3 16 screws 500 TMAAO1 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 19 3 Inte
441. lected selected 1 In the programming application click the Basic Settings page under the Networks heading 2 Click the Basic Network Settings tab 3 Check the setting in the Squelch Detect Type field Ensure that the setting is what the Customer expects 4 If the setting is Noise Level implying that noise muting is selected go to Task 15 If the setting is Signal Strength implying that RSSI muting is selected go to Task 16 262 Receiver Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 15 With noise muting selected check the noise mute settings Noise Muting Selected T 1 In the calibration application open the Deviation Squelch page and click the Squelch and Signaling Thresholds tab 2 Ensure that under the Squelch Thresholds label the settings in the Country City and Hard fields are what the Customer expects D Open the Haw Data page and click the Mute tab 4 Compare the values in the Mute Noise Readings field with the required minimum and maximum values listed in Table 10 5 5 If the mute noise readings are correct go to Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity If they are not go to Step 6 6 Recalibrate the mute and then check if the mute fault has been removed d If the fault has been removed go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivi
442. lectronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 12 PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can K5 band C3950 C3900 Aa SA circuitry between IC301 and PAs via to gate of Q309 via to pin 14 of IC301 RE via to gate of Q310 via to pin 8 of C301 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 297 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 15 Shaping Filter for Power Control If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 13 is correct then the shaping filter for the power control circuitry or the CODEC and audio circuitry 1s suspect Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A And when entering the CCTM command 331 x do not specify a value X higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN1 test point see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 The voltage should be FIN1 test point 18 2mV initially Enter the CCTM command 331 X where X was recorded in Task 12 Check that the voltage changes to FIN1 test point
443. led Microphone Microphone Leads H Speaker Leads Speaker CH ON OFF CH ON OFF Control Head Connector On Off 13V8 13V8 Keypad POWER ON OFF SENSE gt 41V5 43V3 m 1V5 3V3 V Volume 3V3 VOL WIP DC Potentio ee U meter WATCHDOG TRIGGER Te Analog Digital Converter RESET el TEMP SENSOR DISPLAY CONTROL BIRDIE LCD Connector BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT lt Power HEATER Switches HEATER AGND FPGA CLOCK v ENABLE Function BRIGHT BRIGHT Key and K Status LEDs Constant Current Keypad BRIGHT Drivers BRIGHT Backlighting lt LEDs ROW gt FP Main GA Keypad COL Memory EE 43V3 413V8 Boot Flash ASYNC UART Control s DGND Options jme Connector RENE DGND AGND CH SPI DO Y 13 8V 3V3 SENSE MICRXD _ ee CTXD l pies Protection 7 gt MIC GPIO1 an wm ch Microphone E gt Connector MIC RX AUD CH RX AUD MIC AUD IN CONTROL AGND Microphone SZ Pre amplifier CH MIC AUD Soldering Pads Speaker lt TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 and Audio Switching Control Head Board SPK LO Circuit Descriptions 97 Power Supply Volume Control Main Keypad LCD Module Function Key LEDs and Status LEDs Keypad Backlighting Speaker Microphone and Concealed Microphone Optional
444. led by a serial data link to the FPGA A faulty LCD display can be caused by the following m aloose or dirty LCD loom connection m afaulty LCD or m a fault on the control head board Note This section only deals with the display of the LCD For faults of the LCD backlighting refer to LCD Backlighting Faulty on page 430 Figure 14 3 Circuit diagram of the LCD circuitry 3V3 LCD BACKLIGHT CTRL Q102 LCD HEATER CTRL 2 Q102 LCD Connector 3V3 E 2 LCDRESETN R4 LCD RESETN a LcDDC J f 4 LCcDSGK 5l LCD DAT Re LCDDAT 6 LCD CEN fJ f 7 LED 8 WW E108 HEATER a LCD RESETN 2 lines send CCTM command 1006 1 to activate all LCD pixels If some of the LCD pixels are faulty replace the LCD de Note If some of the LCD pixels are faulty usually complete rows or If the LCD display is faulty 1 Disconnect the LCD loom visually inspect and clean the contacts and reconnect the LCD loom Visually inspect connector J102 for open or shorted contacts 428 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 Check the 3 3V supply voltage at pin 2 of the LCD connector J102 J102 pin 2 3 3V If the signal 1s not correct refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 426 Tip For a quick check of the LCD without having to disassemble the control head connect a good LCD
445. lid of the radio body The radio has been designed to operate with a 50 Q termination impedance but will tolerate a wide range of antenna loading conditions Nevertheless care should be exercised Normally the RF connector on the board will be connected to the RF communications test set as shown in Figure 4 2 on page 116 But for those tests where this connection is not necessary a 50Q load may be used instead Do not operate the transmitter without such a load or without a connection to the test set Failure to do so might result in damage to the power output stage of the transmitter After setting the frequency and power level if necessary enter the CCTM command 39 to perform a transmit test This command places the radio in transmit mode After completing the measurement or check required immediately enter the CCTM command 32 This command returns the radio to the receive mode Restricting the duration of transmit tests in this way will further limit the danger of overheating The reason for this precaution is that the transmit timers do not function in the CCTM mode Under certain circumstances the microprocessor can key on the transmitter Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from such accidental transmissions Avoid thermal burns Do not touch the cooling fins or underside of the radio body when the transmitter 1s or has been operating Avoid RF burns Do not touch the antenna or the RF signal path on the circuit boa
446. lled when Microphone ever the microphone is plugged into the microphone socket When installed the grommet has two functions B to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there is movement of the microphone cord and m toensure that the control head is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Plug the DTMF microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head 2 Slide the microphone grommet along the microphone cord and push two adjacent corners of the grommet into the microphone socket cavity 3 Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position 4 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO02 02 DTMF Microphone 507 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 20 1 Correct DTMF microphone grommet seating VE x Control head Installing the LL Install the microphone clip in the most convenient location for the Microphone Clip radio user It must be within easy reach of the user but 1n such a position that the microphone PTT key cannot be inadvertently activated or jammed on 2 Connect the microphone clip to the negative supply if hookswitch operation is required 20 2 Adjustment Remove the DTMF microphone back cover and set the DTMF tone level to approximately 60 deviation t 3kHz for wide bandwidth radios and t1 5kHz for narrow bandwidth radios 20 3 Radio Programming The foll
447. lt in the initial RF signal path go to Task 31 If there is no RF voltage go to Step 12 Check the components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310 see Figure 11 23 to Figure 11 25 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 325 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 23 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the PAs Q309 and Q310 VHF PAF TOP CAN PAD TOP CAN 326 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 24 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the PAs Q309 and Q310 UHF R351 es CO Co I
448. luns and a quadruple SMD diode For the bands between 66 and 174MHz A4 and B1 the receiver includes a circuit for suppressing ignition noise This circuit momentarily removes the LO local oscillator signal from the mixer when an ignition noise pulse is detected The ignition noise suppressor 1s selectable on a per channel basis when the radio is programmed The noise blanker 1s generally not fitted to trigger base variants of the radio as 1t 1s not required in a fixed station environment The first mixer of the K5 band 1s an integrated high performance mixer IC409 The first LO signal from the VCO is tapped from the collector of Q504 The first LO injection is low side for all bands except the 66 to 88 MHz A4 band In the 762 to 870MHz K5 band radios the first LO injection is high side for the 762 to 776 MHz sub band and low side for the 850 to 870MHz sub band The first IF stage consists of a crystal channel filter BPF1 followed by an IF amplifier and then another crystal filter BPF2 The second mixer is an IC quadrature mixer with an internal AGC amplifier This IC has a divide by two function on the LO input in order to provide the quadrature LO frequencies required internally The second LO frequency 1s synthesized by an integer PLL IC403 which uses the TCXO frequency SYN RX OSC 13 0000 MHZ as its reference 70 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Block diagram o
449. ly to match the surface shape 2 Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or bushings in the holes Important Check that the U bracket is not distorted when the screws are tightened OO P 3 If precise positioning is required predrill 3mm 1 8 inch pilot holes for the self drilling screws Reduce the hole size in metal that is less than 1 mm 1 32 inch thick 4 Screw the U bracket in the chosen mounting position using the self drilling screws washers Installing the Radio 1 Connect the antenna and power cables to the rear of the radio Body in the GE 2 Position the radio body in the U bracket so that the holes in the U bracket line up with the holes in the radio chassis 3 Screw the radio into position using the four thumb screws TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing a Remote Kit 533 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 1 8 Connecting the Remote Cable Caution When drilling holes in the vehicle check that drilling at the selected points will not damage existing wiring petrol tanks fuel lines brake pipes or battery cables 1 Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or bushings in the holes 2 Plug one end of the remote cable into the control head interface Di Run the remote cable to the torso interface and plug it into the RJ45 connector without a bung Installing the Install both the remote cable grommets using the following proced
450. m Digital tab 1 To transmit only when the signalling is valid set this field to Signalling Audio Mute Status Programmable 1 0 The following table shows the crossband linking settings required in the Form Audio Tab Audio tab of the Programmable I O form Table 29 3 Crossband settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Audio tab Tap In Type Tap In Unmute Tap Out Type Tap Out Unmute A Bypass In R7 D Split Busy Detect This can be set to Busy Detect Sub if the mute is to open only when valid subaudible signalling is present with the transmission 29 2 1 Repeater Transmit Tail Settings TM8100 Radios If the transmitter requires a tail then this can be set in the External PTT 1 tab of the PTT form During the PTT deactivation delay period any signalling such as CTCSS or DCS is still present Table 29 4 Transmit tail settings in the PTT form External PTT 1 tab Advanced EPTT1 PTT Deactivation Delay up to 1000ms If a further transmitter tail 1s required then this can be configured in the Subaudible Signalling tab of the Basic Settings form During the lead out delay period no signalling such as CTCSS or DCS is present Table 29 5 Additional Transmit tail in the Basic Settings form Subaudible Signalling tab CTCSS Settings Lead Out Delay any duration up to 1000ms DCS Settings Lead Out Delay any duration up to 1000ms TM8200 Radios If the transmitter requires a tail then this can be configure
451. m long reach socket to remove the RF connector nut OD Also remove the lock washer 02 Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to remove the three screws D securing the main board 7 to the heat transfer block GJ Make sure not to touch the thermal paste on the heat transfer block and the underside side of the main board If the thermal paste 1s contaminated you must re apply thermal paste as described in Reassembling the Main Board Assembly on page 143 Separate the main board 9 from the heat transfer block Inspect the inner foam D range seal and the outer foam seal and replace if necessary The gap pad W 725 W radio only must be replaced each time the heat transfer block 1s separated from the main board To replace the power connector 9 m With the 725 W radio use a Torx T6 screwdriver to undo the two screws 2 m With the 25 W radio use a Torx T10 screwdriver to undo the two screws 2 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 5 4 Components of the main board assembly Torx T6 1Ib in 0 11 N m 9 2 Torx T10 X 3lb in 0 34N m 7 T Torx T10 x3 15lb in 1 7 N m TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual thermal paste 3 16 inch 5mm 8lb in 0 9 N m H D M3x10 screw x3 2 gt 25W radios M2 2x10 PT screw x2 25W radios K30x8 PT screw x2 3 auxiliary connector 4 inner foam D range seal 5 heat transfer block 6 outer foam seal
452. m the Mode switch of the test unit is set to Rx m the programming application 15 set up correctly Refer to the troubleshooting section of the online help If the programming file can be read now save a copy on the test PC and go to Task 5 If not go to Step 6 Check whether the control head loom the control head or the radio body is faulty by first connecting a spare control head loom and then a spare control head If the control head is faulty check m the control head connector pin 3 TXD pin 7 R XD m the microphone or programming connector m the path between the control head connector and the microphone Or programming connector and repair or replace the control head board If the repair succeeded without the need for replacing the main board assembly go to Step 9 Otherwise continue with Step 10 If the programming file can be read now save a copy on the test PC and go to Task 5 If the file still cannot be read go to Step 10 Set up a suitable default programming file and attempt to upload it to the radio If the upload succeeds go to Task 6 If the upload fails continue with step 12 If the main board assembly was replaced or if the repair failed re assemble the radio as described in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Conclude with the tasks of Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 5 Obtain the Details of the Softw
453. moval of the fault and go to Task 38 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 38 If the signal at the TP502 test point is correct check the signal at the TP501 TP501 Test Point 1 10 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual test point With the oscilloscope probe at the TP501 test point see Figure 9 18 check the DAC output CDC VCXO MOD If a triangular wave is present go to Step 2 Otherwise go to VCXO and CODEC Circuitry on page 244 A fault is causing the loop to oscillate If not already done remove the FCL TOP can Check the waveform at the TP500 test point see Figure 9 18 The waveform should be an amplified and inverted version of the waveform at the TP501 test point A4 band TP500 is not marked but the waveform can be checked at the via adjacent to C518 If the waveform is correct go to Step 5 If it is not there is a fault in the modulator buffer amplifier IC502 pins 1 to 3 and associated components see Figure 9 18 Rectify the fault and return to Step 1 Connect the TP501 test point to ground by resoldering R527 in the position shown in Figure 9 18 The VCXO loop voltage is forced high Use the oscilloscope probe to check che VCXO output at C536 probe the via next to C536 see Figure 9 18 The signal should be VCXO output at C536 sine wave with frequency of 13 017 MHz and amplitude of 1 1 0 2V on 1 4 0 2V DC If the signal is correct
454. moved return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If 1t has not replace the control head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 452 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 15 5 Some but not All Keys Faulty If one or more but not all of the keys are faulty repair the control head as follows 1 Disconnect the control head loom and remove the control head board Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens cleaning cloth to clean the pads on the control head board for those keys that are faulty Re install the control head board Reconnect the control head loom and test the keys If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not go to Step 5 Replace the keypad Re assemble the control head Reconnect the control head loom test the keys to confirm the removal of the fault and return to Initial Tasks on page 155 15 6 All Keys Faulty If all the keys with the exception of the ON OFF key are faulty 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disconnect the control head loom Replace IC4 which reads the status of the keys See Figure 15 2 Reconnect the control head loom and test the keys to confirm the removal of the fault If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not replace the control head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 1
455. mponents see Figure 9 8 then conclude with Step 9 A4 band C5085 to C5089 B1 band C5085 to C5089 CO band C5085 to C5088 D1 band C5085 to C5088 G2 band C5085 and C5086 H5 band C5085 and C5086 H6 H7 bands C5085 and C5086 K5 band C590 and C591 On early issue boards C548 may be fitted instead of these components Remove R566 and R570 see Figure 9 8 which provide a modulation path to the VCO s Repeat the measurement of Step 1 If the correct result is now obtained go to Step 8 If the correct result is still not obtained the CODEC and audio circuitry 1s suspect resolder R566 and R570 in position see Figure 9 8 and go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 Resolder R566 and R570 in position see Figure 9 8 Check IC504 pins 6 8 9 see Figure 9 4 and the associated components in the loop filter If a fault is found repair the circuit and confirm that the voltages are now correct If they are go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not or if no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 5 Receive VCO and Related Circuitry UHF Radios Introduction If there 1s no fault with the power supplies the PLL inputs and output and the loop filter check the VCO and related circuitry The procedures in this section apply only to UHF radios with a lock error or receive fault an
456. n the control head board The graphical display LCD assembly 2 sits on a foam seal inside a rectangular recess of the front panel assembly 9 Another foam seal is attached to the rear of the LCD with self adhesive coating The LCD assembly has a loom which runs through a slot in the space frame and connects to a connector on the rear side of the control head board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 27 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Speaker Concealed Microphone Optional Space Frame Seals 28 Description The speaker OD sits inside a round recess of the front panel assembly where a cloth membrane is fixed to the speaker grille The speaker clamp 49 holds the speaker in position The speaker cable plugs into the speaker connector on the rear side of the control head board Note Tn some configurations the speaker may be disconnected A concealed microphone 9 consisting of the microphone capsule and a rubber seal can be fitted in a round recess inside the front panel assembly 9 The microphone leads are soldered to two pads on the top side of the control head board Before the microphone 1s fitted a small hole is drilled in the recess to provide an acoustic path to the microphone The hole 1s covered by the rubber seal to ensure that the control head remains sealed to IP54 standards For more information refer to TMAA02 07 Concealed Microphone on page 519 The aluminium space frame 9 s
457. n Board Control Head Board Internal Options Connector Power Connector Internal n Pads for Options Auxiliary I Concealed Loom Connector Microphone Speaker Connector Internal External RS S Options Options c Board Connector B Factory Only Speaker Leads Speaker Figure 2 11 shows the connectors of the radio body Figure 2 12 shows the connectors of the control head For information on the factory connector of the main board and the internal connectors of the control head refer to the PCB information of the main boards and the control head board 38 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 11 Connectors of the radio body 25W radio Joooo T OOA front view control head connector provision for provision for external options additional connector connector ceo LM HP IMs rear view auxiliary power RF connector connector connector internal options connector JU UU U UTI UU o9 0959696969090 top view TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 39 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 12 Connectors of the control head with graphical display front view microphone connector t control head connector rear view without adapter flange Figure 2 13 Connectors of the control head with 1 2 or 3 digit display front view microphone connector control head connector for speaker connect
458. n Step 1 and Step 2 are correct go to Step 9 If they are not remove R103 see Figure 9 7 and go to Step 4 Enter the CCTM command 335 0 and measure the voltage at the via between R103 and the digital board see Figure 9 7 via at R103 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 Enter the CCTM command 335 1 and again measure the voltage at the via between R103 and the digital board via at R103 3 3 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 If the voltages measured in Step 4 and Step 5 are correct go to Step 7 If they are not the digital board 1s faulty resolder R103 in position see Figure 9 7 replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check and resolder R103 in position see Figure 9 7 and check for continuity between Q508 and the digital board via R593 see Figure 9 11 and R103 If no fault is found go to Step 9 If a fault 1s found repair the circuit confirm that the voltages are now correct and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check the circuitry for the transmit receive and 5V switches based on Q506 Q507 and Q508 see Figure 9 11 If a fault is found repair the circuit confirm that the voltages are now correct and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Servi
459. n scratch Bench Tops Compliance Issues Sealing of Radio ESD Precautions This section discusses the precautions that need to be taken when servicing the radios These precautions fall into the following categories m mechanical issues m compliance issues m anti static precautions m transmitter issues Service technicians should familiarize themselves with these precautions before attempting repairs of the radios Apply the correct torque when using a torque driver to tighten a screw or nut in the radio Under torquing can cause problems with microphonics and heat transfer Over torquing can damage the radio The illustrations in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 show the correct torque values for the different screws and nuts Use workbenches with non scratch bench tops so that the mechanical parts of the radio are not damaged during disassembly and re assembly The workbench must also satisfy the anti static requirements specified below In addition use a clear area of the bench when disassembling and re assembling the radio Note The radio is designed to satisfy the applicable compliance regula tions Do not make modifications or changes to the radio not expressly approved by TEL Failure to do so could invalidate com pliance requirements and void the Customer s authority to operate the radio To maintain the sealing of the radio to IP54 standards ensure that all bungs and seals are fitted after servicing
460. naps into the three clips of the front panel assembly 19 The front side of the space frame holds the keypads the LCD assembly and the speaker in place and at the same time allows access to their electrical contacts The rear side of the space frame has four through holes for the screws of the control head board and two screw bosses to fit the adapter flange Two light pipes D and are fitted in recesses in the space frame and direct light from LEDs on the control head board to the front panel A slot at the top edge of the space frame allows the loom of the LCD assembly 2 to run to the control head board Two identical ring seals fitted to grooves around the perimeter of the space frame provide for IP54 class protection TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 4 Components of the control head with graphical display 34512 02 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 D M4 x 12 Taptite screw x2 2 adapter flange control head loom assembly with female female adapter 4 3 x 10 PT screw x4 5 control head board 6 space frame seal x2 7 short light pipe long light pipe 9 space frame speaker clamp I speaker 2 LCD assembly 43 main keypad power keypad 5 concealed microphone optional front panel assembly AD knob for volume control potentiometer Description 29 Control Head Board Control Head Loom
461. nce of a keypad microphone as this is automatically done when the radio is powered on However there are a a number of related fields that should be configured to enable the keypad microphone to be used effectively Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information about the programming options Note You must power cycle the radio after replacing the keypad micro phone with a programming lead 1n order to read or program the radio 23 2 1 Radios with a 1 or 2 Digit Control Head Firmware The radio must have the following firmware versions in order to use these Compatibility keypad microphone features m Channel control firmware version 2 09 or later m DTMF dialling firmware version 2 10 or later 522 TMAAO02 08 Keypad Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 UI Preferences Form Start up Form Phone Patch form Select Keypad Mic in the Mic field In the Keypad Mic Mode field select whether the keypad microphone is in Channel Control mode or DTMF Dialling mode when the radio is first turned on Note To toggle between channel control and DTMF dialling modes when using the keypad microphone program a function key for DTMF Dialling Select the Audible Phone Patch Side Tones check box to allow radio users to hear the DTMF tones as they are transmitted 23 2 2 Radios with a 3 Digit Control Head As the radio does not ne
462. nd R389 m Di R3000 R389 and R390 m CO R3000 and R389 m D1 R3000 and R390 m H5 H6 R3000 and R389 If any resistor 1s faulty replace the resistor as well as D307 A faulty resistor is likely to have resulted in damage to D307 With the test lead still connected to the test set enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Again measure the RF output power This should exceed 35 W RF output power more than 35W Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Repeat Step 5 to Step 7 Remove the test lead and test capacitor and resolder the blocking capacitors C361 C362 and C363 see Figure 12 17 in position If the power in both the above cases is now correct the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding
463. ne cord and m to ensure that the control head is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards p Make sure the radio is turned off then plug the keypad microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO02 08 Keypad Microphone 521 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Important The radio will only recognize the presence of the keypad microphone when the radio is powered on so that if the microphone is plugged in after the radio has been powered on it will not recognize the keypad microphone Also if the keypad microphone is plugged in on power up but is later unplugged then plugged back in the radio will not recognize it again until the next power cycle 2 Slide the microphone grommet along the microphone cord and push two adjacent corners of the grommet into the microphone socket cavity 3 Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position 4 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity Figure 23 1 Correct keypad microphone grommet seating VE ax control head Installing the Install the microphone clip in the most convenient location for the radio Microphone Clip user It must be within easy reach of the user but in such a position that the microphone PTT key cannot be inadvertently activated or jammed on 23 2 Radio Programming The radio does not need to be programmed to recognize the prese
464. nearest ASC and level 2 service centres should return the board or assembly to the ISC 1f deemed necessary Supply details of the fault and 1f applicable the attempted repair Go to step Step 6 If the main board assembly has not been replaced go to Step 4 Replace any cans removed Refer to Shielding Cans and Connectors on page 119 Re test the radio as described in Final Test on page 165 Reassemble the radio as described in Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 Reconnect the radio to the test equipment and carry out a final calibration of the radio Refer to the online help of the calibration application If the main board assembly has been replaced ensure that the correct software features if any are enabled for the Customer If software features need to be enabled a special licence file 1s required for the replacement main board assembly The file must allow for the enabling of the same software features as 1n the original assembly Proceed as follows 1 Servicing Procedures If it was possible to read the software features in Obtain the Details of the Software Feature Enabler SFE on page 159 go to Step 2 If it was not possible go to Step 3 Reading the software features reveals if any software features are enabled for the radio under repair If there are go to Step 3 If there are none go to Task 3 Technicians not at a CSO should contact their CSO regarding the radios softw
465. ng capacitors C348 C349 and C350 in position see Figure 12 6 12 Ifthe power and current are now correct at all three frequencies the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not go to Task 25 in RF Signal Path on page 380 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 11 If the RF output power and the supply current are uniformly low at all Power and Current Ate ou frequencies one of the PAs is suspect or the input to the PAs 1s reduced Check each PA in turn 1 For the first PA Q310 enter the CCTM command 331 to check the DAC value of final bias 1 CDC TX FIN BIAS 1 Record the value X returned 2 Note the current reading on the DC power supply 3 Enter the CCTM command 331 7 to turn off final bias 1 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 5 Note the RF output power measured at the test set This should be as shown in Table 12 5 6 If the RF power is correct go to Step 7 to repeat the check with the second PA If it is not enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio 1n receive mode and carry out Task 12 and then Task 13 ya For the second PA Q309 enter the CCTM command 332 to check the DAC value of final bias 2 CDC TX FIN BIAS 2 Record the value y returned 8 Note the current reading on the DC power supply 9 Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to turn off final bias 2
466. nge 0 to 255 of bias voltage for first PA Read bias voltage for second PA displays DAC value x in range 0 to 255 Set DAC value x in range 0 to 255 of bias voltage for second PA Set synthesizer on x21 or off x20 via DIG SYN EN line Set transmit receive switch on x21 or off x20 via DIG SYN TR SW line Frequency Bands Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of the radio the frequency band 1s given in brackets The frequency band may be referred to as either VHF very high frequency or UHF ultra high frequency or identified by the frequency sub band such as DI or H7 For example RF output power 60W VHF 52W UHF current 15A VHF 12A UHF In some cases differences in performance across a wide band of frequencies within a frequency band may mean that different figures are given for specific frequencies For example RF output power gt 60W VHF gt 52W UHF gt 40W 700MHz gt 45W 800 MHz A definition of frequency bands is given in Defining Frequency Bands on pace 151 Some fault diagnosis tasks require programming the radio with the lowest centre or highest frequency in the radio s frequency band The relevant frequencies for the different bands are listed in Table 11 2 268 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Emergency Frequencies Can Removal
467. nics Limited November 2007 20 5 Circuit Description The microphone has a standard 12 key telephone keypad When one of the keypad keys is pressed a DTMF tone specific to that key is generated on the MIC AUD line pin 5 For the duration of the tone the tone generator activates the PTT so that the user is not required to press the PTT key to transmit each tone 510 TMAAO2 02 DTMF Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 21 TMAAO2 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones The concealed and dynamic microphone support board plugs onto the radio s control head board and contains circuitry for a pre concealed and M dynamic microphone amplifier and a microphone switch circuit The concealed electret support board microphone is installed inside the speaker grille of the w F control head If the radio is placed in emergency mode the concealed microphone can be used to monitor activity around the radio The support board is required if a dynamic microphone is used such as the microphone in the TMAA10 02 handset concealed microphone capsule The TMAAO02 06 support kit is used for radios with 1 2 or 3 Rossa en digit display control heads For radios with a graphical display control head the TMAA02 07 kit is used refer to TMAA02 07 Concealed Microphone on page 519 21 1 Installation damage from static discharges Refer to ESD Precaut
468. nput and then carry out the procedure given in Task 2 Interface Fault Finding 183 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 184 Interface Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding Introduction This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the frequency synthesizer The sections are divided into the following m Initial checks m Fault diagnosis of RF PLL circuitry m Fault diagnosis of FCL circuitry The initial checks will indicate whether it is the RF PLL or the FCL that is suspect Note that the synthesizer is a closed loop control system A fault in one area can cause symptoms to appear elsewhere Locating the fault can therefore be difficult Measurement The radio must be in CCTM for all the fault diagnosis procedures of this Techniques section The CCTM commands required are listed in Table 9 1 Pull details of the commands are given in Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM on page 123 Use an oscilloscope with a x10 probe for all voltage measurements required The signals should appear stable and clean Consider any noise or unidentified oscillations as evidence of a fault requiring investigation Use a frequency counter for all measurements of high frequencies The RF power output from the frequency synthesizer will not exceed 10mW If a probe 1s used for frequency measurements use the x1 setting Table 9 1 CCTM commands required fo
469. ns can be seen by all service centres A PCB Information document provides the PCB layout BOMs and circuit diagrams for a specified issue of a board For every issue of a board there is a different PCB Information document See Check the Issue Number on page 117 Always download the correct PCB Information document from the Tait Technical Support website If you cannot find the required document please contact your nearest Tait CSO Tip It 15 good practice to print and store a copy of all relevant PCB Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 109 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 2 Tools Equipment and Spares Torque drivers Tools for SMT Repairs Test Equipment 50W gow 29W The following torque drivers are required for level 1 repairs and for level 2 repairs excluding SMT circuit boards repairs m Torx T6 Torx T10 and Torx T20 driver bits m 3 16 inch and 14mm long reach sockets Refer to the illustrations in Reassembling the Radio Body on page 143 for the corresponding torque values In general only the standard tools for SMT work are required for level 2 repairs ofthe circuit boards In addition a can removal tool is recommended but if none 1s available a hot air tool may be used instead However it should be noted that a hot air tool affords little control Even in skilled hands use of a hot air tool to remove cans will result 1n rapid uncontrolled rises in the temp
470. ns connector of the main board Tait offers a range of internal options board which are described in the accessories section of this manual For more information on how to create your own internal options board contact Tait Electronics Limited The aluminium chassis is different for the gt 25 W radio and the 25 W radio The chassis houses the main board assembly which is attached with five screws to screw bosses inside the chassis and with two screws through the rear of the chassis to the heat transfer block The rear of the chassis has apertures for the RE power and auxiliary connectors of the main board If the auxiliary connector is not used the aperture is sealed with a rubber bung 9 for IP54 class protection The RF connector has a rubber seal which is fitted inside the aperture for the RF connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 2 Components of the radio body 1 cover 2 screw M4x 16 x4 3 lid assembly 4 screw M3x10 x5 5 main board assembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3630z 01 6 chassis 7 auxiliary connector bung screws MAx16 x2 9 seal gap pad gt 25W radio only Description 23 24 Description The front of the chassis has an aperture for the control head connector The control head seal 1s fitted inside a groove around the flange at the front face of the cha
471. nsitivity 5 Check if the RSSI fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Task 13 Task 13 If the RSSI delta gain values are also correct check the AGC delta gain AGC Delta Gain values 1 Note the values listed in the AGC Delta Gain Values field The values should run gradually from 0dBm to about 35 dBm 2 If the values are as expected go to Step 6 If they are not go to Step 3 3 Recalibrate the receiver and check the values again 4 If the values are now correct go to Step 5 If they are not go to lask 1 and check the receiver sensitivity 5 Check if the RSSI fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Step 6 6 In this case all the RSSI calibration settings are correct but there 1s still an RSSI fault Go to Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 261 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 5 Faulty Radio Mute Introduction If the radio mute 1s faulty the calibration settings are suspect There are three tasks m Task 14 determine type of muting selected m Task 15 noise muting selected m Task 16 RSSI muting selected The programming application is required for Task 14 and the calibration application for Task 15 and Task 16 Task 14 First use the programming application to determine the type of muting Determine Type of Muting Se
472. ntact on the control head board Four light pipes 9 and 9 are fitted in the appropriate recesses 1n the keypad and direct light from LEDs on the control head board to the front panel The LCD 2 sits inside a rectangular recess of the front panel assembly and is held in place by the space frame 9 Electrical contact between the LCD and the control head board is ensured by two elastomeric strips held in place by the space frame 1 The speaker clamp 7 and a new space frame 6 were introduced in April 2007 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 31 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Speaker Concealed Microphone Optional Space Frame Control Head Board Control Head Loom 32 Description The speaker sits inside a round recess of the front panel assembly where a cloth membrane is fixed to the speaker grille The space frame 9 and the speaker clamp hold the speaker in position The speaker cable plugs into the speaker connector on the rear side of the control head board Note Ln some configurations the speaker may be disconnected A concealed microphone consisting of the microphone capsule and a rubber seal can be fitted in a round recess inside the front panel assembly The microphone leads are soldered to two pads on the top side of the control head board Before the microphone is fitted a small hole is drilled in the recess to provide an acoustic path to the microphone The hole is cov
473. nter the CCTM command 331 7 to turn off final bias 1 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 5 Note the RF output power measured at the test set This should be as shown in Table 11 5 6 If the RF power is correct go to Step 7 to repeat the check with the second PA If it is not enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio 1n receive mode and carry out Task 12 and then Task 13 ya For the second PA Q309 enter the CCTM command 332 to check the DAC value of final bias 2 CDC TX FIN BIAS 2 Record the value y returned 8 Note the current reading on the DC power supply 9 Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to turn off final bias 2 10 With the radio still in transmit mode note the RF output power measured at the test set This should be as shown in Table 11 5 11 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 12 Ifthe RF power measured in Step 10 is correct go to RF Signal Path on page 315 If it is not carry out Task 12 and then Task 16 Table 11 5 RF output power of individual RF power amplifiers at different frequencies Frequency within band Frequency band Lowest frequency Centre frequency Highest frequency TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 289 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 11 3 Biasing of PA Driver and PAs Introduction The measurements of the transmitter RF output power in Transmitter RP Power may indicate a need to
474. ntinue Task 1 A system error indicates a fault in the calibration of either the FCL or the gt YSTEMENREOr frequency synthesizer To determine which 1s faulty calibrate the VCXO and the transmit VCO as described below Always calibrate the former first because the latter depends on the former 1 Place the radio in CCTM 2 Enter the CCTM command 301 0 10 to calibrate the VCXO The response will be one of the following three messages m passed sanity check Cald values put into effect m failed sanity check Cal d values not in effect m Cal failed lock error The first two messages will be preceded by four calibration values J In the case of the first message passed go to Step 4 In the case of the second and third messages failed the FCL is suspect go to Power Supply for FCL on page 234 4 Enter the CCTM command 302 0 10 to calibrate the transmit VCO The response will be one of the three messages listed 1n Step 2 The first two messages will be preceded by eight calibration values Reset the radio and re enter CCTM 5 If the calibration succeeded but the system error persists replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 In the case of the second message failed sanity check go to Step 6 In the case of the third message calibration failed go to Step 8 UHF radios or Power Supplies on page 189 VHF radios TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Faul
475. o maintain a constant output voltage TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 75 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Synthesizer Circuitry Reference Frequency VCO Frequency and Output Power Dual VCOs Phase locked Loop Active Loop Filter The essential function of the PLL frequency synthesizer 1s to multiply a 25 kHz reference frequency 30kHz for A4 band 72kHz for K5 Rx to give any desired frequency that is an integer multiple of 25 kHz 30kHz for A4 band 72kHz for K5 Rx There are some constraints imposed by the capabilities of the synthesizer hardware especially the tuning range of the VCOs The approximately 25kHz 30kHz for A4 72kHz for K5 Rx reference is obtained by dividing the approximately 13 MHz 2 612kHz for A4 output of the FCL Any error in the FCL output frequency will be multiplied by the synthesizer Therefore if the synthesizer 1s locked but not the FCL then the synthesizer output frequency will be wrong The FCL frequency division 1s performed by a digital counter inside the PLL IC The divider setting 1s constant The output frequency from the synthesizer is generated by a VCO The VCO frequency 15 tuned across the frequency range of the radio by means of a DC control voltage typically between 2V and 12V The VCO output power is amplified by a buffer amplifier The power 1s low and varies from band to band The buffer output power depends on which mode receive or transmit i
476. o adjacent corners of the grommet into the RJ45 socket cavity 2 Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position 3 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity Figure 26 2 Correct remote cable grommet seating v se ax control head 550 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 2 Circuit Description Figure 26 3 shows a block diagram of the remote control head installation Both control heads contain a circuit board with audio amplifiers and RS 485 driver components Figure 26 3 Block diagram of remote control head installation REMOTE CONTROL HEAD BACK REMOTE DUAL RJ45 CONTROL HEAD CH ON OFF RM ON OFF CH ON OFF gt 13V8 13V8 lt V 3 3V 8V 8V REGULATOR REGULATOR REGULATOR 8 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE I Ea AUDIO AMP AUDIO AMP lt RM RX AUD CH RX AUD lt CH MIC AUD A gt RM MIC AUD RM MIC AUD K CH MIC AUD L L V RS485 DRIVER RM RS485 B RM RS485 B RS485 DRIVER CH TXD i CH GPIO1 pai RM RS485 A RM RS485 A DGND DGND AGND SIGNAL TYPES gt ANALOGUE gt DIGITAL ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL DATA SPI serial peripheral interface only one of two parallel connectors shown TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 551 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 3 Servicing the Remote Control Head Instal
477. o can be tapped out from the DSP for use with an external modem The modem may be connected to the auxiliary connector or to the external options connector when an internal options board is fitted The receiver has an AGC circuit to enable it to cover a large signal range Most of the circuit functions are implemented in the FPGA The FPGA passes the AGC signal to the CODEC IC204 for output from pin 14 IDACOUT and then via IC201 as the signal CDC RX AGC to pin 23 of the quadrature mixer IC400 As the antenna signal increases the AGC voltage decreases The channel filtering is split between the first and third IF stages The channel filtering circuit in the first IF stage comprises a pair of two pole crystal filters The first filter has a 3dB bandwidth of 12kHz and the second a 3dB bandwidth of 15 kHz Most of the channel filtering however is implemented in the FPGA When the radio 1s programmed the different filters are selected as assigned by the channel programming The selectable filters plus the fixed crystal filters result in the following total IF 3dB bandwidths in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Total IF 3 dB bandwidths Channel spacing All bands except K5 K5 band The FPGA runs from the DIG SYS CLK signal which has a frequency of 12 288 MHz The receiver requires the TCXO calibration to be completed to ensure that the channel filtering is centred thereby minimizing distortion TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 7
478. o connector and pin 10 radio furthest from connector of the external interface connector to an input on the interface to the external alert device Connect the pins together to drive the same external alert device Connect the pins separately to drive separate external alert devices Important The high current sink capability of the radio s auxiliary lines cannot be accessed with this cable That means you cannot connect directly to an external alert device an interface to the external alert such as a controller box must be used Important The internal pullups normally available from the auxiliary lines are not available via this cable If the external alert requires a logic type signal on the output lines the lines must be pulled up to a suitable voltage level by an external resistor 31 4 2 Radio Programming Program both radios as shown in Table 31 6 Table 31 6 External alert settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab po en neie acon mme AUX_GPIO6 Output EXT_ALRT External Alert 1 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 585 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 31 5 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for all the connectors on the cable and shows the interfaces between the cable and the radios Table 31 7 Auxiliary connectors pins and signals EE EE pes 7 AU ME audio tp pe SR Jeans AUX GPIO6 external aler
479. o performs demodulation which 1s multiplexed along with AGC and amplitude data and fed via a single synchronous serial port to the DSP The stream is demultiplexed and the demodulation data used as an input for further audio processing The noise squelch process resides in the DSP The noise content above and adjacent to the voice band is measured and compared with a preset threshold When a wanted signal is present out of band noise content 1s reduced and if below the preset threshold is indicated as a valid wanted signal RSSI Receive signal strength 1s measured by a process resident in the DSP This process obtains its input from the demodulator RF signal magnitude value and from the AGC present gain value With these two inputs and a calibration factor the RF signal strength at the antenna can be accurately calculated Calibration The following items within the receiver path are factory calibrated m front end tuning m AGC m noise squelch m RSSI Information on the calibration of these items 1s given in the on line help facility of the calibration application TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 55 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 5 3 Audio Processing and Signalling Audio Processing Data and Signalling Decoders Side Tones CODEC Output to Speakers Volume Control Configurations 56 Description Raw demodulated data from the receiver is processed within the DSP The sample rate at this point i
480. o the telemetry connector The POWER ON OFF LED is supplied by the 13V8 voltage Figure 3 17 Block diagram of the control head board of the RJ45 control head PRG ON OFF CH ON OFF oi 13V8 13V8 PRG TXD CH TXD Programming Control Head PRG RX AUD CH RX AUD Connector Connector PRG MIC AUD CH MIC AUD PRG PTT CH PTT AGND AGND v LC Signal types gt analog Power On Off gt digital LED Lu asynchronous serial data Control Head Board of RJ45 Control Head 1 The signal supplying the LED can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 102 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Part B Servicing the Radio 4 General Information ua doo ox doo ER EE eer RC Cue ut de ES 107 4 1 Repair Levels Accreditation and Website Access 107 42 Tools Eguiprientand MM isa ew ard Rio E d wp V Sd e 3 se 110 4 5 eI PISCHIDDA A 12a 9 3 4x 2 43 44 CE IC ACE EE 112 44 Setting up the Test Equipment rers doas rrari Od ri resaniga 115 5 Febuar Board tut ZEN X ANE terre RA d ed 117 46 Shielding Cans and COMDOCEO a aa du aab od deed dede d oed ds 119 47 SMI Reeg FOCUS a AEN EE E IA AK Ed TRES R 121 4 8 Computer Controlled Test Mode CCTM 123 49 Dehnine Frequency Bands 4 04 62560844 oo to e ehm s 131 4 10 Visus and Audible
481. oards 497 19 1 Changing the Options Extender Links a a aca avc re de eee Rc e 497 19 2 Iusulhusdhet p ous Extender DOR ioa a a e dete ded p EA 499 19 5 VOR Ce en ee oe hh de Veo REPRE a RO ir C he id 501 DP PORDON Ee ee AE Petre keea 503 20 TMAA02 02 DTMF Micropbhone leere 507 ds sn de mere ei ion eee Eege 507 R SR Reo de oie dedi de ed 508 E Badio TEENUI Luo pod doe y dore qoe dba de RO Rob RHE OEE 508 2 Vee GAEREN Sus du vx oe ee JACO E o EN dC E ege 509 S5 AIDUCOUE DESOE IDA dae ag ded dt dei E EEN 510 21 TMAA02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones 511 Zl e EE 211 AL Radio Pre Lus iud iode dw x qd a do x CE ACE E edd 012 Zi DOCE oe Ste Je eof E RR p ORE E ESS 313 El PO ISDN 1339 44 3 3 0 8 4 8 RO dedo d Ecol dedos dO doof de ofa 514 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 465 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 466 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 TMAA02 07 Concealed Microphone 519 ABC Uno PTT 519 do WOOO Prose es rea p RERO I E REXCORAR REA RRRIEA PA 520 TMAA02 08 Keypad Microphone 521 Bk ee ed Ge eo oo 521 5 Sali POOSPADIIIDEE on add 3 dhe eed ee deeds eee d Edd SES Bie rem AE ee HERE NE Ae E 524 TMAA03 02 Security Bracket 525 24 1 Installing the Security Bracket and Rache isses ro 526 2 amp 2 Jee TUO a aca 3 EE HA She do d OR RC ts um 526 24 5 Removing a Radio from the Security
482. octave Receiver Unprocessed 1 3dB 300Hz to 3kHz relative to 1 kHz 60 deviation Test Signal 46dBm RF OdBm line output audio tap T4 60 deviation at 1 kHz Signal to Noise Ratio Narrow Bandwidth gt 40dB Wide Bandwidth gt 43 dB Mute Ratio gt 60dB Distortion Narrow Bandwidth lt 4 Wide Bandwidth lt 4 30kHz bandwidth distortion meter TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 479 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 7 2 Radio With Line Interface Board Receiver Line Input Transmitter Frequency Response Bandwidth 300Hz to 3kHz Response 1 3dB relative to 6dB octave relative to 1kHz 2096 deviation below limiting Test Signal OdBm line input audio tap T1 60 deviation at 1 KHz Signal to Noise Ratio Narrow Bandwidth gt 40dB Wide Bandwidth gt 43 dB demodulated filtered 300Hz to 3kHz and de emphasised 750us rms Mute Ratio gt 60dB Distortion lt 3 demodulated filtered 15kHz low pass 480 TMAAO41 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 8 Circuit Description 17 8 1 Audio Interface When the line interface board is used for repeater applications the audio passed between the two radios must be of such a level that the message 1s able to be repeated intelligibly The audio interface 1s therefore capable of handling a wide range of input and output levels 20 to 6dBm The audio interface i
483. ode and go to Task 12 in Biasing of PA Driver and PAs on page 360 5 Check the logic signal at the D TX INH test point see Figure 12 4 The signal should be D TX INH test point about OV inactive 6 If the signal is inactive as required go to Step 8 If it is active about 3 2V the temperature sensor 1s suspect go to Step 7 7 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode and go to Task 8 8 The lock status is possibly no longer normal Enter the CCTM command 2 and check the lock status 9 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 10 The normal lock status is 110 If it is not proceed to the relevant section If 1t 1s go to Step 11 11 Check for short circuits on the DIG TX INH line from the D TX INH test point 354 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 Repair any fault confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or no fault could be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 8 If the transmitter 1s being inhibited and the logic signal at the D TX INH test SERIES point 1s active a fault 1n the temperature sensor might be the cause 1 Enter the CCTM command 47 to check the temperature reading 2 Of the two numbers returned the first is the temperature in degrees celsius and should be about 25 C If it is go
484. ol Head Connectors on page 44 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 2 6 Components of the control head 1 2 or 3 digit display control head loom with female female adapter 2 control head options board optional 3 3 x 8 PT screw x3 4 control head board 5 elastomeric strip x2 6 space frame 7 speaker clamp speaker 9 short light pipe long light pipe D keypad 3 LCD 43 concealed microphone optional front panel assembly 5 knob for volume control potentiometer TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 33 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 1 4 RJ45 Control Head Front Panel Control Head Loom Control Head Board PCB Bracket 34 Description The RJ45 control head consists of the following parts m front panel m control head loom with female female adaptor m control head board m PCB bracket The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2 7 on page 35 The front panel is an injection moulded plastic part with two apertures for the fitted programming connector and a second optional RJ45 connector When not in use the apertures are sealed with two R45 bung 5 to ensure that the control head is sealed to IP54 standards There is also a hole for the POWER ON OFF LED which illuminates through the label A label with the model number is attached to the front panel with self
485. ol head Figure 5 1 Disconnecting the control head from the radio body control head lever point control head seal indication of lever point damage the control head seal C Important When inserting the flat bladed screwdriver take care not to 3 At either of the lever points insert a 3 16 inch 5mm flat bladed screwdriver between the control head and the control head seal 4 Use the screwdriver to lift the edge of the control head up and off the clip then repeat in the other position The control head can now be removed 5 Disconnect the control head loom 6 Inspect the control head seal for damage and replace if necessary Mounting the 1 Plug the control head loom onto the control head connector Control Head 2 Insert the bottom edge of the control head onto the two clips in the front of the radio body then snap into place 136 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 2 Disassembling the Radio Body Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts For reassembly instructions refer to Reassembling the Radio Body on page 143 Removing the Cover 1 At the upper edge of the lower screw bosses on both sides of the radio body insert a 1 8 inch 3mm flat bladed screwdriver 2 Push the screwdriver under the cover towards the upper screw boss to release the cover from the upper screw boss 3 Remove the cover
486. om radio 4 a ep CT s Rb cHe on OF Rado conwolhead onon TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO03 34 Extender Box 567 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 28 2 PCB Information 28 2 1 Ref IPN C1 018 13270 00 C2 018 13270 00 G3 015 06470 01 C4 018 13270 00 C5 015 06470 01 C6 018 13270 00 C7 018 16100 00 C8 018 13270 00 Co 018 16100 00 C10 018 14100 00 C11 014 07470 05 C12 018 16100 00 C13 018 14220 00 C14 018 16100 00 C15 018 13270 00 C16 018 13270 00 C17 015 27100 08 C18 018 14220 00 C19 018 16100 00 C20 018 13270 00 C21 018 16100 00 C22 018 16100 00 C23 018 13270 00 C24 018 14220 00 C25 018 16100 00 C26 018 16100 00 C27 018 13270 00 C28 015 27100 08 C29 018 14220 00 C30 018 16100 00 C31 018 13270 00 C32 018 13270 00 C33 018 16100 00 C34 015 27100 08 C35 015 27100 08 C36 015 27100 08 C37 015 27100 08 C38 015 27100 08 C39 015 27100 08 C40 015 27100 08 C41 015 27100 08 C42 018 13270 00 C43 018 13270 00 C44 018 13270 00 C45 018 13270 00 C46 018 16100 00 568 Description CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP cer 470n 50V 20 1206 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP cer 470n 50V 20 1206 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V 10 0603 X7R CAP tant 4u7 16V 1096 A CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 2n2 50V 1096 0603 X7R CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 270p 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 270p 50V NPO
487. om the control head board refer to Figure 5 10 3 If a concealed microphone 9 is fitted unsolder the microphone leads from the control head board The leads are soldered to pads on the board as shown in Figure 5 10 4 Note whether the speaker is connected or disconnected If it is connected disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker connector of the control head board refer to Figure 5 10 Note that the radio must be returned to the customer in its original configuration 3 Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to unscrew the three screws D securing the control head board The screws are labelled screw 1 to screw 3 these numbers are also inscribed on the PCB The control head board is now held down only by the clips labelled clip 1 to clip 3 in Figure 5 10 6 While pressing on the shaft of the volume control potentiometer push clip 2 clip 1 and then clip 3 away from the control head board The board will be freed from the space frame Remove the board Figure 5 10 Speaker orientation connectors and clips of the control head board 1 2 or 3 digit display connectors for speaker terminals connector for speaker clip 1 clip 2 optional circuit board legs of the pads for leads of concealed connector for speaker clamp microphone control head loom 150 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 7 While pulling upwards on the space frame at the corner where the micr
488. on techniques that enable it to rapidly settle close to the final value while the loop is open The loop is then closed and settling to the final value occurs with an associated reduction in noise The total settling time is typically less than 4ms The following items are calibrated in the frequency synthesizer m nominal frequency gm KVCO gm KVCXO m VCO deviation Calibration of the nominal frequency 1s achieved by adding a fixed offset to the FCL nominal frequency the TCXO frequency itself is not adjusted The items KVCO and KVCXO are the control sensitivities of the RF VCO Gin MHz V and VCXO in kHz V respectively The latter has temperature compensation TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 61 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 6 3 RF Transmitter RF Power Amplifier and Switching gt 25W Radio RF Power Amplifier and Switching 25W Radio Output of RF Power Amplifier Power Control 62 Description The RF power amplifier and exciter of the 40W 50 W radio is a five stage line up with approximately 40dB of power gain The output of the frequency synthesizer is first buffered to reduce kick during power ramping The buffer output goes to a discrete exciter that produces approximately 300 to 400mW output This is followed by an LDMOS driver producing up to 8 W output that is power controlled The final stage consists of two parallel LDMOS devices producing enough power to provide 40 to 50W at th
489. oncealed and dynamic microphone support board pins and signals fre sent ew OOOO O 1 CH LE SPI latch signal to latch microphone select data into the concealed and dynamic microphone board 6 4 2 2 data from the control head shift register D G 3 OE enables the output of the shift register of the audio S2 top view switch 4 CH SPI CLK SPI clock signal to clock microphone select data into concealed and dynamic microphone board 13V8 SW power for analogue parts 3V3 power for digital parts 7 initialise the concealed and dynamic microphone board shift register digital ground microphone audio from microphone interface processed microphone signal output to radio DE not connected processed microphone signal output to radio audio from the concealed microphone analogue ground Figure 21 1 Concealed and dynamic microphone support kit to radio interface GO 53 top view Ul auxiliary connector VO concealed amp microphone dynamic micrqphone amplifier support board MIC transmit optional ea AUK GPI concealed switc microphone microphone connector 2 CH_MIC_AUD microphone control head lauxiliary microphone select oncealed fist microphone select control pre amp select TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO02 06 Support Kit for Concealed and Dynamic Microphones 513 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 21 4 PCB Information 21 4 1 Ref C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 LD C7 C8 C
490. one Sets the radio in the receive mode 63 RSSI level 63 X Reads the averaged RSSI level where x is the averaged level in multiples of 0 1 dBm 376 Front end tuning 3 6 to read voltage X Sets or reads the tuning voltage for where x is the front end tuning the front end circuitry of the voltage in millivolts receiver Command 3 6 x to set voltage where x is the front end tuning voltage in millivolts any integer from O to 3000 378 Receiver output level X Reads the signal power at the where x is the signal power output of the channel filter the square of the amplitude 126 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 4 5 CCTM commands in the transmitter category part 1 Transmitter Transmitter category 33 Transmit D e None Sets the radio in the transmit mode 47 Temperature Reads the temperature in the vicinity of the PAs where x is the temperature in degrees celsius and y is the corresponding voltage in millivolts a value from 0 to 1200 mV Command 114 Transmitter power 114 to read value X Sets or reads the transmitter power where x is the current power setting compare command 326 setting an integer from O to 1023 114 x to set value where x is the required power setting an integer from O to 1023 304 Driver bias 304 to read value X Sets or reads the clamp current at where x is the DAC value of the the gate of
491. one connected check the voltage at the junction of C708 and C732 CH MIC AUD see Figure 13 8 junction of C708 and C732 approximately 3V d If the above voltage is correct go to Task 14 the bias network is suspect If it is not go to Task 13 the 2 3V supply 15 suspect 416 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 9 Circuitry in under the CDC BOT can CDC BOT LO2 BOT CAN CAN FOR DIGITAL BOARD Q NS co PO n2 Oo de gt SS n2 co 9020 gley TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 417 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 13 If the CH MIC AUD signal is not as expected the 2 3 V supply needs to be Check 2 3V Supply checked 1 If not already done remove the CDC BOT can 2 Check the voltage across C202 see Figure 13 9 voltage across C202 3V 3 If the above voltage is correct go to Task 14 If it is not go to Step 4 4 Check the soldering of R209 and check for shorts to ground at C202 see Figure 13 9 Repair any fault 5 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 162 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on pa
492. oned on a flat surface The desktop microphone plugs into the microphone socket on the radio control head The desktop microphone has an internal pre amplifier and an adjustable output control on the underside of the desktop microphone base Press the PTT key to transmit Speak clearly into the microphone and release the PTT key when you have finished talking To use the Monitor function press the MONITOR key and check whether the channel is clear When Monitor 1s active the MONITOR LED lights up Press the MONITOR key again to turn Monitor off The LED goes out If the channel is clear press the PTT key to transmit If the FUNCTION key is programmed press it to activate the programmed function 37 2 Installation Important The desktop microphone grommet must be installed when ever the desktop microphone is plugged into the microphone socket When installed the grommet has two functions m to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there is movement of the microphone cord and m to ensure that the control head 1s sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Plug the microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head 2 Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the erommet into the microphone socket cavity TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TMAA10 08 Desktop Microphone 609 3 Squeeze the grommet and pus
493. ons connector Table 18 1 RS 232 installation parts required n Figure 18 1 2 347 0001 1 00 4 40x3 16 screws 2 354 01043 00 screw lock fasteners 1 Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN 18 2 2 Installation Procedure 1 Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity For detailed disassembly instructions refer to Disassembly and Reassembly on page 135 The circled numbers in the following instructions refer to items in the diagram on page 491 2 Remove the top cover and lid D from the radio to access the options cavity 3 Remove the external options connector bung Q if it is fitted 4 On the inside of the radio lid place the foam seal over the external options connector cavity 4 5 Plug one end of the internal options connector loom into the internal options connector on the RS 232 board 6 With the top side of the RS 232 board facing the radio lid guide the external options connector 9 into the external options connector cavity 490 TMAAO1 02 RS 232 Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 be tightened correctly before screwing the RS 232 board onto the mounting posts 8 Important The external options connector screw lock fasteners must 7 Screw the external options connector to the radio lid using the two screw lock fasteners Tighten the fasteners to a torque of 0 9 N m 8lbf in 8 Screw the R S 232 board
494. op side of the LCD When fitting the speaker and the speaker clamp observe the orientation of the speaker terminals Make sure that the legs of the speaker clamp are positioned under the space frame as shown 1n Figure 5 10 on page 150 1 The speaker clamp 7 and a new space frame 6 were introduced in April 2007 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 4 3 RJ45 Control Head Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 12 1 Release the clip of the PCB bracket and remove the control head board CD 2 Disconnect the control head loom Q from the control head board D 3 Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to unscrew the four screws G and remove the PCB bracket Figure 5 12 Components of the RJ45 control head Torx T10 5 b in 0 6 N m 17 control head board 4 PCB bracket 2 control head loom with female female adapter 5 front panel 3 3x8 PT screw x4 6 RJA5 bung x2 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 153 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 5 4 4 Blank Control Head Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in F
495. ophone connector is situated release the clips labelled to in Figure 5 11 in the order Q and O and O and then 9 and To release each clip use a 3 16 inch 5mm flat bladed screwdriver to lever the clip out of its recess Pulling on the space frame helps release the clips Important When fitting the space frame make sure that the clips C labelled to fully snap into the front panel assembly If necessary use a flat bladed screwdriver to push down the clips until they snap into place Figure 5 11 Components of the control head 1 2 or 3 digit display control head loom with female female adapter us control head options board optional 5 Ib in 0 6 N m pu optional 3 3x 8 PT screw x3 4 control head board 5 elastomeric strip x2 6 space frame 7 speaker clamp speaker 9 short light pipe long light pipe OT keypad 3 LCD 43 concealed microphone optional front panel assembly 5 knob for volume control potentiometer TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 151 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 152 8 Remove the elastomeric strips speaker clamp Qi speaker LCD 2 keypad D lightpipes 9 and 9 and if fitted the concealed microphone 8 Important C Important When replacing the LCD carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the t
496. options connector that are used by the line interface board are IOP_GPIO1 to IOP_GPIO4 The behaviour of these lines is configured in the Programmable I O and PTT forms of the programming application Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information The following table explains the required input and output line interface connections Table 17 6 Line interface input and output connections GPIO1 PTT FROM OPT This signal causes the radio to transmit This normally requires External PTT1 to be set up in the Digital tab of the Programmable I O form and the External PTT 1 tab of the PTT form GPIO2 Busy Gate This active high signal allows connection to the Busy Gate output signal If this is not used the Action field is set to No Action and the Active field is set to Low GPIO3 Busy Gate Keying Line This active high signal allows connection to the Busy Gate output signal This signal also allows the single line keying functionality GPIO4 AUX This allows the line interface board to be disabled One of the four control head function keys Is selected to control this AUX line For the associated LED to reflect the status of the line interface board the Function Key Action field on the Key Settings form must be set to Action Digital Output Line 476 TMAAO41 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 5 Interface Specification The following
497. or rear view pads for leads of connectors for concealed microphone optional circuit board 40 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 3 1 RF Connector The RF connector is the primary RF interface to the antenna The RF connector is a BNC connector or a mini UHF connector with an impedance of 500 may damage the radio C Important The maximum RF input level is 27 dBm Higher levels Table 2 1 RF connector pins and signals Pinout Pin Signal Name Signal Type i rear view 2 3 2 Power Connector The power connector is the interface for the primary 13 8 V power source and the external speaker The primary power source can be the vehicle battery or a mains fed DC power supply There are different power connectors for the gt 25 W and 25W radios output lines must not be connected to ground Connecting Important The speaker load configuration is balanced the speaker a speaker output line to ground will cause audio power amplifier shutdown Table 2 2 Power connector radio pins and signals mes mm Serene oeoo sin 1 AGND Earth return for radio body power Ground gt 25W radio source 2 SPK External speaker output Balanced load Analog configuration rear view 3 SPK External speaker output Balanced load Analog 25W radio configuration 4 13V8 BAIT DC power input for radio body and control head L rear view TM8100 TM8200 Service M
498. or The outputs that can be made available by changing linking resistors are m the 5V supply line and m the HX BEED IN line In both cases these lines replace other lines that are available when the linking resistors are in the factory set configuration Note that there is no external connection available for the RX AUD line TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 05 and TMAA01 07 Options Extender Boards 497 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 19 1 Options extender board linking resistor locations power supply line CIUS 5 RT RR RBS B EAR TO R RX_BEEP_IN line 19 1 1 Power Supply Line The power supply output available on pin 2 of the external options connector is factory set to 13 8 V The output on this pin can be changed to 5V if R11 a OQ surface mount resistor is moved to position R10 Figure 19 1 at the top of the page shows the component locations Important The maximum current for the 5V supply line is 400mA 19 1 2 RX BEER IN Line If the RS BEEP IN line is required on the external options connector it must replace one of the following lines m IOP_RSSI m AUD TAD IN gm AUX MIC AUD m AUD TAD OUT The following table explains the resistor link changes required and Figure 19 1 at the top of the page shows the component locations Table 19 1 RX BEER IN resistor changes RX BEEP IN Line Replaces Add Resistor 498 TMAAO01 05 and TMAAO01 07 Options Extender Boards TM8100 TM8200
499. or the microphone grommet if any of these parts is missing or damaged replace it as described below In the case of the microphone grommet refer to the accessories section for the repair procedure Remove the volume control knob if it is damaged Push the replacement knob onto the shaft of the volume control potentiometer Ensure that the knob turns freely Remove any damaged seal or bung Obtain a replacement seal for the RF connector or a replacement bung from Spares kit 2 Order a replacement cover seal and screws from TEL the IPNs of the parts are listed in Spare Parts on page 455 In fitting a replacement bung ensure that it is not upside down and that it is properly seated To fit the seal for the RF connector first fit the upper part of the seal and then press down around the sides of the seal to the bottom Ensure that the seal 1s properly seated around its entire periphery Also check for damage to exterior parts that can be replaced only by partly disassembling the radio These parts are m cover assembly for radio body m keys lens and LCD of control head m front panel of control head In the case of the front panel inspect particularly the light pipes for the STATUS LEDs and the membrane behind the speaker grille If the radio 1s reported to have a functional fault continue with Task 3 Any additional mechanical damage will be repaired during the course of rectifying the functional fault If the radio has no funct
500. orrect then Shaping Filter for the shaping filter for the power control circuitry or the CODEC and audio Power Control BEN circuitry is suspect Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A C And when entering the CCTM command 331 x do not specify a value X higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs 1 Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN1 test point see Figure 12 8 The voltage should be FIN1 test point 18 2 mV initially 2 Enter the CCTM command 331 X where X was recorded in Task 12 Check that the voltage changes to FIN1 test point 1 1 to 2 7V after entry of CCTM 331 x 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the voltage measured above is correct go to Step 6 If it is not go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 6 Check IC301 and the surrounding shaping filter circuitry see Figure 12 8 If a fault 1s found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 366 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 16 If the biasing of the first PA is correct check that of the second PA Q309 Check Biasing of Second PA Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A C And when
501. ove the test lead and test capacitor the resolder the coupling capacitors in position and go to Task 31 PIN switch and LPF require checking Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 357 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 10 Repair Output Matching Circuitry 358 If the checks in Task 9 show that the power and current are still skewed there 1s a fault 1n the output matching circuitry IM If not already done remove the PAF TOP can 2 Check for faulty shorted or misplaced components in the circuit between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310 see Figure 12 6 Repair any fault 3 Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz 4 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 2 Note the RF output power measured by the test set and note the current reading on the DC power supply RF output power 35W current 8A VHF 9A UHF 6 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 7 Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the frequency in hertz o Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 9 Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the frequency in hertz 10 Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 11 Remove the test lead and test capacitor and resolder the coupli
502. ower supply is given in this section in Task 34 below The remaining three stages are covered in VCXO and TCXO Outputs to VCXO and CODEC Circuitry respectively The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults in the FCL are summarized in Figure 9 16 234 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 16 Test and measurement points the FCL circuitry WLISIG T 49019 OO IVNV ken dd lt S3dAL IVNSIS quvoga VLIOIQ SSES AALIN9OAI9 193 mm dH3AIH3O3H 1241 SIG NAS OSO XH NAS O1SO Ajuo pueg py S 2912 popeus ES E HalsndWv 43 09 AU UO 3jOV4dHa lNI LNdLNO OXO L OXO L LOSOI JO t Nid LOGOI 40 L Nid LeGH IV cogu IV INdNI O1 1Nd LNO OXOA 9ES9 IV LAdLNO OXOA 30N3u3Jld Tid DG HOLVINGOW LAON OX9A 932 8 Alddns l A is HaldridiAv JOVLIOA NV OAE 434408 d007 OXOA 235 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 34 If the FCL is suspect first check that the 3 V power supply is not the cause Power Supply of the fault 1 If not already done remove the board from the chassis and place the radio in CCTM 2 Measure the supply 3V0 AN at the via shown in Figure 9 17 The via is adjacent to the CDC TOP can via adjacent to CDC TOP can 3 0 0 3V DC 3 If the volta
503. owing table shows the settings required for CH_GPIO1 in the Programmable I O form of the programming application When CH GPIO 1 is set to Send Mic Audio To Spkr then DTMF tones are fed into the radios speaker at a reduced volume whenever a key on the DTMF microphone is pressed This gives the radio user confidence that the tones are being transmitted Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information Table 20 1 DTMF microphone settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab CH GPIO1 Input None Send Mic Audio High None None None To Spkr 508 TMAAO2 02 DTMF Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 20 4 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the DTMF microphone on the radio s microphone connector and shows the interface between the DTMF microphone and the radio Table 20 2 DTMF microphone connector pins and signals i _ not connected ae 13V8_SW red power supply switched er 3 Ilan notcomected wa white audio from the microphone Ga Joue analogue ground 7 CT e meron Joe mmot Figure 20 2 DTMF microphone to radio interface hookswitch control C codd microphone connector microphone cord ed 13V8 SW p connector SE BE I transmit signal path microphone amplifier TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAAO02 02 DTMF Microphone 509 Tait Electro
504. p jenas snouoJupu se lt jepp 1 pop 4t bo eue kan ju 4 sed jeubis 77 ions ipt ircuit Descri C TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 6 Block diagram of the frequency control loop circuitry A4 band 3V0 AN Modulator Buffer Amplifier 1 cpcvcxo mop e Figure 3 7 Block diagram of the VCO K5 band SYN TX LO Coupler SYN RX LO1 5 V Switch VCO K5 band TR Switch Re tuning of VCO When the radio changes channels or switches between receive and transmit Frequency the VCO frequency must be changed The rate at which the VCO 1s re tuned is dependent on many factors of which the loop filter is the main factor The loop filter 1s an integrator built around an operational amplifier The resistors and capacitors of the filter affect both the switching time and the stability of the synthesizer the values of these components have been carefully selected to give optimum control characteristics 78 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Speed up Techniques To reduce the change over time between transmit and receive part time speed up techniques have been implemented Speed up involves changing some resistor values while simultaneously changing the PLL IC settings This process 1s implemented in hardware under software control in conjunction with u
505. peat Step 4 and Step 5 of Task 28 to measure the minimum VCO frequency 6 If the frequencies are now correct resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 14 and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are still not correct go to Step 7 o Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 14 Replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 230 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 31 If no frequency is detected in the check of the VCO first check that the Check Transmit Receive Switch li 10 11 12 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual transmit receive switch is functioning correctly Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 14 Remove the VCO BOT can Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to switch on the supply to the RX port Measure the voltage at pin 2 of D5004 see Figure 9 15 Some RF noise might be observed The voltage should be pin 2 of D5004 5 0 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 Enter the CCTM command 335 7 to switch off the supply Again measure the voltage at pin 2 of D5004 pin 2 of D5004 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 If the voltages measured 1n Step 4 and Step 6 are correct go to Step 8 If they are not the switching network 1s suspect go to Task 32 Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to switch on the supply to the TX port Measure the voltage at pin 1 of D5004 see Figure 9 15 Some RF noise might be observed T
506. ply 1V8 from the digital board and the 13 8 V DC supply 13V8 BATT from the power connector Faults in these supplies are dealt with elsewhere Task 1 First check the 9V DC supply 9V0 which is required by IC201 9V Power Supply 1 Remove the board from the chassis 2 Remove the CDC BOT can 3 Measure the voltage 9V0 at pin 4 of IC201 see Figure 13 1 4 If the voltage 1s correct go to Task 2 If it is not go to Step 5 5 The fault will be at IC201 see Figure 13 1 since any fault with the 9V regulator in the PSU module will already have been rectified Therefore check the soldering of IC201 Repair any fault 6 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 2 If the 9 V supply is correct check the 3V DC supply 8V0 AN next 3V Power Supply 1 Measure the voltage 3V0 AN at the TP601 test point see Figure 13 1 2 If the voltage 1s correct go to Task 3 If it 1s not go to Step 3 E The 3V regulator IC603 is suspect see Figure 13 1 Check the regulator as described in Task 3 of Power Supply Fault Finding on page 174 400 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 13 1 Power supply circuitry for the CODEC and audio circuitry under the CDC Bor can CDC BOT LO2 BOT CAN
507. ply 0 01 cm of thermal paste on the audio PA heat sink of the chassis refer to Figure 5 3 on page 139 S Place the main board assembly in position in the chassis 4 Loosely screw 1n the two screws 9 through the heat transfer block by hand TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Disassembly and Reassembly 145 While pressing down firmly on the diagonal edge of the PAD TOP can refer to Figure 5 7 use a Torx T20 torque driver to tighten the two screws 8 to 221Ib in 2 5 N m This will ensure that the main board is seated correctly on the bosses for the five internal screws Figure 5 7 PAD TOP can on the top side of the main board PAD TOP can 6 Clean off any excess thermal paste on the heat transfer block 7 Screw in the five screws through the main board by hand as far as possible Use a Torx T10 torque driver to tighten the screws to 171bfin 1 9 N m 8 Fit the RF connector seal Ensure that the seal is properly seated around its entire periphery 9 If an auxiliary connector bung was fitted fit the bung Closing the The circled number in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 3 on Radio Body page 139 1 If an internal options board is fitted inside the lid connect the loom to the internal options connector 2 Inspect the main seal in the lid for damage and replace 1f necessary 3 Place the lid assembly on the chassis 4 Use a Torx T20 torque driver
508. power on off key circuitry pig 114 2 R113 C104 top side bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 437 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 9 Function Scroll or Selection Keys Faulty The eight keys of the main keypad function scroll and selection keys are connected to the FPGA by an array of three columns and three rows During idle operation the KEY Row signals are driven low by the FPGA and the KEY COL signals pulled high by an external resistor are monitored for activity by the FPGA A key press will generate a high to low transition on the associated column KEY coL signal This in turn will initiate a sequence of high output levels on the KEY Row signals to identify which key was pressed Figure 14 11 Circuit diagram of the function scroll and selection keys A D604 AD620 D602 KEY COL1 KEY COL3 KEY ROW1 MG Scroll Up Key Scroll Down Key Left Selection Key KEY ROW2 KEY ROW3 The signal at the column side of the switch should be 3 3 V The row side of the switch should be GND A successful press will cause transition on associated KEY_COL signal to low release events Note CCTM command 1009 can be used to monitor keypad press and One Key Faulty If an individual key is faulty de Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens cleaning cloth to clean the pad of the PCB switch contacts 2 Visually inspect both PCB switch contacts
509. product support CD supplied with the service kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 115 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 4 2 TMAA23 02 cable Test setup Test PC serial port DB9 TPA SV 006 T950 001 cable USB 1 1 to serial DB9 adapter optional computer connector TOPA sV 024 R12 Test Unit Portables and Mobiles transmit audio van JA connector BNC ce Rx Audio Mod Audio Audio Tap In SINAD Portable fi W i E i sen receive audio QL Q Jo KC Y ey SINAD connector Off Hook Tx PTT Load e Anel SI B N C radio connector DB15 TMAA21 01 cable speaker microphone connector connector RJ45 power connector oL RF connector mini UHF or BNC auxiliary connector DB15 gt 25W radios TMAA20 03 cable DE Bowersuppyy V e O Q 9 QO Q N banana plugs 116 General Information RF comms set RF in out N type AUDIO audio OUT monitor BNC out BNC Oscilloscope AC input BNC TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 5 Replacing Board Components To obtain a replacement board component complete the following steps in the order shown 1 Check the issue number 2 Identif
510. puts to SMPS m Task 2 check 3 3V supply m Task 3 check linear regulators for 2 5 V 3V 6V and 9V supplies m Task 4 check power up configuration m ask 5 check power up options m Task 6 check provision of external power Types of Fault Which of the above tasks are applicable depends on the nature of the fault m Radio fails to power up The radio fails to power up immediately when power 1s applied or it fails to power up when power 1s applied and the ON OFF key is pressed Carry out Task 1 to Task 3 m Power up option has failed The radio powers up when the ON OFF key is pressed but not for a power up option for which it is configured Carry out Task 4 and Task 5 m External power at connector has failed The external power required at a particular connector is no longer present Carry out Task 6 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Power Supply Fault Finding 169 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 1 The test equipment and radio should be set up as described in Setting up Check Inputs to SMPS the Test Equipment on page 115 If not already done remove the board Connect the control head to the assembly Then check the SMPS as follows 1 Use a multimeter to check the supply voltage at pin 7 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 in the SMPS circuitry the voltage should be pin 7 of IC602 13 8 V DC If it is go to Step 5 If it is not go to Step 2 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply at the power connector PL100 C
511. r see Figure 12 11 and go to Step 12 11 Check R340 between pins 6 and 7 of IC303 in the buffer amplifier see Figure 12 12 and then go to Step 12 12 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks Replace IC303 if none of the other components is faulty see Figure 12 8 13 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 23 In this task any faults in the path between the power control circuit and the SE Control PA driver will be located as well as any fault with the PA driver or PA Driver M Check for short circuits at the gate of the PA driver Q306 Check R333 R336 see Figure 12 8 C310 R324 and R327 see Figure 12 10 between the power control circuit and Q306 2 Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 1 If none of the above mentioned components is faulty replace Q306 see Figure 12 10 3 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 376 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 12 Components of concern on the bottom side of the board VHF shown COPPER PLATE VCO BOT CAN vom E e mE T d SH 30 mis m ISS TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 377 Tait Electronics Limit
512. r x y where x is the error number and y represents the associated data None General Information Table 4 4 CCTM commands in the frequency synthesizer and receiver categories Frequency synthesizer category 72 Lock status 72 Xyz Reads the lock status of the RF PLL where x is the RF PLL y the FCL FCL and LO2 respectively and z the LO2 lock status O not in lock 1 in lock 101 Radio frequencies 101xy0 None Sets the transmit and receive where x is the transmit and y the frequencies to specified values receive frequency in hertz any integer from 50 000 000 to 1000 000 000 301 Calibrate VCXO 301 0 10 Four KVCXO control sensitivity Calibrates the VCXO of the FCL values followed by message with results of calibration attempt 302 Calibrate VCO s 302 0 10 Eight KVCO control sensitivity Calibrates the VCO s of the values followed by message with frequency synthesizer results of calibration attempt 334 Synthesizer power 334 x None Switches the frequency synthesizer where x is the required state on or off via the DIG SYN EN line O off 120n 335 Synthesizer switch 335 x None Switches the transmit receive where x is the required state switch of the frequency synthesizer O off 120n on or off via the DIG SYN TR SW line 389 Synthesizer mode 389 x None Sets the mode of the frequency where x is the required mode synthesizer to fast or slow O slow 1 fast Receiver category 32 Receive mode 32 N
513. r failed go to Task 7 Task 5 If the lock status is normal check the biasing of the IF amplifier Check Biasing oT IE Ampiner m Remove the IF TOP can 2 Check all components around Q404 of the IF amplifier see Figure 10 1 J Check the 3V supply voltage at L419 use the measurement point shown in Figure 10 1 4 Also check the amplifier bias conditions First measure V between the collector of Q404 and ground see Figure 10 1 5 Secondly check I To do so unsolder and raise one terminal of L419 tombstone position see Figure 10 1 connect a multimeter between this terminal and the pad for the terminal and measure the current 6 If the checks in Step 2 to Step 5 reveal no fault go to Task 6 If there is a fault repair it and go to Step 7 25 Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application 8 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual page 163 If the repair failed go to Task 7 Receiver Fault Finding 253 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 6 Check Matching Circuitry L D 3 4 5 6 P 254 Receiver Fault Finding Having excluded the IF amplifier check the matching circuitry for the crystal filters Check all remaining components between T401 and IC400 these form the matching circuitry for the crystal filters XF400 and XF401 see Figure 10 1 If the above check reveals no fault go to Step 3 If there 1s a fault
514. r measured by the test set and note the current reading on the DC power supply RF output power gt 70W VHF gt 60W UHF gt 52W 700 MHz gt 58W 800 MHz current 15A VHF 12A UHF 12A 800 MHz 6 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 7 Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the frequency in Hertz sl Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 9 Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the frequency in Hertz 10 Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 11 Remove the test lead and test capacitor and resolder the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 in position see Figure 11 6 12 Ifthe power and current are now correct at all three frequencies the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are not go to Task 26 in RF Signal Path on page 316 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 11 If the RF output power and the supply current are uniformly low at all Power and Current Ate ou frequencies one of the PAs is suspect or the input to the PAs 1s reduced Check each PA in turn 1 For the first PA Q310 enter the CCTM command 331 to check the DAC value of final bias 1 CDC TX FIN BIAS 1 Record the value X returned 2 Note the current reading on the DC power supply 3 E
515. r the K5 band in position see Figure 11 26 13 Ifthe power in both the above cases 1s now correct the fault has been rectified go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 331 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 33 In checking the final RF signal path if no fault is found in the directional Check PIN Switch coupler then check the PIN switch next The PIN switch may also require investigation following certain checks in Transmitter RF Power 1 Remove the LPF TOP can 2 Remove the three blocking capacitors C361 C362 and C363 for VHF and UHF or C363 for the K5 band see Figure 11 27 3 Solder one terminal of a 56pF VHF 18pF UHF or 47pF K5 test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 11 27 Mount the capacitor vertically Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111 DLI C17 ATC100B or equivalent 4 Solder a 50 test lead to the PCB Solder the outer sheath to the test pad shown in Figure 11 27 and solder the central wire to the other terminal of the test capacitor 5 Connect the test lead to the test set 6 Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum 7 Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table
516. r the diagnosis of faults in the frequency synthesizer Command Description Read lock status of RF PLL FCL and LO2 displays xyz O not in lock 1 in lock Set transmit frequency x in hertz and receive frequency y in hertz to specified values Calibrate VCO s of RF PLL Set synthesizer on x21 or off x20 via DIG SYN EN line Set transmit receive switch on x21 or off x20 via DIG SYN TR SW line Set synthesizer mode to slow x20 or fast x21 3931x Write data x to FPGA TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 185 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 1 Initial Checks Types of checks There are two different types of initial checks which are covered in the following tasks m Task 1 calibration checks B Task 2 lock status Which if any of these tasks needs to be carried out depends on the symptoms of the fault Symptoms of Fault The symptoms of the fault may be divided into three categories m radio fails to power up and system error 1s displayed m lock error 1s displayed m radio is in lock but exhibits transmit or receive fault The nature of the display depends on the type of control head as shown in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Format of error displays by different control heads Control head Type of error Graphical display control head Out of lock In the first two cases the checks of Task 1 and Task 2 respectively are required In the last case there are several symptoms these a
517. ramming Programmable 1 0 At a minimum settings in Table 31 1 Table 31 2 and Table 31 3 must be and Audio Settings programmed for both radios Table 31 1 Cross band settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab I E EM AUX GPI1 XBAND TX Crossband Tx Input AUX_GPIO5 Conventional Output BUSY Busy Status es Signalling Audio Mute Status Signalling Audio Mute Status Mute Status Table 31 2 Cross band settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Audio tab Pin Tal Tap In Type Tap In Unmute Tap Out Type Tap Out Unmute Rx None A Bypass In On PTT R7 D Split Busy Detect Busy Detect Subaud EPTT1 A Bypass In On PTT C Bypass O On PTT 1 Select Busy Status and Busy Detect to re transmit any signal 2 Select Signalling Audio Mute Status and Busy Detect Subaud to transmit valid signalling only This is recommended if the repeater is to operate on a scan group where member channels require valid subaudible signalling Otherwise the radio may re transmit short bursts of activity when a channel is busy but not captured due to invalid activity Table 31 3 Cross band settings in the PTT form External PTT 1 tab LONE MN Advanced EPTT1 PTT Transmission Type Receive and The cross band repeater receives signals based on the radios squelch carrier Transmit Settings mute and re transmits signals based on external PTT 1 If programmed to only re transmit valid signals the radio s signalling m
518. ration of the vehicle 35 3 Radio Programming for the TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit Remote PTT Settings in the PTT Form Remote PTT Settings in the Programmable 1 0 Form The following table shows the settings required in the PTT form of the programming application Some of these settings are default settings and may not need to be changed Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information Note The handsfree remote PTT cannot transmit when the rugged microphone is on the microphone clip microphone hookswitch is closed 1f m hookswitch operation 1s programmed for the rugged microphone and m the Inhibit PTT Transmission When Mic On Hook field is selected in the PTT tab of the PTT form Table 35 1 Remote PTT settings in the PTT form External PTT 1 tab PTT Transmission Type Voice s LLL MEN UN The following table shows the settings required in the Programmable I O form of the programming application Some of these settings are default settings and may not need to be changed Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information Note The Programmable I O form setting for AUX_GPIO4 must have the default programming settings and the AUX_GPIO4 pullup resistor on the radio main PCB must be set for the factory default of 3 3V R769 fitted Table 35 2 Remote PTT settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 04 Remote PTT Kit and TMA
519. rd while the transmitter is operating TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 343 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 1 Power Supplies Introduction First check that a power supply 1s not the cause of the fault There are two power supplies and a switch circuit for the transmitter m Task 1 13 8V DC supply from power connector 13V8 BATT m ask 2 switch circuit for 13 8 V DC supply m Task 3 9V DC supply from 9V regulator in PSU module 9V0 TX The measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the power supplies are summarized in Figure 12 1 Figure 12 1 Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults involving the power supplies for the transmitter 9VO TX TRANSMITTER e 13 8 VDC 13 8 V DC SUPPLY 9VO TX POWER SUPPLY TO PAS TO PA DRIVER TEST POINT SUPPLY 13V8 BATT SIGNAL TYPES RF gt ANALOG OTHER y y y TRANS MITTER CIRCUITRY SWITCH INTERFACE CIRCUITRY O GND TEST POINT 344 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 1 First check the power supply from the power connector 13 8V Power Supply d 10 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Obtain a needle probe to use for measurements of the power supply at the PA driver and PAs If none 1s available remove the PAF TOP and PAD TOP cans Set the DC power supply to 13 8 V with a current limit of 9A Program the radio with th
520. re listed below Frequency Bands Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of the radio the frequency band 1s given in brackets The frequency band may be referred to as either VHF very high frequency or UHF ultra high frequency or identified by the frequency sub band such as BU or H7 The product code label on the radio body will identify the frequency band as described in Product Codes on page 17 A definition of frequency bands is given in Defining Frequency Bands on page 131 186 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Transmit and A transmit or receive fault will be implied by one of the following Receive Faults consequences m radio fails to receive or receive performance 1s degraded m radio fails to enter transmit mode m radio exits transmit mode unexpectedly m radio enters transmit mode but fails to transmit m radio enters transmit mode but transmit performance is degraded With a fault of this kind neither of the initial tasks 1s required Fault diagnosis should begin with Power Supplies on page 189 Summary To summarize given the nature of the fault proceed to the task or section indicated below m ask 1 system error m Task 2 lock error m Power Supplies transmit or receive fault The checks of Task 1 and Task 2 will indicate the section with which the fault diagnosis should co
521. re screwing the line interface Important The external options connector screw lock fasteners must board onto the mounting posts 8 Screw the line interface board to the mounting posts on the radio lid using six M3x8 self tapping screws 9 Tighten the M3x8 screws to a torque of 1 9 N m 171bfin radio s options cavity the internal options connector Important For the line interface board to be installed correctly in the loom 40 must be looped in the way shown in the diagram on page 475 Plug the unattached end of internal options connector loom into the internal options connector on the radio main PCB Refit the radio lid and top cover to the radio and screw the external options cover seal D over the external options connector using the two 4 40x3 16 screws 2 474 TMAAO01 01 Line Interface Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 17 2 Installing the line interface board radio lid screw lock fasteners external options connector bung mounting posts foam seal M3x8 self tapping screws external options connector cavity internal options loom line interface board external options cover seal amp G e D 4 external options connector 4 40x3 16 screws TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 475 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 17 4 Programming Information The lines from the radios internal
522. receiver m requency synthesizer including FCL m CODEC and audio m power supply m interface m digital board Figure 3 1 gives an overview of the of the circuitry modules of the main board and shows how they are interconnected Sample Schematics For up to date schematics refer to the relevant PCB information refer to Associated Documentation on page 6 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 65 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Main board hardware architecture Figure 3 1 J0122UU0 suondqo ua J0183uuo jei ixny J0128UU0 peap 0J1u0 J0122uu0 J9MOd ejep jenas snouoJpu s Am opne pue 53905 joued Z ejep jenas snouoJupu se And Jerusuen jo ed ejbip i EU 19U9MU 00 bojeue oi jeubip N JU 4 z J3JeAuo jeubip oi bojeue YJ TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 19 1IUISUPJ Jeziseu1u g fouenbaJJ B7 ee add J0122UU0 Jy lt aN ge EIERE A KI p1eog 1e161q AA N Ayddns Jamod pJeog ule Circuit Descriptions 66 3 1 Transmitter Circuitry Introduction For a block diagram of the transmitter circuitry refer to Figure 3 2 The transmitter circuitry is different for the 40W 50W radios the 30 W 35 W radios available for K5 band only and the 25 W radios and the different bands Exciter With the 40 W 50 W radio the discrete component exciter 1s designed for specific bands UH
523. rect height mounting rails and screws and attach a rail to each side of the bottom of the radio body two screws per rail minimum torque 201in Ibf 2 26 N m 3 To insert the radio with the mounting rails attached into the security bracket base check that the left and right slide locks are open 526 TMAAO3 02 Security Bracket TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 If the slide locks are closed open them by inserting the slide lock key into the keyhole Rotate the key 90 it will slip into a detent and pull Two slide lock keys are supplied so that you can either use them both at once or so that you can keep one as a spare 5 Place the radio over the security bracket base so that the feet of the mounting rails fit securely into the base 6 Close the slide locks by pressing them into the base You should hear an audible click as the internal spring lock mechanism engages Warning For continued safe operation replace and do p p not re use Security Bracket once it has been involved in a crash greater than 50km h 24 3 Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket Remove the radio from the security bracket as follows 1 Open the slide locks by inserting the slide lock key into the keyhole Rotate the key 90 it will slip into a detent and pull The pull will be need to be quite firm to open each slide lock 2 Remove the radio and its mounting rails by lifting it up and out of the
524. regardless of the temperature The VCXO runs at a nominal frequency of 13 0120MHz and 1s frequency locked to the TCXO reference frequency The VCXO is mixed with the TCXO output to create a nominal difference or offset frequency of 12kHz SYN CDC FCL In A4 band radios there 1s additional circuitry and the VCXO is mixed with the TCXO to produce 2 612M Hz This is then mixed with 2 6 MHz T CXO divided by 4 to produce the 12kHz SYN CDC FCL The signal SYN CDC FCL is fed via the CODEC IC502 in the CODEC circuitry to the FPGA on the digital board The FPGA detects the offset frequency compares it with the programmed offset frequency and outputs a corresponding feedback signal CDC VCXO MOD via IC205 The feedback signal is amplified and inverted by the modulator buffer amplifier and output as the loop voltage for the VCXO With this design the VCXO frequency can be adjusted by very small precise amounts and because the loop is locked the VCXO inherits the temperature stability of the TCXO The FCL modulation 1s implemented within the FPGA and appears at the output of IC205 and therefore on the VCXO loop voltage Consequently the VCXO is frequency modulated directly by the relevant modulation information The latter may be the microphone audio an audio tap in signal internal modem signals or any combination of these 80 Circuit Descriptions TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 5 CODEC and Audio C
525. res in this section apply only to VHF radios the VHF frequency bands are defined in Table 9 5 There are six aspects Task 28 Task 29 Task 30 Task 31 Task 32 Task 33 check VCO repair PLL feedback repair VCO check transmit receive switch repair switching network check buffer amplifier The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the VCO and related circuitry are summarized in Figure 9 13 Table 9 5 Minimum and maximum frequencies for the different VHF frequency bands Frequency in MHz Frequency band 224 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 13 Measurement points for the VCO and related circuitry in VHF radios MIO vk Na NAS Sla 2019 lt MS HL NAS DIG DOIVNY kan JH lt S3dAL VNOSIS H3ZIS3H LNAS AONSNOSAYS 23 AGT l TS JO Nid O l AYLINOUIO H31H3ANI Ped e ONIE3LTIJ yoosa JO Z Nid V V V l YINWNNS H31dnoo i Ws B 2 4 Haldrtdi iv PESE Wat i d007 H344ng peo A HOLIMS HL JPG ONY L L00S0 voosa i Wale i JO NOLLONAP O Berane JO 1 Nid Eer 9081 AS as H9Va0211 Tid MS YL NAS SIG MOAHS OL VIA LHOd XH LOT XY NAS O1 XL NAS EEN quvog VLISIQ d3AldO3H da3 LLIN SNVuL 225 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 28 Check VCO Check
526. respond to the reset command character 130 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 9 Defining Frequency Bands Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of the radio the frequency band is given in brackets The frequency band may be referred to as either VHF very high frequency or UHF ultra high frequency or identified by the frequency sub band such as BU or HT For example RF output power gt 60W VHF gt 52W UHF current 15A VHF 12A UHF In some cases differences in performance over the frequency band mean that the K5 frequency band may be further divided into 700MHz and 800MHz The frequency bands for TM8100 TM8200 radios are listed in Table 4 10 The relevant frequencies for the different bands are listed in this table Table 4 10 Defining frequency bands Frequency identification Frequency sub band A4 66MHz to 88MHz B1 136MHz to 174MHz CO 1 4MHz to 225MHz D1 216MHz to 266 MHz G2 350MHz to 400 MHz H5 400MHz to 470MHz H6 450MHz to 530MHz H 450MHz to 520MHz K5 762 to 870MHz Tx 762 to 776MHz and 850 to 870MHz RX TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 131 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 10 Visual and Audible Indications Visual and audible indicators give information about the state of the radio Visual indications are provided by the ST
527. rface Specification The following tables summarize the signals used for the options extender board on the internal options connector SK1 on the options extender board and the external options connector SK2 on the options extender board Note The TM8100 TM8200 3DK Hardware Developers Kit Applica tion Manual product code MMA 00011 xx contains a detailed electrical specification for the signals available on the radio s inter nal options connector This manual is part of the 3DK Resource CD which can be purchased using product code TMAA30 01 Table 19 3 Internal options connector pins and signals S ed Description Signal 1 f13V8 BW _SW switched 13V8 switched 13V8 supplyfromtheradio from the radio UNI _TAP Lc Programmable tap point out iia Lio MN the receive or transmit audio chain DC coupled AGND analogue ground AUX_MIC_AUD Auxiliary microphone input with electret microphone biasing provided Dynamic microphones are not supported EA RX BEER IN receive sidetone input AC receive sidetone input AC coupled AUD TAP IN re tap point into the receive or transmit audio chain DC coupled SEH RX_AUD 8 RSSI analogue RSSI output 9 15 IOP GPIO1 to programmable function and direction IOD GPIO7 DGND digital ground IOP RXD an RS 232 compliant asynchronous serial port receive data IOP TXD an RS 232 compliant asynchronous serial port transmit data TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01
528. riptions 69 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 2 Receiver Circuitry Introduction Front End Circuitry First Mixer First IF Stage and Second Mixer For a block diagram of the receiver circuitry refer to Figure 3 3 B1 H5 H6 bands 05 issue PCBs and Figure 3 4 other bands and later issue PCBs The receiver is of the triple conversion superheterodyne type The first two IF stages are implemented in hardware the third stage 1s implemented in the FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array of the digital board The FPGA also carries out the demodulation of the received signals The front end circuitry of all bands except K5 is a standard varicap tuned singlet band pass filter followed by an LNA low noise amplifier and then a varicap tuned doublet image filter The varicap tuning voltage CDC RX FE TUNE is provided by a DAC with voltages calculated from a calibration table stored in non volatile memory The two varicap tuned filters need to be calibrated to ensure that maximum sensitivity 1s achieved The K5 receiver has a dual 700 MHz 800 MHz front end This consists of a switch followed by a SAW surface acoustic wave filter then an LNA low noise amplifier and then a second SAW filter and a second switch The varicap tuning voltage CDC FE TUNE is used to control the switches that select which front end 1s used The first mixer of all bands except K5 is a standard diode ring mixer with SMD surface mount device ba
529. riteria are satisfied but there 1s either no speaker audio or the speaker audio is distorted There are four tasks m Task 4 check audio power amplifier m ask 5 check speaker outputs m ask 6 check ITF VOL WIP DC input signal m Task 7 check ITF RX BEEP IN input signal The next section deals with the case where there 1s no speaker audio at the auxiliary connector Figure 13 2 Circuitry in the vicinity of IC202 top side NE C 211 KN Li 3 EM D C201 402 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 4 If there 1s no fault with the power supplies check the inputs to the audio PA Check Audio Power Amplifier as follows This check is only applicable however if the output of the voice band CODEC is correct and the signal level varies as the volume is varied 1 10 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Use the programming application to find the frequency selected for channel 1 In user mode apply an on channel RF signal of 47 dBm with 60 1 kHz deviation The channel must not have signalling enabled Set the volume to maximum Use an oscilloscope probe to check the output of the voice band CODEC at the TP200 test point see Figure 13 2 The signal should be TP200 test point sine wave of 100mV with 0 6V DC offset If the above signal is correct go to Step 5 If it is not go to Task 7 Vary the volume control This should cause
530. rong protection of the same type used for AUX GPIO4 AUX GPI2 is normally a dedicated emergency input but can be made a general purpose input like AUX GPI1 by removing the link LK3 in the power supply area AUX GPI3 is normally a dedicated ignition sense input but can be made a general purpose input like AUX GPI1 by removing the link LK2 in the power supply area and fitting the 33kQ resistor R775 On exposed inputs of the auxiliary and control head connectors ESD electrostatic discharge protection is provided by a 470pF capacitor and by clamping diodes to ground and to 13 8V For example on AUX GPIO4 this consists of D713 and C725 The lines IOP GPIO to IOP GPIO7 are intended for connection to internal digital devices and so these have relatively light protection Hookswitch detection is performed by Q700 R709 R706 and R712 When the resistance to ground on the PTT line is less than 13 2kQ Q700 will turn on and drive the ITF CH HOOK line high this indicates either that the microphone 1s on hook or that the PTT press to talk switch is pressed 3 8 Digital Board Introduction Different digital boards are used for the TM8200 and TM8100 radios For a block diagram of the digital board of the TM8200 radios refer to Figure 3 13 For a block diagram of the digital board of the TM8100 radios refer to Figure 3 14 The digital board is not serviceable at level 2 and 1s not described in this manual TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit
531. ronics Limited November 2007 4 Screw the U bracket in the chosen mounting position using the self drilling screws washers Installing the Radio 1 Connect the antenna and power cables to the rear of the radio Body in the Bracket 2 Position the radio body in the U bracket so that the holes in the U bracket line up with the holes 1n the radio chassis 3 Screw the radio into position using the four thumb screws 26 1 8 Connecting the Remote Cable at the selected points will not damage existing wiring Caution When drilling holes in the vehicle check that drilling petrol tanks fuel lines brake pipes or battery cables 1 Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or bushings in the holes 2 Plug one end of the remote cable into the control head interface o Run the remote cable to the torso interface and plug it into the RJ45 connector without a bung Installing the Install both the remote cable grommets using the following procedure Remote Cable Grommets remote cable is plugged into the RJ45 sockets When installed the grommets have two functions Important The remote cable grommets must be installed whenever the m to prevent damage to the RJ45 sockets when there is movement of the remote cable and m to ensure that the radio and remote control head assembly is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Slide the grommet along the remote cable and push tw
532. rside of the main board If the thermal paste is contaminated you must re apply thermal paste as described in Fitting the Main Board Assembly to the Chassis on page 145 5 Holding a hand over the chassis to catch the main board assembly turn the chassis upside down and tap its fins on the edge of the workbench This will release the heat transfer block from the chassis 6 With the 7225 W radio the gap pad QU on the L shaped ridge must be replaced each time the main board is removed 138 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 5 3 Components of the radio body Torx T20 22 b in 2 5 N m Torx T10 T 15lb in 1 7 N m Torx T20 221b in 2 5N m sn 1 cover 6 chassis 2 screw M4x 16 x4 7 auxiliary connector bung 3 lid assembly screws MAx16 x2 4 screw M3x10 x5 9 RF connector seal 5 main board assembly gap pad gt 25W radio only TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Disassembly and Reassembly 139 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Disassembling the Main Board Assembly 140 Disassembly and Reassembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 4 on page 141 This figure shows the gt 25 W configuration 1 2 Note Remove the power connector seal Use a torque driver with a 3 16 inch 5mm socket to remove the D range screwlock fasteners CD Use a torque driver with a 9 16 inch 14m
533. ry see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 301 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 19 Biasing of PA Driver DRV test point If there 1s no fault in the biasing of the PAs investigate the biasing of the PA driver Q306 First check the DRV test point Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 1A And when entering the CCTM command 304 Z do not specify a value Z higher than that recorded 1n Task 12 Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PA driver 1 Note the current reading on the DC power supply As mentioned in Step 7 of Task 12 the current will be less than 500mA 2 Enter the CCTM command 304 Z where Z was recorded in Task 12 to switch on the clamp current 3 Note the current reading on the DC power supply 4 Compare the above current readings The current should increase by an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11 6 If it does go to Task 21 It it does not go to Step 5 5 Check as follows that the voltage from the DAC is changing First enter the CCTM command 304 1 to switch off the bias 6 Measure the voltage at the DRV test point CDC TX DRV BIAS see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 The volt
534. s In receive mode the modulation to the frequency synthesizer is muted See Frequency Synthesizer on page 59 for a description of the frequency synthesizer The output of the first IF is then down converted using an image reject mixer to a low IF of 64kHz The K5 front end has two paths 762 to 776 MHz and 850 to 870 MHz which are selected depending on the Rx frequency The LO for the image reject mixer quadrature demodulator is synthesized and uses the TCXO as a reference This ensures good centring of the IF filters and more consistent group delay performance The quadrature demodulator device has an internal frequency division of 2 so the second LO operates at 2 x IF1 64kHz The quadrature output from this mixer is fed to a pair of ADCs with high dynamic range where it is oversampled at 256kHz and fed to the custom logic device The AGC is used to limit the maximum signal level applied to the image reject mixer and ADCs in order to meet the requirements for intermodulation and selectivity performance Hardware gain control is performed by a variable gain amplifier within the quadrature demodulator device driven by a 10 bit DAC Information about the signal level 1s obtained from the IQ data output stream from the ADCs The control loop is completed within the custom logic The AGC will begin to reduce gain when the combined signal power of the wanted signal and first adjacent channels is greater than about 70dBm In the presence of
535. s on TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 385 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 28 If the exciter output 1s correct check the output of the PA driver at the Output of PA Driver drain of Q306 If necessary also check the signal at the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310 This is the last point in the initial RF signal path 1 With the radio still in transmit mode measure the RF voltage at the drain of Q306 A4 B1 CO or after C317 and C389 D1 H5 H6 see Figure 12 14 Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equiva lent The required voltage should be as given in Table 12 8 A4 Table 12 9 B1 Table 12 10 C0 Table 12 11 D1 or Table 12 12 H5 H6 2 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 3 If the voltage measured above is correct go to Step 7 If it 1s not go to Step 4 4 Check the components between C301 and Q306 see Figure 12 14 5 If the above checks reveal a fault go to Step 6 If they do not go to Task 12 in Biasing of PA Driver and PAs on page 360 6 Repair the fault Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 162 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 7 If not already done remove the PAF TOP can 8 Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the power level to the maximum and then th
536. s 48kHz with signal bandwidth limited only by the IF filtering Scaling dependent on the bandwidth of the RF channel is then applied to normalize the signal level for the remaining audio processing The sample rate is decimated to 8kHz and 0 3 to 3kHz bandpass audio filtering 1s applied De emphasis 1s then applied to cancel out the receive signals pre emphasized response and improve signal to noise performance Optional processing such as decryption or companding is then applied 1f applicable The data and signalling decoders obtain their signals from various points within the audio processing chain The point used depends on the decoders bandwidth and whether de emphasis 1s required Several decoders may be active simultaneously Side tones are summed in at the end of the audio processing chain These are tones that provide some form of alert or give the user confidence an action has been performed The confidence tones may be generated in receive or transmit mode The sidetone level is a fixed proportion in the order of 10 dB relative to full scale in the receive path The combined audio and side tone signal 1s converted to analog form by a 16 bit DAC with integral anti alias filtering This 1s followed by a programmable gain amplifier with 45 dB range in 1 5 dB steps that performs primary volume control and muting The DAC and primary volume control are part of the same CODEC device AD6521 The output of the CODEC 1s fed to an a
537. s also capable of using either a two or four wire isolated interface formats which are selectable using S1 The input to the line driver IC U5 is the AUDIO TAP OUT line from the radio This line is a software programmabable tap point which can be chosen from various audio signals available within the radio and 1s coupled through a capacitor into the audio line out level control RV2 This variable resister Is AC coupled into the line driver U5 which 1s used in a bridged output format with gain set to provide the necessary 21 dB gain The resistors on the output of the line driver provides the necessary 600 terminating impedance but also cause a 50 loss of signal This is compensated for by the higher than necessary gain of the line driver Line out protection is provided by two zener diodes and the transformer T1 provides isolation The audio interface 1s capable of using a two or four wire interface so a tap is taken from one side of the balanced line out and is feed directly into the line input level control RV3 When using a four wire interface the signal comes in through a second isolation transformer T2 T2 1s terminated with 600 and also acts as a voltage divider This means that the signal level at RV3 will be identical to the level at RV3 when using a two wire interface To achieve the required output level the non inverting AC amplifier U7 has a gain of 10 which provides the necessary 13dB of gain The output
538. s doe b oboe cU ee oe odd a EM 90 QS EE o 0 o Pcr GE 3 9 Control Head Board with Graphical Display 96 3 10 Control Head Board with 1 2 or 3 Digit Dsplaw ona aaaaaa 99 SAI PISO Lg H aaa d naui 4 4 3 d EePEYEAYG E ERE Eq RAd Rs 102 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 11 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 12 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 1 Introduction The TM8100 and TM8200 series is a range of high performance microprocessor controlled radios for analog voice and data communication The radios are designed for installation in vehicles but can also be used in desktop remote monitoring and similar applications This manual includes the information required for servicing the radio and its accessories This section describes the different options available for m frequency bands m RF output power M accessories E product codes This section also gives an overview of the labels on the product and the specifications Figure 1 1 TM8200 mobile radios TM8250 or TM8255 radio with graphical display control head TM8252 radio with RJ45 control head TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Introduction 13 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 1 2 TM8100 mobile radios TM8115 radio with 2 digit display control head TM8110 radio with 1 digit display control head TM8105 radio with blank control head rear view 25W radio 14 Introduction T
539. s that the torso interface 1s sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards Installing a Remote Kit 531 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 1 5 Mounting the Remote U Bracket 25 1 6 532 Installing a Remote Kit The remote U bracket with its self drilling screws is used to install the remote control head assembly on the dashboard or on any sufficiently flat surface Caution When drilling holes in the vehicle check that drilling at the selected points will not damage existing wiring screws are tightened C Important Check that the remote U bracket is not distorted when the Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or bushings in the holes If precise positioning is required predrill 3mm 1 8 inch pilot holes for the self drilling screws Reduce the hole size in metal that is less than 1 mm 1 32 inch thick Screw the remote U bracket in the chosen mounting position using the selt drilling screws provided Use all four screws provided Installing the Control Head Interface With the control head separated from the radio body the control head interface 2 must be installed on the rear of the control head 1 Undo the two Torx T 20 screws on the adaptor flange of the control head and remove the adaptor flange Unplug the control head loom The adaptor flange and control head loom are not used for the remote control head installation Keep the two screws
540. s used In receive mode the output power should be about 7dBm 0dBm for K5 Rx whereas in transmit mode it should be about 9dBm Some variants of the synthesizer use two VCOs one for receive and one for transmit Synthesizers with two VCOs share the same tuning signal Only one VCO is switched on at a time and so the PLL IC will see only one output frequency to tune A portion of the RF output from the VCOs is fed to the RF input of the PLL IC The RF signal is divided by an integer that gives 25 kHz 30kHz for A4 72kHz for K5 Rx if the output frequency is correct The PLL IC compares the 25kHz reference 30kHz for A4 72kHz for K5 Rx and the divided VCO signal and the error is used to control the internal charge pump The charge pump is a current source that can sink or source current in proportion to the frequency or phase error The output 1s a series of 25 kHz pulses 30kHz for A4 72kHz for K5 Rx with a width that is dependent on the phase error When the output frequency of the synthesizer is correct there is no error and the charge pump output will become open circuit The loop filter continuously integrates the current pulses from the charge pump and produces a steady DC output voltage that tunes the VCO or VCOs When the VCO frequency is correct there is no frequency error and therefore no charge pump output and so the loop filter s output voltage remains constant If the frequency is too high or too low the error will
541. sa i i i 21607 i i wioysn gt ZHN 826 y JHA OL 7 S ZHIN 8C 06 1HN 01 pano d i 01 FESSES aseud i ZH v9 1 dd 1 PUZ a t i _ fy i i J H AUOD Aa umoq Tib eu SUUM dd LI i jouueu5 ZHIN ELE 4HA i 1 1 1 ZHIN L t 200 1 7 Al i 1 i 8 bey 7 OV eee mm mm mm um Em EM EE EM EM EE EM EM m EM EM EM EM EM XM pm EM EM EM EM EM EE EM EM EE EM pm RM ES pm pm pm pm pm L i i XY 8 mm mm mm mm mm mm NE NEM NM mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 53 Description Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 2 5 1 RF Hardware PIN Switch Front End and First IF Quadrature Demodulator Automatic Gain Control Noise Blanking A4 B1 bands only 54 Description The RF PIN switch circuitry selects the RF path to and from the antenna to either the Tx or Rx circuitry of the radio In addition to the switching functionality the PIN switch is used to provide attenuation to the Rx front end in high signal strength locations The front end hardware amplifies and image filters the received RF spectrum then down converts the desired channel frequency to a first intermediate frequency IF1 of 21 4 MHz VHF or 45 1 MHz UHF and K5 band where coarse channel filtering 1s performed The first LO signal 1s obtained from the frequency synthesizer and is injected on the low side of the desired channel frequency for all band
542. scratch the soft polariser material on both sides of the LCD 4 Re assemble the control head 5 Reconnect the control head loom and test the user interface If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not go to Step 6 6 The control head board is suspect Level 1 service centres should replace the board Level 2 service centres should attempt to repair the board as follows 450 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Control Head Board If neither the elastomeric strips nor the LCD are faulty check the relevant Faulty components on the control head board 1 Use an oscilloscope to display the signal at pin 5 of IC5 see Figure 15 2 The signal should be a square wave with a fre quency of about 60 Hz and an amplitude that alternates between 0 0 and 3 3 V If the signal is correct go to Step 3 If it is not go to Step 2 2 Replace IC2 see Figure 15 2 Test the user interface If the fault has been removed return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not go to Step 3 3 Use the oscilloscope to display the signal at pin 12 of IC7 see Figure 15 2 The signal should be a square wave with a frequency of about 120Hz and an amplitude that alternates between 0 0 and 3 3 V If the signal is correct replace IC5 and go to Step 4 If it is not replace IC7 and go to Step 4 4 Test the user interf
543. screw RJ45 bung control head interface loom torso interface loom earthing tag earthing tag screw amp G e remote cable grommets 546 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 26 1 3 Removing the Control Head from the Radio Body if necessary Caution During this procedure take care that the control head seal is not damaged Damage to this seal reduces environmental protection 1 On the underside of the radio lever point insert a 5mm 3 16 inch flat z De lie sc bladed screwdriver between the NZ control head and the control head SA indication ot lever point seal in the positions shown Insertion points and are lever points and are indicated on the radio chassis by a dot dash dot pattern Lessel 2 Use the screwdriver to lift the control head off the chassis clip then repeat in the other position S Unplug the control head loom from the radio body The control head is now separate from the radio body 26 1 4 Installing the Torso Interface The torso interface must be installed onto the radio body in place of the control head 1 Screw the solder tag onto one of the screw bosses on the radio chassis 2 Plug the torso interface loom 9 onto the control head connector 3 Insert the bottom edge of the remote control head D onto the two clips in the front of the radio chassis then snap into place 4 Remove one of
544. se of the synthesized reference input The result 1s a transmit receive settling time of less than 4 5ms The switching time is measured for a frequency change equal to the first IF plus 10 MHz or 1 MHz depending on the repeater offsets used for the band This implies a synthesizer transmit receive change over plus an offset of 1 MHz or 10 MHz in less than 4 5ms The ramp up and ramp down of the transmitter which totals 1 ms extends this change over time to 5 5 ms TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 79 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 3 4 Frequency Control Loop Introduction Elements of FCL Circuitry Circuit Operation Modulation The FCL is included in the block diagram of the frequency synthesizer see Figure 3 5 and Figure 3 6 The FCL forms part of the frequency synthesizer module The basis of the FCL is a VCXO which generates the reference frequency required by the main PLL of the synthesizer The FCL is a simple frequency locked loop The circuitry consists of the following elements gm VCXO XL501 Q501 Q503 m ICXO XL500 m buffer amplifier IC500 m mixer IC501 m low pass filter IC502 pins 5 to 7 m modulator buffer amplifier IC502 pins 1 to 3 The A4 band has additional circuitry m 2 612MHz mixer IC506 m amplifiers Q504 IC509 m TCXO divide by 4 IC508 The TCXO supplies a reference frequency of 13 0000 MHz 10 4 MHz for the A4 band which 1s extremely stable
545. ses is now correct go to Step 14 If it does not go to Task 32 Remove the test lead and test capacitor resolder the coupling capacitors in position and go to Task 33 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W 329 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 26 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can and the points for attaching the test lead and test capacitor 6669 66C9 66 2 66 9 16610 DK dol jud JoyDede 1591 104 uiod Dupunou ped 1591 pueq SJ 10 DPdeE 1591 10 juiod bulyunow n lc cS ea Le CRE Et ped 1591 JHN Jojede 1591 10 juiod Duunou ped 1591 AHA TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W 330 Task 32 If the RF output power measured in Task 31 1s low there is a fault in the Repair Circuitry circuit between the common drain of the PAs and the test capacitor 1 If not already done remove the PAF TOP can 2 Che
546. shows a block diagram of the hardware links LK1 to LKA Figure 3 10 Block diagram of hardware links LK1 to LK4 ON OFF Key 13V8 BATT O O 13 8V Battery Power Sense LK2 AUX GPI3 O O Auxiliary Power Sense 34 8 part Ignition Sense Power up j Circuit LK3 AUX GPI2 5 o e Emergency Sense LK4 IOP GPIO7 o o Internal Options Power Sense The radio can be programmed to be either on or to return to its previous state when the power sense signal is removed For information on programming the power on mode refer to the online help of the programming software The ON OFF key can be used with any of the of the power sense options to turn the radio on and off TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 87 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 3 2 shows the configuration of the hardware links LK1 LK2 and LK4 for the individual power sense options It also lists the dependence of the power sense options with respect to the GPI lines which can or cannot be used Table 3 2 Configuration of hardware links and GPI lines for power sense options Ba colon Links Configuration of remaining links and Voltages H required use of AUX GPI3 and IOP GPIO7 required 13 8V battery power LK1 in LK2 in 10 8V lt supplyz 16V sense AUX GPI3 must be left floating LK2 out AUX GPI3 can be used as GPI LK4 out IOP GPIO7 can be used as GPIO auxiliary power sense LK2 in LK1 in AUX GPI3 x0
547. single three level analog signal required by IC202 There are two microphone source signals m ITF AUX MIC AUD from auxiliary or internal options connector m ITF CH MIC AUD from control head The biasing for electret microphones is provided by a filtered 3 0V supply via R226 and R227 The components R209 and C202 provide the supply filtering The microphone inputs to IC204 VINAUXP VINAUXN VINNORP and VINNORN balls are differential The negative inputs are decoupled to the filtered 3 0 V supply by C215 and C216 The positive inputs are biased to approximately 1 5 V by R229 R232 R230 and R233 AC coupling and DC input protection 1s provided by C213 and C214 The auxiliary audio input signal ITF AUD TAP IN is DC coupled to the ADC input of IC205 R241 combined with internal clamping diodes in IC205 provide DC protection for the ADC input IC205 provides the input biasing of approximately 1 5 V TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 83 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Auxiliary Audio The source for the auxiliary audio output signal CDC AUD TAP OUT 1s provided Output by IC204 RAMPDAC ball The DAC output of IC204 1s low pass filtered to remove high frequency artefacts The low pass filter formed by IC201 pins 1 to 3 R219 R220 R221 R224 C206 C208 and C210 is a third order Butterworth type with a cut frequency of approximately 12kHz The output of the low pass filter is amplified by 6dB by a buffer amplifier
548. sition 4 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity Figure 36 1 Correct desktop microphone grommet seating v lone X control head 36 3 Adjustment Adjust the output sensitivity of the desktop microphone using the control accessible from the underside of the desktop microphone The microphone sensitivity is set to maximum by turning the control fully clockwise 36 4 Radio Prog ramming adjust output level here The desktop microphone has an internal pre amplifier Therefore the dynamic microphone support in the UI Preferences form of the radio s programming application should not be enabled 36 5 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the desktop microphone on the radio s microphone connector and shows the interface between the desktop microphone and the radio Table 36 1 Desktop microphone connector pins and signals m sm rm Ro meme H oo Po from er i O O connected 5 HUS adefansemcaere zem analogue ound PE rome BE rome 608 TMAA10 07 Desktop Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 37 TMAA 10 08 Desktop Microphone FUNCTION key MONITOR LED MONITOR key PTT key grommet 37 1 Operation The TMAA10 08 desktop microphone is an omnidirectional electret microphone which can be used in dispatch situations where the microphone is positi
549. speaker The remote speaker can then be installed at some distance from the radio or it can be used to increase the volume of the audio from the radio s existing mounting internal speaker bracket 4 P The remote speaker is supplied with a socket housing e already 1nstalled and a flying lead connector This cable connector enables the speaker to be easily removed and reconnected as required socket housing flying lead EQ The flying lead connector 1s terminated with two receptacles The receptacles supplied with the TMAA10 03 for 25 W radios are different to those supplied with the TMAA10 06 40W 50W radios Two spare receptacles are included with each kit along with receptacles four mounting screws and washers 34 1 Installation Remote Speaker 1 Choose a mounting position for the remote speaker where it will not MounAng interfere with the operation of any of the vehicle controls 2 Remove the remote speaker from the mounting bracket and use the screws and washers provided to fix the mounting bracket securely in the chosen location components or wiring behind the mounting location Important Check before drilling that the drill will not damage any m If mounting the bracket onto a metal surface drill two 3 5 mm 0 14 inch holes in the appropriate locations and secure the bracket with the supplied self tapping screws m Ifmounting the bracket to any other materi
550. splay Introduction This section describes the circuitry of the control head boards for the control heads with 1 2 or 3 digit display The boards differ in their layouts but the components are virtually identical The circuit description given below 1s sufficiently general to be applicable to all boards User Interface The control head board includes the circuitry for the following control elements m ON OFF key m volume potentiometer m keypad with four functions keys and two scroll keys gm LCD m three status LEDs m four function key LEDs for function keys F1 to F4 m keypad backlighting LEDs m speaker Connectors The control head board includes the circuitry for the following connectors m microphone connector RJ45 socket m control head connector 18 way MicroMaTch socket m speaker connector 2 leads m soldering pads 2 leads for an optional concealed microphone m two control head options connectors for optional circuit board Protection circuitry 1s provided for the microphone connector For pinouts of the control head connector and the microphone connector refer to Connectors on page 38 For more information on the control head options connector please contact Tait Electronics Limited The optional circuit board is installed when a dynamic microphone 1s used or a concealed microphone is fitted Basic Circuitry The LCD driver 1s based on IC2 IC5 and IC7 Electrical contact between the control head and the LC
551. ssis and provides for IP54 class protection when the control head 1s fitted Two dot dash dot marks at the underside side of the chassis indicate the leverage points for removing the control head from the radio body The sides of the chassis contain two of the four screw bosses to attach the radio to the U bracket of the installation kit For heat dissipation the chassis has heat fins at the rear grooves at the bottom and holes in the front The heat fins at the rear of the gt 25 W radio are longer than those of the 25 W radio The grooves at the bottom of the 725 W radio are deeper than those of the 25 W radio For additional heat dissipation the 725 W radio has an additional L shaped gap pad I between the chassis and the main board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Main Board The main board assembly consists of the following components Assembly see Figure 2 3 m main board 9 with SMT components digital board G shielding cans and connectors m heat transfer block D m mounting and sealing elements for the connectors at the rear of the radio body Figure 2 3 Components of the main board assembly D M3x10 screw x3 2 gt 25W radios M2 2x10 PT screw x2 25W radios K30x8 PT screw x2 3 digital board 4 internal options connector 5 auxiliary connector 6 inner foam D range seal 7 heat transfer block outer foam seal TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual
552. stor Also take strict anti static measures when storing shipping or carrying a circuit board or its components m To carry store or ship a circuit board use an anti static bag m To carry store or ship a component use foil an anti static bag or an anti static tube You can also use an anti static tray to carry a circuit board or component Transmitter Issues The following issues relate to the operation of the transmitter m RF and thermal burns m antenna loading m test transmissions W accidental transmissions m distress beacons The precautions required in each case are given below Caution Avoid thermal burns Do not touch the cooling fins or underside of the radio body when the transmitter TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual General Information 113 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 114 C Important C Important C Important is or has been operating Avoid RF burns Do not touch the antenna while the transmitter is operating The radio has been designed to operate with a 50Q termination impedance Do not operate the transmitter without a suitable load Failure to do so might result in damage to the power output stage of the transmitter While servicing the main board avoid overheating the radio during test transmissions The following is good practice Secure the main board assembly in the chassis with the two external screws and one of the internal screws The heat transfer
553. switch is functioning correctly to Receive Mode m Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 2 Enter the CCTM command 385 0 to switch on the supply to the receive VCO 3 Measure the voltage at the first collector pin 3 of Q506 see Figure 9 11 The voltage should be pin 3 of Q506 5 0 0 3V DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 4 Enter the CCTM command 335 7 to switch off the supply 5 Again measure the voltage at the first collector of Q506 pin 3 of Q506 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 6 If the voltages measured 1n Step 2 and Step 5 are correct go to Task 22 If they are not the switching network is suspect go to Task 21 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 215 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 21 Repair Switching Network 216 If the transmit receive switch is not functioning correctly first check the DIG SYN TR SW line to confirm that the digital board 1s not the cause If the digital board 1s not faulty the switching network 1s suspect 1 10 Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off receive mode Measure the voltage on the DIG SYN TR SW line between Q508 and R593 see Figure 9 11 R593 OV DC after entry of CCTM 335 0 Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on transmit mode Again measure the voltage at R593 R593 2 0 0 5V DC after entry of CCTM 335 1 If the voltages measured i
554. t AUX GBI PTT input rear view AUD TAP OUT audio tap output AGND Table 31 8 GPS socket pins and signals mem rem 12345678 13V8 power supply trom radio front view GPS_TXD transmit data Table 31 9 External interface connector pins and signals m Lem eme AUX GPIO6 external alert radio closest to connector S a D 9 D e EE EE 000000 10 AUX_GPIO6 external alert radio furthest from connector 586 TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 31 6 PCB Information Description CAP 100n 16V 10 0603 X7R CAP 1n 50V NPO 5 0603 CAP 10n 50V 1096 0603 X7R DIODE SMF10A TVS 10V SOD123FL DIODE SMF28A TVS 28V SOD123FL DIODE MRA4004T3 1A 400V RES 0805 OR 1 8W XSTR BC847BS NPN Dual SOT363 RES 0603 560R 1 1 10W RES 0603 1k2 1 1 10W RES 0603 82R 5 1 10W RES 0603 47k 1 1 10W RES 0603 33k 1 1 10W RES 0603 6k8 1 1 10W RES 0603 120R 5 1 10W RES 0805 5k6 1 1 8W RES 0805 5k6 1 1 8W RES 0603 OR 5 1 10W RES 0603 OR 5 1 10W SMT Alloy Lead Free sac PCB cross bnd extnl 1 F cbl J1 31 6 1 TMAA04 06 Parts List PCB IPN 220 01755 01 Ref IPN Description Ref IPN 219 03081 00 CBL assy TMA X Band GPS Ign Secondary auxiliary connector 369 00010 27 CBL tie ny
555. t When replacing the LCD carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the top side of the LCD The LCD seal is replaced whenever the LCD 1s replaced 148 Disassembly and Reassembly TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 5 9 Components of the control head graphical display Torx T20 18lb in 2 0N m Torx T10 5 5 b in 0 62 N m TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9080000000000000 OO MA x 12 Taptite screw x2 adaptor flange control head loom assembly with female female adapter 3 x 10 PT screw x4 control head board space frame seal x2 short light pipe long light pipe space frame speaker clamp speaker LCD assembly including LCD seal main keypad power keypad concealed microphone optional front panel assembly knob for volume control potentiometer Disassembly and Reassembly 149 5 4 2 Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5 11 on page 151 L With your fingers pull off the volume control knob 9 Do not use any tools as this might cause damage 2 If an optional circuit board for a concealed microphone is fitted unplug it fr
556. t ANY 535 Id dIM 10A 111 anv DIN XP v 31l GNV DIN HD 21 NI d338 X 111 dS 411 ANY TMdS 111 CAV m aa ON anv xd 202 11V8 SAE LT 202 SAC NV OAE an ee sa o l vn vn l v l wn l i oipny pue 33009 pieog jeubiq cic Sig MI gjo sie O10 j 9 clc LE cea Alo FIV IS 3 I e OI N AIZ v v gt gt un I Lo 2 mi ke lt C D D It Cc Nn lt II la mm ele IG OQ Jo A 2 ND fs wn E n lt 2 EN Ars SS es ee Em um es mmm NEN mm Jeuiduiy Jaying V jeulung TES SuinjoA pm oipny 23005 Joi dui Jaying WK 2 9 17105 25d 910 f Las 220 Sid 7191 2d Old e 23002 gt va TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 OLAS DIO 29d 124 202 NAS GOW OXIA 202 GOW ODA 205 MI D09 NAS YMd A38 XL YMd AM4 XL dL XL 112 YMd XL 202 SvIg Aud XL 202 CSVI8 NH XL 205 I SVI8 NIJ XL 205 ANAL 34 XY 207 D9V Nid Xd 205 IOV Xd 202 N3 Xd DIO JPIAIQ abe oA N3 X DI NO 202 XY dO 202 XY NI 202 Xd dl 205 X 134A XY 20D JazisayyuAs Aduanba4 Joy SUueJ IONS 18A1929Y ipt ircuit Descri C 82 Audio Signal for Speaker Summing Circuit Buffer Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Control of Audio Power Amplifier Microphone Signals Auxiliary Audio Input The
557. t Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 22 Following the checks in Task 19 to Task 21 locate the fault and repair the Directional Coupler and Buffer Amplifier faults in the directional coupler or buffer amplifier will be located circuitry as described in the remaining tasks of the section In this task any 1 Cycle the power 2 Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter to maximum power 3 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode 4 Measure the voltage at pin 9 of IC303 in the power control circuit see Figure 12 8 5 The above voltage should be as given in Table 12 7 If it 1s go to Task 24 If it is not go to Step 6 6 Check the voltage at pin 5 of IC303 or use the FWD PWR test point see Figure 12 8 Note that the probe impedance might affect the measurement 7 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 8 The voltage measured in Step 6 should be as given in Table 12 7 If it is not go to Step 9 If it 1s go to Step 11 Table 12 7 Voltages at IC303 at maximum power 40 W Voltage V Frequency band Frequency MHz SI Ww H H H O O O Ui Ln Ur P WA H H H 1 6 1 8 1 9 SOO UT Ul Ul t HH TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 375 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 9 Remove the DIRC TOP can 10 Check the components of the directional couple
558. t Finding 187 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 6 Enter the CCTM command 205 to reset the calibration values to the default values Then enter the CCTM command 302 0 10 again to calibrate the transmit VCO ds If the calibration succeeded confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the calibration failed go to Step 8 UHF radios or Power Supplies on page 189 VHF radios 8 Program the radio with the maximum frequency in the radio s frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where Xis the frequency 1n hertz 9 Enter the CCTM command 72to determine the lock status in receive mode Note the response lock status xyz x RF PLL yz FCL z LO2 Oz not in lock 12 in lock 10 Ifthe lock status is 111 or 110 the synthesizer is functioning in the receive mode and the power supplies and PLL are functioning correctly Go to Loop Filter on page 204 to check the loop filter VCOs and buffer amplifiers If the lock status is 011 or 010 the synthesizer is faulty in the receive mode Go to Power Supplies on page 189 Task 2 A lock error indicates that the frequency synthesizer FCL or second LO 1s Lock Status 188 out of lock To determine which 1s faulty check the lock status as described below 1 If not already done place the radio in CCTM 2 Program the radio with the receive frequency of a channel that is known to be out of lock Enter the CCTM command 107
559. t To maintain V 3 Wa the IP54 _ protection class great care must be taken when installing Unscrew the two screws holding the adaptor flange to the control head The adaptor flange can now be separated from the control head Drill 1mm diameter hole in the concealed microphone cavity D in the position indicated by the small dimple 2 cJ GG EC 4 ss cee the microphone capsule and seal into the concealed microphone cavity Push the microphone capsule and seal into the concealed microphone cavity On the control head board solder the negative wire to the COV MIC pad and the positive concealed microphone wire to the COV MIC pad 3 a He s a E T The positive wire on the micro phone capsule 1s identified by a red stripe Re install adaptor flange onto the control head Plug the control head loom onto the control head connector Insert the bottom edge of the control head onto the two clips in the front of the radio chassis then snap into place 22 2 Radio Programming When the concealed microphone is installed 1n a radio for use in emergency situations make the following selection in the UI Preferences form Audio tab of the programming application m Emergency Mic select Concealed Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information 520 TMAAO02 07 Concealed Microphone TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual
560. t already done remove the DIRC TOP can Remove the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 for the VHF and UHF bands or C350 for the K5 band see Figure 11 26 Solder one terminal ofa 1000pF VHF or 82 pF UHF or 47pF K5 band test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 11 26 Mount the capacitor vertically Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111 DLI C17 ATC 100B or the equivalent Solder a 50 test lead to the PCB Solder the outer sheath to the test pad shown in Figure 11 26 and solder the central wire to the other terminal of the test capacitor Connect the test lead to the test set Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF output power This should be RF output power more than 70W VHF more than 60W UHF more than 52W 700MHz more than 58W 800 MHz Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 11 8 B1 Table 11 9 G2 Table 11 10 H5 Table 11 11 H7 or Table 11 12 K5 Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 If the power in both the above ca
561. t and software complies with the laws rules and regulations of the applicable jurisdictions Enquiries and Comments If you have any enquiries regarding this document or any comments suggestions and notifications of errors please contact Technical Support Updates of Manual and Equipment In the interests of improving the performance reliability or servicing of the equipment Tait Electronics Limited reserves the right to update the equipment or this document or both without prior notice Intellectual Property Rights This product may be protected by one or more patents of Tait Electronics Limited together with their international equivalents pending patent applications and registered trade marks NZ 338097 NZ 508054 NZ508340 NZ508806 NZ508807 NZ509242 NZ509640 NZ509959 NZ510496 NZ511155 NZ511421 NZ516280 519742 NZ519118 NZ519344 NZ520650 537902 NZ 522236 NZ524369 NZ 524378 NZ524509 NZ 524537 NZ524630 NZ 530819 NZ534475 NZ 534692 NZ535471 NZ 536945 NZ537434 NZ 546295 NZ547713 NZ 521450 AU 2003281447 AU 2002235062 AU 2004216984 AU 2005207405 CA2439018 CA2554213 EU 03784706 8 EU 02701829 0 EU04714053 8 EU05704655 9 GB23865476 GB2386010 GB2413249 GB0516092 4 US11 232716 US10 597339 US10 520827 US10 468740 US5 745 840 US10 547653 US 10 546696 US10 547964 US10 523952 US11 572700 To Our European Customers Tait Electronics Limited is an environmentally responsible company
562. t be installed on the rear of the control head 1 Undo the two Torx T 20 screws on the adaptor flange of the control head and remove the adaptor flange 2 Unplug the control head loom The adaptor flange and control head loom are not used for the remote control head installation Keep the two screws for step 4 3 Plug the control head interface loom 8 into the connector on the control head control head Important When fitting the control head interface to the control head be careful not to damage the space frame seal 4 Use the two screws from step 2 to fit the control head interface to the control head through the two screw holes at the rear of the control head interface The control head interface 1s configured for installation with the RJ45 socket facing downwards U bracket below control head as in Figure 26 1 If the RJ45 socket is required to face upwards control head hanging from 548 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Installing the Remote Control Head Assembly in the Remote U Bracket U bracket the control head interface loom 8 must be moved so that it can reach the control head connector To move the control head interface loom 1 Undo the seven Torx T 10 screws on the control head board and remove the control head interface board from the control head interface 2 Change the control head interface loom
563. t is not go to Step 9 Check the circuitry between pin 8 of IC301 and the gate of Q309 see Figure 11 6 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 1623 If the repair failed or Q309 itself is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 300 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 18 If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 16 is correct then Shaping Filter for Power Control the shaping filter for the power control circuitry or the CODEC and audio circuitry is suspect Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A And when entering the CCTM command 332 y do not specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs E Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN2 test point see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 The voltage should be FIN2 test point 18 2V initially 2 Enter the CCTM command 332 y where y was recorded in Task 12 3 Check that the voltage changes to FIN2 test point 1 1 to 2 7V after entry of CCTM 332 y 4 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 5 If the voltage measured above is correct go to Step 6 If it 1s not go to CODEC and Audio Fault Finding on page 399 6 Check IC301 and the surrounding shaping filter circuit
564. t the bottom of the radio body indicate the positions where a screwdriver is applied to separate the control head from the radio body TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Description 21 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 1 1 Radio Body Overview Cover Lid Internal Options Board Optional Chassis 22 Description The radio body consists of the following main components see Figure 2 2 on page 23 m cover a lid m internal options board optional m chassis 9 m main board assembly The black plastic cover D wraps over the top and sides of the radio body Apertures in the sides of the cover allow access to the four external screw bosses of the radio body used for mounting the radio to the U bracket The aluminium lid G is attached to the chassis with four M4x16 Torx head screws A seal fitted inside a groove at the underside of the lid provides for IP54 class protection The rear of the lid has an aperture for an external options connector which may be fitted 1f an internal options board is used If no external options connector is used the aperture is sealed with a bung for IP54 class protection The lid contains two of the four screw bosses to attach the radio to the U bracket of the installation kit On the inside of the lid nine screw points are provided for mounting an internal options board which can be sized and shaped as required The internal options board connects to the internal optio
565. ta 7 AUD TAD IN Programmable tap point into the Rx Analog or Tx audio chain DC coupled 13 AUD TAP OUT Programmable tap point out of the Analog Rx or Tx audio chain DC coupled 14 AUS MIC AUD Auxiliary microphone input Electret microphone biasing provided Dynamic microphones are not supported EN RSSI Analog RSSI output 413V8 SW Switched 13 8V supply Supply is switched off when radio body is switched off a For more information on hardware links refer to Power Sense Options on page 85 Gi CAS bad Geib OCH GG amp 5 9 ite rear view b Can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 42 Description TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 3 4 Internal Options Connector When installing an internal options board the internal options connector is the electrical interface to the main board of the radio body The internal options connector provides similar I O to the auxiliary connector The internal options connector 1s an 18 pin 0 1 inch pitch M icro MaT ch connector with compatible logic signals only Do not connect these Important The digital I O signals are intended to interface directly signals to external devices without appropriate signal con ditioning and ESD protection Table 2 4 Internal options connector pins and signals 1 13V8 SW Switched 13V8 supply Supply is switched Power off when
566. tables summarize the signals used for the line interface board on the internal options connector SK2 on the line interface board and the external options connector SK1 on the line interface board Table 17 7 Internal options connector SK2 pins and signals Signal 13V8 SW 13V8 FROM RADIO switched 13V8 supply from the radio 2 AUD TAP OUT AUDIO TAP OUT Programmable tap point out of the receive or transmit audio chain AGND AGND analogue ground AUXMICAUD not connected 5 RXBEEPIN BEEP IN lna not connected TAP IN ee _TAP_IN LL tap point into the receive or transmit audio chain O DAD rnm E n GPIO1 PTT a OPT IOP GPIO1 from the radio 3V3 logic level 5V tolerant 10 IOD GPIO2 SECONDARY BUSY IOP GPIO2 from the radio 3V3 logic level 5V tolerant IOP GPIO3 BUSY IOP GPIO3 from the radio 3V3 logic level 5V tolerant 12 IOP GPIOA AUX IOP GPIOA from the radio 3V3 logic level 5V tolerant IOP GPIO5 GPIO5 IOP GPIO5 from the radio 3V3 logic level 5V tolerant He peu i NUES o n DIM NN OC E DGND AGND analogue ground IOP RXD asynchronous serial port receive data IOP TXD asynchronous serial port transmit data top view TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 01 Line Interface Board 477 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 17 8 External options connector SK1 pins and signals Pin signal penan 0 0 0 s mem Joe SSS B Jemen 9 ive FROM R
567. tation of processes Once staff are trained and facilities are confirmed as suitable the centre 1s granted ASC status and endorsed for repairs See also Website Access below 4 1 3 Website Access No password is required for the unsecured area of the website which is accessible to the general public To carry out level 1 or level 2 repairs however you need to log on to the secured area of the Tait Technical Support website www taitworld com technical Technical Support supplies the necessary log in information The Single Sign On feature automatically signs you on with your authorised level of access m level 1 repairs require associate access m level 2 repairs require ASC and Tait only access 108 General Information TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Product Issue Tracking PCB Information The website includes m Application Notes m Calbration Software m Firmware m Fitting Instructions m Installation Guides m PCB Information m Programming Software m Programming User Manuals m Service Manuals m Software Release Notes m Technical Notes B Users Guides Customers and service centres use the Tait Technical Support website to raise and track technical issues The Product Issue Tracking link accesses to the Tait FOCUS call logging database Technical Support resolves any issue raised and informs the customer or service centre of the outcome All issues and solutio
568. tender box TAPE slfadh 12x6 4mm 15m roll BOX extender mach Dcast 569 28 2 2 Extender Box Board Layouts top side oT SK203 2D C44 f ls c PC CEY rea GEL C A no no 4 6 ge Red Gr 673 Gril Gei ell E ON 2 r1 CH Mm N m FL e A C ZEN dd ua SE O E S T E oq CH eh R ou R30 way Ze uU kes FRS Vee ee CG A n Beet UR N23 be peg m R22 a m LS EA Te End Gil fes Ke e oi a R18 xil EJ Me C SCH l E d EE UNS cam DX Red CC C6 7 ans RA e BIS R3 R24 EES HO Jm Ei e e ES e e E doii E oa HSS R16 f E SSS zm 2 22 2 ny as a N ZX B pi IKC14 D2 Bis ot En no e Cl Le e T W e a m p x B NO SK201 rm 2 A e Naar Cc c N a USTE A K X N N Ro Co gt O7 A 570 TMAAO3 34 Extender Box TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2
569. tep 2 is correct go to Step 4 If it is incorrect go to Task 19 but if no frequency is detected go to Task 20 Proceed as follows to observe the receive frequency at the RX port before and after applying 3V DC to the junction of C541 and R547 there 1s a convenient 3V level at R544 see Figure 9 11 While holding the probe on the RX port use the tweezers to momentarily apply 3V DC to the junction do not touch the board with your hand and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans when you remove them The frequency should change to RX port minimum receive frequency see Table 9 3 The loop filter will hold its output steady at about ON This should result in a frequency equal to the minimum given in Table 9 3 If the receive frequency measured in Step 4 1s correct go to Task 18 If it 1s incorrect go to Task 19 If no frequency is detected go to Task 20 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 211 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 9 11 Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN Top and vco Top cans UHF radio top side UHF band shown VHF similar Q507 Q506 Tx port Q508 R13 Junction of C541 and R547 R583 5 4 C Cn C Lo 261 R56 561 SYN TOP
570. teps begin on page 256 i Remove the FE TOP can and if not already done the IF TOP can 2 Check the soldering of all the components of the front end circuitry from C400 to IC409 see Figure 10 1 and Figure 10 4 3 Check the 3 V supply voltage at L420 and L421 use the measurement points shown in Figure 10 1 4 Also check the LNA enable conditions First measure V on pin 1 of the collector of IC404 or IC405 and ground see Figure 10 1 IC404 is enabled for channels between 850 to 970MHz and IC405 is enabled for channels between 762 and 776 MHz Ver 2 930 V 5 If the checks in Step 2 to Step 4 reveal no fault go to Step 6 If there is a fault repair it and go to Step 7 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Receiver Fault Finding 257 6 Check the signal level at the output of LO1 and continue the fault diagnosis as in Power Supply for FCL on page 234 7 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 on page 136 If the repair failed go to Task 9 Table 10 3 Front end tuning voltages and corresponding DAC values K5 band Tuning voltages at five different frequencies Frequency band FE mme FE mme 1 FE mme FE TUNES FE TUNE4 K5 band Frequency MHz n 9 1 849 9 DAC value T Voltage V Task 9 Following the initial investigation in Task 7 check the circuitry as follows SE ag when the sensitivity loss 1s slight T Remove the F
571. that the correct receive and transmit frequencies are synthesized The receive frequency is that of the VCO output SYN RX LO at the RX port shown in Figure 9 14 The transmit frequency is that of the output SYN TX LO at the TX port 1 Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit receive switch on transmit mode Using a frequency counter proceed as follows to observe the transmit frequency at the TX port before and after grounding the junction between C541 and R547 see Figure 9 14 While holding the probe from the counter on the TX port use a pair of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction The frequency should change to TX port maximum VCO frequency see Table 9 5 The loop filter will hold its output steady at 13 3 V This should result in a frequency equal to the maximum given in Table 9 5 If the maximum frequency measured in Step 2 1s correct go to Step 4 If 1t 1s incorrect go to Task 30 but if no frequency at all is detected go to Task 31 Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit receive switch off receive mode Proceed as follows to observe the receive frequency at the RX port before and after applying 3V DC to the junction of C541 and R547 there is a convenient 3V level at R544 see Figure 9 11 While holding the probe on the RX port use the tweezers to momentarily apply 3V DC to the junction do not touch the board with your hand and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans when you
572. the CCTM command 32 This command returns the radio to the receive mode Restricting the duration of transmit tests in this way will further limit the danger of overheating The reason for this precaution 1s that the transmit timers do not function in the CCTM mode Under certain circumstances the microprocessor can key on the transmitter Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from such accidental transmissions Avoid thermal burns Do not touch the cooling fins or underside of the radio body when the transmitter 15 or has been operating Avoid RF burns Do not touch the antenna or the RF signal path on the circuit board while the transmitter is operating 270 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 11 1 Power Supplies Introduction First check that a power supply 1s not the cause of the fault There are two power supplies and a switch circuit for the transmitter m Task 1 13 8V DC supply from power connector 13V8 BATT m ask 2 switch circuit for 13 8V DC supply m Task 3 9V DC supply from 9V regulator in PSU module 9V0 TX The measurement and test points for diagnosing faults 1n the power supplies are summarized in Figure 11 1 Figure 11 1 Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults involving the power supplies for the transmitter 49VO TX TRANSMITTER O 13 8 VDC f 13 8 V DC SUPPLY 9VO TX POWER SUPPLY TO PAS TO PA DRIVER TEST POINT
573. the Radio Body is switched off 2 AUD_TAP_OUT Programmable tap point out of the Rx or Analog Tx audio chain DC coupled AGND Analog ground 4 AUX MIC AUD Auxiliary microphone input Electret microphone biasing provided Dynamic microphones are not supported 5 RX BEER IN Receive sidetone input AC coupled top View ES p p U AUD TAP IN Programmable tap point into the Rx or Tx Analog audio chain DC coupled 7 RX_AUD Receive audio output Post volume Analog control AC coupled RSSI Analog RSSI output 9 15 IOP GPIO1 7 General purpose port for input and Digital output of data Programmable function 3V3 CMOS and direction With LKA fitted GPIO7 is a power sense input DGND Digital ground 17 IOP RXD Asynchronous serial port Receive data Digital 3V3 CMOS 18 IOP TXD Asynchronous serial port Transmit data Digital 3V3 CMOS a Can be switched or unswitched For more information refer to Connector Power Supply Options on page 90 b For more information on hardware links refer to Power Sense Options on page 85 2 3 5 Provision for External Options Connector The radio has a mechanical interface for the external connector of an internal options board This external options connector can be a 9 way standard density or 15 way high density D range connector If no internal options board is installed standard configuration the hole for the external options connector is sealed by a bung
574. the drain of Q306 and should be drain of Q306 more than 13V DC Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the power supply measured in Step 7 and Step 8 is correct go to Task 3 If the power supply measured in Step 7 and Step 8 is not correct UHF and VHF transmitters go to Task 2 Check Switch Circuit K5 band there is no switch circuit so the power supply to the drains of the PAs Q309 Q310 and PA driver Q306 is always on Go to step 12 Check the connection on the board between L310 and L306 and the radio supply connector Repeat Task 1 to confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 157 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 157 272 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 11 2 Point for measuring the power supply to the PAs and PA driver VHF
575. the main PCB by the internal options Options extender board dl internal options connector connector and loom LJ FT d IM a ij LI i A ii The internal options connector signals are then made available on the high density 15 way D range connector mounted on the options extender board This connector fits through the external external options options connector hole provided in the radio chassis connector Installation parts DAC Len tion standard once an options extender board has been installed unless the exter nal options cover seal is installed O Important The radio does not meet the IP54 protec external options _ Interna cover seal options loom 19 1 Changing the Options Extender Links Note The following instructions on links apply to the 220 65203 02 revision of the TMAA01 05 board only For information on boards from revision 05 refer to technical note TIN 1260 AN The options extender board configuration must be completed before the board is installed in the radio as the top side of the options extender board is not accessible once the board is screwed to the radio lid Important This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to damage from static discharges Refer to ESD Precautions on page 112 for more information The options extender board has various link options which allow the user to re configure the outputs available on the external options connect
576. the signal level at the TP200 test point see Figure 13 2 to vary If it does go to Step 6 If 1t does not go to Task 6 Check the voltage at pin 11 of IC202 see Figure 13 2 pin 11 of IC202 at least 8V DC If the voltage 1s correct go to Step 9 If it is not check for and repair any faults in the level translation circuits incorporating Q200 and Q201 see Figure 13 2 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Check the digital signals DIG AUD PA EN1 at R200 and DIG AUD PA EN2 at R202 see Figure 13 2 R200 DIG AUD PA EN1 3 3V DC R202 DIG AUD PA EN2 0 0V DC If the signals are correct go to Task 5 If they are not check the programming and test set up otherwise the digital board is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding 403 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 5 If the inputs to the audio PA are not faulty check the speaker outputs from Check Speaker the PA Outputs 1 Check the positive and negative speaker outputs AUD ITF SPK and AUD ITF SPK at pins 3 and 8 respectively of IC202 see Figure 13 2 pin 3 of IC202 AUD ITF SPK approximately half rail bias pin 8 of IC202 AUD ITF SPK approximately half rail bias 2 If the speaker outputs are correct go to Step 5 If they are not go to Step 3 3 Check for
577. ther than those described in this section Important The radio does not meet the IP54 protection standard once the auxiliary connector rubber bung has been removed and a crossband linking cable has been installed Care must be taken when the radio is being operated in an environment where there is water dust or other environmental hazards 31 1 Cross band Repeater Operation The external interface cable in the TMAA04 06 kit 1s used to connect the auxiliary ports of two radios allowing the radio system to be used as a cross band repeater Cross band repeater mode enables a TM8260 dual radio system be used as a temporary repeater Any activity received on one radio will be automatically transmitted on the other radio and vice versa 31 1 1 Installation 1 Remove the rubber bung that covers the auxiliary connector on each of the radios 2 Plug an auxiliary connector into the auxiliary port of a radio body 3 Plug the second auxiliary connector into the auxiliary port of the other radio body Note The cable can be plugged in either way its orientation has no impact on radio performance However to reduce the cabling required orient the cable so the external interface connector and GPS socket are closest to the device or devices to connect to 4 Tightly fasten the Jackscrew type locks TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA04 06 Linking and Interface Cable 581 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 31 1 2 Radio Prog
578. timeter on pin 5 of IC602 see Figure 7 1 press the ON OFF key again The voltage should exceed 2 0V DC while the key is depressed If it does go to Task 2 If it does not the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 170 Power Supply Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 7 1 Important components of the power supply circuitry bottom side including 3 3V regulator IC602 Co ol l eT e9 E Rb der S I J SSIS ea a It EE Gg m let Re re gt eo Iesel 2 Cy CD 16605 D604 Q 09 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Power Supply Fault Finding 171 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 7 2 Important components of the power supply circuitry top side including 9V regulator 1C601 LK8 R786 LK7 R787 a gt penne d i REN LK BG 0208 C228 S S eam C201 3V3 test point Task 2 If the inputs at pin 5 and pin 7 of IC602 in the SMPS circuitry are correct
579. to Task 24 If it 1s incorrect go to Task 25 If no frequency is detected go to Task 26 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding 219 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 24 Repair PLL feedback Task25 If either or both the minimum and maximum transmit frequencies are Pd SE incorrect the transmit VCO circuitry 15 faulty 1 Remove the VCO TOP can 2 Check the transmit VCO The circuitry is based on Q510 for all bands except K5 and Q509 for the K5 band see Figure 9 11 o If a fault 1s found repair 1t and go to Step 4 If no fault 1s found go to Step 6 4 Repeat the frequency measurements in Step 2 and Step 4 of Task 23 5 If the frequencies are now correct resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If they are still not correct go to Step 6 6 Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 Replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 220 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 1 If both the minimum and maximum transmit frequencies are correct the PLL feedback is suspect Resolder R542 in position see Figure 9 11 Remove the VCO BOT can Replace the components C570 R578 see Figure 9 12 and IC503 see Figure 9 11 Confirm that the fault in the radio has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Tait Electronics Lim
580. to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs If the PAF TOP can has already been removed go to Step 5 If it has not go to Step 2 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Remove the PAF TOP can Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Enter the CCTM command 332 y where y was recorded in Task 12 Check that the voltage at the gate of Q309 is see Figure 12 9 gate of Q309 2 to 5V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage 1s correct Q309 1s faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it is not go to Step 9 Check the circuitry between pin 8 of IC301 and the gate of Q309 see Figure 12 9 If a fault is found repair it confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 1623 If the repair failed or Q309 itself is faulty replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 368 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 18 If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 16 is correct then Shaping Filter for the shaping filter for the power control circuitry or the CODEC and audio Power Control BEN circuitry 1s suspect Important Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A C And when entering the CCTM command 332 y do not specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12 Failure to do so might
581. to ensure that the control head is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Plug the radio to microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head 2 Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the erommet into the microphone socket cavity J Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position 4 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity 594 TMAA10 02 Handset TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 33 1 Correct handset microphone grommet seating v ER X control head 33 2 Radio Programming Dynamic Dynamic microphone support must be enabled in the UI Preferences form O E of the radios programming application so that audio is optomized for dynamic microphones Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information Table 33 2 Handset settings in the UI Preferences form TM8100 Programming Application Audio Setup Enable Options Board Preamp Table 33 3 Handset settings in the UI Preferences form TM8200 TM9000 TP9000 Programming Application Audio Audio Setup Dynamic Mic Support Private Handset If private handset mode is required the radio needs to be programmed to Mode mute the audio power amplifier when the handset 1s out of the cradle The audio path is then only through the RX AUDIO line to the handset earpiece The following table shows the settings req
582. to the mounting posts on the radio lid using four M3x8 self tapping screws 9 Tighten the M3x8 screws to a torque of 1 9 N m 171Ibf in options cavity the internal options connector loom 0 must Important For the RS232 board to be installed correctly in the radios be looped in the way shown in the diagram on page 491 9 Plug the unattached end of internal options connector loom 19 into the internal options connector on the radio main PCB 10 Refit the radio lid and top cover to the radio and screw the external options cover seal D over the external options connector using the two 4 40x3 16 screws 2 Figure 18 1 RS 232 board installation radio lid external options connector bung screw lock fasteners mounting posts M3x8 self tapping screws foam seal external options connector cavity internal options loom RS 232 board external options connector external options cover seal 4 40x3 16 screws Gi 9 C TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA01 02 RS 232 Board 491 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 18 3 Interface Specification The following tables summarize the signals used for the RS 232 board on the internal options connector SK1 on the RS 232 board and the external options connector SK2 on the RS 232 board Manual contains a detailed electrical specification for the signals available on the radios internal options connector This manual is part of the 3DK Resource CD which can be p
583. ts of the TM8100 and TM8200 mobile radio product lines General The product codes of the TM8100 and TM8200 mobile radio product lines have the format TMAabc ddee where m a identifies the product category A accessory B radio body C control head S software feature m b c dd and ee identify specific product features Radio Bodies The product codes of the radio bodies have the format TMABbc ddee f where m b identifies the architecture of the digital board 1 conventional analog 2 conventional analog dual mode capability 3 identifies the digital boards of the digital TM9100 product line m c identifies the RF output power 2 25W 3 25W trigger base 4 30 to 59W 5 30 to 59W trigger base m dd identifies the frequency band A4 66 to 88MHz B1 136 to 174MHz C0 174 to 225 MHz D1 216 to 266MHz G2 350 to 400MHz H5 400 to 470MHz H6 450 to 530MHz H7 450 to 520MHz K5 762 to 870MHz Tx 762 to 776MHz and 850 to 870MHz Rx m ee identifies any radio options UU lt BNC REF connector 01 mini UHF RF connector m f optional identifies a combination of software features as loaded at the time of manufacture Control Heads The product code of the control heads has the format TMACbc dd ee where m bc identifies control head user interface and hardware options m dd identifies badging and configuration variants m ee optional identifies variations from the standard firmware and or data load at the time o
584. ty The two speaker lines SPK and SPK are connected to the speaker connector J104 which 1s connected to the control head connector J103 through two ferrite beads L105 and L106 Figure 14 13 Circuit diagram of the speaker circuitry Control Head opeaker Connector Connector If the speaker functions only intermittently or the audio level is low L Check the continuity from the speaker connector J104 to pin 18 SPK and pin 17 SPK of the control head connector J103 2 Inspect E105 and E106 3 Replace the speaker 4 If there 1s still a fault go to Volume Control Faulty on page 442 440 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 14 14 PCB layout of the speaker circuitry top side R118 e bottom side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 441 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 11 Volume Control Faulty The voltage level of the volume control potentiometer is converted to a digital signal by an analog digital converter processed by the FPGA and transmitted to the main board Note This section only describes faults to the volume control caused by the control head which has been established during the initial servicing tasks by means of elimination test For fault finding of the amplifier circuitry of the main board refer to Faulty Speaker Audio on page
585. ty Table 10 5 Mute data Mute noise readings Mute noise readings Channel spacing SINAD dB K5 band all other bands Narrow 12 5 kHz 5 1700 2000 1900 2300 Medium 20 kHz 5 1400 2100 3700 4200 Wide 25 kHz 5 3500 5600 5000 7300 1100 3100 2200 3700 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Receiver Fault Finding 263 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 16 With RSSI muting selected check the RSSI mute settings RSSI Muting Selected l ae E S d In the calibration application open the Deviation Squelch page and click the Squelch and Signaling Thresholds tab 2 Check that the values in the Opening Pt fields and the Hysteresis fields under the Squelch Thresholds label are what the Customer expects 3 If the calibration values are as expected go to Task 10 and check the RSSI calibration If they are not go to Step 4 4 Adjust the values in the Opening Pt and Hysteresis fields Program the radio with the new values 5 Check if the mute fault has been removed If it has go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it has not go to Task 10 and check the RSSI calibration Figure 10 5 TCXO circuitry under the cpc TOP can top side pis sar E T co L ON CD Kaz me CEE Das c Ed NO d E223 L200 264 Receiver Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 10 6 High Receiver Distortion Introduction If there is high re
586. udio power amplifier via a secondary volume control not TM8100 radios and to the control head via a buffer amplifier The output configuration of the audio power amplifier 15 balanced and drives an internal speaker in non remote control head configuration and optionally an external speaker The speaker loads are connected in parallel rather than being switched The power delivered to each speaker is limited by its impedance The internal speaker has 16Q impedance whereas the external speaker can be as low as 4Q There are two volume controls in the TM8200 radio but only one is active at any time when audio is being output to the speaker s The inactive volume control is set to maximum For non remote control head configuration the primary volume control is active For remote control head configuration the secondary volume control 1s active This enables fixed level audio feed to the remote control head and independent volume control of the external speaker and the speaker of the remote control head TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 2 6 Operation in Transmit Mode Overview This section describes the functioning of the transceiver in transmit mode The operation of the transceiver is illustrated in Figure 2 16 on page 53 These block diagrams show the hardware modules integrated with the software modules m hardware transmitter receiver CODEC and audio m RISC processor on FPGA of digital board
587. uired in the Programmable I O form of the radio s programming application Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information Note If private handset mode is programmed then no audio will be heard from the speakers 1f the handset 1s unplugged Table 33 4 Handset settings in the Programmable 1 0 form Digital tab TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual TMAA10 02 Handset 595 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 33 3 Interface Specification The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the handset on the radios microphone connector and shows the interface between the handset and the radio Table 33 5 Handset microphone connector pins and signals Handset PCB Colour Description Connector HT SUD 8 bees CE ER ER EE Inet EE Pe not connected 5 MIC yellow audio from the handset to dynamic mic support board po i rome 8 CH GPIO1 programmable line controlling private mode Figure 33 2 Handset to radio interface microphone connector handset cord RX AUDIO Z Bol MIC handset and cradle 596 TMAA10 02 Handset TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 34 TMAA10 03 and TMAA10 06 High Power Remote Speakers The TMAA10 03 remote speaker for the 25 W radio and the TMAA10 06 remote speaker for the 40 W 50 W radio are installed in parallel with the radio s existing internal
588. uit go to Task 41 If the voltage level remains fixed at about 1 5 V DC investigate the CODEC 2 circuitry go to Task 42 If the voltage levels are all correct following earlier repairs the fault has been removed go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the CCTM checks indicate that the VCXO tank circuit 15 faulty repair the circuit as follows 1 If not already done remove the VCXO BOT can 25 Locate and repair the fault in the VCXO tank circuit Q501 D501 D502 XL501 and associated components see Figure 9 19 3 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 4 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 244 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 Replace all cans 5 Repeat Task 40 to confirm the removal of the fault If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 42 If the CCTM checks indicate a fault in the CODEC 2 circuitry or with the CODEC 2 Circuitry 1 10 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual digital signals to and from the circuitry rectify the fault as follows Most of the CODEC 2 circuitry is situated under the CDC TOP can If not already done remove the CDC TOP can Check the following digital signals at IC205 see Figure 9 17 m pin 10 DIG CDC2 LRCK m pin 12 DIG CDC2 SCLK m pin8 CDC2 DIG SDTO m pin9 DIG CDC2 SDTI These signals to an
589. uld be as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands 6 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 7 If the voltage measured above is correct go to Task 27 If 1t 1s not go to Step 8 8 Check the components around Q300 see Figure 12 14 9 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks Replace Q300 see Figure 12 14 if none of the other components 1s faulty 10 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 Task 27 If the output of the buffer amplifier 1s correct check that of the exciter Output of Exciter at C301 1 With the radio still in transmit mode measure the RF voltage after C301 see Figure 12 14 Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent The required voltage should be as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands 2 If the voltage is correct go to Task 28 If it is not go to Step 3 9 Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode 4 Check the components between C313 and Q303 and between Q303 and R308 see Figure 12 14 5 Repair any fault revealed by the above checks Replace Q303 see Figure 12 14 if none of the other components 1s faulty 6 Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Task
590. upply For more information on these accessories refer to Part C Accessories on page 465 The radios allow for the connection of a comprehensive range of audio accessories m rugged microphone standard m DTMF microphone m keypad microphone m handset m concealed microphone TM8200 and concealed microphone kit TM8100 m high power remote speaker m remote PTT kit and hands free kit The radio is delivered with a vehicle installation kit including a U bracket Installation of the radio is described in the user s guide or the installation guide Optional installation kits are m remote control head kit for remote installation of the control head m security bracket for secure and quick release installation m ignition sense kit The radio provides space for an internal options board inside the radio body connecting to an internal options connector An aperture for an external options connector 1s also provided Tait offers the following internal options boards m line interface board m RS 232 board m options extender board The radio provides space for a control head options board inside the blank control head of the TM8105 and TM8252 radios A desktop power supply including the parts for mounting the radio 1s available for desktop installations TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 1 4 Product Codes This section describes the product codes used to identify produc
591. urchased using product code TMAA30 01 de Note The TM8000 3DK Hardware Developers Kit Application Table 18 2 Internal options connector pins and signals S Signal Description Signal 1 13V88W _SW switched 13V8 switched 13V8 supply from the radio from the radio dE _TAP DEN y Programmable tap point out tee oi Lo RE the receive or transmit audio chain DC coupled E AGND analogue ground AUX MIC AUD Auxiliary microphone input with electret microphone biasing provided Dynamic microphones are not supported Bo RX BEEP IN receive sidetone input AC coupled AUD TAP IN Programmable tap point into the receive or transmit audio chain DC coupled SH RX_AUD 8 RSSI analogue RSSI output 9 15 IOP GPIO1 to programmable function and direction IOD GPIO7 DGND digital ground IOP RXD an RS 232 compliant asynchronous serial port receive data IOP_TXD an RS 232 compliant asynchronous serial port transmit data Table 18 3 External options connector SK2 pins and signals 3 sera eene data noto the L5 meme O 8 CTS using IOP GPIO1 output from the radio OO OO front view 492 TMAAO1 02 RS 232 Board TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 18 4 PCB Information 18 4 1 Ref IPN C1 014 07100 02 C2 018 14100 00 C3 018 14100 00 CA 018 14100 00 C5 018 14100 00 C6 018 16100 00 C7 014 07470 11 C8 018 16100 00 C9 018 16100 00 C1
592. ure Remote Cable Grommets remote cable 1s plugged into the RJ45 sockets When installed the grommets have two functions Important The remote cable grommets must be installed whenever the m to prevent damage to the RJ45 sockets when there is movement of the remote cable and m to ensure that the radio and remote control head assembly is sealed against water dust and other environmental hazards 1 Slide the grommet along the remote cable and push two adjacent corners of the grommet into the RJ45 socket cavity 2 Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position 3 Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity Figure 25 2 Correct remote cable grommet seating VE n ax control head 534 Installing a Remote Kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 25 2 Circuit Description Figure 25 3 shows a block diagram of the remote control head installation The control heads contain circuit boards with RS 485 driver components and an audio amplifier or attenuator Figure 25 3 Block diagram of remote control head installation CONTROL HEAD INTERFACE TORSO INTERFACE CH ON OFF RM ON OFF CH ON OFF 13V8 13V8 13V8 5V 5V 8V2 REGULATOR REGULATOR REGULATOR 8 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE lt SPAR S q CH MIC AUD RM MIC AUD RM MIC AUD I CH MIC AUD gt gt I gt ATTENUATOR RS485 DRIVER RM RS485 B RM RS485 B J RM
593. ure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 in the shaping filter cir cuit The voltage should be pin 1 of IC301 4 8 0 5V Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the voltage measured in Step 1 is correct go to Step 4 If it is not go to Step 5 Check the components R334 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 and C319 see Figure 11 17 and Figure 11 18 and go to Step 6 Check the components between the PWR test point and pin 1 of IC301 see Figure 11 9 and Figure 11 10 and go to Step 6 Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 4 and Step 5 Replace IC301 if none of the other components is faulty Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 314 Transmitter Fault Finding 225W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 11 4 RF Signal Path Introduction The RF signal path extends from the output of the frequency synthesizer to the LPE This section of circuitry will require investigation either following certain checks in Transmitter RF Power or if the biasing checks of Biasing of PA Driver and PAs reveal no fault The procedure is divided into ten tasks grouped as follows m Task 26 to Task 30 initial RF signal path m Task 31 and Task 32 directional coupler m Task 33 and Task 34 PIN switch m Task 35 LPF The initial signal path includes the exciter and PA driv
594. used by Check the Receive ol and Receive Audio m the synthesizer not being in lock Functions 162 B no carrier detected a faulty speaker or volume control BH no modulation If the cause 1s already known go directly to the relevant fault finding section 1 10 11 Servicing Procedures Use CCTM command 101 x y Oto set the receive frequency to the bottom of the band Use CCTM command 72 to read the lock status If the synthesizer is in lock go to Step 5 If the synthesizer is not in lock repair the radio as described in Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 Repeat Step 1 to Step 3 with the receive frequency set to the top of the band Feed a signal without modulation on the receive channel at 47 dBm Check for maximum RSSI using m the el indicator on the radio display graphical display m the green status LED m CCTM command 63 should return the fed signal strength 1 dBm Repeat the check in Step 5 with 117 dBm The RSSI indicator should show as empty or close to empty graphical display If the carrier 1s detected correctly go to Step 9 If the carrier 1s not detected correctly try to re calibrate the radio If the re calibration repairs the fault go to Final Tasks on page 163 If it does not repair the radio as described in Receiver Fault Finding on page 247 Check whether the speaker 1s the source of the fault as described in Speaker Faulty on page 440
595. utes are also taken into account which are affected by the radio s monitor function such as the hookswitch monitor when the microphone 15 off the hook If monitor settings are programmed the radio user must not enable monitor such as having the microphone off the hook while entering or during cross band repeater mode The transmit timer if enabled limits the maximum duration of cross band repeater transmissions If a transmit lockout period 1s programmed then further repeater transmissions will also be inhibited until the lockout timer expires However if a valid received signal 1s present when the lockout timer expires then the radio does not automatically resume transmission The received signal must first drop and return before re transmission resumes Priority scanning also affects the transmit timer during cross band repeater transmissions If a non priority channel in the group 1s captured the radio will re transmit that activity and the transmit timer will begin counting down However each time the radio samples the priority channel or 582 TMAAO4 06 Linking and Interface Cable TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 channels there 1s a brief break in reception which will cause the transmit timer to restart Squelch override 1s not compatible with cross band repeater operation Avoid programming this feature to a function key and consider removing the menu option Transmit Inhibit If bot
596. v T 9 ze 2 en orans DIW GT S i anouL a ZTS A NE C 4 J odes Ge de 9 226 GAprSH x e MM j zd Eu E 2 e SAET E l cG ZT 66 EY et Pc d gt nal es i goss mae L Ee lt CL x 4AO NO gus dS 2E 5 Jne g IdS HO EE Sy d ES jb EL 2g AC AS c D IdS D o MS 8 t LN Ei E A OIdS HO NS lt 8 lt lt ING l HO lt X Siler es lt Ky VV are F H2 T S JdOLr 3dOZr MOIS 94 CH MR ee ETHS E po LH AE dI lo JJO NO BEY U JJO NO HD ON ansad i Ixy HO J ONDES 9 S SIN HO l c D 7 0 T c ns ng 544 26 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit 26 1 The control head of a graphical display radio can be installed remotely from the radio body The diagram below shows the parts used for this installation control head interface iS TMAAO3 03 remote TMAAOA 01 remote cable TMAC34 OT TM8200 or control head back TMAC34 1T TM9100 includes remote U bracket torso interface Note Although the torso interface is similar in appearance to the RJ45 control head on the telemetry radio the control head on the telemetry radio cannot be used for remote installation Installation A ob Warning Mount the remote U bracket with the remote control head assembly and the U bracket with the radio body securely These units must not break loose in the event of a collision Unse cured radio units are dangerous to the vehicle occupants Caution Observe th
597. ve the coupling capacitors C348 C349 and C350 see Figure 12 6 Solder one terminal of a test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 12 6 Mount the capacitor vertically Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111 DLI C17 Murata 1210 or the equivalent The value of the capacitor depends on the frequency band of the radio gm A4 100pF m DI CO D1 680pF m H5 H6 82pE Solder a 50Q test lead to the PCB Solder the outer sheath in the position shown in Figure 12 6 and solder the central wire to the other terminal of the test capacitor Connect the test lead to the test set Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radios frequency band Enter the CCTM command 101 x X0 where Xis the frequency in hertz Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Note the RF output power measured by the test set and note the current reading on the DC power supply RF output power 35W current 8A VHF 9A UHF Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency in hertz Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0 where X is the frequency in hertz Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 If the power and current are still skewed go to Task 10 If the power and current are correct rem
598. wer at the other connectors is also unswitched External power either switched or unswitched is supplied to pin 2 of the control head connector SK100 The power is switched or not depending on the links LK5 and LK6 m switched power LK5 in LK6 out m unswitched power LK5 out LK6 in External power is also supplied to pin 1 of the internal options connector SK102 The power is switched or not depending on the links LK7 and LK8 m switched power LK7 in LK8 out m unswitched power LK7 out LK8 in Note In some boards LK7 is R786 and LK8 is R787 If there is a fault with the supply of external power to any of these connectors first confirm the link settings required and then carry out the following procedure L With the radio powered up confirm that 13 8 V DC 1s present at pin 3 of IC605 see Figure 7 1 and more than 3V DC at pin 2 2 Check that 13 8 V 1s present at pin 5 of IC605 If there is go to Step 3 If there 1s not go to Step 4 ac Check for an open circuit between pin 5 of IC605 and the relevant pin of the connector in question Repair any fault confirm the removal of the fault and go to Final Tasks on page 163 If the repair failed or the fault could not be found replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 4 Check for continuity between pin 5 of IC605 and the relevant pin of the connector in question Check for shorts to ground check C718 at the auxiliary connector see Figure 7 1 and c
599. wer level and should be as shown in Table 11 3 Confirm the above result by checking the level at the FWD PWR test point see Figure 11 4 using an oscilloscope Enter the CCTM command 319 to check the reverse power The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the power level and should be as shown in Table 11 3 Confirm the above result by checking the level at the REV PWR test point see Figure 11 4 using an oscilloscope If the oscilloscope momentarily indicates a very high reverse power then the most likely scenario 1s that the antenna VSWR threshold has been exceeded and the PA has shut down to very low power Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode If the values obtained in Step 3 and Step 5 are both correct and there is no indication of a momentary high reverse power go to Task 5 If one or both are incorrect go to Step 9 Check the connection from the RF connector on the radio to the test set If there is no fault go to Step 11 If there is rectify the fault and repeat the above measurements If the reverse power is momentarily too high the directional coupler PIN switch or LPF is suspect go to Task 31 Otherwise go to Task 5 Transmitter Fault Finding gt 25W TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 5 If the power supplies are correct check the RF output power of the Check RF Output transmitter Power k Enter the CCTM
600. wer up the repair failed replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Power Supply Fault Finding 173 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 7 3 Power supply circuitry under the CDC BOT can including 3V regulator IC603 and 2 5V regulator IC604 CDC BOT LO2 BOT CAN CAN FOR DIGITAL BOARD Go 60991 3 Task 3 This task describes the general procedure for checking any linear regulator Check Linear There are two possible faults either the regulator has failed and prevents the Regulators M radio from powering up or the regulator voltage is incorrect The regulator IC might or might not have been removed during earlier checks 1 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply Check for continuity and shorts to ground if not already done on the input output and control line of the relevant regulator IC Repair any fault 2 If the regulator IC has been removed resolder it in position 9 Reconnect the 13 8 V supply and press the ON OFF key If the radio powers up or the correct regulator voltage 1s restored return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If the repair failed go to Step 4 4 Disconnect the 13 8 V supply Replace the regulator IC with a spare R
601. witch next The PIN switch may also require investigation following certain checks in Transmitter RF Power on page 350 l 2 10 11 12 13 14 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Remove the PIN TOP can Remove the three blocking capacitors C361 C362 and C363 see Figure 12 17 Solder one terminal of a test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 12 17 Mount the capacitor vertically Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111 DLI C17 Murata 1210 or the equivalent The value of the capacitor depends on the frequency band of the radio m A4 100pF m B1 CO D1 33pF m Ha Hp 22pE Solder a 50Q test lead to the PCB Solder the outer sheath in the position shown in Figure 12 17 and solder the central wire to the other terminal of the test capacitor Connect the test lead to the test set Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the lowest frequency in hertz for maximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode Measure the RF output power This should exceed 35 W RF output power more than 35W Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode Enter the CCTM command 101 x X 0 where X is the highest frequency in hertz for ma
602. x x 0 where Xis the frequency in hertz 3 Enter the CCTM command 2 to determine the lock status in receive mode Note the response The action required depends on the lock status as described in the following steps lock status xyz x RF PLL y FCL z LO2 O not in lock 1 in lock 4 If the lock status is XOX where X is 0 or 1 the FCL is suspect go to Power Supply for FCL on page 234 5 If the lock status is 011 the synthesizer 1s suspect although the power supplies are functioning correctly go to Loop Filter on page 204 6 If the lock status 1s 010 the synthesizer and second LO are both out of lock First investigate the synthesizer excluding the power supplies go to Loop Filter on page 204 If necessary investigate the receiver later Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 p If the lock status is 110 the second LO is out of lock Go to Receiver Fault Finding on page 247 8 If the lock status 1s 111 this implies normal operation But if the lock error persists replace the board and go to Final Tasks on page 163 9 2 Power Supplies Introduction First check that a power supply is not the cause of the fault There are four power supplies for the frequency synthesizer two are supplied from the PSU power supply unit module and two are produced in the synthesizer circuitry itself m Task 3 14VDC K5 band 15 5V supply
603. ximum power as given in Table 12 8 A4 band Table 12 9 B1 band Table 12 10 CO band Table 12 11 D1 band or Table 12 12 H5 H6 bands Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 If the power in both the above cases exceeds 35 W go to Step 14 If it does not the circuitry of the PIN switch is suspect go to Task 32 Remove the test lead and test capacitor resolder the blocking capacitors in position and go to Task 33 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W 391 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 12 17 Circuitry under the PIN TOP can and points for attaching the test lead and test capacitor UHF shown SOLDER E SHEATH TO GND MOUNTING POIN FOR TEST CAPACITOR TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual 392 Transmitter Fault Finding 25W Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 32 If the RF power at the PIN switch is low the switch is not drawing the Repair PIN switch 1 10 11 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual expected current or the diode is faulty Check the circuit as follows Perform a diode check of D307 see Figure 12 17 If it is not faulty go to Step 2 If it is replace D307 and go to Step 3 Check the 49VO TX supply to the PIN switch via the following resistors on the bottom side of the PCB see Figure 12 18 and Figure 12 19 m A4 R3000 a
604. xx Control head loom with female female adaptor ER female female adaptor 240 00021 41 CS El RS KT T v K aana eee DI rp o emm e pem pera The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number Items will LM be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured Spares kit TMAA22 08 contains an assembled control head without control head board concealed microphone and LED assembly b The LCD seal IPN 362 01 126 xx is part of the LCD assembly and must be replaced whenever the LCD is replaced This seal is included in the TMAA22 95 kit TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Spare Parts 459 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 16 4 Spare parts of the control heads with 1 2 or 3 digit display 460 Spare Parts TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Table 16 3 Spare parts of the control heads with 1 or 2 digit display CR CE Control head loom with female female adaptor 1 219 02882 xx TMAA22 01 and 90 female female adaptor 210 00021 41 Control head options board optional dynamic microphone board TMAAO2 06 o 3x8 PT screw 3 xe 10030 08 TMAA22 01 and 90 Kees board 2 digit display TMAA22 e Control head board 1 digit display TMAA22 91 Elus frame before April 2007 ut 9 30073 00 01 Space frame since April 2007 319 30073 02 TMAA22 01 and 90 Speaker clamp since April 2007 not for use with 303 501 11 xx TMAA22 01 an
605. y With the graphical display while pressing the PTT key the transmit symbol f or f should appear on the radio display unless transmit is inhibited on the selected channel m scroll and selection keys Scroll through all settings and observe the radio display m function keys Check whether the programmed function is activated m keypad With the graphical display use CCTM command 1009 1 to turn on keypad notification Check that each keypress returns a different number CCTM command 1009 1 turns keypad notification off m backlighting if programmed Any keypress should activate backlighting TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Servicing Procedures 159 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 4 If there 1s a fault in the user interface repair the radio as described in Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display on page 423 or Fault Finding of Control Head with 1 2 or 3 Digit Display on page 447 5 If there is no fault go to Task 8 Task 8 The radio may display an error message Carry out the corrective actions Check Error Messages described in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Error messages Error message Corrective action Error E0001 Turn the radio off and then back on Unknown Error E0002 Continue with servicing tasks to locate the problem Unknown Error E0003 Re download the radio s firmware Corrupt FW Error E0008 Turn the radio off and then back on If the system error persists download new S
606. y Mode has been selected 5 If the link and programming settings are correct go to Task 5 If they are not rectify the settings and check if the fault has been removed If it has return to Initial Tasks on page 155 If it has not go to Task 5 Table 7 1 Implementation of the power up options PONE Mp EDITO Factory Activation mechanism Connector option insert default Battery LK1 Link in Connection of 13 8V supply Power connector power sense Auxiliary Link in AUX GPI3 line goes high Pin 4 of power sense If LK1 is in line floats high auxiliary connector If LK1 is out line floats low Emergency Link in AUX GPI2 line goes low Pin 5 of power sense auxiliary connector Internal options Link out IOP GPIO7 line goes high Pin 15 of power sense internal options connector TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Power Supply Fault Finding 175 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 5 Check Power up Options The functioning of the power up options may be checked as described in Step 1 to Step 4 below Carry out the procedure in the appropriate step or steps In all four cases the procedure involves checking the digital power up signal at pin 5 of IC602 For a particular option the activation mechanism is the condition that results in the power up signal becoming active the signal 1s active high 1 For the battery power sense option the link LK1 should be inserted see Figure 7 2 Check the power up signal
607. y TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 If the signal is not correct check the 13 8 V supply voltage from the radio body Return to Step 1 3 Check the inhibit signal at pin 3 of U1 U1 pin 3 high gt 2 2V low lt 0 7 V DEEM If the signal is above 2 2 V visually inspect the components D1 R16 R17 R208 and Q201 for open or shorted contacts Replace if nec essary Return to Step 1 If the signal is low replace U1 Return to Step 1 4 Check the 1 5 V supply voltage at pin 4 of U203 U203 pin 4 1 5V If the signal is correct continue with Step 6 If the signal is not correct continue with Step 5 5 Check E203 for continuity E203 1 5V If E203 1s correct continue with Step 6 If E203 1s faulty replace E203 and return to Step 4 6 U202 detects a possible power failure and generates an output signal on pin 7 Check whether this signal 1s low U202 pin 4 3 3V U202 pin 7 3 3V If pin 4 measures 3 3V and pin 7 is low replace U202 If pin 4 measures 3 3V and pin 7 is high replace U203 Figure 14 2 PCB layout of the power supply circuitry C je NI gt top side TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display 427 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 14 3 LCD Display Faulty The LCD module is connected to the control head board via the LCD connector The LCD module display 1s control
608. y be fitted If Q707 is fitted R768 must be removed The 5V supply mentioned above is provided by a simple buffered zener regulator formed by Q702 D721 R721 and R722 The resistor R722 limits the current to about 25mA under short circuit conditions An input signal applied to AUX GPIO4 is coupled via R757 to ITF AUX GPI4 and fed to the digital section As the input signal may exceed the maximum allowed by the digital section it 1s clamped by D711 and a shunt regulator The shunt regulator consists of Q708 R719 and R720 and begins to turn on at approximately 2 7 V In combination with D711 the input to ITF AUX GPI4 is therefore clamped to 3 3V nominally The value of R757 is made large to minimize the loading effect on the output pull up resistors TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 91 Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Figure 3 12 Block diagram of the interface circuitry 13V8 BATT AGND SPK 13V8 BATT Connector Interface NZ Power 13V8 BATT Co EMC Supply A F R 303 EID Filters AUX GPI2 a AGND AUX GPIB I DGND EH ON OFF I ITF IOP GPIO7 P e AUD ITF SPK SPK AUD ITF SPK EMC 8 SPK Filters ITF VOL WIP DC E VOLWIP DC CODEC TF CH MIC AUD _ CH MIC AUD and CDC RX AUD P _ R RX AUD Audio TFRXBEEPIN E CDCAUDTAP OUT JW TFAUDTAPIN JW TE AUX MIC AUD H ES CDC RSSI Ed ESD and Connector
609. y the damaged component 3 Consult the technical notes 4 Verify the specifications 5 Order the replacement component Check the Issue 1 Locate the unique 10 digit Internal Part Number IPN that 1s Number printed on the PCB For example 220 01761 09 2 Make sure that the IPN on the board is identical to the IPN on the PCB Information document that was supplied with the service documentation The last two digits of each Internal Part Number IPN are the issue number of the board Starting at 01 the issue number increments by one 02 03 and so on each time the PCB 1s re issued See also Consult the Technical Notes below 3 If the IPNs do not match download the correct version of the PCB Information from the Technical Support website Note To replace a printed board assembly such as a control board quote the relevant product code see Product Codes on page 17 To replace a component on a PCB however use the IPN on the PCB to locate the correct PCB Information document see PCB Information on page 109 Identify the 1 Consult the BOM for the board under repair Damaged SPIpensnt 2 Use the BOM to identify the damaged component Consult the Consult all technical notes that apply to the board before ordering the Technical Notes replacement component Technical notes are published on the Technical Support website When there 1s a major change in the design of a board such as a change in layout the
610. ypad LCD The control heads with 1 2 or 3 digit display can be divided into the following main areas m front panel with control elements indicators speaker and optional concealed microphone W space frame m control head board with SMT components shielding cans connectors and volume potentiometer m control head loom with female female adapter The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2 6 on page 33 The front panel assembly D consists of an injection moulded plastic part with an integrated transparent light pipe element for the radio STATUS LEDs a transparent lens which cannot be replaced and a cloth membrane which is fixed to the speaker grille Depending on the type of control head the aperture on the lens 1s sized to display either one two or three characters A label with the radio model number is attached to the front panel assembly with self adhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes Six clips on the space frame snap into corresponding locations on the inside of the front panel assembly to hold the keypad 9 the LCD 2 the speaker clamp D and the speaker 9 in place The knob for the volume control potentiometer I9 is fitted to the shaft of the volume control potentiometer which 1s soldered to the control head board The keypad D protrudes through apertures in the front panel assembly CD The rear side of each key connects directly to the relevant co
611. ystem error radio firmware Oxabcdefgh To capture details of the system error use CCTM command 204 Temperature threshold Wait until the radio has cooled down exceeded Go to Task 9 on page 161 Out of lock Go to Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 Programming mode Re program the radio with a new programming database If the problem persists invalid radio update or reload the radio s firmware and re program the radio s calibration database 160 Servicing Procedures TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual Tait Electronics Limited November 2007 Task 9 If the radio does not transmit this can be caused by Check the Transmit and Transmit Audio m the synthesizer not being in lock Functions NH no or wrong carrier power BH no modulation If the cause 1s already known go directly to the relevant fault finding section Caution Observe the servicing precautions for transmitter issues listed on page 113 Use CCTM command 101 x y Oto set the transmit frequency to the 10 11 12 13 TM8100 TM8200 Service Manual bottom of the band Use CCTM command 33 to set the radio to transmit mode Use CCTM command 72 to read the lock status If the synthesizer is in lock go to Step 5 If the synthesizer 1s not in lock repair the radio as described in Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding on page 185 Repeat Step 1 to Step 4 with the transmit frequency set to the top of the band Use CC

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents